Resonance Maths Ntse Plus

DOWNLOADED FROM THE BOOKCORNER
Welcome to THE BOOKCORNER world. We are a team to help you and many others
to get free books online. Here you will get everything and we just need your support.
TELEGRAM CHANNEL
It provides you books for all competitive exams like IIT, NEET, KVPY, NTSE, PRMO, NSE
Olympiads, UPSC, CIVIL SERVICES and much more.
CLICK HERE TO JOIN OUR CHANNEL
PRIVATE TELEGRAM CHANNEL

We have a second telegram channel only for premium materials. It's totally free too but
private channel so you must have a link to join
CLICK HERE TO OUR PRIVATE CHANNEL
THE BOOKCORNER STUDY BOT

To help you in a fully organized way we have designed a STUDY MATERIAL BOT through
which you can access our study material easily. The priority remains the CHANNEL always
CLICK HERE TO REACH STUDY MATERIAL BOT
WANNA EXPLORE US??

We have a special updates channel where we update about our website, apps and telegram
channels. I'll recommend checking it out once at least.
CLICK HERE TO EXPLORE MORE ABOUT US
DISCLAIMER
The material provided by us is neither self created nor scanned. We provide them from
already known open sources only. Our aim is just to achieve free education for those who
can't afford much. In case it violates any copyright or other law, please write us at
bookcornerofficialstore@gmail.com for the removal of such material immediately. We are
always there to help you.
https://t.me/NTSEFocus
NTSE (STAGE-I & II)
MATHEMATICS
Telegram @Altruists @BookCornerBack @TheBookCorner

National Talent Search Scheme is a flagship activity of the NCERT started in the year 1963. The
purpose of the scheme was to identify talented students and nurture their talent. Talent refers to the
potentiality that manifests itself in a high level of performance in one or more specialized areas.
The purpose of the scheme is to identify talented students and nurture them.This year NCERT will
conduct the National Talent Search Examination for students studying in Class X.
There will be two stage selection process for award of scholarship Stage- I, selection will be done by
States/UTs through a written examination Students, who qualify Stage-I, will be eligible to appear for
Stage-II examination, conducted by NCERT. In order to be considered for merit, students from General
Category and Reserved Category (SC/ST/PH) required to qualify with score minimum 40% and
minimum 35% respectively in each MAT, SAT and LCT separately.
On the basis of the examination conducted,1,000 scholarships will be awarded under the NTSE criteria
:-
Rs. 1250 per month for Class 11th and 12th level
Rs. 2000 per month for UG and PG level
Amount for Phd to be fixed in accordance with UGC norms.
15% scholarships will be reserved for students belonging to the SC category, 7.5% scholarships for
students belonging to the ST category and 3% for Physically Challenged group of students .
Students can enroll themselves for the examination through school only, application form can
be downloaded from NCERT website http://www.ncert.nic.in also The completed application
form should be signed by the Principal of the School & should be submitted to the Liaison
Officersl. Different states may have different last dates for submission, All queries related to
application form should be directed to the State Liaison Officers (LOs).No application should
be sent to NCERT directly.
States and Union Territories may notify the fee required which will be paid for the Stage-I
examination Therefore, before submitting the application form, you may find out the fees
charged for Stage-I examination and also the mode of payment from the respective State
Liaison Officers (LOs) However, NCERT does not charge any fee for Stage-II examination

MAT
(Mental Ability) 50 50 45 Min.
LCT
(Language Test) 50 50 45 Min.
SAT
(Scholastic Aptitude Test) 100 100 90 Min.
* No Negative Marking in Stage-1 but in stage-2 there will be 1/3 negative marking.
There is no prescribed syllabus for the NTSE examination. However the standard of the items conforms to the
level of CBSE class 10th.
Results of the Stage-I examination will be announced by the respective State Governments/ Union Territories
Results of Stage-II examination will be announced by NCERT Indian Students Studying Abroad in class X can
appear directly for Stage-II NTS examination under conditions prescribed in the NTS brochure which is available
on the NCERT website.
Stage –I Examination : http:\\www.rajboard.nic.in
Stage-II Examination : http:\\www.ncert.nic.in

You find yourself at a very important junction in your life as you have to select a correct career
path for your future endeavors and also a suitable study material in this journey which can
keep you on the right track always. It is very important to enjoy this journey as it is long and can
be completed successfully only by making the most out of it.
Aptitude and inclination are clearly the deciding factors for any competitive examination.
Keeping this in view, content of this module has been prepared according to syllabus of
National Talent Search Examination (NTSE). The text of this module enables you to develop
thorough understanding of Principles and Concepts which is required to crack NTSE.
Pre-foundation Career Care Programmes (PCCP) Division
Every effort has been taken to make our study material error free, however any suggestion to
improve is welcome in this regard.

1. NUMBER SYSTEM :
Introduction, Classification of numbers, Identification of prime number, Fraction, Comparison of fraction,
Pure recurring of decimals, Mixed recurring of decimals, Modules of real numbers, Bodmas rule, Square
and square root, Cubes and cube root, Factors and multiples, HCF and LCM, Divisibility, Remainders,
Cyclicity, Alpha numeric puzzles.
2. SURDS AND EXPONENTS :

Surds and exponents, Laws of surds, Operation of surds, Rationalization of surds, Exponents.
3. POLYNOMIALS :
Polynomials, Algebraic identities, Factors of a polynomial, Zeros or roots of a polynomial, Remainder
Theorem, Factor Theorem, Graph of Polynomial, Sign of quadratic expression, Graph of cubic polynomial,
Relationship between zeros and coefficients of a quadratic polynomial, Relationship between zeros and
coefficients of a cubic polynomial.
4. LINEAR EQUATIONS IN TWO VARIABLES :

Linear equations in two variables, Conditions for solvability (or consistency) of system of equations,
Graphical solution of linear equations in two variables, Nature of graphical solution, Word problem.
5. QUADRATIC EQUATIONS :
Quadratic equation, Roots of a quadratic equation, Nature of roots, Relation between roots & coefficients,
Condition for common root, Methods of solving quadratic equation, Application of quadratic equation.
6. PROGRESSIONS :
Sequence, Progressions, Arithmetic progression, General form of an A.P., nth term of A.P., mth term of A.P.
from the end, selection of terms in A.P., Sum of n terms of A.P. Property of A.P., Geometric Progression,
Properties of G.P., Geometric mean.
7. PERCENTAGE :
Important concept associated with percentage, Successive changes in percentage.
8. RATIO & PROPORTION, PARTNERSHIP, MIXTURE & ALLIGATION :

Ratio, Proportion, Partnership, Mixture and alligation.
9. PROFIT, LOSS & DISCOUNT :

Definition, Discount, Sales tax, Value Added tax (VAT).
10. SIMPLE & COMPOUND INTEREST :

Simple Interest (Definition), Compound Interest (Definition),
11. TIME & WORK :
Direct & Indirect proportion, Work and Time, Pipes and Cisterns,
12. TIME, SPEED & DISTANCE :
Time, Speed & Distance, Problem on Train, Boat and Streams, Circular motion.

13. AVERAGE :
Definition and problems.
14. TRIGONOMETRY :
Angle, Quadrants, Trigonometry, Trigonometric ratio of complementary angles, Area of triangle,

Trigonometric Identities, Angle of Elevation, Angle of Depression.
15. CO-ORDINATE GEOMETRY :
Rectangular coordinates, Distance between two points, Section Formulae, Centroid of a triangle, Incentre
of a triangle, Ex-centre of a triangle, Area of triangle, Area of quadrilateral, Locus and equation of locus,
Algorithm to find the locus of a point.
16. LINES AND ANGLES, TRIANGLES :
Line & angles, Polygon, Triangle, Congruent figures, Some inequality relations in a triangle, Similar
triangles, Thales theorem, Area of similar triangles, Pythagoras theorem.
17. QUADRILATERALS :
Definition, Properties, Midpoint theorem, Area of parallelogram, Area of triangle.
18. CIRCLES :
Definition, Cyclic quadrilaterals, Theorem, Segments of chord, Angles in alternate segment, common
tangents of two circles.
19. PERIMETER AND AREA OF PLANE FIGURES :
Introduction, Area and perimeter of triangle, Area and perimeter of quadrilateral, Perimeter and area of a
circle, Sector of a circle and it’s area, Segments of a circle and it’s area, Area of combination of plane
figure.
20. SURFACE AREA & VOLUME :
Mensuration (solid figures).
21. STATISTICS :
Introduction, Definitions, Frequency distribution, Cumulative frequency, Graphical representation of data
(Bar graph, Histogram), Frequency polygon, Measures of central tendancy, Properties of mean, Merits of
arithmetic mean, Demerits of arithmetic mean, Cumulative frequency curve or Ogive, Quartiles, Mean
deviation.
22. PROBABILITY :
Definition and concepts of probability.

MATHEMATICS
NTSE (STAGE-I & II)
CONTENTS
S. NO. TOPICS PAGE NO.
1. Number System 1-16
2. Surds & Exponents 17-20
3. Polynomials 21-32
4. Linear Equations in Two Variables 33-41
5. Quadratic Equations 42-49
6. Progressions 50-56
7. Percentage 57-63
8. Ratio-Proportion & Partnership, Mixture & Alligation 64-72
9. Profit, Loss & Discount 73-81
10. Simple & Compound Interest 82-88
11. Time & Work 89-94
12. Time, Speed & Distance 95-101
13. Average 102-106
14. Trigonometry 107-118
15. Co-ordinate geometry 119-127
16. Lines and Angles, Triangles 128-142
17. Quadrilaterals 143-149
18. Circles 150-163
19. Perimeter and Area of Plane Figures 164-178
20. Surface Area & Volume 179-186
21. Statistics 187-204
22. Probability 205-209
23. Answer key 210-217
© Copyright reserved
All right reserved. Any photocopying, publishing or reproduction of full or any part of this study
material is strictly prohibited. This material belongs to only the enrolled student of RESONANCE.
Any sale/resale of this material is punishable under law.

INTRODUCTION (viii) Real numbers : Numbers which can represent

actual physical quantities in a meaningful way are
Number System is a method of writing numerals to
represent numbers. known as real numbers. These can be represented
on the number line. Number line is geometrical straight
Ten symbols 0,1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 are used to
represent any number (however large it may be) in our line with arbitrarily defined zero (origin).
number system. (ix) Prime numbers : All natural numbers that have
Each of the symbols 0,1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 is called a one and itself only as their factors are called prime
digit or a figure. numbers i.e. prime numbers are exactly divisible by 1
and themselves. e.g. 2, 3, 5, 7, 11, 13, 17, 19, 23,...etc.
If P is the set of prime number then P = {2, 3, 5, 7,...}.
(i) Natural numbers :
(x) Co-prime Numbers : If the H.C.F. of the given
Counting numbers are known as natural numbers.
N = { 1, 2, 3, 4, ... }. numbers (not necessarily prime) is 1 then they are
known as co-prime numbers. e.g. 4, 9 are co-prime
(ii) Whole numbers :
All natural numbers together with 0 form the collection as H.C.F. of (4, 9) = 1.
of all whole numbers. Any two consecutive numbers will always be
W = { 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, ... }.
co-prime.
(iii) Integers : All natural numbers, 0 and negative of (xi) Twin primes : Pairs of prime numbers which have
natural numbers form the collection of all integers.
only one composite number between them are called
I or Z = { ..., – 3, – 2, – 1, 0, 1, 2, 3, ... }.
Twin primes.
(iv) Even Numbers : All integers which are divisible by 3, 5 ; 5, 7 ; 11,13 ; 17, 19 ; 29, 31 ; 41, 43 ; 59, 61 and
2 are called even numbers. Even numbers are denoted
71, 73 etc. are twin primes.
by the expression 2n, where n is any integer. So, if E is
a set of even numbers, then E = { ..., – 4, –2, 0, 2, 4,...}. (xii) Composite numbers : All natural numbers, which
(v) Odd Numbers : All integers which are not divisible are not prime are composite numbers. If C is the set
by 2 are called odd numbers. Odd numbers are of composite number then C = {4, 6, 8, 9, 10, 12,...}.
denoted by the general expression 2n –1 where n
is any integer. If O is a set of odd numbers, then 1 is neither prime nor composite number.
O = {..., –5, –3, –1, 1, 3, 5,...}.
(xiii) Imaginary Numbers : All the numbers whose
(vi) Rational numbers : These are real numbers which square is negative are called imaginary numbers.
p
can be expressed in the form of , where p and q are e.g. 3i, -4i, i, ... ; where i = - 1.
q
integers and q 0 . e.g. 2/3, 37/15, –17/19. IDENTIFICATION OF PRIME NUMBER
All natural numbers, whole numbers and integers are Step (i) : Find approximate square root of given number.
rational numbers.
Step (ii) : Divide the given number by prime numbers less
Rational numbers include all Integers (without any
than approximately square root of number. If given
decimal part to it), terminating fractions ( fractions in
which the decimal parts are terminating e.g. 0.75, – number is not divisible by any of these prime number
0.02 etc.) and also non-terminating but recurring decimals then the number is prime otherwise not.
e.g. 0.666....., – 2.333...., etc.
Ex.1 Is 673 a prime number ?
(vii) Irrational Numbers : All real number which are
not rational are irrational numbers. These are non- Sol. Approximate square root = 26
recurring as well as non-terminating type of decimal Prime number < 26 are 2, 3, 5, 7, 11, 13, 17, 19, 23. But
numbers. 673 is not divisible by any of these prime number. So,
For Ex. : 2, 3
4, 2 3, 2 3 , 47
3 etc. 673 is a prime number.
PAGE # 11
Short cut method for mixed recurring decimal : Form
FRACTIONS
a fraction in which numerator is the difference between
(a) Common fraction : Fractions whose denominator the number formed by all the digits after the decimal
is not 10. point taking the repeated digits only once and that
formed by the digits which are not repeated and the
(b) Decimal fraction : Fractions whose denominator is
denominator is the number formed by as many nines
10 or any power of 10.
as there are repeated digits followed by as many zeros
3
(c) Proper fraction : Numerator < Denominator i.e. . as the number of non-repeated digits.
5
5 Ex.2 Change 2.76 45 in the form of p/q.
(d) Improper fraction : Numerator > Denominator i.e. .
3
27645 276 27369 3041
(e) Mixed fraction : Consists of integral as well as Sol. 2.7645 = = = .
9900 9900 1100
2
fractional part i.e. 3 .
7
(f) Compound fraction : Fraction whose numerator and
The absolute value of a real number I x I is defined as
2/3
denominator themselves are fractions. i.e. .
5/7 x, if x 0
|x|=
x, if x 0
Improper fraction can be written in the form of mixed
fraction. For example :
| 2 |= 2 ; 2 > 0 and | – 2 | = – (– 2 ) = 2; – 2 < 0.
COMPARISON OF FRACTIONS
BODMAS RULE
S up po se som e frac tion s are to b e arrang ed in
ascending or descending order of magnitude. Then, This rule depicts the correct sequence in which the
convert each one of the given fractions in the decimal operations are to be executed so as to find out the
form, and arrange them accordingly. value of a given expression.
3 6 7 Here,‘B’ stands for ‘Bracket’, ‘O’ for ‘Of’, ‘D’ for
Now, = 0.6, = 0.857, = 0.777..... ‘Division’, ‘M’ for ‘Multiplication’, ‘A’ for ‘Addition’ and
5 7 9
‘S’ for ‘Subtraction’.
6 7 3
Since 0.857 > 0.777....> 0.6, so > > . Thus, in simplifying an expression, first of all the
7 9 5
brackets must be removed, strictly in the order ( ), { }
PURE RECURRING DECIMAL and [ ].
After removing the brackets, we must use the following
If in a decimal fraction, a figure or a set of figures is operations strictly in the order :
repeated continuously, then such a number is called (i) Of (ii) Division (iii) Multiplication
recurring decimal. (iv) Addition (v) Subtraction.
1
Thus, = 0.333...... = 0.3 , Vinculum (or Bar) : W hen an expression contains
3
22 Vinculum, before applying the ‘BODMAS’ rule, we
= 3.142857142857..... = 3. 142857 . simplify the expression under the Vinculum.
7
Conversion of decimal numbers into rational
numbers of the form p/q. 3 1 1 1
Ex.3 Simplify : 5 – 4 2 0.5 :
2 6 7
Short cut method for pure recurring decimal: W rite
the repeated digit or digits only once in the numerator
3 5 1 7 6
and take as many nines in the denominator as there Sol. 5 – 4 2 2 42
are repeating digits in the given number.
e.g., (i) 0. 3 = 3/9 or 1/3 3 5 1 1

= 5– 4 2 2 42
(ii) 0. 387 = 387/999
3 5 22 3 83
MIXED RECURRING DECIMAL = 5– 4 =5– 4
2 42 42
A decimal is said to be a mixed recurring decimal if
there is at least one digit after the decimal point, which 229 420 229 191 23
= 5– = 84
= =2 .
is not repeated. 84 84 84
PAGE # 22
Properties of Square Roots :
(i) If the unit digit of a number is 2, 3, 7 or 8, then it does

Squares : W hen a number is multiplied by itself then not have a square root in N.
the product is called the square of that number. (ii) If a number ends in an odd number of zeros, then it
Perfect Square : A natural number is called a perfect does not have a square root in N.
square if it is the square of any other natural number (iii) The square root of an even number is even and
e.g. 1, 4, 9,... are the squares of 1, 2, 3,... respectively. square root of an odd number is odd.e.g. 81 = 9,
256 = 16, 324 = 18 ...etc.
Ex.4 Find the smallest number by which 180 must be
(iv) Negative numbers have no square root in set of
multiplied so that the product is a perfect square.
real numbers.
Sol. Given number is 180, first we resolve it into prime
Ex.6 Find the square root of 5 + 3.
factors.
2 180 Sol. Let 5 3 = p + q
2 90 5+ 3 =p+q+2 pq [By squaring both sides]
3 45
p+q=5 ...(i) [By equating the parts]
3 15
2 pq = 3 ...(ii)
5 5
4pq = 3 ...(iii) [By squaring both sides ]
1
(p – q)2 = (p + q)2 – 4 pq
180 = 2 × 2 × 3 × 3 × 5 (p – q)2 = 25 – 3
Clearly 5 has no pair. Thus if we multiply it by 5 then (p – q)2 = 22
p – q = 22 ...(iv)
product will be a perfect square. p+q=5 [By eqn (i)]
Required smallest number is 5. 1
p= 5 22 [On adding (i) & (iv)]
2
Ex.5 Find the smallest number by which 28812 must be
1
divided so that the quotient becomes a perfect square. q= 5 22 [On subtracting (i) & (iv)]
2
Sol. Given number is 28812, first we write it as the product 1
5 3 = 5 22 5 22
of prime factors. 2
2 28812
2 14406
Cube : If any number is multiplied by itself three times
3 7203
then the result is called the cube of that number.
7 2401 Perfect cube : A natural number is said to be a perfect
7 343 cube if it is the cube of any other natural number.
7 49
Ex.7 W hat is the smallest number by which 392 must be
7 7 multiplied so that the product is a perfect cube.
1 Sol. Resolving 392 into prime factor, we get
28812 = 2 × 2 × 3 × 7 × 7 × 7 × 7
Clearly, 3 has no pair, so if we divide it by 3 then quotient
become a perfect square.
Square roots : The square root of a number x is that

number which when multiplied by itself gives x as the
product. As we say square of 3 is 9, then we can also 392 = {2 × 2 × 2} × 7 × 7
say that square root of 9 is 3. Grouping the factor in triplets of equal factors, we get
The symbol use to indicate the square root of a number 392 = {2 × 2 × 2} × 7 × 7
W e find that 2 occurs as a prime factor of 392 thrice but
is ‘ ’ , i.e. 81 = 9, 225 = 15 ...etc. 7 occurs as a prime factor only twice. Thus, if we
W e can calculate the square root of positive numbers multiply 392 by 7,7 will also occur as a prime factor
thrice and the product will be 2 × 2 × 2 × 7 × 7 × 7, which
only. However the square root of a positive number
may be a positive or a negative number. is a perfect cube.
Hence, we must multiply 392 by 7 so that the product
e.g. 25 = + 5 or – 5.
becomes a perfect cube.
PAGE # 33
Ex.8 W hat is the smallest number by which 3087 must be Ex.9 Directions : (i to v) Read the following information
divided so that the quotient is a perfect cube ? carefully and answer the questions given below.
Sol. Resolving 3087 into prime factors, we get In a big hostel, there are 1,000 rooms. In that hostel
only even numbers are used for room numbers, i.e.
the room numbers are 2, 4, 6, ...., 1998, 2000. All the
rooms have one resident each. One fine morning, the
warden calls all the residents and tells them to go
back to their rooms as well as multiples of their room
numbers. W hen a guy visits a room and finds the door
open, he closes it, and if the door is closed, he opens
3087 = 3 × 3 × 7 × 7 × 7 it, All 1,000 guys do this operation. All the doors were
Grouping the factors in triplets of equal factors, we get open initially.
3087 = 3 × 3 × {7 × 7 × 7}
(i) The last room that is closed is room number ?
Clearly, if we divide 3087 by 3 × 3 = 9, the quotient
would be 7 × 7 × 7 which is a perfect cube. Therefore, (ii) The 38th room that is open is room number ?
we must divide 3087 by 9 so that the quotient is a
perfect cube. (iii) If only 500 guys, i.e. residents of room number 2
to 1000 do the task, then the last room that is closed is
room number ?
Factors : ‘a’ is a factor of ‘b’ if there exists a relation (iv) In the case of the previous question, how many
such that a × n = b, where ‘n’ is any natural number. rooms will be closed in all ?
1 is a factor of all numbers as 1 × b = b. (v) If you are a lazy person, you would like to stay in a
Factor of a number cannot be greater than the number room whose number is ?
(infact the largest factor will be the number itself). Thus Sol (i) If a room has an odd number of visitors, it will be
factors of any number will lie between 1 and the number closed. Any room number that is twice a perfect square
itself (both inclusive) and they are limited. will have an odd number of visitors. The room with the
largest such number (twice a perfect square) will be
Multiples : ‘a’ is a multiple of ‘b’ if there exists a relation the last room to have an odd number of visitors. Hence
of the type b × n = a. Thus the multiples of 6 are the last number is 2 × 961 = 1922.
6 × 1 =6, 6 × 2 = 12, 6 × 3 = 18, 6 × 4 = 24, and so on.
(ii) Note that the 38th room with an open door will be
The smallest multiple will be the number itself and the the 38th room whose number is not twice a perfect
number of multiples would be infinite. square, which happens to be 88.
NOTE : (iii) Note that if only occupants of 2 to 1000 do the
To understand what multiples are, let’s just take an task, then only 1 person, i.e. the occupant of number
example of multiples of 3. The multiples are 3, 6, 9, 1000 will go to room number 2000, (since 2000 is a
12,.... so on. W e find that every successive multiples
multiple of 1000), and this room will therefore be closed.
appears as the third number after the previous.
(Since it is initially open).
So if one wishes to find the number of multiples of 6
less than 255, we could arrive at the number through (iv) Number of room closed upto 1000 = 22, since
255 there are 22 twice a perfect square numbers. Number
= 42 (and the remainder 3). The remainder is of of remaining room = 500. Number of twice a perfect
6
no consequence to us. So in all there are 42 multiples. number between 1000 and 2000 = 9.
255 All rooms with twice a perfect square between 1000
If one wishes to find the multiples of 36, find =7 and 2000 will be open.
36
(and the remainder is 3). Hence, there are 7 multiples Number of room closed = 22 + 500 – 9 = 513.
of 36. (v) As regards questions 34, anyone who lives in a
Factorisation : It is the process of splitting any number
room with a number greater than 1000 will obviously
into form where it is expressed only in terms of the
have to visit only that particular room, as it will not have
most basic prime factors.
any multiple which is not greater than 2000.
For example, 36 = 2 2 × 3 2. 36 is expressed in the
Hence, the answer is greater than 1000.
factorised form in terms of its basic prime factors.
Number of factors : For any composite number C,
which can be expressed as C = ap × bq × cr ×....., where
a, b, c ..... are all prime factors and p, q, r are positive LCM (least Common Multiple) : The LCM of given
integers, then the number of factors is equal to (p + 1)
nu mb ers, as th e nam e sug gests is the smallest
× (q + 1) × (r + 1).... e.g. 36 = 22 × 32. So total no. of
positive number which is a multiple of each of the given
factors of 36 = (2 +1) × (2 + 1) = 3 × 3 = 9.
numbers.
PAGE # 44
HCF (Highest Common factor) : The HCF of given Some important points :
numbers, as the name suggests is the largest factor If we have to find the greatest number that will exactly
of the given set of numbers. divide p, q and r, then required number = HCF of p, q
Consider the numbers 12, 20 and 30. The factors and and r.
the multiples are :
Ex.12 Find the greatest number that will exactly divide 65,
Given 52 and 78.
Factors Multiples
numbers Sol. Required number = HCF of 65, 52 and 78 = 13.
1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 12 12 12, 24, 36, 48, 60, 72, 84, 96, 108, 120....
1, 2, 4, 5, 10, 20 20 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120..... If we have to find the greatest number that will divide p,
1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 10, 15, 30 30 30, 60, 90, 120.... q and r leaving remainders a, band c respectively, then
The common factors are 1 and 2 and the common the required number = HCF of (p – a), (q – b) and (r – c).
multiples are 60, 120...
Ex.13 Find the greatest number that will divide 65, 52 and
Thus the highest common factor is 2 and the meaning 78 leaving remainders 5, 2 and 8 respectively.
of HCF is that, HCF is the largest number that divides Sol. Required number = HCF of (65 - 5), (52 - 2) and (78 - 8)
all the given numbers. = HCF of 60, 50 and 70 = 10.
Also since a number divides its multiple, the meaning
of LCM is that it is smallest number which can be If we have to find the greatest number that will divide p,
q and r leaving the same remainder in each case, then
divided by the given numbers.
required number = HCF of the absolute values of
HCF will be lesser than or equal to the least of the
(p – q), (q – r) and (r – p).
numbers and LCM will be greater than or equal to the
greatest of the numbers. Ex.14 Find the greatest number that will divide 65, 81 and
145 leaving the same remainder in each case.
There are two methods of finding the H.C.F. of a given
Sol. Required number
set of numbers : = HCF of (81 – 65) (145 – 81) and (145 – 65)
(i) Factorization Method : Express each one of the = HCF of 16, 64 and 80 = 16.
given numbers as the product of prime factors. The
Least Common Multiple (L.C.M.) : The least number
product of least powers of common prime factors gives
which is exactly divisible by each one of the given
H.C.F. and product of highest powers of common prime
numbers is called their L.C.M.
factors gives L.C.M.
/ (i) Factorization Method of Finding L.C.M. : Resolve
Ex.10 Find the HCF of (72, 108 ). each one of the given numbers into a product of prime
Sol. HCF of (72, 108 ) factors. Then, L.C.M. is the product of highest powers
= HCF of (23 × 32, 22 × 33 ) of all the factors.
= 22 × 32 = 4 × 9 = 36. Ex.15 Find the LCM of (72, 108 )
Sol. The LCM of (72, 108 )
(ii) Division Method : Suppose we have to find the H.C.F.
The LCM of (23 × 32, 22 × 33)
of two given numbers. Divide the larger number by the
= 23 × 33 = 8 × 27 = 216.
smaller one. Now, divide the divisor by the remainder.
Repeat the process of dividing the preceding divisor (ii) Common Division Method (Short-cut Method) of
by the remainder last obtained till zero is obtained as finding L.C.M. : Arrange the given numbers in a row in
remainder. The last divisor is the required H.C.F. any order. Divide by a number which divides exactly at
least two of the given numbers and carry forward the
Ex.11 Find the HCF of (72, 108 ). numbers which are not divisible. Repeat the above
Sol. process till no two of the numbers are divisible by the
same number except 1. The product of the divisors
and the undivided numbers is the required L.C.M. of
the given numbers.
Ex.16 Find the LCM of (72, 108).

Sol.
2 72, 108
So, HCF of (72, 108 ) = 36.
2 36, 54
Finding the H.C.F. of more than two numbers : 2 18, 27
Suppose we have to find the H.C.F. of three numbers. 3 9, 27
Then, H.C.F. of [(H.C.F. of any two) and (the third 3 3, 9
number) gives the H.C.F. of three given numbers. 3 1, 3
Similarly, the H.C.F. of more than three numbers may 1, 1
be obtained.
So, LCM of (72, 108) = 2 × 2 × 2 × 3 × 3 × 3 = 216.
PAGE # 55
Some important points : Ex.21 In a school 437 boys and 342 girls have been divided
into classes, so that each class has the same number
If we have to find the least number which is exactly
of students and no class has boys and girls mixed.
divisible by p, q and r, then the required number
W hat is the least number of classes needed?
= LCM of p, q and r .
Sol. W e should have the maximum number of students in
Ex.17 Find the least number that is exactly divisible by 6, 5 a class. So we have to find HCF (437, 342) = 19.
and 7. HCF is also the factor of difference of the number.
Sol. Required number = LCM of 6, 5 and 7 = 210. 437 342
Number of classes = + = 23 + 18
19 19
If we have to find the least number which when divided
= 41 classes.
by p, q and r leaves the rem ain ders a, b and c
respectively then if it is observed that For any two numbers x and y :
(p – a) = (q – b) = (r – c) = K (say), then the required x × y = HCF (x, y) × LCM (x, y).
number = (LCM of p, q and r) – (K). Make sure the fractions are in the most reducible form.
Ex.22 Six bells start tolling together and they toll at intervals
Ex.18 Find the least number which when divided by 6, 7
of 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 sec. respectively, find.
and 9 leaves the remainders 1, 2 and 4 respectively.
(i) After how much time will all six of them toll together ?
Sol. Here, (6 – 1) = (7 – 2) = (9 – 4) = 5.
(ii) How many times will they toll together in 30 min ?
Required number = (LCM of 6, 7 and 9) – 5
Sol. The time after which all six bells will toll together must
= 126 – 5 = 121.
be multiple of 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12.
If we have to find the least number which when divided Therefore, required time = LCM of time intervals.
by p, q and r leaves the same remainder 'a' in each = LCM (2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12) = 120 sec.
case, then required number = (LCM of p, q and r) + a. Therefore after 120 s all six bells will toll together.
After each 120 s, i.e. 2 min, all bells are tolling together.
Ex.19 Find the least number which when divided by 15, 20 30
and 30 leaves the remainder 5 in each case. Therefore in 30 min they will toll together 1
2
Sol. Required number = (LCM of 15, 20 and 30) + 5 = 16 times
= 60 + 5 = 65 1 is added as all the bells are tolling together at the
H.C.F and L.C.M. of fractions : start also, i.e. 0th second.
H.C.F. of Numerators Ex.23 LCM of two distinct natural numbers is 211. W hat is
H.C.F = L.C.M. of Deno min ators
their HCF ?
Sol. 211 is a prime number. So there is only one pair of
L.C.M. of Numerators
L.C.M. = . distinct numbers possible whose LCM is 211,
H.C.F. of Deno min ators
i.e. 1 and 211. HCF of 1 and 211 is 1.
a c e HCF of (a, c, e ) Ex.24 An orchard has 48 apple trees, 60 mango trees and
HCF of ( , , )= 96 banana trees. These have to be arranged in rows
b d f LCM of (b, d, f )
such that each row has the same number of trees and
LCM of (a, c, e ) all are of the same type. Find the minimum number of
a c e
LCM of ( , , )= such rows that can be formed.
b d f HCF of (b, d, f )
Sol. Total number of trees are 204 and each of the trees
H.C.F. and L.C.M. of Decimal Fractions : In given are exactly divisible by 12. HCF of (48, 60, 96).
numbers, make the same number of decimal places 204
= 17 such rows are possible.
by annexing zeros in some numbers, if necessary. 12
Considering these numbers without decimal point, find
H.C.F. or L.C.M. as the case may be. Now, in the result,
mark off as many decimal places as are there in each Division Algorithm : General representation of result is,
of the given numbers.
Dividend Re mainder
Quotient
Ex.20 The HCF of (0.5, 2.06, 1.025 ) Divisor Divisor
Sol. HCF of (0.500, 2.060, 1.025 ) Dividend = (Divisor × Quotient ) + Remainder
500 2060 1025 NOTE :

= HCF of ( , , )
1000 1000 1000 (i) (xn – an) is divisible by (x – a) for all the values of n.
5 (ii) (xn – an) is divisible by (x + a) and (x – a) for all the
= = 0.005
1000 even values of n.
(iii) (xn + an) is divisible by (x + a) for all the odd values of n.
PAGE # 66
Test of Divisibility : Ex.31 Find the largest four digit number which when
reduced by 54, is perfectly divisible by all even natural
No. Divisiblity Test numbers less than 20.
2 Unit digit should be 0 or even
Sol. Even natural numbers less than 20 are 2, 4, 6, 8, 10,
3 The sum of digits of no. should be divisible by 3
4 The no formed by last 2 digits of given no. should be divisible by 4. 12, 14, 16, 18.
5 Unit digit should be 0 or 5. Their LCM = 2 × LCM of first 9 natural numbers
6 No should be divisible by 2 & 3 both
= 2 × 2520 = 5040
8 The number formed by last 3 digits of given no. should be divisible by 8.
9 Sum of digits of given no. should be divisible by 9 This happens to be the largest four-digit number
The difference between sums of the digits at even & at odd places divisible by all even natural numbers less than 20. 54
11
should be zero or multiple of 11.
25 Last 2 digits of the number should be 00, 25, 50 or 75. was subtracted from our required number to get this
number.
Rule for 7 : Double the last digit of given number and Hence, (required number – 54) = 5040
subtract from remaining number the result should be Required number = 5094.
zero or divisible by 7.
Ex.32 Ajay multiplied 484 by a certain number to get the
Ex.25 Check whether 413 is divisible by 7 or not. result 3823a. Find the value of ‘a’.
Sol. Last digit = 3, remaining number = 41, 41 – (3 x 2) = 35 Sol. 3823a is divisible by 484, and 484 is a factor of 3823a.
4 is a factor of 484 and 11 is also a factor of 484.
(divisible by 7). i.e. 413 is divisible by 7.
Hence, 3823a is divisible by both 4 and 11.
This rule can also be used for number having more
To be divisible by 4, the last two digits have to be
than 3 digits. divisible by 4.
‘a’ can take two values 2 and 6.
Ex.26 Check whether 6545 is divisible by 7 or not.
38232 is not divisible by 11, but 38236 is divisible by
Sol. Last digit = 5, remaining number 654, 654 – (5 x 2)
11.
= 644; 64 – (4 x 2) = 56 divisible by 7. i.e. 6545 is
Hence, 6 is the correct choice.
divisible by 7.
Ex.33 W hich digits should come in place of and $ if the
Rule for 13 : Four times the last digit and add to number 62684 $ is divisible by both 8 and 5 ?
remaining number the result should be divisible b y Sol. Since the given number is divisible by 5, so 0 or 5 must
13. come in place of $. But, a number ending with 5 in
never divisible by 8. So, 0 will replace $.
Ex.27 Check whether 234 is divisible by 13 or not . Now, the number formed by the last three digits is 4 0,
Sol. 234, (4 x 4) + 23 = 39 (divisible by 13), i.e. 234 is divisible which becomes divisible by 8, if is replaced by 4 or 8.
by 13. Hence, digits in place of and $ are 4 or 8 and 0
respectively.
Rule for 17 : Five times the last digit of the number and
Ex.34 On dividing 15968 by a certain number, the quotient
subtract from previous number the result obtained
is 89 and the remainder is 37. Find the divisor.
should be either 0 or divisible by 17.
Dividend Re mainder 15968 37
Ex.28 Check whether 357 is divisible by 17 or not. Sol. Divisor = = 179.
Quotient 89
Sol. 357, (7 x 5) – 35 = 0, i.e. 357 is divisible by 17.
Ex.35 How many numbers between 200 and 600 are
Rule for 19 : Double the last digit of given number and divisible by 4, 5, and 6 ?
Sol. Every such number must be divisible by L.C.M. of 4, 5,
add to remaining number The result obtained should
6, i.e.60.
be divisible by 19.
Such numbers are 240, 300, 360, 420, 480, 540
Ex.29 Check whether 589 is divisible by 19 or not. Clearly, there are 6 such numbers.
Sol. 589, (9 x 2) + 58 = 76 (divisible by 19), i.e. the number
is divisible by 19.
The method of finding the remainder without actually
Ex.30 Find the smallest number of six digits which is exactly performin g th e pro cess of d ivision is termed as
divisible by 111. Remainder Theorem.
Sol. Smallest number of 6 digits is which is 100000. Remainder should always be positive. For example if
On dividing 100000 by 111, we get 100 as remainder. we divide –22 by 7, generally we get –3 as quotient and
–1 as remainder. But this is wrong because remainder
Number to be added = (111 – 100) = 11.
is never be negative hence the quotient should be –4
Hence, required number = 100011. and remainder is +6. W e can also get remainder 6 by
adding –1 to divisor 7 ( 7–1 = 6).
PAGE # 77
Ex.36 Two numbers, x and y, are such that when divided by
6, they leave remainders 4 and 5 respectively. Find the LOGARITHM
remainder when (x2 + y2) is divided by 6. John Napier was born in 1550. He died on 4th April,
Sol. Suppose x = 6k1 + 4 and y = 6k2 + 5 1667 in Edinburgh. A mathematician John Napier
x2 + y2 = (6k1 + 4)2 + (6k2 + 5)2 introduced the concept of logarithm for the first time in
= 36k12 + 48k1 + 16 + 36k22 + 60k2 + 25 1 7th century. L ater, Henry Brig gs, a British
= 36k12 + 48k1 + 36k22 + 60k2 + 41 mathematician born in Feb. 1561 in Yorkshire England,
Obviously when this is divided by 6, the remainder will prepared and published logarithm tables. He died on
be 5. 26th January, 1663 in Oxford England. Logarithm tables
made complicated numerical calculations both easy
Ex.37 A number when divided by 259 leaves a remainder and fast. Today with the advent of desk calculators and
139. W hat will be the remainder when the same computers, the work of numerical calculations has
number is divided by 37 ? beco me easier an d faster, th us red uc in g th e
Sol. Let the number be P. usefulness of logarithm tables. All the while they are
So, P – 139 is divisible by 259. useful for calculations in the study of science and
mathematics.
P 139 If ‘a’ is a positive real number, other than 1 and x is a
Let Q be the quotient then, =Q
259 rational number such that ax = N, then x is the
P = 259Q + 139 logarithm of N to the base a.
If ax = N then loga N = x. [ Remember N will be +ve]
P 259Q 139
=
37 37
259 is divisible by 37, There are two systems of logarithm which are generally
W hen 139 divided by 37, leaves a remainder of 28. used.
Ex.38 A number being successively divided by 3, 5 and 8 (i) Common logarithm : In this system base is always
leaves remainders 1, 4 and 7 respectively. Find the taken as 10.
respective remainders if the order of divisors be (ii) Natural logarithm : In this system the base of the
reversed. logarithm is taken as ‘e’. W here ‘e’ is an irrational
3 x number lying between 2 and 3. (The approximate value
5 y 1 of e upto two decimal places is e = 2.73)
Sol. 8 z 4 Some Useful Results :
1 7
z = (8 × 1 + 7) = 15 ; y = (5z + 4) = (5 × 15 + 4) = 79 (i) If a > 1 then
; x = (3y + 1) = (3 × 79 + 1) = 238. (a) loga x < 0 [for all x satisfying 0 < x < 1]
8 238 (b) loga x = 0 for x = 1
5 29 6 (c) loga x > 0 for x > 1
Now, 3 5 4 (d) x > y loga x > loga y i.e. logax is an increasing
1 2 function.
Respective remainders are 6, 4, 2. Graph of y = loga x, a > 1
Ex.39 A number was divided successively in order by 4, 5 y
and 6. The remainders were respectively 2, 3 and 4.
Then find out the number.
4 x y = logax, a > 1
Sol.
5 y 2 0
x' (1,0) x
6 z 3
1 4
z = (6 × 1 + 4) = 10 y'
y = (5 × z + 3) = (5 × 10 + 53) = 53 (ii) If 0 < a < 1, then
x = (4 × y + 2) = (4 × 53 + 2) = 214 (a) loga x < 0 for all x > 1
Hence, the required number is 214. (b) loga x = 0 for x = 1
(c) logax > 0 for all x satisfying 0 < x < 1
Ex.40 In dividing a number by 585, a student employed the (d) x > y logax < loga y i.e. loga x is a decreasing
method of short division. He divided the number function.
successively by 5, 9 and 13 (factors of 585) and got the Graph of y = loga x, 0 < a < 1.
remainders 4, 8 and 12. If he had divided number by y
585, then find out the remainder.
y = logax, 0 < a < 1.
5 x
9 y 4 (1,0)
Sol. 13 z 8 x' 0 x
1 12
Now, 1169 when divided by 585 gives remainder

= 584. y'
PAGE # 88
Ex.44 Evaluate : 3 2 – log 3 5 .
Logarithm to any base a (where a > 0 and a 1 ).
Sol. Given 3 2 – log 3 5 = 3 2.3 – log 3 5 [ am + n = am.an]
(i) loga a = 1
(ii) loga 0 = not defined log3 5 –1 9
= 9. 3 = 9 × 5–1 = .
[As an = 0 is not possible, where n is any number] 5
(iii) loga (–ve no.) = not defined.
[As in loga N, N will always be (+ ve)]
log11 13 log11 7
Ex.45 If A = log27625 + 7 and B = log9125 + 13 ,
(iv) loga (mn) = loga m + logan
[W here m and n are +ve numbers] then find the relation between A and B.
log11 13 4 log 13
m Sol. A = log27625 + 7 = log33 5 + 7 11
(v) loga = logam – logan
n
(vi) loga(m)n = n logam 4 log 13
or, A = log35 + 7 11 ....(i)
3
log m
b
(vii) log am log11 7
log a and,B = log9125 + 13
b
log11 13
(viii)logam . logma = 1 or, B = log3 2 5 3 + 7
(ix) If ‘a’ is a positive real number and ‘n’ is a positive 3 log 13

rational number, then or, B = log35 + 7 11 ...(ii)
2
a log a n
n By (i) and (ii) we have,
(x) If ‘a’ is a positive real number and ‘n’ is a positive
4 3
rational number, then A– log35 = B – log35
3 2
loga q np p
loga n
q 4 3
log35 < log35
3 2
(xi) ploga q qloga p
A < B.
(xii) logax = logay x= y
Ex.46 Find the value of log25125 – log84
Ex.41 If log3a = 4, find value of a. Sol. Given, log25125 – log84
Sol. log3a = 4
3 2
a = 34 a = 81. = log52 5 3 – log 23 2 2 = log55 – log2 2
2 3
9 27 3
Ex.42 Find the value of log – log log
8 32 4 3 2
Sol. Given : = – [ loga a 1]
2 3
9 27 3 9 27 3
log – log log log log 5
8 32 4 8 32 4 = .
6
9 32 3 Standard form of Number

log
8 27 4 In general, any positive number n can be put in the
form n = t x 10p, where 1 t < 10 and p is an integer. We
shall call this representation of a positive number as
= log1 = 0. [ loga1 = 0] presentation of number in the standard form.
If the standard form of a number is 8.97 x106, its
Ex.43 If 2log4x = 1 + log4(x – 1), find the value of x.
decimal form is 8.97 X 1000000 = 8970000.
Sol. Given 2log4x = 1 + log4(x – 1) A positive number expressed in its decimal form can
log4x2 – log4(x – 1) = 1 be expressed in its standard form by applying the
following rules :
x2 x2 (1) To shift the decimal point p places to the left, multiply
log4 =1 41 = by 10p
x –1 x –1
(2) To shift the decimal point p place to the right, multiply
x2 = 4x – 4 x2 – 4x + 4 = 0
by 10-p.
(x – 2)2 = 0 x = 2.
PAGE # 99
Ex.47 W rite the following numbers in the standard form Finding Log of three digit number :
(1) 703251 (2) 603.328
To obtain the mantissa of the logarithm of a three digit
(3) 0.0000168
number, first find the number formed by the first two
Sol. (1) 703251 = 7.03251 x 105
digits of the given number in the column to the extreme
(2) 603.328 = 6.03328 x 102
left of the logtables. Look at the row against this number.
(3) 0.0000168 = 1.68 x 10-5
In this row, the number in the column headed by the
third digit of the given number gives the mantissa. For
Ex.48 W rite the following numbers in decimal form :
example to find mantissa of log 723, look at the row
(1) 3.72 x 102 (2) 1.798 x 10-3
against 72 in the first column and in the column headed
(3) 83.596 x 10-2
b y 3. T he n um ber 8591 app ears there. Henc e
Sol.
mantissa of log 723 is 0.8591. Since the characteristic
(1) 3.72 x 102 = 372
of log 723 is 2, we have log 723 = 2.8591.
(2) 1.798 x 10-3 = 0.001798
(3) 83.596 x 10-2 = 0.83596 Finding Log of Four digit number :
The Characteristic and Mantissa of Logarithm : For finding the logarithm of a number with four digits,
the columns of mean difference will also be used. For
Let the standard form of a positive number n be
examples suppose we want to find the mantissa of
t x 10p , where 1 t < 10 and p is an integer.
log 3986. The number 3986 is divided into three parts
log n = log (t x 10p)
39, 8 and 6. Now look for 39 in a first enigma. Then find
= log t + log 10p
the number in the row against 39 in the column headed
= log t + p log10
by 8. This is 5999. Finally look for the number in the
= log t + p
same row in the column headed try 6 mg the columns
Since 1 t < 10, we have log 1 log t < log 10. i.e. 0
of mean differences. This number is 7. Adding 7 to
log t < 1.
5999, we get 6006. Hence the mantissa of log 3986 is
W e note log n = log t + p consist of two parts : (1) p (2)
0 .6 00 6. S in ce the characteristic of 3 98 6 is 3 ,
log t
log 3986 = 3.6006.
Here p is called the characteristic and log t is called
Note if fifth digit of the given number is less than 5, this
the mantissa of log n.
four digit number is taken as approximation. if the fifth
For example : digit is 5 or greater, then add 1 to the last digit of the
fo ur d ig it n um ber ob tain ed b y trun cation . Th e
83.628 = 8.3628 x 101, p= 1.
characteristic of the logarithm of a given number is
894.82 = 8.9482 x 102, p = 2
o btained in the u su al w ay. Th e mantissa is th e
0.0329 = 3.29 x 10-2, p = -2
mantissa of the logarithm of the four digit number which
0.000487 = 4.87 x 10–4, p = -4
approximates the given number. For example, let
279389 = 2.79389 x 10 5, p = 5
x = 5.79881. Then the characteristic of log x is 0. The
From above examples, we note that four digit approximation of x is 5.799. Hence the
mantissa o f lo g x = the mantissa o f
(1) W hen the integral part of a number is non-zero, p is log 5.799 = 0.7634.Hence log 5.79881 = 0.7634.
one less than the number of digits in the integral part. W hen the characteristic of a logarithm is a negative
(2) W hen the integral part of the number is zero, p = - number -n it is denoted by n (read as n bar). For
(n + 1), where n is the number of zeros between the example, log (0.002675) = 3.4273 .
decimal point and the first non-zero digit of the number.
Use of Antilog tables :
How To Use of Logarithmic Tables :
The antilogarithm is used to get the number from its
Ready tables of logarithms and antilogarithms shortly logarithm. The first column from the left of the antilog
called log tables and antilog tables are available. The tables contain numbers from 0.00 to 0.99. In all other
log tables consist of three parts : In the first part, there respects, antilog tables are similar to logtables. The
is one column, the first column from left, which contains antilogs are also used in the same way as logtables.
two digit numbers from 10 to 99. Next there are ten Since the logtable gives only the mantissa part of the
columns headed by numbers 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9. logarithm of a number, the antilog table will give a
The last ‘ part called ‘mean difference’ has nine number corresponding to the mantissa part only. Then
columns headed by numbers from 1 to 9. by using characteristic the actual number for the given
The antilog tables are of the same type, except that the logarithm can be obtained.
first column contains numbers froms 0.00 to 0.99. For example, suppose we want to find antilog (1.5278).
From antilogtables, we find that antilog 0.5278 = 3.371
Finding Log of two digit number :
(Meaning that log 3.371 = 0.5278). Hence, antilog
For example we wish to find log 81. Here 81= 81 + 0. 1.5278 = 3.371 X 101 = 33.71 Also antilog 3 .5278 =
its characteristic is 1. The mantissa can be obtained
3.371 x 10-3 = 0.003371. Note that power of 10 is (-1)
from log tables. Look for the number formed by first
means no zero between decimal point and first non-
two digits in the first column. For this, find 81 in the first
zero digit. (-3) means two zeroes between decimal
column and look at row against it. At the intersection of
point and first non-zero digit etc.
this row and the column headed by 0 is the number
In fact antilog is obtained from first four digits after
9085. The mantissa of log 81 is 0.9085. Hence, log
decimal point (the truncated four digit number). If the
81= 1 + 0.9085 = 1.9085.
characteristic is p, we multiply antilog obtained by 10p.
PAGE # 1010
Ex.49 Find value of x = (41.23)3 5. W hich one of the following is an odd number ?
Sol. logx = 3log(41.23) (A) 20012 + 3 (B) 20023 + 10
(C) 20032 + 7 (D) 20043 +1
= 3(1.6152) = 4.8456
6. W hen the repeating decimal 0.45454545....... is written
antilog(logx) = antilog(4.8456)
in simplest fractional form, the sum of the numerator
x = 70080 and denominator is :
(A) 5 (B) 11
Ex.50 Find Value of 49.673 X 9.4891 (C) 55 (D) 16
Sol. Suppose x = 49.673 X 9.4891
log x = log (49.673) + log (9.4891)
= 1.6961 + 0.9772 = 2.6733 7. The number of positive n in the range 12 n 40 such
antilog (log x) = antilog (2.6733)
x = 471.3 that the product (n –1) (n – 2).... 3.2.1 is not divisible by
n is :
2 (A) 5 (B) 7
(8432) × (0.1259)
Ex.51 Find Value of x = 5 (C) 13 (D) 14
(27.478)
8. If least prime factor of a number m is 3 and least prime
1
2 factor of another number n is 7, then least prime factor
2
(8432) × (0.1259) of the number (m + n) is :
Sol. logx = log 5
(27.478) (A) 2 (B) 3
(C) 5 (D) 7
1 2 5 9. A prime number is called a “Superprime” if doubling it,
= {log(8432) + log(0.1259) - log(27.478) }
2 and then sub tracting 1, resu lts in another p rime
number. The number of Superprimes less than 15 is :
1 (A) 2 (B) 3
= {2log(8432) + log(0.1259) - 5log(27.478)}
2 (C) 4 (D) 8
1 10. The positive integers A, B, A – B and A + B are all prime

= {2(3.9259) + 1.1000 - 5(1.4391)} numbers. The sum of these four primes is
2
(A) even (B) divisible by 3
1 (C) divisible by 5 (D) prime
= {(7.8519) + 1.1000 - 7.1955}
2 11. V is product of first 41 natural numbers. A = V + 1. The
number of primes among A + 1, A + 2, A + 3, A + 4
1 1
= (1.7563) = {2 + 1.7563} = 1.8782 .................... A + 39, A + 40 is :
2 2 (A) 1 (B) 2
antilog(logx) = antilog(1.8782) (C) 3 (D) 0
x = 0.7554
12. The greatest value assumed by the function
f(x) = 5 – |x – 3| is :
(A) 3 (B) 8
(C) 6 (D) 5
1. If p, q, r, s and t are real numbers such that r <s, t > q, q >
13. The value of 16 – | – 7 | – | 11 – 22| is equal to :
p and t < r, which of these numbers is greatest ?
(A) t (B) s (A) 56 (B) –2
(C) r (D) q (C) 39 (D) 26
8 [5 ( 3 2)] 2
2. Th e digit at the 1 00 th p lace in th e decimal 14. Evaluate : .
5 3 5 8 3
6 (A) 2 (B) 3
representation of , is :
7 (C) 4 (D) 5
(A) 1 (B) 2
(C) 4 (D) 5 15. If x < – 2, then | 1 – | 1 + x | | equals :
3. xy is a number that is divided by ab where xy < ab and (A) 2 + x (B) x
gives a result 0.xyxyxy... then ab equals : (C) – x (D) – (2 + x)
(A) 11 (B) 33
(C) 99 (D) 66 16. Find the value of x if | 2x+6 |=–8
4. Given that a, b are odd and c, d are even, then which (A) –7 (B) 7
statement is correct ? (C) 1 (D) no solution
(A) a2 – b2 + c2 – d2 is always divisible by 4
(B) a4 + b4 + c3 + d3 + c2b + a2b is always odd
(C) a + 2b + 3c + 4d is odd
(D) All of these
PAGE # 1111
26. The difference between two numbers is 2. Their
product is 84 greater than the square of the smaller
5 number. The sum of the number is :
17. The value of 4 is :
1 (A) 164 (B) 86
1
1 (C) 84 (D) 42
3
1
2
4
27. If x is a positive integer less than 100, then the number
40 4 of x which make 1 2 3 4 x an integer is:
(A) (B)
31 9
(A) 6 (B) 7
1 31
(C) (D) (C) 8 (D) 9
8 40
18. Simplify : 18 – [5 – {6 + 2(7 – 8 5 )}]. 954 484 704 625 0.0004
28. If = .
(A) 13 (B) 15 0.00155 (0.009)2.x
(C) 27 (D) 32 Then x =
(A) 123.456 (B) 0.01234
3 1 1 1 (C) 12.34 (D) 12345.67
19. 5 – 2 0.5 is equal to :
4 2 6 7
23 1 29. If 562 – 492 = 7p, then p is equal is :
(A) 2 (B) 3 (A) 115 (B) 95
84 6
(C) 105 (D) 104
3 1
(C) 3 (D) 5
10 10 110 25
30. If = 50, then the value of x is :
25 x
1 1 1 1 1 1
20. The value of 1 [1 1 (1 1 1 )] is : 1
2 2 2 2 2 4 (A) 36 (B)
36
1 1
(A) (B) 1
2 4 (C) 36 (D)
1 1 36
(C) (D) 1 3 2
16 5 3 2
31. If A = ,B = , C = (0.3)2, D = (– 1.2)2 then:
21. (– 9) + 4 . 4 5
(A) A > B > C > D (B) D > A > B > C
(A) –15 (B) –33
(C) D > B > C > A (D) D > C > A > B
(C) 10 (D) 33
32. If n is a perfect square, then the next perfect square
greater than n is :
(A) n2 + 1 (B) n2 + n
(C) n + 2 n + 1 (D) 2n + 1
22. If 9 (n 2 )2 is a real number, then the number of

integral values of n is : 33. An integer is multiplied by 2 and the result is then
(A) 3 (B) 5 multiplied by 5. The final result could be :
(C) 7 (D) Infinitely many (A) 64 (B) 32
(C) 12 (D) 30
23. The number of integers a such that 1 a 100 and
aa is a perfect square is : 34. If N denotes the number of digits in the number
(A) 50 (B) 53 (584).(286) then N equals
(C) 55 (D) 56 (A) 83 (B) 84
(C) 85 (D) 88
24. The product of three consecutive positive integers is 8
times their sum. The sum of their square is : 35. How many pairs of positive integers (n,m), with n m
(A) 50 (B) 77
(C) 100 (D) 149 1 1 1
satisfy the euation ?
5 n m
25. The number N = 173889 is a perfect square. The sum (A) 1 (B) 2
of the digits in N , is : (C) 3 (D) 4
(A) 12 (B) 7
(C) 14 (D) 9 36. If a2 – b2 = 13 where a and b are natural numbers, then
value of a is :
(A) 6 (B) 7
(C) 8 (D) 9
PAGE # 1212
37. A n um ber N wh en facto rized can be w ritten as 48. The value of the digit d for which the number d456d is
N = p14 × p23 × p37. Find the number of perfect squares divisible by 18, is :
w hich are fac to rs o f . (T he 3 prim e nu mb ers (A) 3 (B) 4
(C) 6 (D) 9
p1, p2, p3 > 2)
(A) 12 (B) 24
49. W hich of the following number is divisible by 99 ?
(C) 36 (D) 6
(A) 3572404 (B) 135792
(C) 913464 (D) 114345
50. There is an N digit number (N > 1). If the sum of

38. H.C.F. of 3240, 3600 and a third number is 36 and their
d ig its is su b t rac ted fro m th e n u m b er th en th e
L.C.M. is 24 × 35 × 52 × 72. Then the third number is :
resulting number will be divisible by :
(A) 22 × 35 × 72 (B) 22 × 53 × 72 (A) 7 (B) 2
5 2 2
(C) 2 × 5 × 7 (D) 23 × 35 × 72 (C) 11 (D) 9
7
39. The number of ordered pairs (a, b) of positive integers 51. The smallest integral value of x, for which is an
x
such that a + b = 90 and their greatest common integer is :
divisor is 6 equals. (A) 1 (B) – 1
(A) 5 (B) 4 (C) 7 (D) – 7
(C) 8 (D) 10
52. The smallest prime number that divides the sum
40. If HCF (p, q) = 12 and p × q = 1800 then LCM (p, q) is : (711 + 1113) is :
(A) 3600 (B) 900 (A) 2 (B) 3
(C) 150 (D) 90 (C) 5 (D) 7
41. The product of two-digit numbers is 2160 and their 53. In the 5-digit number a6a41 each of the a's represent
G.C.D. is 12. The numbers are : the same digit. If the is divisible by 9, then the digit
(A) 72, 30 (B) 16, 60 represented by 'a' is :
(C) 96, 25 (D) 36, 60 (A) 3 (B) 7
(C) 6 (D) 8
42. The least number of square tiles required to pave the
ceiling of a room 15 m 17 cm long and 9 m 2 cm broad, 54. If x is a positive integer such that 2x + 12 is perfectly
is : divisible by 'x', then the number of possible values
(A) 902 (B) 656 of 'x' is :
(C) 738 (D) 814 (A) 2 (B) 5
43. Four watches are ringing alarm bells in the interval of (C) 6 (D) 12
6, 12, 15 and 18 seconds. If they start at same time,
how many times they will ring together in 4 hrs.
(A) 80 times (B) 81 times
55. The least number which on division by 35 leaves a
(C) 20 times (D) 21 times
remainder 25 and on division by 45 leaves the remainder
35 and on division by 55 leaves the remainder 45 is :
(A) 2515 (B) 3455
44. W hich is the smallest six-digit number divisible by 111 ? (C) 2875 (D) 2785
(A) 111111 (B) 110011
56. W hich one of the numbers listed below is not a divisor
(C) 100011 (D) 100111
of the number N = (230 –1), is equal to :
(A) 25 –1 (B) 25 + 1
45. Number of values of ‘a’ (from 0 to 9) for the number 6
(C) 2 – 1 (D) 210 + 1
N = 2345631143a4 is divisible by 12, is :
(A) 0 (B) 1 57. The remainder when (x51 + 51) is divided by
(x +1), is :
(C) 2 (D) more than 2
(A) 0 (B) 1
(C) 51 (D) 50
46. 113 + 213 + 313 + .....+ 6013 is divisible by :
(A) 61 (B) 63 58. A number divided by 14 gives a remainder 8. W hat is
(B) 65 (D) 59 the remainder, if this number is divided by 7 ?
(A) 1 (B) 2
47. If the eight digit number 2575d568 is divisible by 54 (C) 3 (D) 4
and 87, the value of the digit ‘d’ is:
(A) 4. (B) 7 59. W hen 4101 + 6101 is divided by 25, the remainder is :
(A) 20 (B) 10
(C) 0. (D) 8
(C) 5 (D) 0
PAGE # 1313
60. W hat is the reminder when 13400 is divided by 11? 1 21 22 22006 22007
72. + 2 + 3 +.......+ 2007 + 2008 is equal to :
(A) –1 (B) 1 2 2 2 2 2
(C) 5 (D) 2
1
(A) 1004 (B) 2008
2
61. Since log2 = 0.3010, log 8 = __________ . (C) 2008 (D) 502
(A) 0.3010 (B) 0.6020
(C) 0.9030 (D) 3.010 73. If x x x x ....... 2 then x equals
62. Since log 3 = 0.4771 and log 4 = 0.6021 log 12 = (A) 2 – (B) 2
2 2
_______ .
(A) 1.0792 (B) 0.1250 (C) 2 2 (D) 2 – 3
(C) 0.2873 (D) 0.0792
63. The characteristic of log 0.0004321is _______ 74. The four digit number 2652 is such that any two
(A) 3 (B) –3 consecutive digits from it make a multiple of 13. Another
(C) 4 (D) –4 number N has this same property, is 100 digits long,
and begins in a 9. The last digit of N, is
1 (A) 2 (B) 3
64. 64 3 = 4 is equivalent as _______ . (C) 6 (D) 9
1 75. Three consecutive positive integers are raised to the

(A) log4 64 = 3 (B) log64 4 = first, second and third powers respectively and then
3
added. The sum so obtained is a perfect square whose
(C) log64 3 = 4 (D) log3 4 = 64
square root equals the total of the three original
integers. W hich of the following best describes the
a b c minimum, say m, of these three integers?
65. log + log + log = _____ (A) 1 m 3 (B) 4 m 6
b c a
(C 7 m 9 (D) 10 m 12
(A) 1 (B) 2
(C) 0 (D) 3 76. The expression
66. Since log 40 = 1.6021, log 0.04 = _______ 1 1 1 1 1 1
....... 1 .......
(A) 0.6021 (B) 1 .6021 2 3 2008 2 3 2007
(C) 2 .6021 (D) 3 .6021 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 ....... .......
67. 3 log 2 + 4 log 2 = ________ 2 3 2008 2 3 2007
(A) log 128 (B) log 24
simplifies to :
(C) 7 log 4 (D) 12 log 2
1
68. The value of [log10 (5 log10 100)]2 is : (A) 0 (B)
2007
(A) 0 (B) 1
1 2
(C) 2 (D) 10 (C) (D)
2008 2007
69. log10 p + log10 q = log10 (p–q), then :
q 77. Eighteen students participated in a table tennis contest.
(A) p = q = 0 (B) p = The students were divided into pairs numbered from 1
1 q
to 9. Even numbered pair consist of a boy and a girl
q and odd numbered pair consist of two boys. The
(C) p = q = 1 (D) p =
1 q number of boys participated in the contest is
1 (A) 10 (B) 12
70. If log 3 M 3 log 3 N = 1+ log 5, then : (C) 14 (D) 11
3 0.008
9 9 9 9 78. If n is a natural number then we define n! (pronounced

(A) M (B) N
N M as factorial n) to be the product n × (n – 1) × (n – 2) × ......×
3 3 9 3 2 × 1. For example 4! = 4 × 3 × 2 × 1 = 24.
(C) M (D) N If 6! = a! × b! where a > 1 and b > 1, then a + b is :
N M
(A) 8 (B) 7
(C) 6 (D) 5
71. T he n um ber of p ositive frac tion s m/n su ch that 79. In the sequence ....a, b, c, d, 0, 1, 1, 2, 3, 5, 8.... each
1/3 < m/n < 1 and having the property that the fraction term is the sum of the two terms to its left. Find ‘a’.
remains the same by adding some positive integer to (A) – 3 (B) – 1
(C) 0 (D) 1
the numerator and multiplying the denominator by the
same positive integer is :
(A) 1 (B) 3
(C) 6 (D) infinite
PAGE # 1414
6. The sum of any three distinct natural numbers arranged
1 x in ascending order is 200 such that the second number
80. If 1 1 = ,
36 is a perfect cube. How many possible values are there
1 1 1 1 for this number ? (NTSE Stage-2/2011)
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 (A) 4 (B) 3
x 2 x 2 x 2 x 2 (C) 2 (D) 1
then x is equal to :
(A) 70 (B) 72 7. If the digits of a three-digit number are reversed, then
(C) 36 (D) 68 the number so obtained is less than the original number
2 2 2 by 297. If the sum of the digit of the number is 8 and its
1 1 1
81. T he valu e o f 1 1 1 ....... hundred’s digit has the largest possible value, then the
3 4 5 ten’s digit of the number is : (NTSE Stage-2/2011)
2 (A) 3 (B) 2
1
1 is equal to : (C) 1 (D) 0
n
2 2 8. If aabb is a four digit number and also a perfect square
1 2
(A) (B) then the value of a + b is : (NTSE Stage-2/2011)
n n
(A) 12 (B) 11
2 2 (C) 10 (D) 9
3 4
(C) (D)
n n 9. If the sum of three consecutive odd numbers is a perfect
square between 200 and 400, then the root of this
sum is : (NTSE Stage-2/2011)
(A) 15 (B) 16
(C) 18 (D) 19
1
10. Number of zero's in the product of
1 b
1. If a and b are natural numbers such that = 0.3 , 5 × 10 × 25 × 40 × 50 × 55 × 65 × 125 × 80, is
a
[M.P. NTSE Stage-1 2013]
then the value of ab is : (NTSE Stage-2 2007)
(A) 8 (B) 9
(A) 81 (B) 24
(C) 12 (D) 13
(C) 192 (D) 375
2. If the sum of the digits of a number (10n – 1) is 4707, 11. A farmer divides his herd of x cows among his 4 son's
where n is a natural number, then the value of n is : such that first son gets one-half of the herd, the second
(NTSE Stage-2/2007) son gets one fourth, the third son gets one-fifth and the
(A) 477 (B) 523 fourth son gets 7 cows, then the value of x is :
(C) 532 (D) 704 [M.P. NTSE Stage-1 2013]
(A) 100 (B) 140
7 1 (C) 160 (D) 180
3. If 5 ×y = 12, where fractions are in their lowest
x 13
terms, then x – y is equal to 12. If log12 27 = a, then log6 16 is
(NTSE Stage-2 /2010) [Delhi NTSE Stage-1 2013]
(A) 2 (B) 4 4(3 a) 4(3 a)
(C) 7 (D) 9 (A) (B)
(3 a ) (3 a )
4(3 a) 3 a
4. 1x3y6 is a five digit number where x, y are digits and y (C) (D)
(3 a ) 4(3 a)
exceeds x by 6. If this number is divisible by 18, then
y 24 9 81
the value of is : (NTSE Stage-2/2010) 13. The value of 4log – 16log + 7log
x 25 10 80
(A) 7 (B) 3
1 1 (A) log9 (B) log7
(C) (D) (C) log5 (C) log3
3 7
5. If the product of two numbers is 21 and their difference
is 4, then the ratio of the sum of their cubes to the 14. W hich real number lies between 2 and 2.5
difference of their cubes is : (NTSE Stage-2/2011) [Chandigar NTSE Stage-1 2014]
(A) 185 : 165 (B) 165 : 158
(A) 11 (B) 8
(C) 185 : 158 (C) 158 : 145
(C) 3
7 (D) 3 9
PAGE # 1515
15. For positive x and y, the LCM is 225 and HCF is 15 21. W hen a natural number x is divided by 5, the remainder
There. [NTSE Stage-2 2014] is 2. W hen a natural number y is divided by 5, the
(A) is exactly one such pair remainder is 4, The remainder is z when x + y is divided
(B) are exactly two such pair 2z 5
(C) are exactly three such pair by 5. The value of is (NTSE Stage-2 /2015)
3
(D) are exactly four such pair
(A) –1 (B) 1
(C) –2 (D) 2
16. W hich of the following can be expressed as the sum of
square of two positive in tegers, as well as three 6 4 2
22. Find HCF of , , [Delhi NTSE Stage-1 2016]
positive integers ? [NTSE Stage-2 2014] 5 15 5
(A) 75 (B) 192 6 2
(C) 250 (D) 100 (A) (B)
15 15
17. The HCF of any two prime numbers a and b, is 2 4
[Rajasthan NTSE Stage-1 2015] (C) (D)
5 15
(A) a (B) ab 23. Raj wanted to type the first 200 natural numbers,
(C) b (D) 1 how many times does he have to press the keys
[Delhi NTSE Stage-1 2016]
18. The traffic lights at three different signals change after (A) 489 (B) 492
48 seconds, 72 seconds and 108. If they change at 7 (C) 400 (D) 365
a.m. simultaneously. How many times they will change
between 7 a.m. to 7 : 30 a.m. simultaneously ? 24. If a number m is divided by 5 leaves a remainder 2,
[Haryana NTSE Stage-1 2015] while another number n is divided by 5 leaves a
remainder 4, then the remainder, when (m + n) is
(A) 3 (B) 4
divided by 5 is : [Haryana NTSE Stage-1 2016]
(C) 5 (D) 2
(A) 1 (B) 2
(C) 3 (D) 4
19. Three - digit number formed by using digits 0, 1,2 and
5 (without repetition) are written on different on each
slip, and put in a bowl. One slip is drawn at random 25. Among the numbers 2250, 3200, 4150 and 5100, the greatest
from the bowl. The probability that the slip bears a is [West Bengal NTSE Stage-1 2016]
number divisible by 5 is : (NTSE Stage-2 /2015) (A) 2250 (B) 3200
5 4 (C) 4150 (D) 5100
(A) (B)
9 9
26. Expressing 0.23 + 0.23 as a single decimal, we get
2 1
(C) (D)
3 3 [Rajasthan NTSE Stage-1 2017]
(A) 0.465 (B) 0.465

20. LCM of two numbers x and y is 720 and the LCM of
numbers 12x and 5y is also 720. The number y is. (C) 0.465 (D) 0.4654
(NTSE Stage-2 /2015)
(A) 180 (B) 144
(C) 120 (D) 90
PAGE # 1616
SURDS
3
Let a be a rational number and n be a positive integer, Ex.3 Simplify : 8a5b 4a2b 2 .
then irrational number is of the form n a is given a Sol. 8a5b
3
4a 2b2
special name surd, where ‘a’ is called radicand and it
= 6 6
should always be a rational number. Also the symbol 8 3 a15 b 3 4 2 a 4b 4
n is called the radical sign and the index n is called
= 6
213 a19 b 7
order of the surd. n th
a is read as ‘n root of a’ and can
1
= 2 2 a 3 b 6 2ab
also be written as a n .
= 4a 3 b 6
2ab .
3
n Ex.4 Divide : 24 200 .
1
n 1
n
(i)
n
a = an = a =
n a. 3
200
Sol. 24
(ii) n
a .n b n
ab 24 6
( 24)3 216
6
= 3 .
200 6
(200 ) 2 625
n
a a
(iii) n = n
b b
It is clear that if x > y > 0 and n > 1 is a positive integer
(iv) (n a )m = n
am = a
m/n
n n
then x > y.
mn n m
(v) a = mn a = a 4
Ex.5 Arrange 3
2, 3 and 5 in ascending order..
n n p p
(vi) a a 3 4
Sol. 2, 3 and 5
[Important for changing order of surds]
L.C.M. of 2, 3, 4 is 12.
n n p
or, am am p
2 6
2 26 12
64
Ex.1 Simplify : 3
2 .3 4 .
3 4
1 3
3 34 12
81
Sol. 3
2. 4 =
3 3
2 4 = 3 3
2 = ( 23 ) 3 = 2.
4 3
4
5 53 12
125
As, 64 < 81 < 125.
12 12 12
64 81 125
Addition and subtraction of surds are possible only 3 4
2 3 5.
when order and radicand are same i.e. only for like
surds.
3
Ex.2 Simplify : 5 250 7 3 16 – 14 3 54 Rationalizing factor : If the product of two surds is a
ration al n um ber, then each surd is c alled a
Sol. 5 3 250 7 3 16 – 14 3 54 rationalising factor (RF) of the other.
= 5 3 125 2 7 3 8 2 – 14 3 27 2 Rationalisation of surds :
The process of converting a surd into rational number
= 5 532 7 2 3 2 – 14 3 3
2
by multiplying it with a suitable RF, is called the
= ( 25 14 – 42) 3 2 rationalisation of the surd.
= – 33 2 . Monomial surds and their RF :
The general form of a monomial surd is n a and its

1
1
RF is a n .
PAGE # 17
Ex.6 Find rationalisation factor of 3
5. EXPONENTS
1 2
1
Sol. Rationalisation factor of 3
5 is 5 3 53
3
52 3
25 .
The repeated multiplication of the same factor can be
written in a more compact form, called exponential
Binomial surds and their RF : form.
The surds of the types : a b, a b, a b, Laws of exponents :
If a is any non – zero rational number and m, n are
and a b are called binomial surds. whole numbers, then
(i) On the same base in multiplication, powers are
Conjugate Surds : The binomial surds which differ
added. am × an = am + n
only in sign between the terms separating them are
For example : 32 × 34 = 32 + 4 = 36.
known as conjugate surds. In binomial surds, the
(ii) On the same base in division, powers are subtracted.
conjugate surds are RF of each other.
am
For example : = am – n
an
(i) RF of a b is a b. 35
For Example : = 35 – 2 = 33.
32
(ii) RF of a b is a b. am 1
1 (iii) = , n > m.
an an m
Ex.7 Rationalize the denominator .
7 5 3 23 1 1
For Example : .
1 24 24 3 2
Sol. (iv) (am)n = amn
7 5 3
For Example : (22)3 = 22 × 3 = 26.
1 7 5 3
= ×
7 5 3 7 5 3 (v) an × a– n = a0 = 1
(vi) am × bm = (ab)m
7 5 3 7 5 3 5 3 7
= = = . For Example : 22 ×32 = (2 ×3)2 = 62 = 36.
49 75 26 26
(viii) abn = ab + b + b.....n times
Trinomial surds :
where a, b are positive real numbers and m, n are
A surd which consists of three terms, atleast two of rational numbers.
which are monomial surds, is called a trinomial surd.
3/2 3/ 5
25 243
Example : 7 3 5 Ex.9 Simplify : 5/4 4/3 .
16 8
x Sol. W e have,
In order to rationalize =
a b c 25
3/2
243
3/5
5/4 4/3
(i) Multiply and divide by a + b– c 16 8
3/ 2 3/5
(ii) Multiply and divide by (a + b – c) – 2 ab 52 35
= 5/ 4 4/3
1 24 23
Ex.8 Rationalize : .
6 3 5 52 3/2
35 3/5
53 3 3
= =
1 24 5/4
23 4/3
25 2 4
Sol.
6 3 5 125 27 3375
= = .
1 ( 6 3) 5 32 16 512
= × Ex. 10 If 25x – 1 = 52x – 1 – 100, find the value of x.
( 6 3) 5 ( 6 3) 5
Sol. W e have,
6 3 5 6 3 5 25x – 1 = 52x – 1 – 100
= 2 2 = x 1
( 6 3) ( 5) 6 3 2 18 5 52 5 2x 1
100
2x 2 2x 1
6 3 5 6 3 5 4 6 2 5 5 100
= = 2x 2 2x 2 1
4 6 2 (4 6 2) 4 6 2 5 5 .5 100
52x – 2 (1 – 5) = – 100
4 6 4 3 4 5 6 12 6 6 6 10
= 52x – 2 (– 4) = – 100
16 72
5 2x 2
25
2 6 4 3 4 5 12 3 6 10
= 5 2x 2
52
56
2x – 2 = 2
6 4 3 2 5 3 10
= 2x = 4
28
x = 2.
PAGE # 18
Ex. 11 Assuming that x is a positive real number and a, b, 3 3
9. The number N = 2 5 2 5 equals :
c are rational numbers, show that :
a b c
xb xc xa (A) 1 (B) 5 1
c a b
1
x x x (C) 3 (D) 3
2 5 2
a b c
xb xc xa (4 x 3 )2
Sol. c
. a
. b 10. If 3 3 , then x is equal to :
x x x 6
(A) 22 (B) 6
= xb c a a b b c
. xc . xa x ab ac
.x bc ba
.x ac bc
(C) 3 (D) 1
= x ab ac bc ba ac bc x0 1. (5 3 50 )(5 24 )
11. The number N =
75 5 2
when simplified reduces to :
(A) an irrational number
(B) rational which is not an integer
4 3 4 2 3 (C) unity
1. The value of – is : (D) an even prime
3 1 2 3
(A) 0 (B) 1
(C) 8 3 (D) 15 ( 5)0.25 (125 )0.25
12. The value of is :
1 ( 256 )0.10 ( 256 )0.15
2. If x = (7 + 4 3 ), then the value of x + is :
x 5 5
(A) 8 (B) 6 (A) (B)
2 4
(C) 5 (D) 4 25 25
(C) (D)
3 2 3 2 2 16
3. If x an d y th e valu e o f
3 2 3 2 6r s 12r – s
2 2 13. Let r and s be integer. The is an integer if :
x xy y is : 8r 9r 2 s
(A) 99 (B) 100 (A) r + s 0 (B) s 0
(C) 1 (D) 0 (C) r 0 (D) r s
3 1 14. Suppose that P = 2m and Q = 3n. W hich of the following
4. If x , find the value of 4x3 + 2x2 – 8x + 7.
2 is equal to 12mn for every pair of integers (m, n) ?
(A) 0 (B) 100 (A) PnQm (B) PnQ2m
(C) 11 (D) 10 (C) P2mQn (D) P2nQm
5. The value of the expression 15. The product of 2050 and 5020 is written as an integer in
expanded form. The number of cyphers at the end of
1 1 1
.....upto 99 terms the resulting integer is
2 1 3 2 4 3 (A) 70 (B) 71
is equal to : (C) 90 (D) 210
(A) 9 (B) 3 16. If 2 a > 4c and 3b > 9a and a, b, c all positive, then :
(C) 1 (D) 0 (A) c < a < b (B) b < c < a
6. The value of the expression (C) c < b < a (D) a < b < c
17. If 22008 – 22007 – 22006 + 22005 = k . 22005 then the value of k
34 24 2 × (4 3 2 ) is : is equal to :
(A) – 2 (B) 2 (A) 2 (B) 3
(C) 3 (D) 4 (C) 4 (D) 5
4
7. The simplest rationalising factor of 48 is : (23)9 (23)8
18. If =(23)x then x equals :
(A) 4
9 (B) 4
27
22
(A) 7 (B) 8
(C) 3
9 (D) None of these (C) 9 (D) 1
1 19. Real n um bers a an d b satisfy th e eq uation s

8. If Y = 2 + 1, then the value of Y + is : 3a = 81b + 2 and 125b = 5a – 3. The value of ab, is :
Y (A) 17 (B) 9
3 3 (C) 12 (D) 60
(A) (B)
2 2 1 1 1
20. If 2x = 3y = 6–z, then x y z is equal to :
2 4
(C) (D) (A) 0 (B) 1
2 2
3 1
(C) (D) –
2 2
PAGE # 19
q
1 1 3. If x p = ( xp )q , then p =
[Haryana NTSE Stage-1 2013]
x 2007 x 2009 1
21. Fo r x 0 , ± 1, th e exp ressio n is
1 1 (A) q q (B) 1
2008 2010
equivalent to : x x 1
(A) x (B) x – 1 (C) qq (D) q q 1
1 4. If in 3 3
(C) x2 –1 (D) 3+ 5 , x = 3 and y = 5 , then its rationalising
x factor is [M.P. NTSE Stage-1 2013]
22. Solve for n in 4n + 4n + 4n + 4n = 22010.
(A) 1005 (B) 2010 (A) x + y
(C) 1004 (D) 1003 (B) x – y
(C) x5 + x4y + x3y2 + x2y3 + xy4 + y5
22009 22007
23. Simplify : . (D) x5 – x4y + x3y2 – x2y3 + xy4 – y5
22006 22008
(A) – 4 (B) – 2 5. Of the following four numbers the largest is :
(C) – 1 (D) 2 [Harayana NTSE Stage-1 2014]
(A) 3210 (B) 7140
24. If 4x – 4x-1 = 24, then the value of (2x)x equals : (C) (17)105 (D) (31)84
(A) 5 5 (B) 5 2( 2 6)
6. The value of 2 3 2 – 3 is
3 2 3
(C) 25 5 (D) 25
[Harayana NTSE Stage-1 2014]
a b c
25. If 2 2 2 = 256, then the average of a, b and c is : 3 4 6 4 3 6
(A) (B)
8 256 3 3
(A) (B)
3 3 3 4 6 4–3 6
(C) (D)
4 4 3
(C) (D) 8
3 a
7. The rationalizing factor of n is
1
(0.6 )º (0 .1) b
26. The value of is : [Karnataka NTSE Stage-1 2014]
(3 / 2 ) 1(3 / 2)3
3
( 1/ 3 ) 1
a a
3 3 (A) ab n (B) n
(A) (B) – b b
20 20
n
an – 1 n
an 1
20 1 (C) (D)
(C) (D) bn –1 bn 1
3 20 8. Value of the expression :
27. 273 – 272 – 271 is the same as : 1 3 4
(A) 269 (B) 270
– –
(C) 271 (D) 272 11 2 30 7 2 10 8 4 3
28. If xy = yx and x2 = y, where x and y are distinct positive [NTSE Stage-2 2014]
real numbers, then the value of x + 2y is : (A) 30 (B) 2 10
(A) 3 (B) 8 (C) 1 (D) 0
(C) 10 (D) 12 1 1 1
29. If x = – 0.5 then which one of the following has the xb bc xc ca xa ab
smallest value : 9. T he value o f . . on
xc xa xb
1 1
(A) (B) simplifying is : [Rajasthan NTSE Stage-1 2015]
2x x1 (A) x (B) 1/x
(C) 2x (D) (C) 1 (D) – 1
–x 10. The simplified value of
1 1
+ is
2 3 5 2 3 5
1. Which is the greatest number amongst 21/2, 31/3, (A) 1 (B) 0
81/8 and 91/9 ? (NTSE Stage-II/2011) 1
(A) 91/9 (B) 81/8 (C) 2 (D)
2
(C) 31/3 (D) 21/2
3
4 3
2 3
1
11. The value of – + is :
5 2 5 –2 9 9 9
2. If N = – 3–2 2
5 2
1
then the value of N is : [Haryana NTSE Stage-1 2013] (A) 3 (B) 3 3
3
(A) 2 2 –1 (B) 2
3
3 3
(C) 1 (D) 5 2 (C) (D)
3 3
2 1 2 1
PAGE # 20
(B) Linear Polynomial : A polynomial of degree one is

called a linear polynomial. The general form of linear
An algebraic expression f(x) of the form polynomial is ax + b, where a and b are any real constant
2 n
f(x) = a 0 + a 1x + a 2x +...........+ a nx , where a0, a 1, and a 0.
a2,............,an are real numbers and all the index of ‘x’ (C) Quadratic Polynomial : A polynomial of degree two
are non-negative integers is called a polynomials in x. is called a quadratic polynomial. The general form of a
quadratic polynomial is ax2 + bx + c, where a 0.
Identification of Polynomial :
For this, we have following examples : (D) Cubic Polynomial : A polynomial of degree three is
called a cubic polynomial. The general form of a cubic
(i) 3 x2 + x – 5 is a polynomial in variable x as all the polynomial is ax3 + bx2 + cx + d, where a 0.
exponents of x are non negative integers. (E) Biquadratic (or quartic) Polynomials :
A polynomial of degree four is called a biquadratic
(ii) 3 x2 + x – 5x is not a polynomial as the exponent
(quartic) polynomial. The general form of a biquadratic
polynomial is ax4 + bx3 + cx2 + dx + e, where a 0.
of second term ( x = x1/2) is not a non–negative
integer. NOTE : A polynomial of degree five or more than five does
not have any particular name. Such a polynomial usually
5 called a polynomial of degree five or six or ....... etc.
(iii) 5x3 + 2x2 + 3x – + 6 is not a polynomial as the
x (ii) Based on number of terms
5 There are three types of polynomials based on number

1
expo nent o f fo urth term 5x is no t of terms. These are as follows :
x
(A) Monomial : A polynomial is said to be a monomial
non–negative integer. if it has only one term. e.g. x, 9x2, 5x3 all are monomials.
(a) Degree of the Polynomial : (B) Binomial : A polynomial is said to be a binomial if it

1
contains two terms. e.g. 2x2 + 3x, 2 x + 5x3, – 8x3 + 3,
Highest index of x in algebraic expression is called the
all are binomials.
degree of the polynomial, here a0, a1x, a2x2,............., anxn,
are called the terms of the polynomial and a 0, a 1, (C) Trinomials : A polynomial is said to be a trinomial if
a2,.........., a n are called various coefficients of the 5
it contains three terms. e.g. 3x3 – 8x + , 5 – 7x + 8x9,
polynomial f(x). 2
7 x10 + 8x4 – 3x2 are all trinomials.
For example:
(i) p(x) = 3x4 – 5x2 + 2 is a polynomial of degree 4 NOTE :
A polynomial having four or more than four terms does
(ii) q(x) = 5x4 + 2x5 – 6x6 – 5 is a polynomial of degree 6 not have particular name. These are simply called
polynomials.
(iii) f(x) = 2x3 + 7x – 5 is a polynomial of degree 3.
(b) Different Types of Polynomials : Some important identities are :

Generally, we divide the polynomials in the following (i) (a + b)2 = a2 + 2ab + b2
categories. (ii) (a – b)2 = a2 – 2ab + b2
(i) Based on degrees : (iii) a2 – b2 = (a + b) (a – b)
There are four types of polynomials based on degrees.
(iv) (a + b + c)2 = a2 + b2 + c2 + 2ab + 2 bc + 2ca
These are listed below :
(v) a3 + b3 = (a + b) (a2 – ab + b2)
(A) Zero degree polynomial : Any non-zero number
(vi) a3 – b3 = (a – b) (a2 + ab + b2)
(constant) is regarded as a polynomial of degree zero
or zero degree polynomial. i.e. f(x) = a, where a 0 is (vii) (a + b)3 = a3 + b3 + 3ab (a + b)
a zero degree polynomial, since we can write f(x) = a (viii) (a – b)3 = a3 – b3 – 3ab (a – b)
as f(x) = axo. (ix) a3 + b3 + c3 – 3abc = (a + b + c) (a2 + b2 + c2 – ab – bc – ac)
PAGE # 2121
Special case : if a + b + c = 0 then a3 + b3 + c3 = 3abc. Ex.3 If a + b + c = 15, a2 + b2 + c2 = 83, then find the value of
Value Form : a3 + b3 + c3 – 3abc.
Sol. a + b + c = 15
(i) a2 + b2 = (a + b)2 – 2ab, if a + b and ab are given.
a2 + b2 + c2 = 83
2 2 2
(ii) a + b = (a – b) + 2ab, if a – b and ab are given. To find the value of : a3 + b3 + c3 – 3abc
2
a3 + b3 + c3 – 3abc = (a + b + c)(a2 + b2 + c2 – ab – bc – ca)
(iii) a + b = a b 4ab , if a – b and ab are given.
(a + b + c)2 = a2 + b2 + c2 + 2 (ab + bc + ca)
2 (15)2 = 83 + 2 (ab + bc + ca)
(iv) a – b = a b 4ab , if a + b and ab are given.
2 (ab + bc + ca) = 225 – 83
2
1 1 1
2
(v) a + = a – 2, if a + is given. 2 (ab + bc + ca) = 142
a2 a a
(ab + bc + ca) = 71
2
1 1 1 a3 + b3 + c3 – 3abc = (a + b + c)(a2 + b2 + c2 – ab – bc – ca)
(vi) a2 + = a + 2, if a – is given.
a2 a a = (15) (83 – 71)
= (15) (12) = 180.
(vii) a3 + b3 = (a + b)3 – 3ab (a + b), if (a + b) and ab are
given. Ex.4 Prove that a2 + b 2 + c 2 – ab – bc – ca is always
(viii) a3 – b3 = (a – b)3 + 3ab (a – b), if (a – b) and ab are non - negative for all values of a, b & c.
given. Sol. a2 + b2 + c2 – ab – bc – ca
3
1 1 1 1 1
(ix) a3 = a –3 a , if a + is given. = [ 2a2 + 2b2 + 2c2 – 2ab – 2bc – 2ca ]
a3 a a a 2
3
1 1 1 1 1
(x) a3 = a +3 a , if a – is given. = [(a – b)2 + (b – c)2 + (c – a)2]
a 3 a a a 2
(xi) a4 – b4 = (a2 + b2) (a2 – b2) = [(a + b)2 – 2ab](a + b) (a – b). W e know square of any negative or non negative
Ex.1 Evaluate : value is positive and sum of then will also positive
2 thus we can conclude given eq n will be non–negative
1
(i) (5x + 4y) 2
(ii) (4x – 5y) 2
(iii) 2x for all values of a, b, c.
x
Sol. (i) (5x + 4y)2 = (5x)2 + (4y)2 + 2(5x)(4y)
= 25x2 + 16y2 + 40xy
(ii) (4x – 5y) = (4x)2 + (5y)2 – 2(4x)(5y)
2
To express a given polynomial as the product of
2 2
= 16x + 25y – 40xy polynomials, each of degree less than that of the given
2 2
1 1 1 polynomial such that no such a factor has a factor of
(iii) 2x = (2x)2 + – 2 (2x)
x x x lower degree, is called factorization.
1 (a) Factorization by taking out the common factor :
– 4. = 4x2 +
x2 W hen each term of an expression has a common factor,
Ex.2 If a + b = 10 and a2 + b2 = 58, find the value of a3 + b3.
divide each term by this factor and take out as a multiple.
Sol. Given a + b = 10 ... (i)
Ex.5 Factorize : 6x3 + 8x2 – 10x
and a2 + b2 = 58 ... (ii)
Sol. 6x3 + 8x2–10x = 2x (3x2 + 4x – 5)
we know a3 + b3 = (a + b)(a2 + b2 – ab) ... (iii)
(b) Factorization by grouping :
W e know (a + b)2 = a2 + b2 + 2ab
Thus 2ab = (a + b)2 – (a2 + b2) Ex.6 Factorize : ax + by + ay + bx
n n Sol. ax + by + ay + bx = ax + ay + bx + by = a (x + y) + b(x+y)
Put values from eq (i) & eq (ii)
2ab = (10) – (58) 2 = (x + y) (a + b)
= 100 – 58 = 42 (c) Factorization by making a perfect square :
ab = 21 Ex.7 Factorize : 4x2 + 12x + 9
3 3 2 2
a + b = (a + b)(a + b – ab) Sol. 4x2 + 12x + 9 = (2x)2 + 2 (2x) (3) + 32
= 10 × (58 – 21) = (2x + 3)2
= 10 × 37 = 370.
PAGE # 2222
(d) Factorization the difference of two squares : L.C.M. (Least Common Multiple ) : A polynomial P(x) is
Ex.8 Factorize : 4x – 25. 2 called the LCM of two or more given polynomials, if it
Sol. 4x2 – 25 = (2x)2 – (5)2 = (2x – 5) (2x + 5) is a polynomial of smallest degree which is divided by
each one o f the g iven p olynom ials. F or any two
(e) Factorization of a quadratic polynomial by splitting
polynomials P(x) and Q(x). W e have :
the middle term :
P(x) × Q(x) = [HCF of P(x) and Q(x)]
Ex.9 Factorize : x2 + 4 2 x + 6 × [LCM of P(x) and Q (x)]
Sol. x2 + 4 2 x + 6 Ex.12 If p(x) = (x + 2)(x2 – 4x–21), Q(x) = (x– 7) (2x2 + x – 6)

= x2 + 3 2 x + 2 x+6 find the HCF and LCM of P(x) and Q(x).
Sol. P(x) = (x + 2) (x2 – 4x – 21)
= x(x + 3 2 ) + 2 (x + 3 2 ) = (x + 2) (x2 – 7x + 3x – 21)
= (x + 2) (x – 7) (x + 3)
= (x + 3 2 )(x + 2 ) Q(x) = (x – 7) (2x2 + x – 6)
= (x – 7)(2x2 + 4x – 3x – 6)
(f) Factorization of a algebraic expression as the sum
= (x – 7) [2x (x + 2) – 3 (x + 2)]
or difference of two cubes : = (x – 7) (2x – 3) (x + 2)
HCF = (x + 2)(x– 7)
Ex.10 Factorize : 16a3b–250b4. LCM = (x + 3)(x – 7) (2x – 3) (x + 2).
Sol. 16a3b–250b 4=2b(8a3–125b 3) Ex.13 If HCF & LCM of P(x) and Q(x) are (x + 2) and (x + 3)
= 3
2b{(2a) –(5b) } 3 (x2 + 9x + 14) respectively if P(x) = x2 + 5x + 6, find Q(x).
Sol. P(x) = (x2 + 5x + 6) = (x + 2) (x + 3)
= 2b{(2a–5b)(4a2+25b 2+10ab)}
LCM = (x + 3) (x2 + 9x + 14) = (x + 3)(x + 7)(x + 2)
W e know that HCF LCM = P(x) Q(x)
(g) Factorization of a algebraic expression of the form
a3 + b3 + c3 – 3abc : ( x 2)( x 3)( x 7)( x 2)
Q(x) =
( x 2)( x 3)
Ex.11 Factorize :
= (x + 7) (x+2) = x2 + 9x + 14.
(i) 2 2a 3 8b 3 27c 3 18 2abc
(ii) (x – y)3 + (y – z)3 + (z –x)3
Sol. (i) 2 2a 3 8b 3 27c 3 18 2abc
3 The value of a polynomial f(x) at x = is obtained by

= 2a (2b)3 ( 3c )3 3( 2a )(2b)( 3c )
substituting x = in the given polynomial and is
= denoted by f( ).
2a 2b 3c
2 Consider the polynomial f(x) = x3 – 6x2 + 11x – 6,
2a 2b 2 3c 2
2a 2b 2b 3c 3c 2a
If we replace x by – 2 everywhere in f(x), we get
= 2a 2b 3c 2a 2 2 2 f(– 2) = (– 2)3 – 6(– 2)2 + 11(– 2) – 6
4b 9c 2 2ab 6bc 3 2ac
f(– 2) = – 8 – 24 – 22 – 6
(ii) (x – y)3 + (y – z)3 + (z –x)3
f(– 2) = – 60 0.
Let a =x – y, b = y–z and c = z–x
So, we can say that value of f(x) at x = – 2 is – 60.
So, (x – y)3 + (y – z)3 + (z –x)3 = a3 + b3 + c3
Now, a + b + c = x – y + y – z + z – x = 0
So, a3 + b3 + c3 = 3abc The real number is a root or zero of a polynomial
3 3 3
(x – y) + (y – z) + (z –x) = 3(x – y) (y – z)(z –x) f(x), if f( = 0.
Consider the polynomial f(x) = 2x3 + x2 – 7x – 6,

H.C.F. AND L.C.M. OF POLYNOMIALS If we replace x by 2 everywhere in f(x), we get
A polynomial D(x) is a divisor of the polynomial P(x) if it f(2) = 2(2)3 + (2)2 – 7(2) – 6
is a factor of P(x). W here Q(x) is another polynomial = 16 + 4 – 14 – 6 = 0
such that P(x) = D(x) × Q(x) Hence, x = 2 is a root of f(x).
HCF/GCD (Greatest Common Divisor) : A polynomial

h(x) is called the HCF or GCD of two or more given
polynomials, if h(x) is a polynomial of highest degree Let ‘p(x)’ be any polynomial of degree greater than or
dividing each of one of the given polynomials. equal to one and a be any real number and If p(x) is
divided by (x – a), then the remainder is equal to p(a)
PAGE # 2323
51
Ex.14 If x + 51 is divided by (x + 1) then find the remainder.
Sol. Let P(x)=x51 + 51

In algebraic or in set theoretic language the graph
W hen P(x) is divided by (x+1)
of a polynomial f(x) is the collection (or set) of all
Then remainder = P (–1)
points (x, y), where y = f(x). In geometrical or in
= (–1 )51 + 51 graphical language the graph of a polynomial f(x) is
= – 1 + 51 a smooth free hand curve passing through points
= 50 (x1, y1), (x 2, y2), (x 3, y3), ... etc, where y1, y2, y3, ... are
3 2 3 2
Ex.15 If the polynomial 2x + ax + 3x – 5 and x + x – 4x + a the values of the polynomial f(x) at x 1 , x 2 , x 3, ...
leave the same remainder when divided by x – 2, find respectively.
the value of a. In order to draw the graph of a polynomial f(x), follow
Sol. Let p(x) = 2x3 + ax2 + 3x – 5 and q(x) = x3 + x2 – 4x + a the following algorithm.
W hen divided by x – 2 leave same remainder there-
ALGORITHM :
fore p(a) = q(a)
Step (i) Find the values y1, y2, ...., yn, .... of polynomial
or p(2) = q(2)
f(x) on different points x1, x 2, ...., x n, .... and prepare
2(2)3 + a(2)2 + 3(2) – 5 = (2)3 + (2)2 – 4 × 2 + a
a table that gives values of y or f(x) for various values
16 + 4a + 6 – 5 = 8 + 4 – 8 + a
of x.
3a + 13 = 0
x: x1 x2 ... xn xn + 1 ...
y = f(x) : y1 = f(x1) y2 = f(x2) ... yn = f(xn) yn + 1 = f(xn + 1) ...
13
a= .
3
Step (ii) Plot that points (x1, y1), (x 2, y2), (x 3, y3), ...
FACTOR THEOREM (x n, y n), ... o n rec tang u lar c o -o rd in ate system .
In plotting these points use different scales on the
Let p(x) be a polynomial of degree greater than or equal
X and Y axes.
to 1 and ‘a’ be a real number such that p(a) = 0, then
(x – a) is a factor of p(x). Conversely, if (x – a) is a factor Step (iii) Draw a free hand smooth curve passing
of p(x), then p(a) = 0. through points plotted in step 2 to get the graph of
Ex.16 If x2 – 4 is a factor of 2x3 + ax2 + bx + 12, where a and the polynomial f(x).
b are constant. Then the values of a and b are :

Sol. x2 – 4 is a factor of 2x3 + ax2 + bx + 12
x2 – 4 is factor of given expression Consider a linear polynomial f(x)= ax + b, a 0.
2
Let x – 4 = 0 Graph of y = ax + b is a straight line. That is why
x=±2 f(x) = ax + b is called a linear polynomial. Since two
3 2
f (x) = 2x + ax + bx + 12 points determine a straight line, so only two points
f (2) = 0 need to plotted to draw the line y = ax + b. The line
16 + 4a + 2b + 12 = 0 represented by y = ax + b crosses the X-axis at
2a + b = – 14 ... (i) b
f (–2) = 0 exactly one point, namely ,0 .
a
– 16 + 4a – 2b + 12 = 0
Ex.17 Draw the graph of y = x – 4.
2a – b = 2 ... (ii)
Sol. y = x – 4
Solve eqn (i) & eqn (ii) (add them) y=x–4
2a + b = – 14
2a – b = 2 x 0 4 5
4a = – 12 y –4 0 1
a = – 3 and b = – 14 – 2a = – 14 + 6 = – 8.
(a, b) (– 3, – 8)
PAGE # 2424
Conversely, if the parabola y = ax2 + bx + c intersects
the X-axis at a point ( , 0), then ( , 0) satisfies the
equation y = ax2 + bx + c
2
a + b + c = 0 [ is a real root of ax2 + bx + c = 0]
Thus, the intersection of the parabola y = ax2 + bx + c
with X-axis gives all the real roots of ax2 + bx + c = 0.
Following conclusions may be drawn :
(i) If D > 0, the parabola will intersect the x-axis in two
distinct points and vice-versa.
–b– D
T he p arab ola meets x-axis at an d
2a
–b D
.
2a
Let a, b , c be real nu mb ers an d a 0. Th en
2
f(x) = ax + bx + c is known as a quadratic polynomial
in x. Graph of the quadratic polynomial i.e. the curve
whose equation is y = ax2 + bx + c, a 0. Graph of a
quadratic polynomial is always a parabola.
Let y = ax2 + bx + c, where a 0. (ii) If D = 0, the parabola will just touch the x-axis at
2 2
4ay = 4a x + 4abx + 4ac one point and vice-versa.
4ay = 4a2x2 + 4abx + b2 – b2 + 4ac

4ay = (2ax + b)2 – (b2 – 4ac)
4ay + (b2 – 4ac) = (2ax + b)2
4ay + (b2 – 4ac) = 4a2(x + b/2a)2
2
b 2 – 4ac b
4a y 4a 2 x
4a 2a
2
D b
y a x . ....(i)
4a 2a
(iii) If D < 0, the parabola will not intersect x-axis at all
where, D b2 – 4ac is the discriminant of the quadratic and vice-versa.
equation.
REMARKS :
b D
S hiftin g th e orig in at – ,– , w e h ave
2a 4a
b (–D)
X= x– – and Y = y – .
2a 4a
Substituting these values in (i), we obtain Y = aX2 ...(ii)
which is the standard equation of parabola.
Clearly, this is the equation of a parabola having its
b D
vertex at – ,– .
2a 4a REMARKS :
Th e parabo la o pens u pw ards o r do wn ward s x R, y > 0 only if a > 0 & D b² 4ac < 0
x R, y < 0 only if a < 0 & D b² 4ac < 0
according as a > 0 or a < 0.
Ex.18 Draw the graph of the polynomial f(x) = x2 – 2x – 8.
Sol. Let y = x2 – 2x – 8.
Let be a real root of ax 2 + bx + c = 0. Then, The following table gives the values of y or f(x) for
a 2 + b + c = 0. Point ( , 0) lies on y = ax2 + bx + c. various values of x.
Thus, every real root of ax2 + bx + c = 0 represents a
x –4 –3 –2 –1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
point of intersection of the parabola with the X-axis.
y = x2 – 2x – 8 16 7 0 –5 –8 –9 –8 –5 0 7 16
PAGE # 2525
L et u s p lo t the po in ts (– 4 ,1 6 ), (– 3, 7 ), (– 2 , 0), Ex.19 Draw the graphs of the polynomial f(x) = x 3 – 4x.
(–1, –5), (0, –8), (1, –9), (2, –8), (3, –5), (4, 0), (5, 7) Sol. Let y = f(x) or, y = x3 – 4x.
and (6, 16) on a graphs paper and draw a smooth The values of y for variable value of x are listed in
free hand curve passing through these points. The the following table :
x –3 –2 –1 0 1 2 3
curve thus obtained represents the graphs of the
3
y = x – 4x – 15 0 3 0 –3 0 15
polynomial f(x) = x2 – 2x – 8. This is called a parabola.
The lowest point P, called a minimum point, is the Thus, the curve y = x3 – 4x passes through the points
vertex of the parabola. Vertical line passing through (–3, –15), (–2, 0), (–1, 3), (0, 0), (1, –3), (2, 0), (3, 15),
P is called the axis of the parabola. Parabola is (4, 48) etc.
Plotting these points on a graph paper and drawing
symmetric about the axis. So, it is also called the
a free hand smooth curve through these points, we
line of symmetry.
obtain the graph of the given polynomial as shown
figure.
Observations :
From the graphs of the polynomial f(x) = x 2 – 2x – 8,
following observations can be drawn :
(i) The coefficient of x 2 in f(x) = x2 – 2x – 8 is 1
(a positive real number) and so the parabola opens
up ward s.
(ii) D = b 2 – 4ac = 4 + 32 = 36 > 0. So, the parabola Observations :
cuts X-axis at two distinct points.
From the graphs of the polynomial f(x) = x 3 – 4x,
(iii) On comparing the polynomial x2 – 2x – 8 with
ax2 + bx + c, we get a = 1, b = – 2 and c = – 8. The following observations are as follows :
vertex o f th e parabola has co ordinates (1 , – 9) (i) T h e p o lyn o m ial f (x) = x 3 – 4 x = x ( x 2 – 4 )
b D = x (x – 2) (x + 2) is factorisable into three distinct
i.e. , , where D b 2 – 4ac.
2a 4a linear factors. The curve y = f(x) also cuts X-axis at
(iv) The polynomial f(x) = x2 – 2x – 8 = (x – 4) (x + 2) three distinct points.
is fa c t o r iza b le in t o tw o d ist in c t lin e a r fa c t o r s (ii) W e have, f(x) = x (x – 2) (x + 2)
(x – 4) and (x + 2). So, the parabola cuts X-axis at
t w o d is tin c t p o in t s ( 4 , 0 ) a n d ( – 2 , 0 ) . T h e Therefore, 0, 2 and –2 are three zeros of f(x). The
x-coordinates of these points are zeros of f(x). c u r ve y = f (x) c u ts X - axis a t t h r ee p o in t s
O (0, 0), P (2, 0) and Q (–2, 0).
Graphs of a cubic polynomial does not have a fixed

st an d ard sh ap e . C ub ic p o lyn o m ial g ra p h s w ill Let and be the zeros of a quadratic polynomial
always cross X-axis at least once and at most thrice. f(x) = ax2 + bx + c. By factor theorem (x – ) and (x – )
are the factors of f(x).
f(x) = k (x – ) (x – ) are the factors of f(x)
ax2 + bx + c = k{x2 – ( + ) x + }
ax2 + bx + c = kx2 – k ( + ) x + k
PAGE # 2626
Comparing the coefficients of x2, x and constant terms
on both sides, we get
a = k, b = – k ( + ) and c = k
b c
+ =– and = Let , , b e th e zero s of a cub ic p olyn om ial
a a
Coefficien t of x f(x) = ax3 + bx2 + cx + d, a 0. Then, by factor theorem,
+ = –
Coefficien t of x 2 x– ,x– and x – are factors of f(x) . Also, f(x) being a
Constan t term cubic polynomial, cannot have more than three linear
and = 2
Coefficien t of x factors.
Hence,
f(x) = k(x – ) (x – ) (x – )
b Coefficien t of x
Sum of the zeros = – =– ax3 + bx2 + cx + d = k(x – ) (x – ) (x – )
a Coefficien t of x 2
ax3 + bx2 + cx+ d = k{x3 – ( + + ) x2 + ( + + )x– }
c Constan t term
Product of the zeros = = . ax3 + bx2 + cx+ d =k x3 –k ( + + ) x2 +k ( + + )x– k
Comparing the coefficients of x3, x2, x and constant
REMARKS :
terms on both sides, we get
If and are the zeros of a quadratic polynomial f(x).
Then, the polynomial f(x) is given by a = k, b = – k ( + + ), c = k ( + + ) and d = – k ( )
f(x) = k{x2 – ( + ) x + }
or, f(x) = k{x2 – (Sum of the zeros) x + Product of the b
+ + =–
zeros} a
Ex.20 F in d th e zero s o f q u adratic p o lyno m ial c
+ + =
p(x) = 4x2 + 24x + 36 and verify the relationship between a
the zeros and their coefficients. d
Sol. p (x) = 4x2 + 24x + 36, And, =–
a
Here a = 4, b = 24, c = 36
p(x) = 4x2 + 12x + 12x + 36 b Coefficien t of x 2
= 4x (x + 3) + 12 (x + 3) Sum of the zeros = – =–
= (x + 3) (4x + 12)
= 4 (x + 3)2 Sum of the products of the zeros taken two at a
So, the zeros of quadratic polynomial is – 3 and – 3. c Coefficien t of x
Let = – 3 and = – 3 time = =
Sum of zeros = + a Coefficien t of x 3
=–3–3 =–6 d Constant term
Product of the zeros = – =–
coefficien t of x a Coefficien t of x 3
Also, sum of zeros = –
coefficien t of x 2 REMARKS :
b –24
= – = =–6 Cubic polynomial having , and as its zeros is
a 4
given by
coefficien t of x
So, sum of zeros = + = – f(x) = k (x – ) (x – ) (x – )
coefficien t of x 2
product of zeros = = (– 3) (– 3) = 9 f(x) = k{x3 – ( + + ) x2 + ( + + )x– },
cons tan t term where k is any non-zero real number.

Also, product of zeros = 2 1 3
coefficien t of x Ex.22 Verify that 5, , are zeros of cubic polynomial
c 36 2 4
= = =9 8x3 + 30x2 – 47x + 15. Also verify the relationship
a 4
cons tan t term between the zeros and the coefficients.
So, product of zeros = = . Sol. Given : f (x) = 8x3 + 30x2 – 47x + 15
coefficien t of x 2
Here, a = 8, b = 30, c = – 47, d = 15
Ex.21 F ind a qu adratic polynomial w hose zeros are
f (– 5) = 8 (– 5)3 + 30 (– 5)2 – 47 (– 5) + 15
3 5 and 3 5. = – 1000 + 750 + 235 + 15 = 0
3 2
Sol. Given : = 3 + 5 and = 3 – 5 1 1 1 1
f( )= 8 30 – 47 15
Sum of zeros = + 2 2 2 2
=3+ 5 +3– 5=6
1 1 47
Products of zeros = = 8 30 – 15
8 4 2
= (3 + 5 ) (3 – 5 )
=9–5=4 8 60 – 188 120
So, quadratic polynomial isk {x2 – 6x + 4}, where k is = =0
8
any constant.
PAGE # 2727
3 2 Ex.23 , , are zeros of cubic polynomial x3 – 12x2 + 44x + c.
3 3 3 3
and f ( ) = 8 30 – 47 15 If , , are in A.P., find the value of c.
4 4 4 4 Sol. f (x) = x3 – 12x2 + 44x + c.
27 9 141 , , are in A.P.
= 8 30 – 15 Let = a – d, = a, = a + d
64 16 4
Sum of zeros = + +
27 135 141 =a–d+a+a+d
= – 15
8 8 4 = 3a
27 135 – 282 120 So, 3a = – (– 12)
= =0 a = 4.
8
Sum of product of zeros taken two at a time
1 3 + + = 44
So, – 5, and are the zeros of the polynomial f (x).
2 4 (a – d) a + (a) (a + d) + (a + d) (a – d) = 44
1 3 a2 – ad + a2 + ad + a2 – d2 = 44
Let, = – 5, = and = 3a2 – d2 = 44
2 4
3 (4)2 – d2 = 44 d2 = 4
Sum of zeros = + +
d=±2
1 3 –15 product of zeros = =–c
= –5 =
2 4 4 (a – d) a (a + d) = – c
(4 – 2) (4) (4 + 2) = – c
coefficien t of x 2 (2) (4) (6) = – c
Also, sum of zeros = –
coefficien t of x 3 c = – 48.
b – 30 –15
= – = =
a 8 4
So, sum of zeros = + +
coefficient of x 2 1 x4 1
= – 1. If x + = 5, the value of is :
coefficient of x 3 x x2
Sum of product of zeros taken two at a time (A) 21 (B) 23
= + + (C) 25 (D) 30
1 1 3 3 2. W hich two of the following can be factorised with
= (– 5) ( ) + ( ) ( ) + ( ) (– 5)
2 2 4 4 integral coefficients ?
I x4 + x2 + 1
–5 3 15 II x4 + 2x + 2
= –
2 8 4 III x4 – 2x2 + 1
IV x4 = x + 1
–20 3 – 30 – 47 (A) I and II (B) I and IV
= =
8 8 (C) II and III (D) I and III
Also, sum of product of zeros taken two at a time 3. A factor of x3– 6x2 – 6x + 1, is :
coefficien t of x c – 47 (A) x + 1 (B) x – I
= = =
coefficien t of x 3
a 8 (C) x – 2 (D) 2x + 1
So, sum of product of zeros taken two at a time 4. Let x = (2 00 8) 1004 + (2 00 8) –1004 an d
1004 –1004
y = (2008) – (2008) then the value of (x2 – y2) is
coefficien t of x
= + + = equal to :
coefficien t of x 3
(A) 4 (B) – 4
Product of zeros = (C) 0 (D) None
1 3 15 5. The sum of all real x such that (2x – 4)3 + (4x – 2)3 = (4x + 2x – 6)3
= (– 5) ( )( )= –
2 4 8 is :
cons tan t term 5
Also, product of zeros = – (A) 0 (B)
coefficien t of x 3 2
7
d 15 (C) (D) 4
= – = – . 2
a 8
So, product of zeros = 1 1
6. If x2 + 2 = 62, then the value of x4 + is :
cons tan t term x x4
= – (A) 84 – 28 – 2 (B) 84 + 2
coefficien t of x 3
(C) 84 – 28 + 2 (D) 84 + 28 – 2
PAGE # 2828
16. Th e valu e of k for which x + k is a factor o f
a2 b2 c2 x3 + kx2 – 2x + k + 4 is :
7. If a + b + c = 0 then value of is : (A) – 5 (B) 2
bc ca ab
4 6
(A) 1 (B) – 1 (C) – (D)
3 7
(C) 0 (D) 3
17. F(x) is a polynomial in x. W hen F(x) is divided by (x – 2),
8. If x + y = – 4, then the value of x3 + y3 – 12xy + 64 will be the remainder obtained is 3, when the same polyno-
(A) 0 (B) 128 mial is divided by (x – 3), the remainder obtained is 2.
W hat is the remainder when F(x) is divided by (x – 3) (x
(C) 64 (D) – 64
– 2)
a2 – 5ab a2 – b2 5
9. The value of 2 2 2 is : (A) – x + 5 (B) – x+7
a – 6ab 5b a ab 3
(C) 0 (D) 5
a 18. Determine the value of a for which the polynomial 2x4–
(A) – 1 (B) ax3 + 4x2 + 2x + 1 is divisible by 1 – 2x.
b
(A) 25 (B) 26
1 (C) 28 (D) 30
(C) (D) 1
a
(a – b)2 (b – c )2 (c – a)2
10. Evaluate : .
(b – c )(c – a ) (a – b )(c – a ) (a – b)(b – c ) 19. If one zero of 2x2 – 3x + k is reciprocal to the other,
(A) 0 (B) 1 then the value of k is :
(C) 2 (D) 3 2
(A) 2 (B)
a b 3
11. If (a2 + b2)3 = (a3 + b3)2 then + = 3
b a (C) (D) – 3
2 3 2
(A) (B)
3 2 20. If an d ar e th e zer o es o f x2 – 4 x + 1 , t h en
5 6
(C) (D) 1 1
6 5 is :
3 3
x y
12. = (A) 3 (B) 5
x 3y 1
( xy ) 2
y 3x 1
(C) – 5 (D) – 3
(A) x + y (B) y – x
21. The equation x2 + Bx + C = 0 has 5 as the sum of its
1 1 1 1
(C) – (D) + roots, and 15 as the sum of the square of its roots. The
x y x y value of ‘C’ is :
(A) 5 (B) 7.5
2
a– b 4 ab 5 (C) 10 (D) 12.5
13. If = , then the value of a : b is :
a–b 3 22. If , are the zero’s of polynomial
(A) 1 : 16 (B) 1 : 4 f(x) = x2 – p(x + 1) – c then ( + 1)( + 1) is equal :
(C) 4 : 1 (D) 16 : 1 (A) c – 1 (B) 1 – c
(C) c (D) 1 + c
23. If the sum of the zeros of the quadratic polynomial

f(t) = kt2 + 2t + 3k is equal to their product, then the value
14. If the polynomial P(x) = 2x4 + x3 – 5x2 – x + 1 is divided by
of k is :
the polynomial Q(x) = x2 – x then the remainder is a
linear polynomial R(x) = ax + b. Then (a + b) equals : 3 3
(A) – (B)
(A) – 2 (B) –1 2 2
(C) 1 (D) 2 2
(C) – (D) none of these
15. The polynomial P(x) = x4 + 4x3 + 5x + 8 is :
3
(A) divisible by (x + 2) but not divisible by (x + 1) 24. If , are the zeroes of x2 – 6x + k = 0. W hat is the
(B) divisible by (x + 1) as well as (x + 2) value of k if 3 + 2 = 20.
(C) divisible by (x + 1) but not divisible by (x + 2)
(D) neither divisible by (x + 1) not by (x + 2) (A) –16 (B) 8
(C) – 2 (D) – 8
PAGE # 2929
25. , , are zeros of cubic polynomial x3 – 12x2 + 44x + c. 33. The graph of y = ax2 + bx + c y
If , , are in A.P., find the value of c. is given in figure then identify
x' x
the signs of a, b and c :
(A) – 48 (B) 48 (A) a < 0, b > 0, c < 0 A
(B) a < 0, b < 0, c > 0
(C) –24 (D) 24
(C) a < 0, b > 0, c > 0
26. If , are zeros of quadratic polynomial kx2 + 4x + 4, (D) a < 0, b < 0, c < 0 y'
find the value of k such that ( + )2 – 2 = 24. 2
34. Minimum value for the polynomial 4x – 6x + 1 is :
2
(A) – 1 (B) 3 5
3 (A) – (B) –
(C) both(A)and(B) (D) None of these 4 4
5
(C) – (D) –
10 2 10 2 16
27. If x = and y = , then the value of
2 2
log2(x2 + xy + y2) is :
(A) 1 (B) 2
(C) 3 (D) 4
1. H.C.F. and L.C.M. of expressions (x3 – 1) and A are
28. Two non zero real numbers, a and b, satisfy ab = a – b.
(x – 1) and (x6 – 1) respectively. Then the value of A is :
a b [Raj. NTSE Stage -1 2005]
A possible value of the expression + – ab, is : (A) x3 + 1 (B) x4 – x3 + x – 1
b a
2
(C) (x – 1) (x – x + 1) (D) (x – 1)(x2 + x +1)
1
(A) 2 (B) 2. H.C.F. of x2 + 5x + 6 and x3 + 27 is :
2 [Raj. NTSE Stage-1 2006]
1 (A) x + 2 (B) x – 2
(C) – 2 (D) – (C) x – 3 (D) x + 3
2
29. If a + 1 = b + 2 = c + 3 = d + 4 = a + b + c + d + 5, then x –1 x 5
3. The value of x in the equation = is:
(a + b + c + d) is equal to : x 1 2x 5
(A) – 5 (B) – 10/3 [Raj. NTSE Stage-1 2007]
(C) – 7/3 (D) 5/3 (A) – 1 (B) – 5
4 (C) 1 (D) 5
4
30. If x = 2 2 , then x + 4 is :
x 4. One of the factors of the expression
(A) 2(3 – 2 ) (B) 6 2 – 2 (2x – 3y)2 – 7 (2x – 3y) – 30 is :
(C) 6 – 2 (D) 12 [Raj. NTSE Stage-1 2007]
(A) 2x – 3y – 10 (B) 2x – 3y + 10
31. Given a number of the form a + b 2 , where a, b are (C) 3x – 2y + 5 (D) 6x – 4y – 15
rational numbers with a or b 0, there exists a
5. L.C.M. of x3 + x2 + x + 1 and x3 – x2 + x – 1 is :
number p + q 2 , with p, q rational number, such that [Raj. NTSE Stage-1 2007]
2 2
(A) x4 + 1 (B) x4 – 1
(a + b 2 )(p + q 2 ) = 1. The value of (p – 2q ), is : (C) x2 + 1 (D) x2 – 1
a2 2b2 a2 2b 2
(A) (B) 6. If a2 + 2b = 7, b2 + 4c = – 7 and c2 + 6a = – 14, then the
(a2 4b2 )2 a2 2b 2 value of (a2 + b2 + c2) is : [IJSO-2009]
(A) 14 (B) 25
1 1 (C) 36 (D) 47
(C) 2 2 (D) 2
a 2b a 4b2
x y 10
32. Two non negative real numbers ‘x’ and ‘y’ are such that 7. If y + = and x + y = 10, then the value of xy will
x 3
2x + y = 5. The sum of the maximum and minimum
values of (x + y) is : be : [NSTSE 2010]
(A) 2 (B) 5 (A) 16 (B) 9
(C) 8 (D) 7.5 (C) 2 (D) 10
PAGE # 3030
18. If (x + a)2 + (y + b)2 = 4 (ax + by), where x, a, y, b are real,
1 1
8. If x + = 3, then the value of x6 + 6 is : the value of xy – ab is :
x x
[West Bengal NTSE Stage-1 2014]
[Raj. NTSE Stage-1 2013]
(A) a (B) 0
(A) 927 (B) 114
(C) b (D) None of these
(C) 364 (D) 322
19. The graph of y = p(x) is given below. The number of
9. If the zero of the polynomial f(x) = k2x2 – 17x + k + 2(k > zeroes of polynomial p(x), is
0) are reciprocal of each other, then the value of k is : [Raj. NTSE Stage-1 2015]
[Delhi NTSE Stage-1 2013] Y
(A) 2 (B) – 1
(C) – 2 (D) 1
10. If (a – 5)2 + (b – c)2 + (c– d)2 + (b + c + d – 9)2 = 0, then the
value of (a + b + c) (b + c + d) is :
X' X
(A) 0 (B) 11
(C) 33 (D) 99
Y'
(A) 3 (B) 2
11. A cubic polynomial p(x) is such that p(1)=1, p(2)=2,
(C) 1 (D) 0
p(3)= 3 and p(4) = 5, then the value of p(6) is :
[Harayana NTSE Stage-1 2013] 20. If the zeros of the polynomial 64x3 – 144 x2 + 92x – 15
(A) 16 (B) 13 are in AP, then the difference between the largest and
(C) 10 (D) 7 the smallest zeroes of the polynomial is
12. If x + y + z = 1, then 1-3x2 -3y2-3z2 + 2x3 + 2y3 +2z3 is equal
7
to : [Harayana NTSE Stage-1 2013] (A) 1 (B)
(A) 6xyz (B) 3xyz 8
(C) 2xyz (D) xyz 3 1
(C) (D) 4
13. The sum of real values of y satisfying the equations 4 2
x2 +x2y2 + x2y4 = 525 and x + xy + xy2 = 35 is :
21. The number of integral solution of the equation
(A) 15 (B) 10 1 2 1
(C) 5/2 (D) 3/2 7 y – 2 y =9
y y2
14. If a, b, c and d are natural numbers such that a5 = b6,
c3 = d4, and d–a = 61, then the smallest value of c–b is :
(A) 0 (B) 1
(C) 2 (D) 3
(A) 61 (B) 122
(C) 239 (D) 593
22. The square root of xb2 xb2 2abx a2 b2 is
15. If x, y, z are positive real numbers and a, b, c are [Rajasthan NTSE Stage-1 2016]
rational numbers, then the value of
a b
(A) x 2 a b (B)
1 1 x 2
+ +
1 x b– a x c –a 1 x a–b x c –b a b
2
(C) 2 (D) Xa + b
1 x
is [Raj. NTSE Stage-1 2014] 23. If a + b + c = 0, then the value of
1 x b– c x a–c
(A) – 1 (B) 0 a b 2
b c2 c a2
(C) 1 (D) None of these is
ab bc ca
16. If x2 – x – 1 = 0 , then the value of x3 – 2x +1 is - [Rajasthan NTSE Stage-1 2016]
[Harayana NTSE Stage-1 2014] (A) 1 (B) 2
(A) 0 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) – 3
1 5 1– 5 24. If and are the three zeroes of the polynomial
(C) (D) p(x) = x3 – 64x – 14, what is the value of 3 3
+ 3?
2 2
17. If x% of y is equal to 1% of z, y% of z is equal to 1% of x
(A) 36 (B) 40
and z% of x is equal to 1% of y, then the value of
(C) 42 (D) 64
xy + yz + zx is - [Harayana NTSE Stage-1 2014]
(A) 1 (B) 2 25. W hat is the remainder when the polynomial
(C) 3 (D) 4 p(x) = x200 – 2x199 + x50 – 2x49 + x2 + x + 1 is divided by
(x – 1) (x – 2) ? [Haryana NTSE Stage-1 2016]
(A) 1 (B) 7
(C) 2x + 1 (D) 6x – 5
PAGE # 3131
x 31. If x = cy + bz, y = cx + az, z = bx + ay, the value of
26. If |x – y| = 1 and
y = xy, then the number of different a2 + b2 + c2 – 1 is [West Bengal NTSE Stage-1 2016]
p airs (x, y), w hich satisfy b oth th e eq uation s (A) abc (B) – abc
simultaneously is : [Haryana NTSE Stage-1 2016] (C) 2abc (D) – 2abc
(A) 2 (B) 3
(C) 4 (D) 5 32. The cube root of x+y+3x1/3y1/3 (x1/3 + y1/3) is
27. One of the factors of 81a4 + (x – 2a) (x – 5a) (x – 8a) [Raj. NTSE Stage-1 2017]
(x – 11a) is : [Haryana NTSE Stage-1 2016]
(A) x + y (B) x1/3+y1/3
(A) x2 –13ax + 31a2 (B) x2 +13ax + 31a2
2
(C) x +18ax – 31a 2
(D) x2 –18ax + 31a2 (C) (x + y)1/3 (D) (x + y)3
1 1
28. If f 2 x = x2 + + 1(x 0), the value of f(x) is 33. If (x + 2
2 ) is a factor of kx – 2 x + 1 , then the
x 4x 2
[West Bengal NTSE Stage-1 2016] value of k is : [Raj. NTSE Stage-1 2017]
1 1
2 3 2
2x (A) – (B) –
(A) 4x2 (B) 2 3
4 x
3 2
2 (C) (D)
1 2 1 2 3
(C) x (D) 4 2x
4 x
29. The least value of 2x2 – 4x + 3y2 – 18y + 31 is 34. If a = x – y, b = y – z and c = z – x then the value of
a3 + b3 + c3 is [Raj. NTSE Stage-1 2017]
(A) 3 (B) – 1
(C) 0 (D) 2 (A) 3(x – y) (y – z) (z – x)
(B) (x – y)3 (y –z)3 (z –x)3

30. If 2r = h r2 h2 , the value of r : h is (r, h 0)
(C) (x + y + z)3
(A) 4 : 3 (B) 3 : 4 (D) x3 + y3 + z3
(C) 1 : 2 (D) 2 : 1
PAGE # 3232
Ex.2 Solve for x and y : 10x + 3y = 75, 6x – 5y = 11.

An equation of the form Ax + By + C = 0 is called a linear
Sol. The given equations are
equation. 10x + 3y = 75 ..(i)
W here A is called coefficient of x, B is called coefficient 6x – 5y = 11 ..(ii)
of y and C is the constant term (free from x & y) Multiplying (i) by 5 and (ii) by 3, we get :
A, B, C, R[ belongs to, R Real No.] 50x + 15y = 375 ..(iii)
But A and B can not be simultaneously zero. 18x – 15y = 33 ..(iv)
fA 0, B = 0 equation will be of the form Ax + C = 0. Adding (iii) and (iv), we get
[Line || to Y-axis] 408
68x = 408 x= x=6
f A = 0, B 0 , equation will be of the form By + C = 0. 68
[Line || to X-axis] Putting x = 6 in (i), we get :
f A 0 , B 0 , C = 0 equation will be of the form A x + By = 0. (10 6) + 3y = 75 60 + 3y = 75
[Line passing through origin] 3y = (75 – 60)
f A 0 , B 0 , C 0 equation will be of the form A x + By + C = 0. 3y = 15 y=5
t is called a linear equation in two variable because x = 6, y = 5.
the two unknowns (x & y) occurs only in the first power, Ex.3 Solve for x and y :
and the product of two unknown quantities does not ax + by – a + b = 0, bx – ay – a – b = 0
occur. Sol. The given equation may be written as
ax + by = a – b ...(i)
Since it involves two variables therefore a single bx – ay = a + b ... (ii)
equ atio n will h ave in finite set o f so lu tion i.e. Multiplying (i) by a and (ii) by b, we get
indeterminate solution. So we require a pair of equation a2x + aby = a2 – ab ... (iii)
i.e. simultaneous equations. b2x – aby = ab + b2 ...(iv)
Adding (iii) and (iv) , we get
Standard form of linear equation :
(Standard form refers to all positive coefficients) (a2 b2 )
(a2 + b2) x = (a2 + b2) x=
a1x + b1y + c1 = 0 ....(i) (a2 b2 )
a2x + b2y + c2 = 0 ....(ii) x=1
Putting x = 1 in (i) we get
For solving such equations we have three methods.
(a 1) + by = a – b a + by = a – b
(a) Elimination by substitution
by = a – b – a
(b) Elimination by equating the coefficients by = – b
(c) Elimination by cross multiplication.
b
y= =–1
b
Ex.1 Solve for x and y : y=–1
2x + y = 7, 4x – 3y + 1 = 0 x = 1 and y = – 1 is the required solution
Sol. The given system of equations is Ex.4 Solve for x and y :
2x + y = 7 ....(i)
15 22 40 55
4x – 3y = – 1 ....(ii) + = 5, + = 13, x y and x –y
x y x y x y x y
From (i), we get : y = (7 – 2x)
substituting y = (7 –2x) in (ii) , we get :
1 1
4x – 3 (7 – 2x) = – 1 Sol. Putting = u and = v, the given equation
x y x y
4x – 21 + 6x = – 1
10x = 20 become
15u + 22v = 5 ..(i)
x=2
40u + 55v = 13 ` ..(ii)
Substituting x = 2 in (i), we get
Multiplying (i) by 5 and (ii) by 2, we get
2 2+ y= 7 y = (7 – 4) = 3 75u + 110v = 25 ..(iii)
Hence, the solution is x = 2, y = 3. 80u + 110v = 26 ..(iv)
PAGE # 3333
On subtracting (iii) from (iv), we get x y 1
1 = =
5u = 1 u= ( 18 34 ) ( 51 12) ( 4 9)
5 x y 1
1 = =
Putting u = in (iii), we get 52 39 13
5
15 + 110v = 25 110v = 10 52 39
x= =4,y= =3
13 13
1
v= Hence, x = 4 and y = 3 is the required solution.
11
1 1 1 1
= and =
x y 5 x y 11
1 1 Two lines a1x + b1y + c1 = 0 and a2x + b2y + c2 = 0, if the

u and v denominator a1b2 – a2 b1 0 then the given system of
5 11 equations have unique solution (i.e. only one solution)
and solutions are said to be consistent.
x – y = 5 and x + y = 11
a1 b1
2x = 16 and 2y = 6 a1b2 – a2 b1 0
a2 b2
x = 8 and y = 3
x = 8 and y = 3 is the required solution.
Two lines a1x + b1y + c1 = 0 and a2x + b2y + c2 = 0, if the
Elimination by Cross Multiplication : denominator a1b2 – a2 b1 = 0 then the given system of
a1x + b1y + c1 = 0 equations have no solution and solutions are said to
be inconsistent.
a1 b1
a2x + b2y + c2= 0 a1 b1 c1
a2 b2 i.e. =
a2 b2 c2
b1 c1 a1 b1
b2 c2 a2 b2 Two lines a1x + b1y + c1 = 0 and a2x + b2y + c2 = 0,

[W rite the coefficient in this manner] a1 b1 c1
if = = then system of equations has many
a2 b2 c2
x y 1 solution and solutions are said to be consistent.
= =
b1c 2 – b 2 c 1 a 2 c 1 – a1c 2 a1b 2 – a 2 b1 Ex.6 Find the value of 'p' does the pair of equations given
below has unique solution?
x 1
= 4x + py + 8 = 0 & 2x + 2y + 2 = 0
b1c 2 – b 2 c 1 a1b 2 – a 2 b1 Sol. 4x + py + 8 = 0
2x + 2y + 2 = 0
b1c 2 – b2 c1
x= Here a1 = 4, b1 = p, c1 = 8
a1b2 – a 2 b1 a2 = 2, b2 = 2, c2 = 2
For unique solution
1
Also = a1 b1
a1b2 – a 2 b1
y
a2 b2
a 2 c1 – a1c 2
a 2 c1 – a1c 2 4 p
y=
a1b2 – a 2 b1 2 2
p 4.
Ex.5 So lve th e system o f eq uation s 2x + 3 y = 17 ,
3x – 2y = 6 by the method of cross multiplication. Ex 7.If the system of the given equation has no solution
then find the value of k.
Sol. The given equations may be written as
2x + ky = 7, 2kx + 3ky = 20
2x + 3y – 17 = 0 ..(i) Sol. 2x + ky = 7
3x – 2y – 6 = 0 ..(ii) 2kx + 3ky = 20
By cross multiplication, we have For no solution
x y 1
a1 b1 c1
3 17 2 3 a2 = b2 c2
2 6 3 2
2 k 7
x y
= 2k 3k 20
{3 ( 6) ( 2) ( 17)} {( 17) 3 ( 6) 2}
1 2 k 2 7
= = and
{2 ( 2) 3 3} 2k 3k 2k 20
20
k =3 and k
7
So, the value of k is 3.
PAGE # 3434
Ex.8 Find the values of p and q for which the following (iii) x = 0
system of equations has infinite number of solution :
2x + 3y = 7
(p + q)x + (2p – q)y = 3(p + q + 1)
Sol. 2x + 3y = 7
(p + q)x + (2p – q)y = 3(p + q + 1)
For infinitely many solution
a1 b1 c1
= =
a2 b 2 c 2
Graphs of the type (ii) ay = b.
2 3 7
= =
p q 2p – q 3(p q 1) Ex.10 Draw the graph of following :
2 3 (i) y = 0 (ii) y – 2 = 0 (iii) 2y + 4 = 0

=
p q 2p – q Sol. (i) y = 0
4p – 2q = 3p + 3q 4p – 3p = 5q
p = 5q ... (i)
3 7
and =
2p – q 3(p q 1)
Put p = 5q
3 7
= (ii) y – 2 = 0
10q – q 3(5q q 1)
3 7
=
9q 18q 3
21q = 18q + 3 3q = 3
q = 1.
p = 5 × 1 = 5.
(iii) 2y + 4 = 0 y=–2
Graphs of the type (i) ax = b

Ex.9 Draw the graph of following :
(i) x = 2 (ii) x + 4 = 0 (iii) x = 0
Sol. (i) x = 2
Graphs of the type (iii) ax + by = 0
(Passing through origin)
Ex.11 Draw the graph of following :

(ii) x + 4 = 0 x= –4
(i) x = y (ii) x = – y
Sol. (i) x = y
x 1 4 –3 0
y 1 4 –3 0
PAGE # 3535
(ii) x = –y
x 1 –2 0
Let equations of two lines are a1x + b1y + c1 = 0 and
y –1 2 0 a2x + b2y + c2 = 0.
(i) Lines are consistent (unique solution) i.e. they meet
a1 b1
at one point and condition is
a2 b2
(ii) Lines are inconsistent (no solution) i.e. they do not

a1 b c1
meet at one point and condition is = 1
a2 b2 c2
Graphs of the Type (iv) ax + by + c = 0.
(Making Interception x-axis , y-axis)
Ex.12 So lve th e following system o f linear equ ation
graphically : 4x – 3y + 4 = 0, 4x + 3y – 20 = 0.
Shade the Area bounded by the above two equation
and the x – axis, also find its area.
Sol. 4x – 3y + 4 = 0 ...... (i)
4x + 3y – 20 = 0 ...... (ii)
In (i) 4x + 4 = 3y
4x 4 x 2 1 4
y= =
3 y 4 0 4
In (ii) 3y = 20 × 4x
(iii) Lines are co in cident (infinite solution)
20 4x x 2 5 8 i.e. overlapping lines (or they are on one another) and
y= =
3 y 4 0 4 a1 b1 c1
condition is = = .
Drawing the equations, we get : a 2 b2 c 2
Ex.13 Show graphically that the system of equations

2x + 4y = 10 and 3x + 6y = 12 has no solution.
Sol. Graph of 2x + 4y = 10
Since two lines are meeting at (2,4) their solution is
W e have,
x = 2, y = 4
2x + 4y = 10
1 1
Area = BC × h = 6 4 5 x
2 2 4y = 10 – 2x y=
= 12 sq.unit 2
So the solution of equation is x = 2 and y = 4 and the
5 1
area between the two lines and x-axis is 12 sq. unit W hen x = 1, we have : y = =2
2
PAGE # 3636
Type of Problems :
5 3
W hen x = 3, we have y = =1
2 (i) Determ in in g two n um bers w hen the relatio n
Thus, we have the following table : between them is given.
(ii) Problems regarding fractions, digits of a number,
x 1 3 ages of persons.
y 2 1 (iii) Problems regarding current of a river, regarding

time & distance.
Plot the points A (1,2) and B (3,1) on a graph paper.
(iv) Problems regarding mensuration and geometry.
Join A and B and extend it on both sides to obtain the
graph of 2x + 4y = 10 as shown in figure. (v) Problems regarding time & work.
Graph of 3x + 6y = 12
(vi) Problems regarding mixtures, cost of articles, profit
W e have,
& loss, discount etc.
4 x
3x + 6y = 12 6y = 12 – 3x y= Ex.14 3 bags and 4 pens together cost Rs.257, where as 4
2 bags and 3 pens cost Rs. 324, find the cost of a bag.
4 2 Sol.Let cost of a bag & a pen be x & y respectively
W hen x = 2, we have : y = =1 3x + 4y = 257 ...(i)
2
4x + 3y = 324 ...(ii)
4 0
W hen x = 0, we have : y = =2 Add (i) &(ii)
2 7x + 7y = 581
Thus, we have the following table :
or x + y = 83 ...(iii)
Subtract (i) from (ii)
x 2 0 x – y = 67 ...(iv)
Add (iii) & (iv)
y 1 2 2x = 150
x = Rs.75
Plot the point C (2,1) and D (0,2) on the same graph
y = Rs.8
paper. Join C and D and extend it on both sides to
Hence the cost of 1 bag is Rs.75.
obtain the graph of 3x + 6y = 12 as shown in figure.
Ex15. The sum of numerator and denominator of a fraction
is 8. If 3 is added to both the numerator and denomi-
3
nator the fraction becomes , find the fraction.
4
Sol. Let numerator be x and denominator be y. So, the
x
fraction is
y.
x+y=8 .... (i)
x 3 3
and
y 3 4
4x + 12 = 3y + 9
4x – 3y = – 3 .... (ii)
Solving equation (i) and (ii)
x = 3 and y = 5
3
so, the fraction is .
5
W e find the lines represented by given equations are Ex16. Seven times a positive two digit number is equal to
parallel. So, the two lines have no common point. four times the number obtained by reversing the
Hence, the given system of equations has no solution. digits. If the difference between the digits is 3. Find the
number.
Sol. Let the unit digit and ten’s of two digit number be y, x
respectively
For solving daily – life problems with the help of the two digit positive number is 10x + y.
simultaneo us linear equation in tw o variab les or Reversed two digit number = 10 y + x
equations reducible to them proceed as :- 7(10x + y) = 4(10y + x)
(i) Represent the unknown quantities by some variable 66x – 33y = 0
x and y, which are to be determined. y = 2x ...(i)
And y – x = 3
(ii) Find the conditions given in the problem and 2x – x = 3 from (i)
translate the verbal co nd itio ns into a pair o f x=3
simultaneous linear equation. And y = 6
(iii) Solve these equations & obtain the required the two digit positive number = 10x + y
quantities with appropriate units. = 10 × 3 + 6
= 30 + 6 = 36.
PAGE # 3737
Ex.17A man walks a certain distance with certain speed. If 3. Real numbers a and b satisfy the equations 3a = 81b + 2
he walks 1/2 km an hour faster, he takes 1 hour less. and 125b = 5a – 3. The value of ab, is :
But if he walks 1 km an hour slower, he takes 3 more (A) 17 (B) 9
hours. Find the distance covered by man and his (C) 12 (D) 60
original rate of walking.
4. If 29x + 37y = 103, 37x + 29y = 95, then :
Sol. Let the speed man = x km/hr
(A) x = 1, y = 2 (B) x = 2, y = 1
and Time taken = y hr
(C) x = 2, y = 3 (D) x = 3, y = 2
1
x (y – 1) = xy 25 3 40 2
2 5. On solving – = 1, + = 5 we
x y x–y x y x–y
1 1 get :
xy – x + y– = xy (A) x = 8 , y = 6 (B) x = 4, y = 6
2 2
(C) x = 6, y = 4 (D) None of these
1 1
–x+ y= 2x y x y
2 2 6. = 2, =4:
a b a b
or – 2x + y = 1 ....(i)
2 2
And (x – 1) (y + 3) = xy (A) , (B) 2a, –2b
xy + 3x – y – 3 = xy a b
3x – y = 3 ....(ii) a b
(C) –2a, 2b (D) ,
Solving equation (i) & (ii) 2 2
x = 4 and y = 9 7. If x = 2 an d x = 3 are ro ots of the equ atio n
So, total distance covered = xy km 3x2 – 2kx + 2m = 0 then (k, m) = :
= 4 × 9 = 36 km
and original rate of walking = 4 km/hr 15 15
(A) ( , 9) (B) (9, )
2 2
Ex.18 If 4x + 3y = 120, find how many positive integer
solutions are possible ? 9
Sol. W e can write the equation in another form. (C) ( , 15) (D) (15, 8)
2
4(x – 3) +3 (y + 4) = 120 8. The solution of the equations
Now, we make a table
3x y 1 2x y 2 3x 2y 1
x 30 27 24 21 18 15 12 9 6 3 0 = = given by :
3 5 6
y 0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 (A) x = 2, y = 1 (B) x = 1, y = 1
W e o b se rve a p at te rn t h a t x r ed u c es b y 3 & (C) x = –1, y = –1 (D) x = 1, y = 2
y increases by 4. But, both x & y cannot be negative
or 0. So, the value of x = 0 or y = 0 is ruled out. m n n m
9. The solution of the equations + = a, + =b
H en ce, nine su ch p ositive integ er so lu tion s are x y x y
p o s sib le. is given by :
Alternately, we can write the given equation as
4(x + 3) + 3(y – 4) = 120. We get the same values of x & y. n2 m2 m2 n2
(A) x = ,y=
am bn bm an
m2 n2 n2 m 2
(B) x = ,y=
am bn bm an
2 8
1. The real numbers x and y are such that x + = and m2 n2 m2 n2
y 3 (C) x = ,y=
am bn bm an
2
y+ = 3. The value of xy, is :
x n2 m 2 n2 m 2
(D) x = ,y=
am bn bm an
4 16
(A) (B) 10. In the graph, co-ordinates of the point P are :
3 9
(C) 2 (D) 4
2. If the system of equations px + qy = 8, 3x – qy= 38 has
the solution (x, y) = (2, – 4), then p is equal to :
(A) 20 (B) 8
(C) 40 (D) 21.5
(A) (4, 4) (B) (5, 3)

(C) (3, 2) (D) (2, 3)
PAGE # 3838
19. The digit in the ten’s place of a two-digit number is
three times that in the one’s place. If the digits are
11. Given 3x – 4y = 7 and x + cy = 13, for what value of “c”
reversed the new number will be 36 less than the
will the two equation not have a solution ? original number. Find the number.
3 4 (A) 64 (B) 52
(A) (B) (C) 62 (D) 42
4 3
20. The sum of the present ages of father and his son is
–4 60 years. 6 years ago, father’s age was five times the
(C) – 4 (D)
3 age of the son. After six years son’s age will be :
12. For what value of k, the system of equations kx + 2y = 2 (A) 20 years (B) 14 years
and 3x + y = 1 will be coincident ? (C) 12 years (D) 18 years
(A) 2 (B) 3 21. After covering a distance of 30 km with a uniform speed
(C) 5 (D) 6
there is some defect in a train engine and therefore, its
13. The equations 2x – 3y + 5 = 0 and 6y – 4x = 10, when speed is reduced to 4/5 of its original speed. Conse-
solved simultaneously , have : quently, the train reaches its destination late by 45 min-
(A) only one solution (B) no solution utes. Had it happened after covering 18 kilometers
(C) only two solutions
more, the train would have reached 9 minutes earlier.
(D) infinite number of solutions
Find the speed of the train and the distance of journey.
14. If 2a = b, the pair of equations ax + by = 2a 2 – 3b 2, (A) Speed = 40 km/hr, Distance = 160 km
x + 2y = 2a – 6b possess : (B) Speed = 20 km/hr, Distance = 100 km
(A) no solution (C) Speed = 30 km/hr, Distance = 120 km
(B) only one solution
(D) Speed = 35 km/hr, Distance = 140 km
(C) only two solutions
(D) an infinite number of solutions 22. A wizard having powers of mystic in conditions and
magical medicines seeing a cock, fight going on, spoke
15. Let a, b, c be the positive numbers. The following
system of equations in x, y and z. privately to both the owners of cocks. To one he said; if
your bird wins, than you give me your stake-money, but
x 2 y 2 z2 x 2 y2 z2
= 1; = 1; if you do not win, I shall give you two third of that’. Going
a2 b 2 c 2 a2 b2 c2 to the other, he promised in the same way to give three
2 2 2
x y z fourths. From both of them his gain would be only
= 1, has
a2 b 2 c 2 12 gold coins. Find the stake of money each of the
(A) No solution cock-owners have.
(B) Unique solution (A) 27 gold coins & 30 gold coins respectively.
(C) Infinitely many solutions
(B) 12 gold coins & 20 gold coins respectively.
(D) Finitely many solutions
(C) 33 gold coins & 30 gold coins respectively.
16. If the system of equ atio ns 3 x + 4y = 1 2 an d (D) 42 gold coins & 40 gold coins respectively.
(a + b) x + 2 (a – b) y = 5a – 1 has infinitely many
solutions then a & b satisfy the equation 23. Two candles of equal length start burning at the same
(A) a – 5b = 0 (B) 5a – b = 0 instant. One of the candles burns in 5 hrs. and the other
(C) a + 5b = 0 (D) 5a + b = 0 in 4 hrs. By the time one candle is 2 times the length of
the other. The candles have already burnt for :
p 1 1
(A) 2 hrs. (B) 3 hrs.
17. Let be a fraction expressed in the lowest form. If the 2 2
q
numerator is increased by 2 and the denominator is 1 1
(C) 3 hrs. (D) 3 hrs.
1 9 3
increased by 1, the resulting fraction equals . If,
2 24. The sum of digits of a two-digit number is 7 and the
however, the numerator is increased by 1 and the ten’s place digit is 25% less than the unit’s place digit.
denominator is decreased by 2, the resulting fraction W hat is the number ?
3 (A) 25 (B) 43
equals . The value of (p + q) equals (p, q are natural (C) 16 (D) 34
5
number) 25. At a certain fast food restaurant, Amit can buy 3 burgers,
(A) 7 (B) 9 7 shakes and one order of fries for Rs.120. At the same
(C) 12 (D) 13 place, it would cost Rs.164.50 for 4 burgers, 10 shakes
18. If Rs. 50 is distributed among 150 children giving 50 p and one order of fries. How much would it cost for an
to each boy and 25 p to each girl. Then the number of ordinary meal of one burger, one shake and one order
boys is : of fries ?
(A) 25 (B) 40 (A) Rs. 31 (B) Rs. 41
(C) 36 (D) 50 (C) Rs. 21
(D) Cannot be determined
PAGE # 3939
26. Five years ago, A was three times as old as B and ten 34. Shubham travels 760 km to his home partly by train
years later, A shall be twice as old as B. W hat are the and partly by car. He takes 8 hours if he travels 160 km
present ages of A and B (in years) ? by train and the rest by car. He takes 12 minutes more
(A) 45, 15 (B) 30, 40 if he travels 240 km by train and the rest by car. Find the
(C) 50, 30 (D) 50, 20 speed of the train and the car respectively (in km/hr.).
27. Shyam visited Ram during his brief vacation. In the (A) 40, 80 (B) 60, 120
mornings they both would go for yoga. In the evenings (C) 80, 100 (D) 100, 120
they would play tennis. To have more fun, they indulge
35. The sum and product of two numbers is 20 and 40
only on one activity per day, i.e. either they went for yoga
respectively. The sum of the reciprocal of the numbers
or played tennis each day. There were days when they
were lazy and stayed home all day long. There were 24 will be :
mornings when they did nothing, 14 evenings when
1 1
they stayed at home and a total of 22 days when they (A) (B)
2 10
did yoga or played tennis. For how many days Shyam
stayed with Ram ? (C) 4 (D) 2
(A) 20 (B) 25
36. A change making machine contains 1 rupee, 2 rupee
(C) 30 (D) 40
and 5 rupee coins. The total number of coins is 300.
28. The sum of two numbers is 8. If their sum is four times The amount is Rs. 960. If the number of 1 rupee coins
their difference, find the numbers. and the number of 2 rupee coins are interchanged, the
(A) 6, 2 (B) 7, 1
value comes down by Rs. 40. The total number of 5
(C) 5, 3 (D) 6, 3
rupee coins is
29. If three times the larger of two number is divided by the (A) 100 (B) 140
smaller, the quotient and the remainder, each is equal (C) 60 (D) 150
to 6. If five times the smaller is divided by the larger, the
quotient is 2 and the remainder is 3. The smaller num-
ber is : 37. 2x + 3y = 10. How many integral values of x and y ( 0)
(A) 6 (B) 7 are possible ?
(C) 8 (D) 9 (A) 1 (B) 3
30. The ratio of the number of boys and girls in a school is (C) 4 (D) 2
3 : 2. If 20% of the boys and 30% of the girls are 38. The course of an enemy submarine as plotted on a
scholarship holders, the percentage of the students who set of rectangular axes gives the equation 2x + 3y = 5.
are not scholarship holders is : On the same axes, the course of destroyer is indicated
(A) 50 (B) 72 by x – y = 10. The point (x, y) at which the submarine
(C) 75 (D) 76
can be destroyed is :
31. The area of a rectangle gets reduced by 9 m 2 if its (A) (–3, 7) (B) (7, –3)
length is reduced by 5 m and breadth increased by 3 (C) (–7, 3) (D) (3, –7)
m. If we increase the length by 3 m and breadth by 2 m,
39. If the system of equations, x – ky – z = 0, kx – y – z = 0,
the area is increased by 67 m2. The length of the rect-
x + y + z = 0, has a non zero solution, then the possible
angle is :
values of k are :
(A) 9 m (B) 15.6 m
(A) –1, 2 (B) 1, 2
(C) 17 m (D) 18.5 m
(C) 0, 1 (D) –1, 1
32. Four years ago father's age was 6 times that of his
son. Twelve years from now, father's age will be twice 40. If 4x – 17y = 1 & x,y 500. Find how many positive
that of the son. W hat is the ratio of father and son's integer solutions are possible ?
present ages ? (A) 29 (B) 28
(A) 6 : 1 (B) 7 : 1 (C) 27
(C) 8 : 2 (D) 7 : 2 (D) Cannot be determined
33. A boat travels with a speed of 15 km/hr in still water. If a
river flowing at 5 km/hr, the boat travels some distance
downstream and then returns. The ratio of average
speed to the speed in still water is
(A) 8 : 3 (B) 3 : 8
(C) 8 : 9 (D) 9 : 8
PAGE # 4040
3. If the system of equations
3x + y = 1, (2k – 1)x + (k – 1)y, = (2k + 1),
has no solution, then the value of k is
1. For which values of 'a' and 'b' does the following pair of (A) 2 (B) 3
linear equations have an infinite number of solutions : (C) – 2 (D) 1
2x + 3y = 7, (a – b) x + (a + b) y = 3a + b – 2.
[Raj. NTSE Stage-1 2013] 4. In the equations 3x + 2y = 13xy and 4x – 5y = 2xy, the
(A) a = 5 , b = 1 (B) a = 4, b = 2 values of x and y that satisfy the equations are
(C) a = 1, b = 5 (D) a = 2, b = 4 [Raj. NTSE Stage-1 2017]
2. If the system of equations kx + 3y – (k – 3) = 0, 12 x + ky (A) (2,3) (B) (3,2)
– k = 0 has infinitely many solutions, then k =
1 1 1 1
(C) , (D) ,
(A) 6 (B) – 6
2 3 3 2
(C) 0 (D) None of these.
PAGE # 4141
If P(x) is quadratic expression in variable x, then Consider the quadratic equation, a x2 + b x + c = 0

P(x) = 0 is known as a quadratic equation. having and as its roots and b2 4ac is called
discriminant of roots of quadratic equation. It is
denoted by D or .
The general form of a quadratic equation is
Roots of the given quadratic equation may be
ax2 + bx + c = 0, where a, b, c are real numbers and a 0.
(i) Real and unequal
Since a 0, quadratic equations, in general, are of (ii) Real and equal
the following types:- (iii) Imaginary and unequal.
Let the roots of the quadratic equation ax2 + bx + c = 0
(i) b = 0, c 0, i.e., of the type ax2 + c = 0. (where a 0, b, c R) be and then
(ii) b 0, c = 0, i.e., of the type ax2 + bx = 0. b b2 4ac

= ... (i)
(iii) b = 0, c = 0, i.e., of the type ax = 0. 2 2a
b b 2 4ac
(iv) b 0, c 0, i.e., of the type ax2 + bx + c = 0. and = ... (ii)
2a
Th e nature o f ro ots d epend s u po n the valu e of
expression ‘b2 – 4ac’ with in the square root sign. This
The value of x which satisfies the given quadratic is known as discriminant of the given quadratic
equation is known as its root. The roots of the given equation.
equation are known as its solution.
Consider the Following Cases :
General form of a quadratic equation is :
Case-1 When b2 – 4ac > 0, (D > 0)
ax2 + bx + c = 0
In this case roots of the given equation are real and
or 4a2x2 + 4abx + 4ac = 0 [Multiplying by 4a]
distinct and are as follows
or 4a2x2 + 4abx = – 4ac [By adding b2 both sides]
2 2 2 2
or 4a x + 4abx + b = b – 4ac
b b2 4ac b b2 4ac
or (2ax + b)2 = b2 – 4ac = and =
2a 2a
Taking square root of both the sides
(i) When a( 0), b, c Q and b2 – 4ac is a perfect
2ax + b = ± b 2
4ac square
In this case both the roots are rational and distinct.
b b2 4ac
or x= (ii) When a( 0), b, c Q and b2 – 4ac is not a perfect
2a
square
Hence, roots of the quadratic equation ax2 + bx + c = 0 In this case both the roots are irrational and distinct.
[See remarks also]
b b2 4ac b b2 4ac
are and .
2a 2a Case-2 When b2 – 4ac = 0, (D = 0)
REMARKS : b
In this case both the roots are real and equal to – .
A qu ad ratic eq uatio n is satisfied by exactly two 2a
values of ' x ' which may be real or imaginary. The Case-3 When b2 – 4ac < 0, (D < 0)
equation, a x2 + b x + c = 0 is:
In this case b2 – 4ac < 0, then 4ac – b2 > 0
A quadratic equation if a 0. [Two roots]
b ( 4ac b2 )
A linear equation if a = 0, b 0. [One root] =
2a
A contradiction if a = b = 0, c 0. [No root] b ( 4ac b 2 )
and =
An identity if a = b = c = 0. [Infinite roots] 2a
A quadratic equation cannot have more than two roots. b i 4ac b 2
or =
It follows from the above statement that if a quadratic 2a
equation is satisfied by more than two values of x, then b i 4ac b 2
it is satisfied by every value of x and so it is an identity. and = [ 1 = i]
2a
i.e. in this case both the roots are imaginary and distinct.
4242
PAGE # 42
42
REMARKS : (ii) If only one root is common, then the common
root ' ' will be :
If a, b, c Q and b2 – 4ac is positive (D > 0) but not a
perfect square, then the roots are irrational and they c1 a 2 c 2 a1 b1 c 2 b2 c1
= =
always o cc ur in conj ug ate pairs like 2 + a1 b 2 a 2 b1 c1 a 2 c 2 a1
3
and 2 – 3 . However, if a, b, c are irrational numbers Hence the condition for one common root is:
and b2 – 4ac is positive but not a perfect square, then c1 a2 c 2 a1
2
= a1 b 2 a 2 b1 b1 c 2 b 2 c1
the roots may not occur in conjugate pairs.
NOTE :
If b2 – 4ac is negative (D < 0), then the roots are complex If f(x) = 0 & g(x) = 0 are two polynomial equation having
conjugate of each other. In fact, complex roots of an some common root(s) then those common root(s)
equation with real coefficients always occur in conjugate is/are also the root(s) of h(x) = a f(x) + bg (x) = 0.
pairs like 2 + 3i and 2 – 3i. However, this may not be true
Ex.1 If x2 – ax + b = 0 and x2 – px + q = 0 have a root in
in c ase of equations with c omplex c oefficients. common and the second equation has equal roots,
For example, x2 – 2ix – 1 = 0 has both roots equal to i.
ap
show that b + q = .
If a and c are of the same sign and b has a sign opposite 2
to that of a as well as c, then both the roots are positive, Sol. Given equations are : x2 – ax + b= 0 ..... (i)
the sum as well as the product of roots is positive and x2 – px + q = 0 .... (ii)
(D 0). Let be the common root. Then roots of equation
(ii) will be and . Let be the other root of equation
If a, b, c are of the same sign then both the roots are (i). Thus roots of equation (i) are , and those of
negative, the sum of the roots is negative but the product equation (ii) are , .
of roots is positive (D 0). Now + =a ...(iii)
=b ...(iv)
Relation Between Roots & Coefficients 2 =p ...(v)
2
=q ...(vi)
(i) The solutions of quadratic equation a x2 + b x + c = 0 L.H.S. = b + q = + 2= ( + ) ...(vii)
are given by ap ( )2
And R.H.S. = = = ( + ) ... (viii)
2 2
b b2 4ac
x= From (vii) and (viii), L.H.S. = R.H.S.
2a
(ii) The expression b 2
4 a c D is called discriminant Ex.2 If a, b, c R and equations ax2 + bx + c = 0 and
x2 + 2x + 9 = 0 have a common root, show that
of the quadratic equation a x2 + b x + c = 0.
a : b : c = 1 : 2 : 9.
If , are th e ro o ts o f th e q u ad ratic eq uatio n
Sol. Given equations are : x2 + 2x + 9 = 0 ...(i)
a x2 + b x + c = 0, then an d ax2 + bx + c = 0 ...(ii)
coefficien t of x Clearly roo ts of equ ation (i) are imag inary since
(a) Sum of the roots = – equation (i) and (ii) have a common root, therefore
coefficien t of x 2
common root must be imaginary and hence both
b roots will be common.
+ =
a Therefore equations (i) and (ii) are identical
constant term c
(b) Product of the roots = a b
coefficien t of x 2 = =
1 2 9
c a:b:c=1:2:9
=
a
(iii) A quadratic equation whose roots are and is
(x ) (x )=0
i.e. x2 (sum of roots) x + (product of roots) = 0.
ALGORITHM :
Condition for common Root
Step (i) Factorise the constant term of the given
Consider two quadratic equations, a 1 x2 + b 1 x + c 1 = 0 quadratic equation.
& a2 x2 + b 2 x + c 2 = 0. Step (ii) Express the coefficient of middle term as the
(i) If t w o q u ad rat ic eq u atio n s h a ve b o th ro o ts sum or difference of the factors obtained in step 1.
Clearly, the product of these two factors will be equal to
common, then the equations are identical and their
the product of the coefficient of x2 and constant term.
coefficients are in proportion. i.e.
Step (iii) Split the middle term in two parts obtained in
a1 b c step 2.
= 1 = 1 .
a2 b2 c2
Step (iv) Factorise the quadratic equation obtained in
step 3.
4343
PAGE # 43
43
Ex.3 Solve the following quadratic equation by factorisation x 3 x–3 2x – 3
Ex.8 Solve the equation : .
method : x2 – 2ax + a2 – b2 = 0. x 2 x–2 x –1
Sol. Here, factors of constant term (a2 – b2) are (a – b) and (a + b). Sol. W e have,
Also,Coefficient of the middle term = – 2a

x 3 x–3 2x – 3
= – [(a – b) + (a + b)]
x 2 x–2 x –1
x2 – 2ax + a2 – b2 = 0 (x 2 ) 1 ( x – 2 ) – 1 2( x – 1) – 1
2
x – {(a – b) + (a + b)} x + (a – b) (a + b) = 0 x 2 x–2 x –1
x2 – (a – b) x – (a + b) x + (a – b) (a + b) = 0 1 1 1
1 1– 2–
x{x – (a – b)} – (a + b) {x – (a – b)} = 0
x 2 x–2 x –1
1 1 1
{x – (a – b)} {x – (a + b)} = 0 – –
x 2 x–2 x –1
x – (a – b) = 0 or, x – (a + b) = 0 x–2–x–2 1
x = a – b or x = a + b 2
–
x –4 x –1
–4 –1
Ex.4 Solve 9x2 – 49 = 0
Sol. W e have 9x2 – 49 = 0 x2 – 4 x – 1
4(x – 1) = x2 – 4
or (3x)2 – (7)2 = 0
or (3x + 7)(3x – 7) = 0 x2 – 4x = 0
i.e., 3x + 7 = 0 or 3x – 7 = 0. x(x – 4) = 0
7 7 x = 0, 4.
This gives x = – or .
3 3
Hence, the roots of the given equation are 0, 4.
7 7
Thus, x = – or are solutions of the given
3 3
equation.
ALGORITHM :
Ex.5 Solve the quadratic equation : 3x2 – 15x = 0.
Step-(i) Obtain the quadratic equation. Let the quadratic
Sol. The given equation may be written as 3x(x – 5) = 0
equation be ax2 + bx + c = 0, a 0.
This gives x = 0 or x = 5. Step-(ii) Make the coefficient of x2 unity, if it is not unity.
b c
x = 0, 5 are the required solutions. i.e., obtain x2 + x+ = 0.
a a
c
Ex. 6 Solve the quadratic equation : 48y2 – 13y – 1 = 0. Step-(iii) Shift the constant term on R.H.S. to get
a
Sol. 48y2 – 13y – 1 = 0
b c
48 y2 – 16 y + 3y – 1 = 0 x2 + x= –
a a
16 y (3y – 1) + 1(3y – 1) = 0
Step-(iv) Add square of half of the coefficient of x.i.e.
(16y + 1) (3y – 1) = 0
2
b
–1 on both sides to obtain
1 2a
y= ,y=
16 3 2 2
b b b c
x2 + 2 x+ = –
2a 2a 2a a
2
Ex.7 Solve the quadratic equation : 6 2 x 5x – 3 2 0 .
Step-(v) W rite L.H.S. as the perfect square of a binomial
Sol. 6 2 x2 + 5x – 3 2 =0 expression and simplify R.H.S. to get
2
6 2 x2 + 9x – 4x – 3 2 = 0 b b2 4ac
x = .
2a 4a 2
3x (2 2 x + 3) – 2 (2 2 x + 3)= 0 Step-(vi) Tak e squ are root o f both sid es to g et
(3x – 2 ) (2 2 x + 3) = 0 b b2 4ac
x+ =±
2a 4a 2
2 –3 Step (vii) Obtain the values of x by shifting the constant

x= or x =
3 2 2
b
term on RHS.
2a
4444
PAGE # 44
44
Ex.9 Solve : x2 + 5x + 6 = 0. Ex11 Solve the quadratic equation x2 – 7x – 5 = 0.
Sol. W e have Sol. Comparing the given equation with ax2 + bx + c = 0,
x2 + 5x + 6 = 0 a = 1, b = –7 and c = –5.
1 Therefore, D = (–7)2 – 4 × 1 × (–5) = 49 + 20 = 69 > 0
Add and subtract ( coefficient of x)2 in L.H.S. and get Since D is positive, the equation has two roots given
2
2 2 7 69 7 – 69
5 5 by x = ,
x2 + 5x + 6 + – =0 2 2
2 2
2 2 7 69 7 – 69
5 5 5 x= , are the required solutions.
2
x +2 x+ – +6=0 2 2
2 2 2
Ex.12 Find th e value of P, If the quadratic equation
2
5 1 x2 – 2x (1 + 3P) + 7(3 + 2P) = 0 has real & equal roots.
x – 0
2 4 Sol. x2 – 2x (1 + 3P) + 7 (3 + 2P) = 0
2 If it has real and equal roots, then D = 0
5 1 D = b2 – 4ac
x
2 4 a = 1, b = – 2 (1 + 3P), c = 7 (3 + 2P)
D = 4 (1 + 3P)2 – 4 × 1 × 7 (3 + 2P)
5 1
x = 4[(1 + 3p)2 – 7(3 + 2P)]
2 2
= 4 [1 + 6P + 9P2 – 21 – 14 P]
D = 4 [9P2 – 8P – 20]
This gives x = –3 or x = – 2
Now, D = 0 [according to condition]
Therefore, x =–3,–2 are the solutions of the given 4[9P2 – 8P – 20] = 0
equation. 9P2 – 8P – 20 = 0
Ex.10 By using the method of completing the square, show 9p2 – 18p + 10p – 20 = 0
that the equation 4x2 + 3x + 5 = 0 has no real roots. 9P (P – 2) + 10 (P – 2) = 0
Sol. W e have, 4x2 + 3x + 5 = 0 (9P + 10) (P – 2) = 0
So, 9P + 10 = 0 or p – 2 = 0
3 5
x2 + x+ =0 P = – 10/9 or p = 2.
4 4
3 Ex.13 If the roots of the equation
x2 + 2 x =– 5 a(b – c) x2 + b(c – a)x + c (a – b) = 0 are equal, show that
8 4
2 1 1
2 2 .
3 3 3 5 b a c
x2 + 2 x+ = – Sol. Since the roots of the given equations are equal, so
8 8 8 4
2
discriminant will be equal to zero.
3 71 b2(c – a)2 – 4a(b – c)c(a – b) = 0
x =–
8 64 b2(c2 + a2 – 2ac) – 4ac(ba – ca – b2 + bc) = 0,
Clearly, RHS is negative. a2b2 + b2c2 + 4a2c2 + 2b2ac – 4a2bc – 4abc2 = 0
2 (ab + bc – 2ac)2 = 0
3
But, x cannot be negative for any real value of x. ab + bc – 2ac = 0
8
ab + bc = 2ac
Hence, the given equation has no real roots.
1 1 2
+ =
c a b
2 1 1
S olve the q uadratic equ atio n in g en eral form . Hence Proved.
b a c
viz. ax2 + bx + c = 0.
Step (i) By comparison with general quadratic equation, Ex.14 Fo r wh at value o f K do es the equ atio n
find the value of a, b and c. (k + 3)x2 – (2k + 5)x + k + 1 = 0 have no real roots.
Step (ii) Find the discriminant of the quadratic equation. Sol. (k + 3)x2 – (2k + 5) x + k + 1 = 0
D = b2 – 4ac If it has no real roots, then D < 0
Step (iii) Now find the roots of the equation by given D = b2 – 4ac
equation {– (2k + 5)}2 – 4 × (k + 3) × (k + 1)
b D b D = 4k2 + 20 k + 25 – 4 [k2 + k + 3k + 3]
x= , = 4k + 13
2a 2a
REMARK : SInce D < 0
4k + 13 < 0
If b2 – 4ac < 0, i.e., negative, then b 2 – 4ac is not real
13
and therefore, the equation does not have any real roots. Hence , k < .
4
4545
PAGE # 45
45
4500 = x2 – 15x
x2 – 15x – 4500 = 0
ALGORITHM :
15 225 18000
Th e meth od o f prob lem so lvin g co nsists o f th e x=
2
following three steps :
15 135
Step (i) Translating the word problem into symbolic x= = 75, – 60
2
language (mathematical statement) which means x – 15 = 60
identifying relationships existing in the problem and
x = 75
then forming the quadratic equation.
So speed of fast train is 75 km/hr and the speed of
Step (ii) Solving the quadratic equation thus formed.
slow train (75 – 15) km/hr = 60 km/hr.
Step (iii) Interpreting the solution of the equation, which
means translating the result of mathematical statement Ex.17 A person on tour has Rs. 360 for his expenses. If he
into verbal language. extends his tour 4 days, he has to cut down his daily
1 expenses by Rs. 3, Find the original duration of the
Ex.15 Sum of a number and its reciprocal is 2 . Find the tour.
30
number. Sol. let x be the number of days
Sol. Let the number be x. Then according to given condition
Total money 360
So his daily expenses = =
1 61 Number of day x
x+ =
x 30 when he extend his tour by 4 days, then his daily
x 2 1 61 360
= expenses =
x 30 x 4
30x2 + 30 = 61x Now, according given condition
30x2 – 61x + 30 = 0
360 360
By using quadratic formula – =3
x x 4
61 3721 – 3600
x= 1440 = 3x2 + 12x
60
x2 + 4x – 480 = 0
61 11
x= (x + 24) (x – 20) = 0
60 x = 20
61 11 72 6 So, the original duration of the tour = 20 days.
x= = =
60 60 5
Ex.18 A two digit number is such that the product of its
61 11 50 5 digits is 10 when 27 is subtracted from the number,
x= = =
60 60 6 the digit interchange their places. Find the number.
Sol. Let the tens and unit digit of required number be x and
6 5
Hence the required number is or . y respectively. Then according given condition
5 6
Ex.16 A fast train takes 3 hours less than a slow train for a 10
jo urney of 900 km. If the speed of slo w train is xy = 10 y=
x
15 km/ hr. less than that the fast train. Find the speeds
and 10x + y – 27 = 10y + x
of the two trains.
Sol. Let the speed of fast train = x km/h
10 10
and the speed slow train = (x – 15) km/h 10x + – 27 = 10 +x
x x
900
the time taken by fast train = hr 10x 2 10 27x 100 x 2
x =
x x
900 9x2 – 27x – 90 = 0
the time taken by slow train = hr 9(x2 – 3x – 10) = 0
x – 15
x2 – 3x – 10 = 0
then according the given the condition x2– 5x + 2x – 10 = 0
900 x(x – 5) + 2(x – 5) = 0
900
– =3 (x – 5)(x + 2) = 0
x – 15 x
x = – 2 or 5
300 300 10 10
3 – =3 So, x = 5, y = = =2
x – 15 x x 5
So the required number is 10x + y = 10 × 5 + 2 = 52.
4646
PAGE # 46
46
10. A quadratic equation ax2 – 2ax + b = 0 has two real
solutions. Their average is :
(A) 1 (B) 2
b 2b
1. If x1 and x2 satisfy the equation 22x – 8. 2x + 12 = 0, then (C) (D)
a a
x1 + x2 equals :
(A) 8 (B) log26 11. T he sum o f th e reciproc als of the roo ts o f th e
log2 6 2009 1
(C) log212 (D) equation, x+ 1+ = 0, is :
2 2010 x
2. Solve the quadratic equation :
2010
x –1 x – 2 x–5 x–6 (A) – (B) – 1
– – . 2009
x–2 x–3 x–6 x–7
9 3 2009
(A) (B) (C) (D) 1
2 2 2010
12. If sin a and co s a are the roots of the equation
7 1
(C) (D) 4x2 – kx – 1 = 0, (k > 0) then the value of k is :
2 2
3. The number of roots of the e q u at io n (A) 2 2 (B) 4
2 2 (C) 2 (D) 4 2
x– 1 is :
( x 1) ( x 1)
13. The roots of equation x2 + px + q = 0 are 1 and 2. The roots
(A) 0 (B) 1
of the equation qx2 – px + 1 = 0 must be :
(C) 2 (D) infinite
1 1
4. The set of all real values of p for which the equation x + (A) –1 , – (B) ,1
2 2
1= px has exactly one root, is :
1 1
(A) {0} (B) {4} (C) – ,1 (D) – 1,
2 2
(C) {0, 4} (D) {0, 2}
14. The condition that one root is twice the other root of the
2 1 1 quadratic equation x2 + px + q = 0 is :
5. Solve for x : 2 x –9 x + 14 = 0.
x2 x (A) 2p2 = 9q (B) 3p2 = 8q
2
1 1 (C) p = 9q (D) 4p2 = q
(A) , 1, 2 (B) , 1,– 2
2 2 15. The value of k such that the equation x2 + (k–1)x + 1 = 0
1 1 has such two roots that are equal in magnitude but
(C) , 1, 4 (D) , 1,– 4
2 2 opposite in signs :
(A) 0 (B) –1
6. Solve for x : 3 x + 2 + 3 –x = 10.
(A) –2, 0 (B) – 1, 0 (C) 1 (D) –10
(C) –2, –1 (D) None of these 16. If r1 and r2 are the roots of x2 + bx + c = 0 and S0 = r10 + r20,
S 1 = r 1 + r 2 and S 2 = r 12 + r 22, th en the value of
S2 + bS1 + cS0 is :
7. T he p ro du ct o f th e so lu tion s of the equ atio n
(A) depends on b only
3 8 (B) depends on c only
= – 1, is : (C) depends on both b and c.
x x 3
(D) does not dependent on b and c.
(A) – 6 (B) – 9
(C) 9 (D) 10 17. If the roots of the equation px2 + qx + r = 0 are in the ratio
: m then :
8. If one root of 5x2 + 13x + k = 0 is reciprocal of the other (A) ( + m)2 pq = mr2 (B) ( + m)2 pr = mq
then k =
(C) ( + m)2 pr = mq2 (D) None of these
(A) 0 (B) 5
1 18. If 2 –
(C) (D) 6 3 is a root of the quadratic eqaution
6
x2 + 2 ( 3 1) x + 3 – 2 3 = 0, then the second root is :
9. Let , are the roots of the q uadratic equation
2x2 – mx – 8 = 0. If m1 and m2 are the two values of m for (A) 3 –2 (B) 3
which I – |= m – 1 then (m1 + m2) is equal to :
(A) 3 (B) 8/3 (C) 2 + 3 (D) – 3
(C) – 3/8 (D) – 8
4747
PAGE # 47
47
19. G iven x 1 > 0 an d x 2 = 4 x 1 are so lu tio n s o f th e 30. An aeroplane left 30 minutes later then its scheduled
quadratic equation ax2 +bx + c = 0.If 3a = 2 (c – b) time and in order to reach its destination 1500 km
then the value of x1 is equal to : away in time, it has to increase its speed by 250 km/h
1 3 from its usual speed. Determine its usual speed.
(A) (B)
4 2 (A) 700 km/h (B) 750 km/h
2 1 (C) 770 km/h (D) 800 km/h
(C) (D)
3 9 3
20. If the roots of the quadratic equation 4x2 – kx – 1 = 0 are 31. Two water taps together can fill a tank in 9 hours.
8
sin and cos then |k| has the value equal to :
(A) 2 (B) 8 The tap of larger diameter takes 10 hours less that the
smaller one to fill the tank separately. Find the time in
(C) 4 2 (D) 2 2 which each tap can separately fill the tank.
21. The roots of the equation x2 + Ax + B = 0 are 5 and 4. The (A) 25, 15 hr (B) 15, 5 hr
roots of x2 + Cx + D = 0 are 2 and 9. Which of the following (C) 35, 25 hr (D)10, 20 hr
is a root of x2 + Ax + D = 0 ? 32. A girl is twice as old as her sister. Four years hence,
(A) 3 & 9 (B) 6 & 3
the product of their ages (in years) will be 160. Find
(C) 6 & 9 (D) 3 & 3
their present age of her sister.
(A) 12 yr (B) 6 yr
22. – 2 + (C) 8 yr (D) 9 yr
3 is a solution to which of the following
equations ? 33. One of the two students, while solving a quadratic
(A) 3x2 + 12x + 3 = 0 (B) x2 + 2x + 3 = 0 equation in x, copied the constant term incorrectly
(C) x2 + 4x + 2 = 0 (D) 3x2 + 2x – 1 = 0 and got the roots 3 and 2. The other copied the
c on stant term and co effic ient of x 2 co rrec tly as
23. Number of integer values of ‘k’ for which the quadratic – 6 and 1 respectively. The correct roots are :
equation 2x2 + kx – 4 = 0 will have two rational solutions, (A) 3, – 2 (B) – 3, 2
is : (C) – 6, – 1 (D) 6, – 1
(A) 1 (B) 2
34. Out of a number of saras birds, one fourth of the
(C) 4 (D) 5
1 1
24. The value (s) of k for which the quadratic equation number are moving about in lots, th along with th
9 4
kx2 – kx + 1 = 0 has equal roots is : as well as 7 times the square root of the number move
(A) k = 0 only (B) k = 4 only on a hill, 56 birds remains in vakula trees. W hat is the
(C) k = 0, 4 (D) k = – 4 total number of birds ?
(A) 576 (B) 500
25. If the roots of the equation (a 2 + b 2)x2 – 2b(a + c) (C) 676 (D) 400
x + (b2 + c2) = 0 are equal, then :
(A) 2b = ac (B) b2 = ac 35. If n is an integer such that n n = n + n, then the
number of such number n, is :
2ac (A) 0 (B) 1
(C) b = (D) b = ac (C) 2 (D) 3
a c
26. Find the value of k for which quadratic equation 36. A positive number whose reciprocal equals one less
than the number, is :
(k – 2)x2 + 2(2k – 3)x + 5k – 6 = 0 has equal roots.
(A) 1 (B) 3 1 2 2 1
(C) A and B both (D) none of these (A) (B)
2 4
1 5 2 5
27. The sum of the squares of two consecutive positive (C) (D)
2 2
integers is 545. Find the sum of these integers.
(A) 33 (B) 34
(C) 35 (D) 36 37. Let , be the roots of the equation (x – a)(x – b) = c, c 0.
Then the roots of the equation (x – )(x – ) + c = 0 are :
28. The sides (in cm) of a right triangle containing the right
angle are 5x and 3x – 1. If the area of the triangle is (A) a, c (B) b, c
60 cm2. Find its perimeter. (C) a, b (D) a + c, b + c
(A) 30 (B) 35 38. If is a root, repeated twice, of the quadratic equation
(C) 40 (D) 45
d2
29. A two digit number is four times the sum and three (a – d) x2 + ax + (a + d) = 0 then has the value equal
times the product of its digits, find the number. a2
(A) 24 (B) 42 to :
(C) 36 (D) 63 (A) sin290º (B) cos260º
(C) sin245º (D) cos230º
4848
PAGE # 48
48
39. If p and q are the roots of the quadratic equation
x2 – ( – 2) x – – 1 = 0. W hat is the minimum 4. If one root of x2 – 4x + k = 0 is 6 then the value of k is :
possible value of p 2 + q 2 ? [M.P. NTSE Stage-1 2013]
(A) 0 (B) 3 (A) – 12 (B) 2
(C) 4 (D) 5 (C) – 2 (D) 12
40. If , are the roots of x2 + x + 1 = 0 and , are the 5. If 2 is a root of the equation x2 + bx + 12 = 0 and the
roots of x2 + 3x + 1 = 0, then ( – ) ( + ) ( + ) ( – ) = equation x2 + bx + q = 0 has equal roots, then q =
(A) 2 (B) 4 [Raj. NTSE Stage-1 2014]
(C) 6 (D) 8 (A) 8 (B) – 8
41. If both a and b belong to the set {1, 2, 3, 4}, then the (C) 16 (D) – 16
number of equations of the form ax 2 + bx + 1 = 0 6. If the roots of p x2 + 2qx + r = 0 and qx2 – 2 pr x + q = 0
having real roots is :
(A) 10 (B) 7 are simultaneously real, than
(C) 6 (D) 12 [Harayana NTSE Stage-1 2014]
42. Find the quadratic equation whose roots are half of (A) p = q , r 0 (B) 2q = pr
t h e r ec ip ro c al o f th e r o o ts o f t h e e q u at io n
ax2 + bx + c = 0. (C) pr =q2 (C) 2p = qr
(A) 4ax2 + 2bx + c = 0 (B) 4cx2 + 2bx + a = 0
2
(C) 2cx + bx + a = 0 (D) 2ax2 + bx + c = 0 7. The number of solution of the equation
43. 6 6 6 6 ........ = ? 6 4x x2 x 4 is:
(A) 3 (B) 6 (A) 0 (B) 1
(C) 9 (D) (C) 2 (D) 4
1 50
44. Find the value of x in x 2 x 2 x 2 3 x = x. 8. If x + = , then which is always true ?
x 7
(A) 1 (B) 3 [Harayana NTSE Stage-1 2014]
(C) 6 (D) 12 (A) x700 > 700
(B) x700 < 700
(C) x700 > 700 or x700 < 700
(D) x700 > 700 and x700 < 700
9. If sin 87° and cos 87° are the roots of the equation x2 –
1. If one root is 3 5 , then quadratic equation will be : bx + c = 0, then the value of b2 is :
[Raj. NTSE Stage-1 2006] [Haryana NTSE Stage-1 2016]
(A) x2+ 6x – 4 = 0 (B) x2 + 6x + 4 = 0 (A) c (B) 1 + 2c
(C) x2 – 6x + 4 = 0 (D) x2 – 6x – 4 = 0 (C) 1 – c2 (D) 1 + c2
2. Graph drawn from the equation y = x2 – 3x – 4 will be :

[Raj. NTSE Stage-1 2013] 10. If the roots of a quadratic equation 2x2 + 3kx + 8 = 0 are
(A) Circle (B) Parabola equal, the value of k is
(C) Straight line (D) Hyperbola
3. If the sum of the roots of the equation ax2 + bx + c = 0 is
equal to product of their reciprocal then, 2 3
[M.P. NTSE Stage-1 2013] (A) ± (B) ±
3 2
(A) a2 + bc = 0 (B) b2 + ca = 0
2
(C) c + ab = 0 (D) b + c = 0 3 8
(C) ± (D) ±
8 3
4949
PAGE # 49
49
SEQUENCE nth TERM OF AN A.P.

A sequ enc e is an arrangemen t of num bers in a
definite order according to some rule. Let A.P. be a, a + d, a + 2d, a + 3d,...........
e.g. (i) 2, 5, 8, 11, ... Then, First term (a1) = a + 0.d
(ii) 4, 1, – 2, – 5, ... Second term (a2) = a + 1.d
(iii) 3, –9, 27, – 81, ... Third term (a3) = a + 2.d
. .
Types of Sequence . .
On the basis of the number of terms there are two . .
types of sequence : nth term (an) = a + (n – 1) d
an = a + (n – 1) d is called the nth term.
(i) Finite sequences : A sequence is said to be
finite if it has finite number of terms. Ex.4. W hich term of the A.P. 21, 42, 63, 84, .............. is 420?
Sol. 21, 42, 63, ........ 420
(ii) Infinite sequences : A sequence is said to be first term (a) = 21, common difference (d) = 21
infinite if it has infinite number of terms. Let 420 will come at an term.
Ex.1 W rite down the sequence whose n th term is n 2+1 : an=a+(n–1)d
Sol. Let tn = n 2+1 420 = 21 + (n – 1) 21
Put n = 1,2,3,4,.............. we get 420 = 21 + 21n – 21
21n = 420
t1 =2, t2 = 5, t3 = 10,.... n = 20
So the sequence is 2,5,10,17,..... Ex.5. The 14th term of an A.P. is twice its 7th term. If its 5th
term is 10. Find its first term and the common differ-
PROGRESSIONS ence. Also find its 53 rd term.
Those sequence whose terms follow certain patterns Sol. a14 = 2 a7
are called progressions. Generally there are three types a + 13 d = 2 ( a + 6 d)
of progressions. a + 13 d = 2a + 12 d
a=d
(i) Arithmetic Progression (A.P.) and a5 = 10
(ii) Geometric Progression (G.P.) a + 4d = 10
(iii) Harmonic Progression (H.P.) a + 4a = 10 [ a=d]
5 a = 10
ARITHMETIC PROGRESSION a = 2.
So, d = 2.
A sequence is called an A.P., if the difference of a term
1st term = 2, common difference = 2
an d th e previo us term is alw ays same.
a53 = a + 52 d
i.e. d = tn + 1 – tn = Constant for all n N. The constant
a53 = 2 + 52 × 2
difference, generally denoted by ‘d’ is called the
a53 = 2 + 104
common difference.
a53 = 106.
Ex.2 F in d th e co mm on d ifferen ce o f th e fo llow in g
Ex.6 Is 51 a term of the A.P. 5,8,11,14,.............?
A.P. : 5,9,13,17,21,.....
Sol. 5, 8, 11, 14 .............
Sol. 9 – 5 = 13 – 9 = 17 – 13 = 21 – 17 = 4 (constant).
first term (a)= 5
Common difference (d) = 4.
common difference (d) = 3
GENERAL FORM OF AN A.P. Let 51 be the nth term a term of AP
and we know an=a+(n–1)d
51 = 5 + (n – 1)3
If we denote the starting number i.e. the 1st number by
51 = 5 + 3n – 3
‘a’ and a fixed nu mb er to be ad ded is ‘d’ then
51 = 2 + 3n
a, a + d, a + 2d, a + 3d, a + 4d,........... forms an A.P.
49 = 3n
Ex.3 Find the A.P. whose 1st term is 10 & common difference 49
is 5. n=
3
Sol. Given :First term (a) = 10 & Common difference (d) = 5.
But n can never be a fraction in an AP
A.P. is 10, 15, 20, 25, 30,.......
51 is not a term of AP.
PAGE # 50
th Ex.9 Find the sum of 16 terms of the A.P. 3,8,13,18,.......
m TERM OF AN A.P. FROM THE END
Sol. a = 3, d = 5
Let ‘a’ be the 1st term and ‘d’ be the common difference
n
of an A.P. having n terms. Then mth term from the end Sn = [2a + (n – 1)d]
is (n – m + 1)th term from beginning or {n – (m – 1)}th 2
term from beginning.
16
S16 = [2(3) + (16 – 1)5]
Ex.7 Find 12th term from the end of an A.P. 5,12,19,... 495. 2
Sol. 495 = 5 + (n – 1) 7 n = 71
= 648.
12h term from end m = 12
a71 – (12 – 1) = a71 – 11 = a60 from the beginning. Ex.10. Find the value of x when 1 + 6 + 11 + 16 + ........ + x = 148.
a60 = 5 + (60 – 1) 7 = 418. Sol. Clearly, terms of the given series form an A.P. with first
tern a = 1 and common difference d = 5. Let there be n
SELECTION OF TERMS IN AN A.P. terms in this series. Then,
1 + 6 + 11 + 16 + ...+ x = 148.
Sometimes we require certain number of terms in A.P. Sum of n terms = 148
The following ways of selecting terms are generally n
very convenient. [ 2+ (n – 1) × 5] = 148
2
5n2 – 3n – 296 = 0
No. of Terms Terms Common Difference (n – 8) (5n + 37) = 0 [ n is not negative]
For 3 terms a – d, a, a + d d n=8
Now, x = nth term
For 4 terms a – 3d, a – d, a + d, a + 3d 2d
x = a + (n – 1)d
For 5 terms a – 2d, a – d, a, a + d, a + 2d d x = 1 + (8 – 1) × 5 = 36 [ a =1, d = 5, n = 8]
For 6 terms a – 5d, a – 3d, a – d, a + d, a + 3d, a + 5d 2d
Ex.8 The sum of three numbers in A.P. is –3 and their product PROPERTIES OF A.P.
is 8. Find the numbers.
Sol. Let three no.’s in A.P. be a – d, a, a + d (i) For any real numbers a and b, the sequence whose
a – d + a + a + d = –3 nth term is an = an + b is always an A.P. with common
3a = –3 a = –1 difference ‘a’ (i.e. coefficient of term containing n).
& (a – d) a (a + d) = 8 (ii) If any nth term of a sequence is a linear expression
a (a2 – d2) = 8
in n then the given sequence is an A.P.
(–1) (1 – d2) = 8
1 – d2 = – 8 (iii) If a constant term is added to or subtracted from
d2 = 9 each term of an A.P. then the resulting sequence is
d= 3 also an A.P. with the same common difference.
If a = – 1 & d = 3 numbers are – 4, –1, 2.
(iv) If each term of a given A.P. is multiplied or divided
If a = – 1 & d = –3 numbers are 2, –1, – 4.
by a n on -zero co nstant K, th en the resu ltin g
SUM OF n TERMS OF AN A.P. sequence is also an A.P. with common difference
Let A.P. be a, a + d, a + 2d, a + 3d,............., a + (n – 1)d Kd or respectively. W here d is the common

Then, difference of the given A.P.
Sn = a + (a + d) +...+ {a + (n – 2) d} + {a + (n – 1) d} ..(i)
also (v) In a finite A.P. the sum of the terms equidistant from
Sn= {a + (n – 1) d} + {a + (n – 2) d} +....+ (a + d) + a ..(ii) the beginning and end is always same and is equal to
Add (i) & (ii) the sum of 1st and last term.
2Sn = 2a + (n – 1)d + 2a + (n – 1)d +....+ 2a + (n – 1)d (vi) If three numbers a, b, c are in A.P. , then 2b = a + c.
2Sn = n [2a + (n – 1) d] Ex.11 Check whether an = 2n2 + 1 is an A.P. or not.
n Sol. an = 2n2 + 1
Sn [ 2a (n 1)d]
2 Then, an + 1 = 2(n + 1)2 + 1
an + 1 – an = 2(n2 + 2n + 1) + 1 – 2n2 – 1
n
Sn = [a + a + (n – 1)d] = 2n2 + 4n + 2 + 1 – 2n2 – 1
2
= 4n + 2, which is not constant
n
= [a + ] The above sequence is not an A.P..
2
n
Sn [a ] where, is the last term.
2 If three terms are in A.P. then the middle term is
rth term of an A.P. when sum of first r terms is S r is called the A.M. between the other two, so if a, b, c
given by, tr = Sr – Sr – 1. are in A.P., b is A.M. of a & c.
PAGE # 51
A.M. for any n number a 1 , a2 ,..., an is; (ii) Sum of the first n terms.
a1 a2 a3 ..... a n
A= . a rn 1
n , r 1
r 1
Sn =
a 1 rn
, r 1
If a, b are any two given numbers & a, A1, A2,...., An, b are 1 r
in A.P. then A1, A2,... An are the n-A.M.’s between a & b.
Total terms are n + 2. (iii) Sum of an infinite G.P. when r < 1. W hen
b a n rn 0 if r < 1 therefore,
Last term b = a + (n+2–1)d.Now, d = . a
n 1 S = (| r | 1) .
b a 2(b a) 1– r
A1 = a + , A2 = a + , .. .. . .. . .. .. , Ex.14 Find 10th term of the G.P. 7, 14, 28, .....
n 1 n 1
n (b a) Sol. In this G.P. we have a = 7 and r = 2
An = a + .
n 1
10th term = ar(10–1) = ar9 = 7 29 = (7 512) = 3584.
NOTE :
Sum of all n-A.M.’s inserted between a & b is equal 1
Ex.15 How many terms are there in the G.P. 16,8,4....., ?
to n times the single A.M. between a & b. 16
n 8 1
i.e. Ar = nA where A is the single A.M. between a & b. Sol. In this G.P. we have a = 16, r = =
16 2
r 1
13 Let the number of terms be n. Then,
Ex.12 Between two numbers whose sum is , an even
6 n 1
n u m ber o f A.M .s is in serted , th e su m o f th ese
1 1
16 =
mean s exceed s th eir nu mb er b y un ity. F in d th e 2 16
number of means.
Sol. Let a an d b be two n um bers and 2 n A.M.s are n 1 8
inserted between a and b then 1 1 1
= =
2n 2 16 16 2
(a + b) = 2n + 1.
2
13 13
n = 2n + 1. Given a b n – 1 = 8 or n = 9
6 6
n = 6. Ex.16 A boy saves Re 1 on first day of the month, Rs. 2 on
Number of means = 12. 2nd day of the month, Rs. 4 on third day, Rs. 8 on 4th
Ex.13 Insert 20 A.M. between 2 and 86.
day, Rs. 16 on 5th day and so on. How much does he
Sol. Here 2 is the first term and 86 is the 22 nd term of A.P.
So, 86 = 2 + (21)d save in 12 days ?
d=4
Sol. His savings are 1,2,4,8,16, .... upto terms.
So, the series is 2, 6, 10, 14,......., 82, 86
required means are 6, 10, 14,...82. 2
This is a G.P. with a = 1 and r = =2
1
Savings = Sum of above G.P. upto 12 terms. =
n 12
a(r 1) 1 ( 2 1)
G.P. is a sequence of numbers whose first term is = = 4095.
(r 1) ( 2 1)
non zero & each of the succeeding terms is equal
to the preceding terms multiplied by a constant. Ex.17 Find the sum of 10 terms of the sequence 5, 5.5,
T hu s in a G.P. th e ratio o f su c cessive term s is 5.55, 5.555, ......
c o n st an t. T h is c o n s ta n t f a c t o r is c alle d th e Sol. 5, 5.5., 5.55, 5.555, ..... 10 terms
common ratio of the series & is obtained by dividing = 5(1 + 1.1 + 1.11 + ..... 10 terms)
any term by that which immediately precedes it. 5
1 1 1 1 = (9 + 9.9 + 9.99 + .... 10 terms)
Example : 2, 4, 8, 16 ... & , , , ...are in G.P.
.P. 9
3 9 27 81
5
= (10 – 1 + 10 – 0.1 + 10 – 0.01 + ..... 10 terms)
(i) Therefore a, ar, ar 2 , ar3 , ar4 ,......
is a G.P. with ‘a’ as 9
the first term and ‘r’ as common ratio. 5
= (10 + 10 + 10 +.....10 terms) – (1 + 0.1 + 0.01
9
nth term = a rn 1
+.....10 terms)
PAGE # 52
5 Important results :
= (100 – sum of G.P. of 10 terms with a = 1 & r = 0.1) n(n 1)
9 i. Sum of the first n natural numbers =
2
5 1 (1 (0.1)10 ) 5 10 1 ii. Sum of the squares of first n numbers
= 9 100 100 1
1 0.1 9 9 1010 n(n 1)( 2n 1)
=
6
2
5 9 n(n 1)
= 5 (890 10 ). iii. Sum of the cubes of first n numbers =
81 2
iv. Sum of the first n even numbers = n(n + 1)
v. Sum of the first n odd numbers = n2
2
(i) If a, b, c are in G.P. then b = ac, in general if
RELATION BETWEEN MEANS
a1, a2, a3, a4,......... an – 1 , an are in G.P.,
then a1an = a2an – 1 = a3 an – 2 = .............. If A, G, H are respectively A.M., G.M., H.M. between
(ii) Any three consecutive terms of a G.P. can be a & b both being unequal & positive then, G² = AH
i.e. A, G, H are in G.P.
a
taken as , a , ar..
r Ex.19 The A.M. of two numbers exceeds the G.M. by
(iii) Any four consecutive terms of a G.P. can be taken
a a 3 6
as 3 , , ar, ar3. and the G.M. exceeds the H.M. by ; find the
2 5
r r
n um bers.
(iv) If each term of a G.P. be multiplied or divided or Sol. Let the numbers be a and b, now using the relation
raised to power by the some non zero quantity, the G 2 = A.H.
resulting sequence is also a G.P. 3 6
G2 = G G
2 5
3 9
G2 = G2 + G–
10 5
If a, b, c are in G.P., b is the G.M. between a & c. 15
b² = ac, therefore b = a c ; a > 0, c > 0. G=6 & A=
2
i.e. ab = 36, also a + b = 15
n-Geometric Means Between a, b :
Hence the two numbers are 3 and 12.
If a, b are two given numbers & a, G 1 , G 2 ,....., G n , b A.M. G.M. H.M.
are in G.P.. Then, Let a1, a2, a3, .......an be n positive real numbers, then
G 1 , G 2 , G 3 ,...., G n are n-G.M.s between a & b. we define their
a1 a2 a3 ....... an
G 1 = a(b/a)1/n+1 , G 2 = a(b/a)2/n+1 ,......, G n = a(b/a)n/n+1 A.M. = ,
n
NOTE : G.M. = (a1 a2 a3 .........an)1/n and
The product of n G.M.s between a & b is equal to the
n
nth power of the single G.M. between a & b H.M. = 1 1 1 .
n .......
n a1 a2 an
i.e. Gr = ab = G n where G is the single G.M.
r 1
It can be shown that A.M. G.M. H.M. and equality
between a & b.
holds at either places iff a1 = a2 = a3 = ..............= an.
Ex.18 Find three geometric means between 4 and 64.
a b c
Sol. Let G1, G2, G3 be three geometric means between 4 Ex.20 If a, b, c, > 0 prove that + + 3.
b c a
and 64. Sol. Using the relation A.M. G.M. we have
Then 4, G1, G2, G3, G4, 64 are in G.P. a b c 1
b c a a b c 3
. .
5th term = 64 Let common ratio be r. 3 b c a
Then, 4 r4 = 64 r4 = 16 = 24 a b c
3.
b c a
r=2
G1 = (4 2) = 8, G2 = (8 2) = 16 & G3 = (16 2) = 32
So, the required geometric means are 8,16, 32.
PAGE # 53
10. If Sr denotes the sum of the first r terms of an A.P. Then,
S3n : ( S2n – Sn) is :
(A) n (B) 3n
(C) 3 (D) None of these
1. The sum of 3 rd and 15 th elements of an arithmetic
progression is equal to the sum of 6 th, 11 th and 13 th 11. Find the sum of all the three digit numbers which leave
elements o f th e sam e prog ression . T hen wh ic h remainder 2 when divided by 5.
element of the series should necessarily be equal (A) 98910 (B) 9820
to zero ? (C) 9830 (D) 9840
st th
(A) 1 (B) 9
12. Consider the sequence 1, – 2, 3 – 4, 5, – 6, .........., n
(C) 12 th (D) None of the above
(– 1)n + 1. W hat is the average of the first 300 terms of
2. If m times the mth term of an A.P. is equal to n times its the sequence ?
nth term. Find the value of (m + n)th term of the A.P. (A) – 1 (B) 0.5
(A) 2 (B) 1 (C) 0 (D) – 0.5
13. Let Sn denote the sum of the first 'n' terms of an A.P.
3. The sides of a right angled triangle are in A.P. The ratio and S2n = 3Sn. Then, the ratio S3n : Sn is equal to :
of sides is : (A) 4 : 1 (B) 6 : 1
(A) 1 : 2 : 3 (B) 2 : 3 : 4 (C) 8 : 1 (D) 10 : 1
(C) 3 : 4 : 5 (D) 5 : 8 : 3
14. Let s 1 (n) b e the sum of the first n terms of the
4. The sum of three numbers in A.P. is 12 and the sum of arith m etic pro g ressio n 8 , 1 2 , 1 6 , ....... an d let
their cubes is 288. Find the numbers. s2(n) be the sum of the first n terms of arithmetic
(A) 3, 4, 5 (B) 2, 4, 6 progression 17, 19, 21 ......... If for some value of n,
(C) 2, 5, 8 (D) 3, 6, 9 s1(n) = s2(n) then this common sum is :
(A) not uniquely determined
5. The value of
(B) 260 (C) 216
12 – 22 + 32 – 42 + 52 – 62 + ....+ 992 – 1002 is :
(D) 200
(A) – 100 (B) – 5050
(C) – 2500 (D) – 2520 15. The sum of all natural numbers less than 400 which
are NOT divisible by 6, is :
6. Find the common difference of an A.P. whose first term
(A) 13266 (B) 66534
is 100 and the sum of whose first six terms is five
(C) 79800 (D) 93066
times the sum of the next six terms.
(A) 10 (B) – 10 16. If S1 is the sum of an arithmetic progression of ‘n’ odd
(C) 5 (D) – 5 number of terms and S2 the sum of the terms of the
7n 1 S1
7. The sum of n terms of two A.Ps. are in ratio . series in odd places, then =
4n 27 S2
th
Find the ratio of their 11 terms.
2n n
4 2 (A) (B)
(A) (B) n 1 n 1
3 3 n 1 n 1
(C) (D)
1 4 2n n
(C) (D)
3 7 17. D ivid e 60 0 b iscu its amo ng 5 bo ys so that th eir
8. If su m o f n te rm s o f a se q u en c e is g iven b y shares are in Arithmetic progression and the two
S n = 2n 2 + 3n, find its 50 th term. smallest shares together make one-seventh of what
(A) 250 (B) 225 the other three boys get. W hat is the sum of the
(C) 201 (D) 205 sh ares o f th e tw o b oys w h o are g ettin g lesser
9. Sum of n terms of the series number of biscuits, than the remaining three ?
(A) 75 (B) 85
2 8 18 32 + .......... is :
(C) 185 (D) 90
n(n 1)
(A) (B) 2n (n + 1)
2
18. If k – 2, 2k + 1 and 6k + 3 are in G.P. the value of k is :
n(n 1) (A) 7 (B) 0
(C) (D) 1
2 (C) 3 (D) –2
PAGE # 54
19. The sum of the series 4 + 8 + 16 + 32 + ........ till 28. Find the geometric mean between 16 and 81.
10 terms is : (A) 4 (B) 9
(A) 6 × 210 – 1 (B) 4 × 210 + 1 (C) 36 (D) 18
(C) 4(210 – 1) (D) 4(210 + 1)
29. A square is drawn by joining the mid points of the
20. The first term of an infinite G.P. is 1 and any term is sides of a square. A third square is drawn inside
equal to the sum of all the succeeding terms. Find the second square in the same way and the process
the series. is continued indefinetly. If the side of the square is
1 1 1 10 cm, then the sum of areas of all the squares so
(A) 1, 2, 4, 8, ... (B) 1, , , , ... formed is :
3 9 27
(A) 100 (B) 200
1 1 1 1 1
(C) 1, , , ... (D) 1, , , , ... (C) 250 (D) None of these
4 8 2 4 8
1 1 1
21. Find the sum the infinite G.P.: 1 + + ......
3 9 27 30. The A.M. of two numbers is 34 and their G.M. is 16 The
3 3 numbers are :
(A) (B) (A) 60,8 (B) 64,4
5 2
(C) 56,12 (D) 52,16
49 8
(C) (D) 2 2 2
31. If a + b + c = 1 and p = ab + bc + ca, then :
27 5
1 1 1
1 1 1 1 (A) p 2 (B) – p
22. Sum the series : 1 – ...... . 2 2 2
3 32 33 34
1 1
3 4 (C) – p 1 (D) – 1 p
(A) (B) 2 2
4 3
32. If a2 + b2 + c2 + d2 = 25 , out of the following statments
2 1 the correct one is :
(C) (D)
3 3 (A) ab + bc + cd + da 25
(B) ab + bc +cd + da 25.
23. Evaluate 7 + 77 + 777 + ........... upto n terms.
25
7 (C) ab + bc + cd + da
(A) [10 n + 1 – 9n ] 2
81
25
7 (D) ab + bc + cd + da
(B) [10 n + 1 – 9n – 10] 2
81 33. x + y + z = 1 ; x z ; x, y, z are real numbers and
7 1 1 1
(C) [10 n – 9n – 10]
81 x y z = m. How rnany of the following values of
7 rn are always possible.
(D) [10 n + 1 – n – 10] (i) m = 6, (ii) m = 8, (iii) m = 10 and iv) m = 12
81
(A) 1 (B) 2
2 4 8 16 (C) 3 (D) all
24. Find the sum the infinite G.P.: + ....
3 9 27 81
34. W hich one of the following is true about A.M., G.M. and
2 3
(A) (B) H.M. :
5 5 (A) H.M. G.M. A.M. (B) A.M. H.M. G.M.
19 8 (C) A.M. G.M. H.M. (D) G.M. H.M. A.M.
(C) (D)
27 5 35. If A.M. and G.M. of two numbers is 10 and 8 respectively
1 1 1 then find their H.M. :
25. The sum of 6 terms of G.P. , , ..... (A) 9 (B) 12
2 4 8
(C) 6 (D) 6.4
93 63
(A) (B)
64 64
1023 19 36. If a, b, c are in G.P. and a1/x = b1/y = c1/z, then x, y, z are in:
(C) (D)
512 36 (A) A.P. (B) G.P.
1/2 1/4
26. 6 . 6 .6 ...... 1/8
=? (C) H.P. (D) None
(A) 6 (B) b c–a c a–b a b–c
37. If , and are in A.P. and
(C) 216 (D) 36 a b c
27. If there are 4 G.M.s between 2 and 486, then find the a+b+c 0, then :
third G.M. ac 2ac
(A) b = (B) b =
(A) 6 (B) 18 a c a c
(C) 54 (D) 162 a c
(C) b = (D) b = ac
2
PAGE # 55
38. If a,b,c are in G.P., then log a, log b, log c are in : 2. The sum of all two digit numbers each of which leaves
remainder 3 when divided by 5 is :
(A) A.P. (B) G.P. [Delhi NTSE Stage-1 2013]
(C) H.P. (D) None (A) 952 (B) 999
(C) 1064 (D) 1120
4 9 16 25 3. If a1, a2..........., a19 are the first 19 term of an AP and
39. The infinite sum 1 + 2 3 + ..... equals :
7 7 7 74 19
a1 + a8 + a12 + a19 = 224. Then ai is equal to :

27 21
(A) (B) i 1
14 13 [Harayana NTSE Stage-1 2013]
49 256 (A) 896 (B) 1064
(C) (D) (C) 1120 (D) 1164
27 147
4. The sum of 18 consecutive natural numbers is a perfect
1 1 1 1 1 square. The smallest possible value of this sum is :
40. + ....... equals : [Harayana NTSE Stage-1 2014]
1 3 6 10 15
(A) 144 (B) 169
(A) 2 (B) 3
(C) 225 (D) 289
(C) 5 (D) 1 2 3
5. The sum 2 4 2 4 2
....
2 2 2
41. If a , b , c are in arithmetic progression, then the terms 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 3 34
1/(a + b), 1/(c + a), 1/(b + c) will form : 99
----- + [Harayana NTSE Stage-1 2014]
(A) A.P. (B) G.P. 1 99 2 99 4
(C) H.P. (D) none of these
(A) 0.46 and 0.47 (B) 0.47 and 0.48
42. The arithmetic mean and the geometric mean of two (C) 0.48 and 0.49 (D) 0.49 and 0.50
distinct 2– digit numbers x and y are two integers one 6. If x and y are two positive real numbers such that their
sum is one, then the maximum value of x4y + xy4 is -
of which can be obtained by reversing the digits of the [Harayana NTSE Stage-1 2014]
other. Then x + y equals : 1 1
(A) (B)
(A) 82 (B) 116 6 8
(C) 130 (D) 148 1 1
(C) (D)
43. The sum of the infinite series : 12 16
1 2 3 n 7. If a1, a2, a3, ........... is an arithmetic progression with
... .... 98
10 10 2 10 3 10 n
1 10 common difference 1 and ai 137 , then the value
(A) (B) i 1
9 81 of a2 + a4 + a6 + ......a98 is :
1 17 [Harayana NTSE Stage-1 2014]
(C) (D) (A) 67 (B) 83
8 22 (C) 93 (D) 98
44. p, q, r, s and t are in A.P. and are equal. 8. A club consists of members whose ages are in A.P. the
common difference being 3 months. If the youngest
1 1 1 3 members of the club is just 7 years old and the sum of
If q + r + s = 15 and , which is G.M. of
q r s 5 the ages of all the members is 250 years, then the
number of members in the club are :
p and t ? [Karnataka NTSE Stage-1 2014]
(A) 3 (B) 5 (A) 15 (B) 20
(C) 25 (D) 30
9. Sum of series (1+2) + (3 + 5) + (6 +7) + (9 + 10) + .......+
45. The second, first and third term of an arithmetic (93 + 94) + (95 + 97) +(98 + 99) will be :
progression form a geometric progression in that (A) 5050 (B) 3750
order. W hich of the following can be the common ratio (C) 1350 (D) 4250
of the geometric progression ? 10. Sum of last two terms of an A.P. is 60. If first term is 11
(A) 2 (B) 3 and common differences 2, then the number of terms
in the A.P. is :
(C) 2 (D) – 2 [Rajasthan NTSE Stage-1 2016]
(A) 22 (B) 20
(C) 11 (D) 19
11. The first term of an A.P. is 5, the last term is 45 and the
1. The sum of the third and seventh terms of an A.P. is 6 sum is 400. Then the fourth term of A.P. is
and their product is 8, then common difference is :
[Rajasthan NTSE Stage-1 2017]
(A) 1 (B) 2 (A) 13 (B) 11
1 1
(C) (D) (C) 15 (D) 14
2 4
PAGE # 56
To calculate what percentage of a is b, use the
The word 'percentage' literally means 'per hundred' b

formula : Percentage = ×100.
or 'for every hundred.' Therefore, whenever we a
calculate something as a part of 100, that part is
Ex.4 W hat percentage of 240 is 90 ?
numerically termed as percentage.
90
In other words, percentage is a ratio whose second Sol. Percentage = × 100 = 37.5%.
240
term is equal to 100. i.e. 1 : 4 can be written as 25 : 100
or 25%, 3 : 8 can be written as 37.5 : 100 or 37.5%, 3 :2 Ex.5 W hat percentage of 75 is 125 ?
can be written as 150 : 100 or 150%, and so on. 125
Sol. Percentage ×100 = 166.66%.
To express a% as a fraction divide it by 100. 75
i.e. a% = a/100 REMARK :
To express a fraction (x/y) as a percent multiply it by In short, if you ask yourself, “of what are we calculating
100. percentage ?” you will get the answer of a. Therefore, a
i.e. x/y = (x/y x 100)% will form the whole and b will form the part of the whole.
Basic Formula of Percentage : Percentage increase/decrease when a quantity

p ‘a’ is increased/decreased to become another
p% of a number N is = N ×
100 quantity ‘b’.
Ex.1 W hat is 37.5% of 648 ? Percentage Inc rease/Decrease
Increase / Decrease
37.5 = × 100
Sol. 37.5% of 648 = × 648 Initial Value
100
b–a
375 100, when b a ;(increase )
= × 648 = 3 × 81 = 243. a
1000
= a–b
100, when b a ; (decrease )
Ex.2 W hat is 20% of 50% of 60% of 200 ? a
Therefore new quantity b
60 50 20
Sol. Required percentage 200
100 100 × 100 = 12.
percentage increase
a 1
100
Ex.3 In a market survey, 20% opted for product B & the = percentage decrease
remaining individuals were uncertain. If the difference a 1–
100
between those who opted for product B and those who
were uncertain was 720. How many individuals were Ex.6 A dealer buys products for Rs.80 and hikes up the
covered in the survey ? price to Rs.125. He sells it to the customer after
Sol. Clearly, 80% were uncertain.
giving a discount of Rs.5. Find his profit percentage.
80% of x – 20% of x = 720
Sol. Profit percentage = Percentage Increase/Decrease
60 in his income.
60% of x = 720 or x = 720
100 Pr ofit 120 – 80
= ×100 = ×100 = 50%.
Cost Pr ice 80
720 100
So, x = = 1200.
60 Ex.7 A dealer sells goods priced at Rs.180 after giving a
discount of 25%. Find his selling price.
To increase or decrease a number by x% , multiply
[100 x] 25
the number by Sol. Selling price after discount = 180 1 – = 135.
100 100
W here, (+) Increase, (–) Decrease.
If the price of a commodity increase/decrease by r%,
REMARK : then the decrease/increase in consumption so as
To solve these type of problems calculate x% of given r
not to change the expenditure is : 100 %
number & add or subtract the value from given number (100 r)
for increase or decrease respectively.

PAGE # 5757
Ex.8 The price of wheat falls by 16%. By what percentage a Given below are the fractions converted into
person can increase the consumption of wheat so that percentage.
his overall budget does not change ? Fraction Percentage Fraction Percentage Fraction Percentage
1 1 1
r 2
50%
10
10%
18
5.55%
Sol. Increase in consumption = 100 %
(100 r) 1
33.33%
1
9.09%
1
5.26%
3 11 19
1 1
16 1
100 % = 400 % = 19.04%
25% 12
8.33% 5%
4 20
= 19%.
84 21 1 1 1
20% 7.69% 21
4.76%
5 13
If one quantity A is x% more or less than another 1

16.66%
1
7.14%
1
4.54%
6 14 22
quantity B, than B is less or more than A by : 1 1
1
14.28% 6.66% 4.34%
7 15 23
x
100 1 1 1
100 x 8
12.50%
16
6.25% 24
4.16%
1 1 1
11.11% 5.88% 4%
Ex.9 The salary of Ramesh is 25% more than that of 9 17 25
Anil’s salary. By what percen tage is Anil’s salary

Ex.12 The salary of Sachin Tendulkar is 20% more than
less than that of Ramesh’s ?
that of Ricky Ponting. By what percentage is Ricky’s
Sol. Anil’s salary is less than that of Ramesh’s by
salary less than that of Sachin’s ?
x 25
= × 100 = × 100 = 20%. 1
100 x 125 Sol. 20% = , so if Ricky’s salary is divided into 5 parts,
5
Ex.10 Vijay’s salary was reduced by 50%. Again the reduced Sachin’s salary will one more part added to Rickey’s
salary was increased by 50%. Then, what will be the % salary. i.e. Therefore, if Ricky’s salary is 5 parts,
loss in salary ?
Sachin’s salary is 6 parts. Now if Sachin’s salary is
Sol. Say, salary was Rs.100
6 parts, Ricky’s salary is one part less. Therefore, for
Reduction 50%
th
Now salary = Rs. 50 1
Sachin, Ricky’s salary is less or 16.66% less.
6
Increase = 50%
50 150 Ex.13 A ball drops from a height of 4802 m. Thereafter, it
= Rs.75
100 bounces every time to a height which is 14.28% less
100 75 than its previous height. W hat height will the ball reach
Loss % = = 25
100
on its 4th bounce ?
Hence, loss is 25%.
1
Sol. I wonder how many of you will notice that 14.28% =
Ex.11 Entry fee in an exhibition was Rs.1. Later, this was 7
th
reduced by 25% which increased the sale by 20%. 1
Therefore, the ball is rising up to a height which is
Then find the percentage of slump in business. 7
Sol. Let the total original sale be Rs. 100. Then, original less than the previous height. Or, the ball is rising up to
number of visitors = 100. 6
a height which is of the previous height.
120 7
New number of visitors = = 160. Therefore, on its 4th bounce the ball will reach a height of
0.75
Increase% = 60%. 6 6 6 6
4802 × × × × = 2592 m.
7 7 7 7
Ex.14 A man spends 75% of his income. If his income is
increased by 20% and he increased his expenditure
Conversion of Fractions into Percentages : by 10%. By what % will saving increased ?
K n o w in g c o n versio n o f c o m m o n frac t io n s in to Sol. Let his income be Rs 100, Expenditure = Rs. 75.
percentages helps your convert many fractions into Now, Income is increased by 20%.
percentage immediately, For example, knowing that New income = 120, expenditure is increased by 10%
1 3 75 110
= 12.5% will help you convert fractions like = = Rs. 82.50
8 8 100
Saving = 120 – 82.50 = 37.50
5
or into percentages immediately.. Earlier saving = 100 – 75 = 25
8
37.50 25
Increase in saving = × 100 = 50%.
25

PAGE # 5858
Ex.15 A students scores 40 marks in an examination and Ex.18 10% of the voters did not cast their votes in an election
fails by 26 marks. If the passing percentage is 33 then between two candidates. 10% of the votes polled were
find the maximum marks in the examination. found invalid. The successful candidate got 54% of the
Sol. Let, the maximum marks in the examination is 100. valid votes and won by majority of 1620 votes. The num-
Then he needs 33 marks to pass. ber of voters enrolled on the voter’s list was
But, passing marks required are 40 + 26 = 66 marks. (A) 25000 (B) 33000
33 marks are required to pass if maximum marks are (C) 35000 (D) 40000
100 Sol. Let the total number of voters be x.
Here, 66 marks are required to pass, then maximum Then, Votes polled = 90% of x.
100 66 Valid votes = 90% of (90% of x).
marks are = 200 marks. 54% of [90% of (90% of x)] – 46% of
33
[90% of (90 of x)] = 1620
8% of [90% of (90% of x)] = 1620
8 90 90
If a quantity x is increased or decreased successively × x = 1620
by A%, B%, C% then the final value of x will be 100 100 100
A B C 1620 100 100 100

=x 1 1 1 . x=
100 100 100 8 90 90
Let the present population of town be P and let there
be an increase or decrease of R% per annum. x = 25000.
n
R
Then Population after n years = P 1 Ex.19 A cricket team won 40% of the total number of
100
If length & breadth of a rectangle is changed by a % & matches it played during a year. If it lost 50% of the
b% respectively, than % change in area will be matches played and 20 matches were drawn. Find the
(a b) total number of matches played by the team during the
= a b %
100 year.
(use +ve for increase & –ve for decrease) Sol. 40% of x + 50% of x + 20 = x
Ex.16 The population of a variety of tiny bush in an where x = Total number of matches
experimental field increased by 10% in the first year,
increased by 8% in the second year but decreased by
10% in the third year. If the present number of bushes 40 50
x x + 20 = x or x = 200
in the experimental field is 26730, then find the number 100 100
of bushes in the beginning.
Sol. Let the number of bushes in the beginning is P so, Short cut :
10 8 10 10% of the matches were drawn. So by unitary method
P× 1 1 1 = 26730
100 100 100
10% 20%
26730 10
P= 10
10 8 10 100% ?
1 1 1
100 100 100 200
10 25 10
P= 26730 Ex.20 5% of income of A is equal to 15% of income of B and
11 27 9
10% of income of B is equal to 20% of income of C.
P = 25000.
If the income of C is Rs. 2,000, then find the total
Ex.17 The length of a rectangle is increased by 10%. W hat
will be the percentage decrease in its breadth so as to income of A, B and C.
have a constant area ?
ab 5 15 10 20
Sol. Applying percentage change = a + b + Sol. A= B& B= C
100 100 100 100 100
Let decrease in breadth be x%.
A = 3B and B = 2C = 2 × 2000 = 4000
10 x 11x
Then 0 = 10 – x – = 10 A = 3 × 4000 = 12000
100 10
A + B + C = 12000 + 4000 + 2000 = 18000.
100 1
x= =9 %
11 11

PAGE # 5959
11. In an examination, a student needs to get 45% to
secure passing marks. A student got 138 marks and
failed by 15%. W hat were the maximum marks?
1. If 37% of a number is 990.86, what will be approxi-
(A) 400 (B) 450
mately 19% of that number ?
(A) 600 (B) 500 (C) 460 (D) 500
(C) 700 (D) 550 12. Avinash spends 30% of his income on conveyance.
2. P assing p ercentag e mark s in an exam is 40 . A 1
obtained 72 out of 200. By what per cent did he fail? of the remaining on house rent and the balance on
4
(A) 8 (B) 5 food. If he spends Rs. 300 on conveyance, what is the
(C) 4 (D) 6 expenditure on house rent ?
3. The price of rice increased from Rs.15 by 15% and (A) Rs. 525 (B) Rs. 675
then reduced by 30 paise. W hat was the net increase? (C) Rs. 175 (D) Rs. 200
(A) 10% (B) 12%
(C) 13% (D) 23% 13. If x% of a is the same as y% of b, then z% of b is :
xy x
4. In order to increase sales, price of a product was (A) % of a (B)
decreased by 20%. The net sales increased by 28%. z zy % of a
W hat is the increase in unit sales ? z xz
(A) 48% (B) 50% (C) % of a (D) % of a
xy y
(C) 60% (D) 83%
14. In an examination, A got 10% marks less than B; B got
5. If 1L of water is added to 5 L of a 20% solution of sugar 25% marks more than C and C got 20% less than D. If
in water, what is the strength of the solution now? A got 360 marks out of 500, then the percentage of
(A) 12.66 (B) 8.33% marks obtained by D was :
(C) 16.66% (D) 16% (A) 70 (B) 75
6. Al Pacino invested 40% of his money in shares, 20% (C) 80 (D) 90
of the rest in property and lost 25% of the remaining in 15. In an election involving two candidates, 68 votes were
a casino. W hat per cent does he have now?
found invalid. The winning candidate scores 52% and
(A) 15 (B) 42
wins by 98 votes. The total number of votes casted is :
(C) 30 (D) 36
(A) 2450 (B) 2382
Directions for questions 7 to 9 : (C) 2158 (D) 2518
Answer the questions based on the given information.
16. The price of sugar is increased by 20%. As a result, a
In an election, there were only 2 candidates. The fam ily decreases its co nsum ptio n by 2 5% . Th e
2 expenditure of the family on sugar will be decreased
losing candidate received 66 % of the votes the by :
3
(A) 10% (B) 5%
winner got. If the votes polled in loser were 60 less
(C) 14% (D) 15%
than that of winner, then :
17. A man’s basic pay for a 40-hour week is Rs. 20. Over-
7. How many votes did the loser get ?
time is paid for at 25% above the basic rate. In a cer-
(A) 200 (B) 150
tain week, he worked overtime and his total wage was
(C) 120 (D) 160
Rs. 25. He therefore, worked for :
8. How many total votes were cast ? (A) 45 hr (B) 48 hr
(A) 225 (B) 300 (C) 47 hr (D) 50 hr
(C) 180 (D) 240
18. W hen any number is divided by 12, then dividend
9. W hat per cent of the total votes did the winner get? 1
(A) 60 (B) 80 becomes th of the other number. By how much
4
(C) 66.66 (D) 65 percent first n umber is g reater than the seco nd
10. If the numerator of a fraction is increased by 25% and number ?
the denominator decreased by 20%, the new value is (A) 150 (B) 200
5 (C) 300 (D) Date inadequate
. W hat was the original fraction ? 4
4 19. A tempo is insured to the extent of of its original
3 4 5
(A) (B) value. If the premium on it at the rate of 1.3 percent
5 5
amounts to Rs.910, the original value of the tempo is :
7 3
(C) (D) (A) Rs.78500 (B) Rs.80000
8 7
(C) Rs.82500 (D) Rs.87500

PAGE # 6060
20. Gauri went to the stationers and bought things worth 28. 8% of the people eligible to vote are between 18 and
Rs.25, out of which 30 paise went on sales tax on 21 years of age. In an election, 85% of those eligible to
taxable purchases. If the tax rate was 6%, then what vote, who were between 18 and 21, actually voted. In
was the cost of the tax free items ? that election, the number of persons between 18 and
(A) Rs. 15 (B) Rs. 15.70 21, who actually voted, was what percent of those
(C) Rs. 19.70 (D) Rs. 20 eligible to vote ?
(A) 4.2 (B) 6.4
21. In a recent survey, 40% houses contained two or more
(C) 6.8 (D) 8.0
people. Of those houses containing only one person,
25% were having only a male. W hat is the percentage 29. A bag contains 600 coins of 25 p denomination and
of all houses, which contain exactly one female and no 1200 coins of 50 p denomination. If 12% of 25 p coins
males ? and 24% of 50 p coins are removed, the percentage of
(A) 15 (B) 45 money removed from the bag is nearly :
(C) 75 (A) 15.6% (B) 17.8%
(D) Can’t be determined (C) 21.6% (D) 30%
22. Fresh fruit contains 68% water and dry fruit contains 30. Due to an increase of 30% in the price of eggs, 3 eggs
20% water. How much dry fruit can be obtained from less are available for Rs. 7.80. Find the increased price
100 kg of fresh fruits ? per dozen ?
(A) 32 kg (B) 40 kg (A) Rs. 8.64 (B) Rs. 8.88
(C) 52 kg (D) 80 kg (C) Rs. 9.36 (D) Rs. 10.40
23. One bacteria splits into eight bacteria of the next 2
31. of the voters promise to vote for P and the rest
generation. But due to environment, only 50% of one 5
generation can produce the next generation. If the promised to vote for Q. Of these, on the last day 15% of
seventh generation number is 4096 million, what is the voters went back of their promise to vote for P and
the number in first generation ? 25% of voters went back of their promise to vote for
(A) 1 million (B) 2 million Q, and P lost by 2 votes. Then, the total number of
(C) 4 million (D) 8 million voters is :
(A) 100 (B) 110
24. A man earns x% on the first Rs.2,000 and y% on the (C) 90 (D) 95
rest of his income. If he earns Rs.700 from Rs.4,000
and Rs.900 from Rs.5,000 of income, find x%. 32. In some quantity of ghee, 60% is pure ghee and 40%
(A) 20% (B) 15% is vanaspati. If 10 kg of pure ghee is added, then the
(C) 25% (D) None of these strength of vanaspati ghee becomes 20%. The original
quantity was :
25. I bought 5 pens, 7 pencils and 4 erasers. Rajan bought (A) 10 kg (B) 15 kg
6 pens, 8 erasers and 14 pencils for an amount which (C) 20 kg (D) 25 kg
was half more what I had paid. W hat percent of the
total amount paid by me was paid for the pens? 33. In expressing a length of 81.472 km as nearly as
(A) 37·5% (B) 62·5% p ossible with three sig nificant d ig its, fin d th e
(C) 50% (D) None of these percentage error.
(A) 0.014% (B) 0.018%
26. A student took five papers in an examination, where (C) 0.024% (D) 0.034%
the full marks were the same for each paper. His marks
in these papers were in the proportion of 6 : 7 : 8 : 9 : 34. If 50% of (x – y) = 30% of (x + y). then what percent of x
10. In all papers together, the candidate obtained 60% is y ?
of the total marks. Then, the number of papers in which (A) 10% (B) 15%
he got more than 50% marks is : (C) 25% (D) 50%
(A) 1 (B) 3 35. Mr. Jones gave 40% percent of the money he had, to
(C) 4 (D) 5 his wife. He also gave 20% of the remaining amount to
27. A college has raised 75% of the amount it needs for a each of his three sons. Half of the amount now left was
new building by receiving an average donation of spent on miscellaneous items and the remaining
Rs. 600 from the people already solicited. The people amount of Rs. 12,000 was deposited in the bank. How
already solicited represent 60% of the people, the much money did Mr. Jones have initially ?
college will ask for donations. If the college is to raise (A) Rs. 1,00,000 (B) Rs. 1,10,000
exactly the amount needed for the new building, what (C) Rs. 1,15,000 (D) Rs. 1,20,000
should be the average donation from the remaining 36. The value of machine depreciates at the rate 10% per
people to be solicited ? . annum. If its present value is Rs. 1,62,000. W hat was
(A) 300 (B) 250 the value of the machine 2 years ago ?
(C) 400 (D) 500 (A) Rs. 100000 (B) Rs. 150000
(C) Rs. 200000 (D) Rs. 250000

PAGE # 6161
37. During one year, the population of a town increased by 45. Peter could save 10% of his income. But two years
5% and during the next year, the population decreased later when his income is increased by 20%, he could
by 5%. If the total population is 9975 at the end of the save the same amount only as before. By how much
second year, then what was the population size in the percent has his expenditure increased ?
beginning of the first year ? 2
(A) 22% (B) 22 %
(A) 10000 (B) 15000 9
(C) 20000 (D) 25000 1
(C) 23 % (D) 24%
3
38. In an examination, 80% of the students passed in
English, 85% in Mathematics and 75% in both English 46. Mr. X, a businessman had the income in the year 2000,
and Mathematics. If 40 students failed in both the such that he earned a profit of 20% on his investment
subjects, find the total number of students. in the business. In the year 2001, his investment was
(A) 350 (B) 400 less by Rs. 5000 but still had the same income (Income
(C) 450 (D) 500 = Investment + Profit) as that in 2000. Thus, the percent
profit earned in 2001 increased by 6%. W hat was his
39. Two tailors X and Y are paid a total of Rs. 550 per week investment in 2000 ?
by their employer. If X is paid 120 percent of the sum (A) Rs. 1,02,000 (B) Rs. 1,05,000
paid to Y, how much is Y paid per week ? (C) Rs. 1,50,500 (D) None of these
(A) Rs. 200 (B) Rs. 250
(C) Rs. 300 (D) None of these 47. Prices register an increase of 10% on foodgrains and
15% on other items of expenditure. If the ratio of an
40. 1100 boys and 700 girls are examined in a test; 42% of employee’s expenditure on foodgrains and other items
the boys and 30% of the girls pass. The percentage of be 2 : 5, by how much should his salary be increased
the total who failed is : in order that he may maintain the same level of
2 consumption as before, h is present salary being
(A) 58% (B) 62 %
3 Rs. 2590.
(C) 64% (D) 78%
(A) Rs. 323.75 (B) Rs. 350
41. In an examination, 5% of the applicants were found (C) Rs. 360.50 (D) None of these
ineligible and 85% of the eligible candidates belonged
48. In the month of January, the Railway Police caught 4000
to the general category. If 4275 eligible candidates
ticketless travellers. In February, the number rose by
belo ng ed to other catego ries, th en h ow m an y
5%. However, due to constant vigilance by the Police
candidates applied for the examination ?
and the Railway staff, the number reduced by 5% and
(A) 30,000 (B) 35,000
in April it further reduced by 10%. The total number of
(C) 37,000 (D) None of these
ticketless travellers caught in the month of April was :
42. If A = x% of y and B = y% of x, then which of the following (A) 3125 (B) 3255
is true ? (C) 3575 (D) 3591
(A) A is smaller than B. (B) A is greater than B.
49. In an examination in which full marks were 800, A gets
(C) Relationship between A and B cannot be determined
20% more than B, B gets 20% more than C, and C
(D) None of these.
gets 15% less than D. If A got 576, what percentage of
43. From the salary of an officer, 10% is deducted as house full marks did D get (approximately) ?
rent, 20% of the rest he spends on conveyance, 20% (A) 45.7% (B) 51.2%
of the rest he pays as income tax and 10% of the (C) 58.8% (D) 61.7%
balance he spends on clothes. Then, he left with Rs.
50. One type of liquid contains 20% water and the second
15,552. Find his total salary.
type of liquid contains 35% of water. A glass is filled
(A) Rs. 25,000 (B) Rs. 30,000
with 10 parts of first liquid and 4 parts of second liquid.
(C) Rs. 35,000 (D) Rs. 40,000
The percentage of water in the new mixture in the
44. The price of an article was increased by r%. Later the glass is :
new price was decreased by r%. If the latest price was 2
Rs. 1, then the original price was : (A) 20% (B) 24 %
7
1 r2 (C) 37% (D) 40%
(A) Rs. 1 (B) Rs. 100
1 r2 10000
(C) Rs. (D) Rs.
100 10000 r 2

PAGE # 6262
6. If cost of an object is increased by 40% and then
decreased by 20%. Find the % change in cost.
(NTSE-Stage-I/Haryana/2008)
(A) 20% more (B) 20% less
1. The price of sugar rises by 50%. By what fraction a (C) 12% more (D) 12% less
family reduces the consumption of sugar, so that its
expenditure does not increases ? 7. In an examination there were 1100 Boys and 900 Girls.
(NTSE Stage-I/Raj./2007) 50% of the boys and 40 % girls passed the examination.
1 1 The percentage of candidates who failed is :
(A) (B) 3
4 (NTSE-Stage - I/M.P./2009)
1 2 (A) 45% (B) 54.5%
(C) (D)
2 3 (C) 45.5% (D) 55%
2. If half of x is y and one-third of y is z then : 8. A mixture of water and milk contains 80% milk. In 50
(NTSE-Stage-I/Bangalore/2007)
litres of such a mixture, how many litres of water is
(A) z = 6% of x (B) z = 16.66% of x
required to increase the percentage of water to 50% ?
(C) z = 60% of x (D) z = 30% of x
(NTSE Stage-I/Raj./2010)
4 5 (A) 45 litre (B) 30 litre
3. Total percentage by which of 70 less then of 112 :
5 7 (C) 20 litre (D) 15 litre
(NTSE Stage -I/Haryana/2007)
9. Two numbers are respectively 25% and 40% less than
(A) 42% (B) 30%
a third number. W hat percent is the second of the first ?
(C) 24% (D) 36%
4. Rajmal sold 40 quintals of sugar through an agent at (A) 90% (B) 80%
th e rate o f Rs. 60 0 per qu in tal. H e allo ws 2 % (C) 70% (D) 60%
c om missio n to the agent. Th e am ou nt o f
10. 36 Seconds, is what percentage of one hour?
commission earned by the agent is :
(NTSE-Stage-I/Himachal/2007)
(A) Rs.480 (B) Rs.460 (A) 6 (B) 0.1
(C) 0.01 (D) 1
(C) Rs.500 (D) Rs.510
11. The salary of a worker is first increased by 12% and
5. In a bus depot, it was found that the number of buses
thereafter it was reduced by 12%, what was the
acquired in 2007 is 6 more than that of in 2006 and change in the salary [Delhi NTSE Stage-1 2016]
40% more than the number of buses acquired in 2005. (A) 1.44% decrease (B) 1% increase
Number of buses acquired in 2005 and 2006 are the (C) no change (D) 1.44% increase
same, how many buses were acquired in 2007 ? 12. In the certain examination, 77% candidates passed
(NTSE-Stage-I/Bangalore/2008) in English and 34% failed in Mathematics. If 13%
failed in both the subjects and 784 candidates
(A) 33 (B) 27
passed in both the subjects, then the total number of
(C) 21 (D) 15 candidates was [Delhi NTSE Stage-1 2016]
(A) 1200 (B) 1400
(C) 1600 (D) 1800

PAGE # 6363
RATIO Comparison of ratios
Ratio : If a and b (b 0) are two quantities of the same In order to compare two given ratios, we follow the
a following steps :
kind, then the fraction is called the ratio of a to b, we
b Step-I : Obtain the given ratios
write it as a : b.
Step-II : Express each one of them in the form of a
a a anticedent
or = fraction in the simplest form.
b b consequent
Step-III : Find the L.C.M. of the denominators of the
In the ratio a : b, the first term is ‘a’ and the second term
fractions obtained in step II.
is ‘b’. A ratio is said to be in the simplest form if its two
terms have no common factor other than 1. Step-IV : Obtain first fraction and its denominator. Divide
the L.C.M. obtained in step III by the denominator to get
NOTE :
a number x (say).
(i) The ratio of two numbers is usually expressed in its Now, multiply the numerator and denominator of the
simplest form. fraction by x. Apply the same procedure to the other
(ii) In a ratio, w e co mp are tw o qu an tities. Th e fraction.
Now, the denominators of both the fractions will be
comparison becomes meaningless if the quantities
same.
being compared are not of the same kind i.e. they are
not measured in the same units. Step-V : Compare the numerators of the fractions
ob tain ed in step IV. The fractio n having larger
(iii) It is just meaningless to compare 20 bags with
numerator will be larger than the other.
200 crows. Therefore, to find the ratio of two quantities,
they must be expressed in the same units. Ex.3 Compare the ratios, 7 : 6 and 4 : 9.
Sol. W riting the given ratios as fractions, we have
(iv) Since the ratio of two quantities of the same kind
7 4
determines how many times one quantity is contained 7:6= and 4 : 9 =
6 9
by the other. So the ratio of any two quantities of the Now, L.C.M. of 6 and 9 is 18
same kind is an abstract quantity. In other words, ratio Making the denominator of each fraction equal to 18,
has no unit or it is independent of the units used in the we have
quantities compared. 7 7 3 21 4 4 2 8
= = and = =
6 6 3 18 9 9 2 18
(v) The order of the terms in a ratio a : b is very important.
Clearly, 21 > 8.
The ratio 3 : 2 is different from the ratio 2 : 3.
21 8 7 4
> >
Ex.1 Express the ratio 45 : 108 in its simplest form. 18 18 6 9
Sol. In order to express the given ratio in its simplest form
Ex.4 5 kg of wheat flour is mixed with 500 gm of sugar
we divide its first and second terms by their HCF. extract. W hat is the ratio of sugar extract to the rest of
W e have, the mixture, after adding 1.5 kg of water ?
45 = 3 × 3 × 5 and 108 = 2 × 2 × 3 × 3 × 3 Sol. W e first need to convert all figures into one single unit.
So, HCF of 45 and 108 is 3 × 3 = 9 W heat flour = 5 kg
45 45 9 5 W ater = 1.5 kg
45 : 108 = = = = 5 : 12
108 108 9 12 Sugar extract = 500 gm = 0.5 kg
Hence, 45 : 108 in its simplest form is 5 : 12 Total weight of the mixture = 7 kg
Ex.2 If a : b = 5 : 9 and b : c = 4 : 7, find a : b : c.
0. 5
Sol. a : b = 5 : 9 and b : c = 4 : 7 Ratio of sugar extract to the total mixture =
7
9 9 63
or, b : c = 4: 7 =9: = 1 : 14
4 4 4
Ratio of sugar extract to the rest of the mixture
63
a:b:c=5:9: = 20 : 36 : 63.
4 0 .5
= = 1 : 13
6 .5
PAGE # 64
PROPORTION
(i) We say that x is directly proportional to y, if x = ky for
Proportion : Four (non-zero) quantities of the same some constant k and we write, x y.
kind a, b, c & d are said to be in proportion if the ratio (ii) We say that x is inversely proportional to y, if xy = k
of a to b is equal to the ratio of c to d. 1
for some constant k and we write, x .
a c y
i.e., if = , we write it as a : b : : c : d.
b d Ex.5 Are 36, 49, 6, 7 in proportion ?
Here a, b, c & d are called first, second, third & fourth Sol. W e have,
proportions respectively. Product of extremes = 36 × 7 = 252
Product of means= 49 × 6 = 294
a, b, c & d are in proportion if ad = bc. Clearly, Product of extremes Product of means
Continued Proportion : The (non-zero) quantities of Hence, 36, 49, 6, 7 are not in proportion
the same kind a, b, c, d, e, f,... are said to be in Ex.6 If 3 : x : : 12 : 20, find the value of x.
a b c d e Sol. W e have 3 : x : : 12 : 20
continued proportion if = = = = ... 3, x, 12, 20 are in proportion
b c d e f
Product of extremes = Product of means
Mean Proportional : If a, b & c are in continued 3 × 20 = x × 12
proportion, then a & c are called first & third proportional 60 = 12x
respectively and b is called mean proportional of
12x 60
a and c. So, a : b : : b : c. = [Dividing both sides by 12]
12 12
a b x=5
Then, =
b c
Ex.7 Find out :
b2 = ac
(i) the fourth proportional to 4, 9, 12;
b= ac . (ii) the third proportional to 16 and 36;
(iii) the mean proportional between 0.08 and 0.18.
Compound Ratio : The compound ratio of the ratios
Sol. (i) Let the fourth proportional of 4, 9, 12 be x.
a : b, c : d & e : f is ace : bdf.
Then, 4 : 9 : : 12 : x
Comparison of Ratios : W e say that : 4 × x = 9 × 12
a c 9 12
(a : b) > (c : d) > . x= = 27.
b d 4
Fourth proportional to 4, 9, 12 is 27.
Duplicate Ratio : The duplicate ratio of a : b is a2 : b2.
(ii) Let the third proportional to 16 and 36 is x.
Sub-duplicate Ratio : The sub-duplicate ratio of a : b is
Then, 16 : 36 : : 36 : x
: .
36 36
Triplicate Ratio : The triplicate ratio of a : b is a3 : b3. 16 × x = 36 × 36 x= = 81.
16
Sub-triplicate Ratio : The sub-triplicate ratio of a : b is Third proportional to 16 and 36 is 81.
: . (iii) Mean proportional between 0.08 and 0.18

a c b d 8 18 144
Invertendo : If = then = . = 0.08 0.18 = =
b d a c 100 100 100 100
a c a b 12
Alternendo : If = then = . = = 0.12
b d c d 100
a c a b c d
Componendo : If = then = . Ex.8 W hat must be added to the numbers 6, 10, 14 and 22
b d b d
so that they are in proportion?
a c a b c d Sol. Let the required number be x.
Dividendo : If = then = .
b d b d Then, 6 + x, 10 + x, 14 + x, 22 + x are in proportion.
a c Product of extremes = Product of means
Componendo and Dividendo : If = (6 + x) (22 + x) = (10 + x)(14 + x)
b d
a b c d 132 + 6x + 22x + x2 = 140 + 10x + 14x + x2
then, a b = c d. 132 + 28x = 140 + 24x
28x – 24x = 140 – 132
a c e a c e 4x = 8
If = = then each ratio is equal to .
b d f b d f 8
x= = 2.
4
PAGE # 65
Ex.9 If three loaves of bread are consumed by 9 people, Ex.11 A starts business with Rs. 3500 and after 5 months,
how many people will consume 9 loaves of bread? B joins with A as his partner. After a year, the profit is
Sol. Suppose x people will consume 9 loaves of bread. divided in the ratio 2 : 3. W hat is B's contribution in the
More the people, more will be the number of loaves of capital?
bread required. Sol. Let B’s capital be Rs. x.
W e have, 3500 12 2
Then, =
Number of People Number of Loaves of bread 7x 3
9 3 14x = 126000 x = 9000.
x 9
Ex.12 Ramesh started a business by investing Rs. 25000.
9:x=3 :9 [direct proportion]
3 months later Mahesh joined the business by invest-
9× 9= x× 3
ing Rs. 25000. At the end of the year Ramesh got Rs.
81 = 3x
1000 more than Mahesh out of the profit. Find the total
81 profit.
x= = 27
3 Sol. Ramesh invested for 12 month, Mahesh invested for 9
Hence, 27 people will consume 9 loaves of bread. month.
Profit sharing ratio = 12x : 9x = 12 : 9 = 4 : 3.
PARTNERSHIP Let Capital be Rs P.
Partnership : W hen two or more than two persons 4

Profit of Ramesh = P
run a business jointly, they are called partners and 7
the deal is known as partnership. 3
Profit of Mahesh = P
7
Ratio of Division of Gains :
4 3
(i) W hen investments of all the partners are for the P = P + 1000
7 7
same time, the gain or loss is distributed among the
partners in the ratio of their investments. 4 3
P – P = 1000
7 7
Suppose A and B invest Rs.x and Rs.y respectively
for a year in a business, then at the end of the year : P
= 1000 P = Rs.7000.
(A’s share of profit) : (B’s share of profit) = x : y. 7
(ii) W hen investments are for different time periods, Ex.13 Nitesh & Jitesh invested Rs.15000 and Rs.18000
then equivalent capitals are calculated for a unit of respectively in a business. If the total profit at the end of
time by taking (capital × number of units of time). Now, the year is Rs. 8800 and Nitesh, being an active part-
gain or loss is divided in the ratio of these capitals. ner, gets an additional 12.5% of the profit, find the total
profit of Nitesh.
Suppose A invests Rs.x for t1 months and B invests Sol. Profit sharing ratio = 15000 : 18000 = 5 : 6
Rs.y for t2 months, then Total profit = 8800
A' s share in profit 12.5
Nitesh gets 12.5% of the profit = × 8800
B' s share in profit = 100
= Rs. 1100
A' s amount A' s time of investing of money
Net profit = 8800 – 1100 = Rs. 7700
B' s amount B' s time of investing of money
5
A' s share in profit x t1 Nitesh share in profit = × 7700 = 3500
5 6
B' s share in profit = y t2
Total profit of Nitesh = 3500 + 1100 = Rs. 4600.
Working and Sleeping Partners : A partner who Ex.14 Tanoj & Manoj started a business by investing Rs.
manages th e b usin ess is kn ow n as a working 75000 and Rs. 90000 respectively. It was decided to
partner and the one who simply invests the money is pay Tanoj a monthly salary of Rs. 1875 as he was the
a sleeping partner. active partner. At the end of the year if the total profit is
Ex.10 A and B invested Rs. 3600 and Rs. 4800 respectively Rs. 39000, find the profit of each.
to open a shop. At the end of the year B’s profit was Sol. Profit sharing ratio = 75000 : 90000 = 5 : 6
Rs.1208. Find A’s profit. Total profit = Rs. 39000
Sol. Profit sharing ratio = 3600 : 4800 = 3 : 4 Salary of Tanoj = 12 × 1875 = Rs. 22500
Profit left = Rs.39000 – Rs. 22500 = Rs.16500.
Profit of A 3
Profit of B 4 5
Tanoj’s profit = × 16500 = 7500.
11
3
Profit of A = Profit of B Total profit of Tanoj = 22500 + 7,500 = Rs. 30,000
4
3 6
Profit of A = × 1208 = Rs. 906 Manoj’s profit = × 16500 = Rs. 9,000
4 11
PAGE # 66
Ex.16 A milk vendor has 2 cans of milk. The first contains
25% water and the rest milk. The second contains
Alligation : It is the rule that enables us to find the ratio 50% water. How much milk should he mix from each
of the containers so as to get 12 litres of milk such that
in which two or more ingredients at the given price the ratio of water to milk is 3 : 5 ?
must be mixed to produce a mixture of a desired price. Sol. Let cost of 1 litre milk be Rs.1.
3
Milk in 1 litre mixture in 1st can = litre,
Mean Price : The cost price of a unit quantity of mixture 4
is called the mean price. 3

C.P. of 1 litre mixture in 1st can = Rs. .
4
Rule of Alligation : If two ingredients are mixed, then, 1
Milk in 1 litre mixture in 2nd can = litre,
2
Quantity of cheaper C.P. of dearer – Mean price
1
Quantity of dearer Mean price – C.P. of cheaper C.P. of 1 litre mixture in 2nd can = Rs. .
2
W e can also represent this thing as under 5
Milk in 1 litre of final mixture = litre,
8
C.P. of a unit quantity of cheaper C.P. of a unit quantity of dearer
(c) (d) 5
Mean price = Rs. .
Mean price 8
(m) By the rule of alligation, we have :
(d – m) (m – c) x 3/4 5 / 8
y = 5 / 8 1/ 2 ;
Suppose a container contains x units of liquid from
x 1/ 8 1
which y units are taken out and replaced by water. After y = 1/ 8 = 1 .
n operations, the quantity of pure liquid

C.P. of 1 litre mixture in 1st can C.P. of 1 litre mixture in 2nd can
n
y 3/4 1/2
= x 1– x units. Mean price
5/8
1/8 1/8
Ex.15 The cost of Type 1 rice is Rs.15 per kg and Type 2 rice
is Rs.20 per kg. If both type-1 and type-2 are mixed in W e will mix 6 from each can.
ratio of 2 : 3 , then find the price per kg of the mixed Ex.17 Tea worth Rs.126 per kg and Rs.135 per kg are mixed
with a third variety in the ratio 1 : 1 : 2. If the mixture is
variety of rice.
worth Rs. 153 per kg, then find the price of the third
Sol. Let the price of the mixed variety be Rs. x per kg. variety per kg.
Sol. Since first and second varieties are mixed in equal
By the rule of alligation, we have :
126 135
proportions, so their average price = Rs.
Cost of 1 kg of Type 1 rice Cost of 1 kg of Type 2 rice 2
Rs. 15 Rs. 20 = Rs.130.50
Mean price So, the mixture is formed by mixing two varieties, one
Rs. x
at Rs. 130.50 per kg and the other at say, Rs. x per kg
(20 – x) (x – 15) in the ratio 2 : 2, i.e., 1 : 1. W e have to find x.
By the rule of alligation, we have :
(20 – x ) 2
= Cost of 1 kg tea of 1st kind Cost of 1 kg tea of 2nd kind
( x – 15) 3
130.50 Rs. x
Mean price
60 – 3x = 2x – 30
Rs. 153
5x = 90
(x – 153) 22.50
x = 18.
x 153
So, price of the mixture is Rs.18 per kg. 1=
22.5
153 + 22.5 = x
x = Rs.175.50
PAGE # 67
Ex.18 A jar full of whisky contains 40% alcohol . A part of this 5. 12 labours can construct a road in 20 days. Then 30
whisky is replaced by another containing 19% alcohol labours can construct the same road in x days. The
and now the percentage of alcohol was found to be value of x will be found from the proportion.
26%. Find the quantity of whisky replaced.
(A) 12 : 30 :: 20 : x (B) 30 : 12 :: 20 : x
Sol. By the rule of alligation, we have :
(C) 30 : 12 :: x : 20 (D) 20 : 8 :: x : 20
Strength of first jar Strength of 2nd jar
6. The third proportional to (x2 – y2) and (x – y) is :
40% 19%
Mean strength x y
(A) (x + y) (B)
26% x–y
x–y
7 14 (C) (D) x2 – y2
x y
So, ratio of 1st and 2nd quantities = 7 : 14 = 1 : 2.
2 7. If the ratio of the areas of two circles is 100 : 1, then the
Required quantity replaced = .
3 ratio of their radii is :
Ex.19 A vessel is filled with liquid, 3 parts of which are water (A) 4 : 1 (B) 1 : 8
and 5 parts syrup. How much of the mixture must be (C)10 : 1 (D) 1 : 10
8. The ratio of the boys to girls in a class is 2 : 3. If 20% of
drown off and replaced with water so that the mixture
boys leave this class, then the new ratio of boys to girls
may be half water and half syrup ?
is :
Sol. Suppose the vessel initially contains 8 litres of liquid.
(A) 8 : 15 (B) 8 : 3
Let x litres of this liquid be replaced with water.
(C) 3 : 7 (D) 4 : 7
3x 9. An amount of Rs.735 was divided between A, B and C.
Quantity of water in new mixture = 3 – x litres.
8 If each of them had received Rs.25 less, their shares
5x would have been in the ratio of 1 : 3 : 2, The money

Quantity of syrup in new mixture = 5 – litres. received by C was :
8
(A) Rs. 195 (B) Rs. 200
3x 5x
3– x = 5– (C) Rs. 225 (D) Rs. 245
8 8
10. If a, b, c are in continued proportion, the expression
5x + 24 = 40 – 5x a2 ab b2
can be simplified to :
8 b2 bc c 2
10x = 16 x= . a c a
5 (A) (B)
a b c
8 1 1
So, part of the mixture replaced = = . c a c
5 8 5 (C) (D)
a b
11. A bag contains Rs. 600 in the from of 1 rupee, 50 paise
and 25 paise coins in the ratio 3 : 4 : 12. The number of
25 paise coins is :
(A) 600 (B) 800
1. If x : y = 5 : 2, then (8x + 9y) : (8x + 2y) is :
(C) 1200 (D) 900
(A) 22 : 29 (B) 26 : 61
(C) 29 : 22 (D) 25 : 27 12. The ages of a man and his son is in the ratio of 7 : 2.
After 15 years, they would be in the ratio of 2 : 1, what
2. If x : 6 : : 32 : 24 then, what is the value of x ? was father’s age when son was born ?
(A) 7 (B) 8 (A) 25 years (B) 30 years
(C) 6 (D) 5 (C) 35 years (D) 42 years
3. The ratio of 43.5 : 25 is same as : 13. The cost of manufacturing a product including labor,
(A) 2 : 1 (B) 4 : 1 material and overhead are in the ratio 5 : 7 : 3. If the
(C) 7 : 5 (D) 5 : 2 profits are calculated as 20% on costs, what is the
ratio of material costs to profit ?
4. The mean proportional between 234 and 104 is :
(A) 5 : 2 (B) 10 : 3
(A) 39 (B) 54
(C) 11 : 9 (D) 7 : 3
PAGE # 68
14. One year ago the ratio between Laxman’s and Gopal’s
salary was 3 : 4. The ratios of their individual salaries
21. A, B and C enter into a partnership. They invest
between last year’s and this year’s salaries are 4 : 5
Rs.40,000, Rs. 80,000 and Rs.1,20,000 respectively.
and 2 : 3 respectively. At present the total of their salary
At the end of the first year, B withdraws Rs.40,000,
is Rs. 4160. The salary of Laxman now, is :
while at the end of the second year, C withdraws
(A) Rs. 1040 (B) Rs. 1600
Rs.80,000. In what ratio will the profit be shared at the
(C) Rs. 2560 (D) Rs. 3120
end of 3 years ?
15. If Rs.510 be divided among A, B, C in such a way that A (A) 2 : 3 : 5 (B) 3 : 4 : 7
2 1 (C) 4 : 5 : 9 (D) None of these
gets of what B gets and B gets of what C gets,
3 4
then, their shares are respectively : 22. A and B started a business jointly. A’s investment was
thrice the investment of B and the period of his invest-
(A) Rs. 120, Rs. 240, Rs. 150
ment was two times the period of investment of B. If B
(B) Rs. 60, Rs. 90, Rs. 360
received Rs.4000 as profit, then their total profit is :
(C) Rs. 150, Rs. 300, Rs. 60 (D) None of these.
(A) Rs.16,000 (B) Rs.20,000
1 3 (C) Rs.24,000 (D) Rs.28,000
16. A fraction which bears the same ratio to that
27 11
5 23. A and B started a business with initial investments in
does to , is equal to : the ratio 14 : 15 and their annual profits were in the
9
ratio 7 : 6. If A invested the money for 10 months, for
1 1
(A) (B) how many months did B invest his money ?
55 11
(A) 6 (B) 7
3
(C) (D) 55 (C) 8 (D) 9
11
24. A and B started a business in partnership investing
17. The side of a triangle are in the ratio : : and
2 3 4 Rs. 20,000 and Rs. 15,000 respectively. After six
its perimeter is 104 cm. The length of the longest side months, C joined them with Rs. 20,000. W hat will be
is : B’s share in the total profit of Rs. 25,000. earned at the
(A) 52 cm (B) 48 cm end of 2 years from the starting of the business ?
(C) 32 cm (D) 26 cm (A) Rs. 7,500 (B) Rs. 9,000
18. The ratio of the number of boys and girls in a school is (C) Rs. 9,500 (D) Rs. 10,000
3 : 2. If 20% of the boys and 25% of the girls are 25. Arun, Kamal and Vinay invested Rs. 8000, Rs. 4000
scholarship holders, what percentage of the students and Rs. 8000 respectively in a business. Arun left after
does not get scholarship ? six months. If after eight months, there was gain of Rs.
(A) 56% (B) 70%
4005, then what will be the share of Kamal ?
(C) 78% (D) 80%
(A) Rs. 890 (B) Rs. 1335
19. The electricity bill of a certain establishment is partly
(C) Rs. 1602 (D) Rs. 1780
fixed and partly varies as the number of units of elec-
tricity consumed. W hen in a certain month 540 units 26. A and B start a business with investment of Rs. 5000
are consumed, the bill is Rs. 1800. In another month and Rs. 4500 respectively. After 4 months, A takes out
620 units are consumed and the bill is Rs. 2040. In yet half of his capital. After two more months, B takes out
another month 500 units are consumed. The bill for one-third of his capital while C joins them with a capi-
that month would be : tal of Rs. 7000. At the end of year they earn a profit of
(A) Rs. 1560 (B) Rs. 1680 Rs. 5080. Find the share of each member in the profit.
(C) Rs. 1840 (D) Rs. 1950 (A) A – Rs. 1400, B – Rs. 1900, C – Rs. 1780
20. Four milkmen rented a pasture. A grazed 24 cows for 3 (B) A – Rs. 1600, B – Rs. 1800, C – Rs. 1680
months, B 10 cows for 5 months, C 35 cows for 4 (C) A – Rs. 1800, B – Rs. 1500, C – Rs. 1780
months and D 21 cows for 3 months. If A’s share of (D) None of these
rent is Rs. 720, find the total rent of the field. 7 4 6
27. A, B and C enter into a partnership in the ratio : : .
(A) Rs. 3100 (B) Rs. 3150 2 3 5
After four months, A increase his share by 50%. If the
(C) Rs. 3200 (D) Rs. 3250
total profit at the end of one year be Rs. 21,600, then
B’s share in the profit is :
(A) Rs. 2100 (B) Rs. 2400
(C) Rs. 3600 (D) Rs. 4000
PAGE # 69
1 1 35. Two alloys containing copper and iron in the ratios 5 :
28. In a partnership, A invests of the capital for of the 8 and 5 : 3 are melted in equal qualities. The ratio of
6 6
1 1 iron to copper in the resulting alloy is
time, B invests of the capital for of the time and (A) 103 : 105 (B) 15 : 24
3 3
C, the rest of the capital for the whole time. Out of a (C) 105 : 103 (D) 19 : 21
profit of Rs. 4600, B’s share is :
36. 60 kg of an alloy A is mixed with 100 kg of alloy B. If alloy
(A) Rs. 650 (B) Rs. 800
A has lead and tin in the ratio 3 : 2 and alloy B has tin
(C) Rs. 960 (D) Rs. 1000
and copper in the ratio 1 : 4, then the amount of tin in
29. Manick received Rs.6000 as his share out of the total the new alloy is :
profit of Rs. 9000 which he and Raunak earned at the (A) 36 kg (B) 44 kg
end of one year. If Manick invested Rs. 20,000 for 6 (C) 53 kg (D) 80 kg
months, whereas Raunak invested his amount for the
whole year, what was the amount invested by Raunak ? 37. 15 litres of mixtures contains 20% alcohol and the rest
(A) Rs. 4000 (B) Rs. 5000 water. If 3 litres of water be mixed with it, the percent-
(C) Rs. 6000 (D) Rs. 10,000 age of alcohol in the new mixture would be :
2
30. A and B start a business jointly. A invests Rs. 16,000 for (A) 15% (B) 16 %
3
8 months and B remains in the business for 4 months.
1
2 (C) 17% (D) 18 %
Out of total profit, B claims of the profit. How much 2
7
money was contributed by B ? 38. Zinc and copper are melted together in the ratio 9 : 11.
(A) Rs. 10,500 (B) Rs. 11,900 W hat is the weight of melted mixture, if 28.8 kg of zinc
(C) Rs. 12,800 (D) Rs. 13,600 has been consumed in it ?
31. Two friends P and Q started a business investing in (A) 58 kg (B) 60 kg
the ratio of 5 : 6. R joined them after six months invest- (C) 64 kg (D) 70 kg
ing an amount equal to that of Q’s. At the end of the
39. A and B are two alloys of gold and copper prepared by
year, 20% profit was earned which was equal to Rs.
mixing metals in the ratio 7 : 2 and 7 : 11 respectively. If
98,000. W hat was the amount invested by R ?
equal quantities of the alloys are melted to form a third
(A) Rs. 1,05,000 (B) Rs. 1,75,000
(C) Rs. 2,10,000 (D) None of these alloy C, the ratio of gold and copper in C will be :
(A) 5 : 7 (B) 5 : 9
32. A, B and C enter into a partnership by investing in the
(C) 7 : 5 (D) 9 : 5
ratio of 3 : 2 : 4. After one year, B invests another
Rs. 2,70,000 and C at the end of 2 years, also invests 40. In a mixture of 100 L, the ratio of milk and water is 3 : 1.
Rs. 2,70,000. At the end of three years, profits are If 200 L of water is added to the mixture, what is the
shared in the ratio of 3 : 4 : 5. Find the initial investment new ratio of milk and water ?
of C. (A) 1 : 3 (B) 3 : 1
(A) Rs. 2,70,000 (B) Rs. 1,80,000 (C) 2 : 5 (D) 5 : 2
(C) Rs. 3,60,000 (D) None of these 41. 80 L of mixture of milk and water is in the ratio 5 : 3. If 16
L of this mixture is replaced by 16 L of milk, ratio of milk
and water becomes :
33. In a 60 liter mixture of milk and water, the ratio of milk to (A) 2 : 1 (B) 6 : 3
water is 2 : 1. How many liters of water is to be added (C) 7 : 3 (D) 8 : 3
to this, to make this ratio 1 : 2 in the new mixture ?
42. In a mixture of 28 L, the ratio of milk and water is 2 : 5.
(A) 56 (B) 50
If 2 L of milk is added and 5 L of water is removed from
(C) 70 (D) 60
the mixtures, find the new ratio.
34. Three containers h ave their vo lumes in the ratio (A) 9 : 20 (B) 1 : 4
3 : 4 : 5. They are full of mixtures of milk and water. The
(C) 2 : 3 (D) 3 : 2
mixtures c on tain m ilk an d water in the ratio o f
(4 : 1), (3 : 1) and (5 : 2) respectively. The contents of all 43. How many kg. of wheat costing Rs.8 per kg must be
th ese three c on tainers are po ured in to a fo urth mixed with 36 kg of rice costing Rs.5.40 per kg so that
container. The ratio of milk and water in the fourth 20% gain may be obtained by selling the mixture at
container is : Rs.7.20 per kg ?
(A) 4 : 1 (B) 151 : 48 (A) 10.08 kg (B) 8.6 kg
(C) 157 : 53 (D) 5 : 2
(C) 9.2 kg (D) 10.8 kg
PAGE # 70
44. In what ratio must water be mixed with milk costing Rs.12 52. 16 litres of kerosine is mixed with 5 litres of petrol. The
per litre to obtain a mixture worth of Rs.8 per litre ? price of kerosine is Rs. 12 per litre and the price of
(A) 1 : 2 (B) 2 : 1 petrol is Rs. 33 per litre. The average price of the mix-
ture per litre is :
(C) 2 : 3 (D) 3 : 2
(A) Rs. 15 (B) Rs. 17
4
45. A tin of oil was full. W hen six bottles of oil were taken (C) Rs. 23 (D) Rs. 27
5
3 53. Avinash covered 150 km distance in 10 hours. The
out and four bottles of oil were poured in, it was full.
4 first part of his journey he covered by car, then he hired
How many bottles of oil did the tin contain initially ? a rickshaw. The speed of car and rickshaw is 20 km/hr
(A) 16 (B) 40 and 12 km/hr respectively. The ratio of distances cov-
(C) 32 (D) None of these ered by car and the rickshaw respectively are :
(A) 2 : 3 (B) 4 : 5
46. In what ratio must rice at Rs. 9.30 per kg mixed with (C) 1 : 1 (D) None of these
rice at Rs.10.80 per kg so that the mixture be worth
54. A mixture of rice is sold at Rs. 3.00 per kg. This mixture
Rs.10 per kg ? is formed by mixing the rice of Rs. 2.10 and Rs. 2.52
(A) 7 : 8 (B) 6 : 7 per kg. W hat is the ratio of price of cheaper to the cost-
(C) 7 : 6 (D) 8 : 7 lier quality in the mixture if the profit of 25% is being
earned.
47. A container contains 40 litres of milk. From this con-
(A) 5 : 2 (B) 2 : 7
tainer 4 litres of milk was taken out and replaced by
(C) 2 : 5 (D) 15 : 8
water. This process was repeated further two times.
55. The ratio of expenditure and savings is 3 : 2. If the
How much milk is now contained by the container?
income increase by 15% and the savings increases
(A) 26.34 litres (B) 27.36 litres
by 6%, then by how much percent should his expendi-
(C) 28 litres (D) 29.16 litres
ture increases ?
48. A can contains a mixture of two liquids A and B in the (A) 25 (B) 21
ratio 7 : 5. W hen 9 litres of mixture are drawn off and (C) 12 (D) 24
the can is filled with B, the ratio A and B becomes 7 : 9. 56. 450 litres of a mixture of milk and water contain the
How many litres of liquid A was contained by the can milk and water in the ratio 9 : 1. How much water should
initially ? be added to get a new mixture containing milk and
(A) 10 (B) 20 water in the ratio 3 : 1 ?
(A) 54 (B) 90
(C) 21 (D) 25
(C) 45 (D) 63
49. You have a measuring cup with capacity 25 ml and
ano ther with capacity 110 m l, the c ups have no 57. The ratio of petrol and kerosine in the container is 3 : 2
m ark ing s sh o win g in term ed iate vo lu mes. U sin g when 10 litres of the mixture is taken out and is
replaced by the kerosine, the ratio becomes 2 : 3. The
large container an as much tap water as you wish.
total quantity of the mixture in the container is :
W h at is th e smallest amo un t o f w ater yo u c an
(A) 25 (B) 30
measure accurately ?
(C) 45
(A) 1 ml (B) 5 ml (D) Cannot be determined
(C) 10 ml (D) 25 ml
58. From a container, 6 litres milk was drawn out and was
50. Two varieties of soda water with different prices is replaced by water. Again 6 litres of mixture was drawn
mixed in the ratio of 2 : 3. The price of first soda water
out and was replaced by the water. Thus the quantity of
is Rs. 10 per litre while the price of second soda water
milk and w ater in th e co ntainer after th ese tw o
is Rs. 15 per litre, respectively. The average price of
operations is 9 : 16. The quantity of mixture is :
the mixture (per litre) is :
(A) Rs. 12 (B) Rs. 13 (A) 15 (B) 16
(C) Rs. 14 (D) Rs. 15 (C) 25 (D) 31
51. 5 kg of superior quality of sugar is mixed with 25 kg of 59. The average weight of boys in a class is 30 kg and the
inferior quality sugar. The price of superior quality and average weight of girls in the same class is 20 kg. If
inferior quality sugar is Rs. 18 and Rs. 12 respectively. the average weight of the whole class is 23.25 kg,
The average price per kg of the mixture is : what could be the possible strength of boys and girls
(A) Rs. 13 (B) Rs. 15
respectively in the same class ?
(C) Rs. 18 (D) Rs. 21
(A) 14 and 26 (B) 13 and 27
(C) 17 and 27 (D) None of these
PAGE # 71
6. 28 litre mixture of milk and water contains milk and
water in the ratio of 5 : 2. If 2 litre of water be added to
this mixture, then the ratio of water and milk is :
(NTSE-Stage-I/M.P./2008)
1. If the sum of two numbers is 32 and their ratio is 11: 5, (A) 7: 2 (B) 5: 4
the numbers are : (NTSE Stage - I/Kerala/2006) (C) 1: 2 (D) 2: 1
(A) 22, 10 (B) 24, 8
7. A sum of Rs.7000 is divided among A, B, C in such a
(C) 20, 12 (D) 21, 11
way that shares of A and B are in the ratio 2 : 3 and
2. The ratio of the boys to girls in a class is 2 : 3. If 20% of those of B and C are in the ratio 4 : 5. The amount
boys leave this class, then the new ratio of boys to girls received by C is : NTSE Stage-I/Delhi/2008)
is : (NTSE Stage - I/Kerala/2006) (A) Rs. 2600 (B) Rs. 2800
(A) 8 : 15 (B) 8 : 3 (C) Rs. 3000 (D) Rs. 3900
(C) 3 : 7 (D) 4 : 7 8. W hat should be added in each step of ratio 7 : 11 so
x 3 x y that its equal to 3 : 4 (NTSE Stage-I/Uttra-khand/2009)
3. If = , then is equal to : (A) 1 (B) 2
y 2 x–y
(C) 4 (D) 5
(NTSE-Stage-I/Kerala/2007)
4 1 9. In a 120 litre mixture of milk and water, the ratio of milk
(A) (B) to water is 2 : 1. How many litre of water is to be added
3 2
5 to this, to make this ratio 1 : 2 in the new mixture ?
(C) (D) 5
4 (NTSE-Stage-I/Raj/2011)
4. A perpendicular rod of length of 12 cm make 8 cm. (A) 20 (B) 40
long shadow on the ground. At the same time a tower (C) 80 (D) 120
makes 40 meter long shadow on the ground. The 10. Present ages of Anil and Sunil are in the ratio 4 : 5.
height of the tower will be : Eight years from now the ratio of their ages will be 5 : 6.
(NTSE-Stage-I/Uttarkhand/2007) Find their present ages. (NTSE-Stage-I/Raj/2012)
(A) 60 metre (B) 40 metre (A) 16 yrs., 20 yrs. (B) 25 yrs., 30 yrs .
(C) 50 metre (D) 30 metre (C) 20 yrs., 25 yrs. (D) 32 yrs., 40 yrs.
5. The price ratio of one scooter and one cycle is 9 : 5. If
the value of scooter is Rs. 4200 more than cycle, the
price of cycle will be : (NTSE Stage-I/ Uttra-khand/2008)
(A) Rs. 5250 (B) Rs. 5200
(C) Rs. 5000 (D) Rs. 4800
PAGE # 72
Ex.1 A grocer buys 20 kg of sugar at a cost of Rs 18 per kg

PROFIT, LOSS & DISCOUNT
an d 30 k g of an inferior sug ar at a co st o f
Rs 15 per kg. He mixes the two kinds of sugar and
sells the mixture at a cost of Rs 16.50 per kg. Find his
profit or loss percent.
(i) Cost price (C.P.) : The amount for which an article is
Sol. C.P. of 20 kg of sugar = 18 × 20 = Rs.360
bought is called its cost price, abbreviated to CP. C.P. of 30 kg of sugar = 15 × 30 = Rs.450
(ii) Selling price (S.P.) : The amount for which an article Total C.P. = 360 + 450 = Rs.810
is sold is called its selling price, abbreviated to SP. S.P. of (20 + 30) kg = 50 kg of sugar = 16.50 × 50
= Rs.825
(iii) Gain : W hen S.P. > C.P. then there is a gain. Profit = S.P. – C.P. = 825 – 810 = Rs.15
Gain = S.P. – C.P. 15 50 23
Profit percent = 100 = = 1 .
(iv) Loss : W hen S.P. < C.P. then there is a loss. 810 27 27
Loss = C.P. – S.P. 23
Hence, the required profit = 1 % .
27
REMARK
The gain or loss is always calculated on the cost price. Ex.2 If the selling price of 20 articles is the same as the
cost price of 23 articles, find the profit or loss percent
in the transaction.
Sol Let the C.P. of an article be Rs x.
(i) Gain = S.P. – C.P. (ii) Loss = C.P. – S.P. Then, C.P. of 23 articles = Rs 23x
and C.P. of 20 articles = Rs 20x.
Gain
(iii) Gain% = 100 % S.P. of 20 articles = C.P. of 23 articles = Rs 23x.
C.P.
Since, S.P. of 20 articles > C.P. of 20 articles, hence
Loss there is a profit in the transaction,
(iv) Loss% = 100 %
C.P. Hence, profit on 20 articles = S.P. – C.P.
= Rs (23x – 20x) = Rs 3x.
(v) To find S.P. when C.P. and gain% or loss% are given.
3x
Profit percent = 100 = 15%
(100 Gain %) 20 x
(a) S.P. = × C.P..
100 Required profit = 15%.
(100 Loss %) Ex.3 A man bought 2 boxes for Rs.1300. He sold one box at
(b) S.P. = C.P.
100 a profit of 20% and other box at a loss of 12%.
If the selling price of both the boxes is the same, find
(vi) To find C.P. when S.P. and gain% or loss% are
the cost price of each box.
given
Sol. Let the C.P. of the first box which was sold at a profit of
100
(a) C.P. = S.P. 20% be Rs.x. Then the C.P. of the second box which
100 Gain %
was sold at a loss of 12% will be Rs.(1300 – x).
100 Since the first box was sold a profit of 20%, its S.P.
(b) C.P. = S.P.
100 Loss% 120
= Rs. x.
If the S.P. of two objects are equal and one of them is 100
sold at x% profit and other is at x% loss then there is 88 1300 x
Hence, its S.P. = Rs.
100
always a loss of
Since the S.P. of both the boxes are the same,
2
Common Loss or Gain% x2 W e have,
= = %.
10 100 120 x 88 1300 x
=
100 100
15x = 11 (1300 – x)
Sometimes, after purchasing an article, we have to
15x + 11x = 11 × 1300
pay some more money for things like transportation,
11 1300
labour charges, repairing charges, local taxes, etc. x= = 550.
26
Th ese extra expenses are c alled overhead . Fo r
Hence, C.P. of the first box = Rs.550.
calculating the total cost price, we add overhead to the
And that of the second box = Rs.(1300 – 550) = Rs.750.
purchase price.
PAGE # 73
Ex.4 Even after reducing the marked price of a transistor by Ex.7 Goods are purchased for Rs. 450 and one-third is
Rs. 32, a shopkeeper makes a profit of 15%. If the cost
price be Rs. 320, what percentage of profit would he sold at a loss of 10%. At what profit per cent should the
have made if he had sold the transistor at the marked remainder be sold so as to gain 20% on the whole
price?
Sol. C.P. = Rs. 320, profit = 15% transaction?
115 Sol. Total cost price of goods = Rs. 450

S.P. = Rs. 320 = Rs. 368.
100 120
SP of total goods = 450 = Rs. 540
Marked price = Rs. (368 + 32) = Rs. 400. 100
80 90
Required profit% 100 % = 25%. SP of one-third goods = 150 = Rs. 135.
320 100
Ex.5 A man buys an article and sells it at a profit of 20%. SP of the remaining goods = 540 – 135 = Rs. 405
If he would buy it at 20% less and sell it for Rs.75 less,
CP of remaining (two-thirds) goods = Rs. 300
he would have gained 25%. W hat is the cost price of
the article? 105
Hence, overall profit is given by = 100 = 35%
Sol. Let the C.P. of the article be Rs.x. 300
He makes a profit of 20%.
Ex.8 A reduction of 10% in the price of sugar enables a man
120x 6x
Hence, S.P. = Rs. = Rs. to buy 25 kg more for Rs. 225. W hat is the original
100 5
If he would buy it at 20% less, then price of sugar (per kilogram)?
20 1 Sol. Let the original price be x

4x
The new C.P. = Rs.x 1 = Rs.x 1 = Rs. 225
100 5 5 Original quantity =
If he would sell it for Rs 75 less, then the new S.P. x
New price = 0.9x
6x
= Rs. 75 225
5 New quantity =
If he gains 25%, then the new S.P. 0 .9 x
225 225
125 4x Equating – = 25 x = Re. 1
= Rs. = Rs.x. 0 .9 x x
100 5
6x Ex.9 A man sold two flats for Rs.675958 each. On one he
Hence, 75 = x
5 gains 16% while on the other he loses 16%. How much
6x
x = 75 p ercentag e do es h e gain o r lo se in th e wh ole
5
x transaction ?
= 75
5 Common Loss and Gain %
2
Hence, the required C.P. = Rs 375. Sol. Loss% =
10
Ex.6 A vendor bought oranges at 20 for Rs.56 and sold 16
2
64
them at Rs.35 per dozen. Find his gain or loss percent. = %= % = 2.56%.
10 25
Sol. Let the number of oranges bought
= LCM of 20 and 12 = 60
C.P. of 20 oranges = Rs 56. DISCOUNT
56 (i) Marked price : In big shops and department stores,

C.P. of 1 orange = Rs. .
20 every article is tagged with a card and its price is written
56
Hence, the C.P. of 60 oranges = Rs. 60 on it. This is called the marked price of that article,
20
abbreviated to MP. For books, the printed price is the
= Rs.168
S.P. of 12 oranges = 35. marked price.
35 (ii) List price : Items which are manufactured in a factory

S.P. of 1 orange = Rs. .
12 are marked with a price according to the list supplied
35
Hence, the S.P. of 60 oranges = 60 = Rs.175 by the factory, at which the retailer is supposed to sell
12
them. This price is known as the list price of the article.
Thus, C.P. = Rs 168 and S.P. =Rs.175.
Since, (S.P.) > (C.P.), the vendor has made a gain. (iii) Discount : In order to increase the sale or clear the
Gain = (175 – 168) = Rs.7
old stock, sometimes the shopkeepers offer a certain
Gain 7 1
Gain% = 100 % = 100 % = 4 % . percentage of rebate on the marked price. This rebate
C.P. 168 6
is known as discount.
PAGE # 74
Discount = Marked price – Selling price Ex.12 A person marks his goods 10% above his cost price.
He then sells it by allowing a discount of 10%. W hat is
M.P. Rate of discount
Discount % = his profit or, loss percent?
100
Sol. Let his cost price be Rs.x
100 Discount %
S.P. = M.P. × 100 10 x 11x
Then his marked price = Rs. x = Rs.
.
100 10
100 S.P.
M.P. = 100 Discount % He then sells it at a discount of 10% on this marked
price.
Two successive discounts of x% and y% allowed on
11x
an item are equivalent to a single discount of Discount = 10% of Rs.
10
xy 11x 10 11x
x y %. = Rs. = Rs.
100 10 100 100
An important fact : The discount is always calculated 11x 11x

His S.P. = Rs.
on the marked price. 10 100
Clearly, Selling Price = Marked Price – Discount. 110 x 11x 99 x

= Rs. = Rs.
100 100
NOTE : This discount is always less than the sum of Since his C.P. > S.P., hence there will be a loss
individual discounts. 99 x x
and loss = C.P. – S.P. = Rs. x = Rs.
Ex.10 The marked price of a woolen coat is Rs 2000. It is 100 100
sold at a discount of 15%. The shopkeeper has allowed x 1
Loss percent = 100 = 1
a further discount of 5% due to off season. Find the 100 x
selling price of the coat.
Hence, the required loss = 1%.
Sol. The marked price = Rs 2000
Ist discount = 15% of Rs 2000 Ex.13 At what percentage above the C.P. must an article be
15 marked so as to gain 33% after allowing a customer a
= Rs. 2000 = Rs 300
100 discount of 5%.
The reduced marked price after the 1st discount
Sol. Let C.P. = Rs. 100. Then S.P. = Rs.133.
= Rs.2000 – Rs 300 = Rs 1700
Let marked price be Rs.x.
2nd discount due to off-season = 5% of Rs 1700
Then 95% of x = 133
5
= Rs. 1700 = Rs 85. 95 100
100 x = 133 x = 133 = 140.
100 95
Hence, the final reduced price after the 2nd discount
= Rs.1700 – Rs.85 = Rs.1615 = S.P. Hence, percentage above the C.P. of an article be
Hence, the required S.P. of the coat is Rs.1615. marked as = 140 – 100 = 40%.
Ex.11 Find a single discount equivalent to the discount ,
series 25%, 20% and 10%. It is the tax levied by a state government on the sale or
Sol. Let the marked price of the article be Rs.100 purchase of items within the state. This revenue
collected is used to meets its administrative expenses,
Then a single discount equivalent to the discount
to execute its welfare and development schemes, to
series is meet the expenses on salaries of its employees, etc.
100 25 100 20 100 10
= (100 – × × × 100)% Computation of Sales Tax : The calculation of Sales
100 100 100
Tax is very easy as it involves very simple concept of
75 80 90
= (100 – × × × 100)% percentage. Sale tax is calculated on the sale price.
100 100 100
3 4 9
Rates of Sales Tax Sale Price
= (100 – × × × 100)% Sales Tax =
4 5 10 100
= (100 – 54)% = 46% Sales Tax
Rate of Sales Tax = 100
Hence, the given discount series is equivalent to a Sale Price
single discount of 46%. The amount of money paid by a customer for an article
= Sale Price of an article + Sales Tax.
PAGE # 75
Ex.14 Mr. Gupta purchased an article for Rs. 702 including 100 x 9x
= 2,452.50
sales tax. If the rate of Sales Tax is 8%, find the sale 100
price of the article. 100
x = 2452.50 × = Rs. 2,250
Sol. Let the sale price of the article be Rs. x . 109
x + 8% of x = Rs. 702 Marked price of the article
100 = Rs. 2,250 = Its selling price.
x = Rs. 702 × = Rs. 650 Since, the shopkeeper buys the article for Rs. 1,500
108
Sale price of the article = Rs. 650 and spends 20% of the cost as overheads.
Total cost price of the article
Ex.15 Mrs. Sharma purch ased co nfectio nery g oods
= Rs. 1,500 + 20% of Rs. 1,500
costing Rs. 165 on which the rate of Sales Tax is 6%
= Rs. 1500 + Rs. 300
and some tooth-paste, shaving-cream, soap, etc.,
= Rs. 1,800
costing Rs. 230 on which the rate of Sales Tax is 10%.
Profit = selling price – Total cost price
If she gives a five hundred rupee note to the shopkeeper,
= 2,250 – 1,800 = 450
what money will he return to Mrs. Sharma ?
Sol. Price of confectionery goods including Sales Tax 450
Profit % = 100 = 25%.
= Rs. 165 + 6% of Rs. 165 = Rs. 174.90 1800
P rice o f to oth-paste, shaving -c ream , so ap etc . Ex.18 A shopkeeper marks his goods 40% above the cost
including Sales Tax. price and then sells them at discounts of 20% and
= Rs. 230 + 10% of Rs. 230 = Rs. 253.00 10%. If an article costs the shopkeeper Rs. 5,000. Find
Total amount to be paid by Mrs. Sharma the sales price of the article :
= Rs. 174.90 + Rs. 253 = Rs 427.90 (i) excluding Sales Tax
Since, Mrs. Sharma gave a five hundred rupee note to (ii) including Sales Tax of 10%
the shopkeeper, the money that the shopkeeper will Sol. (i) Since C.P. of the article = Rs. 5,000
return to Mrs. Sharma = 500 – Rs. 427.90 = Rs. 72.10 (ii) Its marked price = 5,000 + 40% of 5,000 = Rs. 7,000.
First discount given = 20% of Rs. 7,000 = Rs. 1400
Ex.16 The price of an article inclusive of Sales Tax of 12%
Price of the article after 1st discount
is Rs. 2,016. Find its marked price. If the Sales Tax is
= Rs. (7,000 – 1400) = Rs. 5,600
reduced to 7%, how much less does the customer pay
Second discount = 10% of 5,600 = Rs. 560
for the article ?
Price of the article after 2nd discount
Sol. Let marked price be Rs. x
= Rs. (5,600 – 560) = Rs. 5,040
x + 12% of x = 2016
Sale price of the article excluding sales Tax
or, directly, 112% of x = 2016
= Rs. 5,040
112 x
= 2016 x = 1800 (ii) Sales Tax levied = 10% of Rs. 5040 = Rs. 504
100
Sales price of the article including Sales Tax
Marked price of the article = Rs. 1,800
= Rs. (5,040 + 504) = Rs. 5,544.
Since, new Sales Tax = 7%
Now, the customer will pay = Rs. 1800 + 7% of 1800 Ex.19 The catalogue price of a computer set is Rs. 45000.
107 The shopkeeper gives a discount of 7% on the listed
= Rs. 1800 = Rs. 1,926 price. He gives a further off-season discount of 4% on
100
Customer will pay for the article the balance. However, sales Tax at 8% is charged on
= Rs. (2016 – 1926) less the remaining amount. Find :
= Rs. 90 less. (i) the amount of sales Tax a customer has pay,
(ii) the final price he has to pay for the computer set.
Ex.17 A shopkeeper buys an article for Rs. 1500 and
Sol. Since, the list price = Rs. 45,000
spends 20% of the cost on its packing, transportation,
Discount = 7% of Rs. 45,000 = 3,150
etc. Then he marks the article at a certain price. If he
S.P. = List price – Discount
sells the article for Rs. 2,452.50 including 9% Sales
= Rs. (45,000 – 3,150) = Rs. 41,850.
Tax on the price marked, find his profit as per cent.
Off-season discount = 4% of Rs. 41,850 = Rs. 1,674
Sol. Let marked price of the article be Rs. x
Net S.P. = Rs. 41,850 – Rs. 1,674 = Rs. 40,176.
9x
Sales Tax on it = 9% of Rs. x = (i) The amount of Sales Tax a customer has to pay
100
= 8% of Rs. 40,176 = Rs. 3,214.08
According to the given statement,
(ii) The final price, the customer has to pay for the
9x
Rs. x + Rs. = Rs. 2,452.50 computer = net S.P. + Sales Tax
100
= Rs. 40,176 + Rs. 3,214.08 = Rs. 43,390.08
PAGE # 76
,
Ex.22 A manufacturer sells a TV set to a wholesaler for
Rs. 20,000. The wholesaler sells it to a retailer and
VAT (Value added tax) is a method of realizing tax on earns Rs. 2,000. The retailer further sells it to a
the sale/purchase of goods. In the VAT system, the tax customer at a profit of Rs. 1,500. If the VAT is 8%, find
(i) the amount of tax (under VAT) received by the state
is realized by the government at every point right from
Government on the sale of the TV set.
the manufacturer to the retailer. (ii) the amount that the customer paid for the TV set.
Ex.20 A shopkeeper buys an article at a discount of 30% Sol. (i) Tax collected by manufacturer
from the wholesaler, the printed price of the article being = 8 % of 20,000
Rs. 2,000 and the rate of sales-tax is 8%. 8
The shopkeeper sells the article to a buyer at the printed = Rs. × 20,000 = Rs. 1600
100
price and charges tax at the same rate. Find : The wholesaler earns a profit of Rs. 2,000.
(i) The price at which the article is bought by the Thus, the value added by the wholesaler = Rs. 2,000
shopkeeper. Amount of VAT to be paid by the wholesaler
(ii) The VAT (Value Added Tax) paid by the shopkeeper. = Tax on the value added by the wholesaler
Sol. (i) Given : Printed price of the article = 2,000 = 8% of 2,000
and, discount = 30% of 2,000
8
30 = Rs. 2,000 = Rs. 160.
= Rs. 2,000 = Rs. 600 100
100
Sale price of the article = Rs. (2,000 – 600) As the retailer earns a profit of Rs. 1,500.
= Rs. 1,400. Therefore, the value added by retailer = Rs. 1,500
Sales-tax paid by the shopkeeper = 8% of Rs. 1,400 VAT to be paid by retailer = Tax on the value added by
8 the retailer
= Rs. 1,400 = Rs. 112 = 8% of Rs. 1,500
100
The price at which the article is bought by the shop- 8
keeper = Rs. 1400 + Rs. 112 = Rs. 1512. = Rs 1500 = Rs. 120
100
(ii) The shopkeeper sells the article for Rs. 2,000
VAT received by the state government
Tax charged by the shopkeeper
= Rs. 1600 + 160 + 120 = Rs. 1880
= 8% of Rs 2,000
(ii) The value of the TV set (excluding VAT) paid by the
8
= Rs. 2000 customer = The price charged by manufacturer + profit
100 of wholesaler + profit of retailer
= Rs.160
= 20,000 + 2,000 + 1,500 = Rs. 23,500
Since, tax paid by the shopkeeper = Rs. 112
Tax paid by the customer = 8% of 23,500
VAT paid by the shopkeeper
= Tax charged – Tax paid 8
= × 23,500 = Rs. 1880
= 160 – 112 = 48. 100
Amount paid by the customer (including VAT) for the
Ex.21 Shyam buys an article for Rs. 10,000 and pays 7%
TV set = 23,500 + 1880 = Rs. 25,380.
tax. He sells the same article for Rs. 13,000 and
charges 9% tax. Find the VAT paid by Shyam.
Sol. Cost price of the article = Rs. 10,000
Tax paid by Shyam = 7% of 10,000
7 1. Cost of 3 balls = Cost of 2 pads. Cost of 3 pads = Cost
= Rs. 10,000 = Rs. 700
100 of 2 gloves. Cost of 3 gloves = Cost of 2 bats. If the bat
Selling price of the article = Rs. 13,000 costs Rs. 54, what is the cost of the ball ?
Tax charged at 9% of Rs. 13,000 (A) Rs.12 (B) Rs.14
9 (C) Rs.16 (D) Rs.18
= Rs. 13,000 = Rs. 1,170
100
2. If the number of books bought at prices ranging from
VAT = Tax recovered on sale – Tax paid on purchase.
Rs. 200 to Rs. 350, are sold at prices ranging from
= Rs. 1170 – 700 = Rs. 470.
Rs. 300 to Rs.425, what can be the greatest possible
profit ?
(A) Rs. 400 (B) Rs. 600
(C) Rs. 800
PAGE # 77
3. If the cost price of 12 books is the same as the selling 12. Sneh buys X eggs to resell them at a profit of 10% but
price of 16 books, the gain or loss per cent is : loses 10% of the eggs. By how much should she mark
(A) 15% gain (B) 25% loss up the selling price in order to retain 10% profit :
(C) 20% loss (D) 30% gain (A) 30% (B) 33.33%
4. A man loses the selling price of 4 apples on selling 36 (C) 22.1% (D) 25%
apples. His loss per cent is 13. If the manufacturer gains 10%, the wholesale dealer
(A) 12.5 (B) 11.11 15% and the retailer 25% , th en find the cost of
(C) 10 (D) 9 production of a table, the retail price of which is Rs.
5. By selling a table, Aditya earned a profit equal to one- 1265 ?
fourth of the price he bought it. If he sold it for Rs. 375, (A) 600 (B) 800
what was the cost price ? (C) 700 (D) 900
(A) Rs.281.75 (B) Rs.300
14. Jacob bought a scooter for a certain sum of money. He
(C) Rs.312.50 (D) Rs.350
spent 10% of the cost on repairs and sold the scooter
6. Rice is mixed in the ratio 2 : 3 and sold at Rs. 22 per kg, for a profit of Rs. 1100. How much did he spend on
resulting in a profit 10%. If the cost of the smaller quan- repairs if he made a profit of 20% ?
tity be Rs. 14 per kg, then the cost per kg of the larger (A) Rs. 400 (B) Rs.440
quantity is : (C) Rs.500 (D) Rs.550
(A) Rs.24 (B) Rs.23
2
(C) Rs.25 (D) Rs.28 15. An article is sold at a certain price. By selling it at
of
3
7. A dealer declares to sell his goods at cost price, but he that price one loses 10%. Find the gain percent at
original price.
18
uses a false weight and gains 6 % for a kilogram, (A) 31% (B) 23%
47
(C) 35% (D) 45%
he uses a weight of :
(A) 953g (B) 960g 16. The profit earned by selling an article for Rs.832 is
(C) 940g (D) 947g equal to the loss incurred when the same article is
sold for Rs.448. W hat should be the sale price for
8. A bought a cycle and spent Rs. 110 on its repairs. He
making 50% profit ?
then sold it to B at a profit of 20%. B sold it to C at a loss (A) Rs. 920 (B) Rs. 960
of 10%. C sold it at a profit of 10% for Rs. 1,188. W hat (C) Rs. 1060 (D) Rs. 1200
is the price A paid to buy that bicycle :
(A) Rs.850 (B) Rs.870 17. A man bought some oranges at Rs.10 per dozen and
bought the same number of oranges at Rs.8 per dozen.
(C) Rs.930 (D) Rs.890
He sold these oranges at Rs.11 per dozen and gained
9. A man sells 2 cows for Rs. 4,000 each, neither gaining Rs.120. The total number of oranges he bought was :
nor losing in the deal. If he sold one cow at a gain of (A) 30 dozens (B) 40 dozens
25%, then the other cow is sold at a loss of : (C) 50 dozens (D) 60 dozens
(A) 16.66% (B) 18.22%
18. The price of a jewel, passing through three hands,
(C) 25% (D) 30% rises on the whole by 65%. If the first and the second
10. Two horses were sold for Rs.12,000 each, one at a sellers earned 20% and 25% profit respectively, find
loss of 20% and the other at a gain of 20%. The entire the percentage profit earned by the third seller.
transaction resulted in : (A) 25% (B) 20%
(C) 15% (D) 10%
(A) no loss, no gain (B) loss of Rs. 1,000
(C) gain of Rs.1,000 (D) gain of Rs. 2,000 19. A trader buys a chair for Rs. 600 and sells it for Rs. 765
at a credit of 4 months. Reckoning money worth 6%
11. A trader quotes Rs. 45 for an article whose cost price
p.a., his gain percent is :
is Rs. 30. The customer pays him a 50-rupee note. 1
The trader does not have the change to give back Rs. (A) 20% (B) 22 %
2
5 to the customer. He thus goes to a neighboring shop 1
(C) 25% (D) 27 %
to get change for Rs. 50. The customer collects his 2
balance Rs.5. The next day the neighboring shop owner 20. If on selling 12 notebooks, a seller makes a profit equal
realizes that the 50-rupee note was fake and demanded to the selling price of 4 notebooks, what is his percent
profit ?
Rs. 50 back from the trader who give it. W hat is the
2
total loss to the trader? (A) 16 % (B) 25%
3
(A) Rs. 80 (B) Rs. 85
(C) 50% (D) None of these
(C) Rs. 35 (D) Rs. 40
PAGE # 78
21. By mixing two brands of tea and selling the mixture at 28. A cloth merchant sold half of his cloth at 20% profit, half
the rate of Rs. 177 per kg, a shopkeeper makes a of the remaining at 20% loss and the rest was sold at
profit of 18%. If to every 2 kg of one brand costing Rs. the cost price. In the total transaction, his gain or loss
200 per kg, 3 kg of the other brand is added, then how will be :
much per kg does the other brand cost ? (A) Neither loss nor gain (B) 5% loss
(A) Rs. 110 (B) Rs. 120 (C) 5% gain (D) 10% gain
(C) Rs. 140 (D) None of these
29. Two-third of a consignment was sold at a profit of 5%
22. The manufacturer of a certain item can sell all he can and the remaining at a loss of 2%. If the total profit was
produce at the selling price of Rs. 60 each. It costs him Rs. 400, the value of the consignment (in Rs.) was :
(A) 10,000 (B) 12,000
Rs. 40 in materials and labour to produce each item
(C) 15,000 (D) 20,000
and he has overhead expenses of Rs. 3000 per week
in order to operate the plant. The number of units he 30. The C.P. of two watches taken together is Rs. 840. If by
selling one at a profit of 16% and the other at a loss of
should produce and sell in order to make a profit of at
12%, there is no loss no gain in the whole transaction,
least Rs. 1000 per week, is : then the C.P. of the two watches are respectively :
(A) 200 (B) 250 (A) Rs. 360, Rs. 480 (B) Rs. 480, Rs. 360
(C) 300 (D) 400 (C) Rs. 380, Rs. 460 (D) Rs. 400, Rs. 440
23. A bought a radio set and spent Rs. 110 on its repairs.
He then sold it to B at 20% profit, B sold it to C at a loss 31. The difference between the discounts of 40% on Rs.
of 10% and C sold it for Rs. 1188 at a profit of 10%. 500 and two successive discounts of 36% and 4% on
W hat is the amount for which A bought the radio set ? the same price is :
(A) Rs. 2 (B) Rs. 7.20
(A) Rs. 850 (B) Rs. 890
(C) Rs. 1.93 (D) Rs. 7
(C) Rs. 930 (D) Rs. 950
32. A hotel offers 10% discount on food purchased during
24. A manufacturer sells a pair of glasses to a wholesale h ap py h ou rs and a 5 % overall disc ou nt o n all
dealer at a profit of 18%. The wholesaler sells the same purchases exceeding Rs. 150. W hat is the net per-
to a retailer at a profit of 20%. The retailer in turn sells centage discount offered to a customer who purchased
them to a customer for Rs. 30.09, thereby earning a food worth Rs. 190 during the happy hours?
(A) 14.75% (B) 14%
profit of 25%. The cost price for the manufacturer is :
(C) 14.5% (D) 15.05%
(A) Rs. 15 (B) Rs. 16
(C) Rs. 17 (D) Rs. 18 33. A mirror is listed at Rs. 1,000. A retailer buys it with two
1 discounts of 20% and 10% each. The retailer incurs
25. A dealer sold an article at a loss of 2 % . Had he sold an additional cost of 10% of the cost of mirror on wood
2
1 work for making a dressing table. At what price should
it for Rs. 100 more, he would have gained 7 % . To o
2 he sell the dressing table to make profit of 15%?
1 (A) Rs. 900 (B) Rs. 910.8
gain 12 % , he should sell it for :
2 (C) Rs.800 (D) Rs. 840
(A) Rs. 850 (B) Rs. 925
(C) Rs. 1080 (D) Rs. 1125 34. The list price of a slipper is Rs. 160. The first discount
offered is 10% and second discount is x% the SP of
26. Ranjan purchased 120 tables at a price of Rs. 110 per
the slipper now is Rs. 122.4. Find x.
table. He sold 30 tables at a profit of Rs. 12 per table
(A) 15 (B) 10
and 75 tables at a profit of Rs. 14 per table. The
remaining tables were sold at a loss of Rs. 7 per table. (C) 18 (D) 20
W hat is the average profit per table ? 35. A shopkeeper sells a badminton racket, whose marked
(A) Rs. 10.04 (B) Rs. 10.875 price is Rs.30, at a discount of 15% and gives a shuttle
(C) Rs. 12.80 (D) Rs. 12.875
cock costing Rs.1.50 free with each racket. Even then
3 makes a profit of 20%. His cost price per racket is :
27. A man purchased sugar worth Rs. 400. He sold th
4 (A) Rs. 19.75 (B) Rs. 20
at a loss of 10% and the remaining at a gain of 10%. (C) Rs. 21 (D) Rs. 21.25
On the whole, he gets :
1 36. An uneducated retailer marks all his goods at 50%
(A) a loss of 5% (B) a gain of 5 % above the cost price and thinking that he will still make
2
1 5 25% profit, offers a discount of 25% on the marked
(C) a loss of 5 % (D) a loss of 5 % price. W hat is his actual profit on the sales ?
19 19
(A) 11% (B) 12%
(C) 12.50% (D) 13.50%
PAGE # 79
37. W hen a producer allows 36% discount on the retail 46. A tradesmen gives 4% discount on the marked price
price of his product, he earns a profit of 8.8%. W hat
and gives 1 article free for buying every 15 articles and
would be his profit percent if the discount is reduced
by 24% ? thus gain 35%. The marked price is above the cost
(A) 45.5% (B) 45.8% price by :
(C) 46.4% (D) 49.6%
(A) 20% (B) 39%
38. An article was sold for Rs. y after giving a discount of
(C) 40% (D) 50%
x%. Then, its list price is :
100 y 100y 47. A trader marked his goods at 20% above the cost price.
(A) (B)
100 x 1 x He sold half the stock at the marked price, one quarter
10y
(C) (D) None of these. at a discount of 20% on the marked price and the rest
1 ( x / 100)
at a discount of 40% on the marked price. His total
39. A shopkeeper gives 12% additional discount on the
discounted price, after giving an initial discount of 20% gain is :
on the labelled price of a radio. If the final sale price of (A) 2% (B) 4.5%
the radio is Rs. 704, then what is its labelled price ?
(C) 13.5% (D) 15%
(A) Rs. 844.80 (B) Rs. 929.28
(C) Rs. 1000 (D) Rs. 1044.80 48. Kunal bought a suitcase with 15% discount on the
labelled price. He sold the suitcase for Rs. 2880 with
40. If the S.P. of Rs. 24 results in a 20% discount on list
price, what S.P. would result in a 30% discount on list 20% profit on the labelled price. At what price did he
price ? buy the suitcase ?
(A) Rs. 18 (B) Rs. 20
(A) Rs. 2040 (B) Rs. 2400
(C) Rs. 21 (D) Rs. 27
(C) Rs. 2604 (D) Rs. 2640
41. Jatin bought a refrigerator with 20% discount on the
labelled price. Had he bought it with 25% discount, he 49. Komal buys an article at discount of 25%. At what
would have saved Rs. 500. At what price did he buy the percentage above the cost price should she sell it to
refrigerator ?
make a profit of 25% over the original list price ?
(A) Rs. 5000 (B) Rs. 10,000
(C) Rs. 12,500 (D) Rs. 15,000 (A) 25% (B) 30%
(C) 40% (D) 66.67%
42. List price of an article at a showroom is Rs. 2000 and
it is being sold at successive discounts of 20% and 50. A shopkeeper allows a discount of 10% on the marked
10%. Its net selling price of will be :
price of an item but charges a sales tax of 8% on the
(A) Rs. 1400 (B) Rs. 1440
(C) Rs. 1520 (D) Rs. 1700 discounted price. If the customer pays Rs. 680.40 as
the price including the sales tax, then what is the
43. The price of a V CR is marked at Rs. 12,000. If
successive discounts of 15%, 10% and 5% be allowed, marked price of the item ?
then at what price does a customer buy it ? (A) Rs. 630 (B) Rs. 700
(A) Rs. 8400 (B) Rs. 8721
44. Two shopkeepers announce the same price of Rs.
700 for a sewing machine. The first offers successive
discounts of 30% and 6% while the second offers
suc cessive disc ou nts of 2 0% and 1 6% . Th e
shopkeeper that offers better discount, charges ........ 1. A fruit seller losses 10 % by selling 26 oranges for
less than the other shopkeeper. Rs. 25. The number of oranges he should sell for Rs. 5
each to gain 17 % is : (NTSE-Stage-I/Kerala/2006)
(A) Rs. 9.80 (B) Rs. 16.80
(A) 4 (B) 5
(C) Rs. 22.40 (D) Rs. 36.40
(C) 6 (D) 8
45. The price of an article is raised by 30% and then two 2. If the selling price of 8 articles is equal to the cost price
su cc essive d isco unts of 10 % eac h are allo wed. of 10 articles, then the gain or loss percentage is :
Ultimately, the price of the article is :
10 8 10 8
(A) 100 gain (B) 100 loss
(A) decreased by 5.3% (B) increased by 3% 8 8
(C) increased by 5.3% (D) increased by 10% 10 8 10 8
(C) 100 gain (D) 100 loss
10 10
PAGE # 80
3. A sold a commodity to B with 10% profit. If B resold the 10. Sheela buys 2 books for Rs. 182. She sells one at a
same commodity to A with a loss of 10%, then A will loss of 5 % and another at a profit of 8 % . But she
have : (NTSE Stage-I/Raj./2007) neither gains nor loses on the whole. Find the price of
(A) 1% loss (B) 11% loss book which has sold at a profit :
(C) 1% profit (D) 11% profit (NTSE Stage- I/Raj./2011)
(A) Rs. 112 (B) Rs. 85
4. If the selling price of 5 articles is same as the cost
(C) Rs. 70 (D) Rs. 120
price of 6 articles then the gain percentage is :
(NTSE Stage-I/Delhi/2008) 11. A cow and a buffalo were bought for Rs. 8000/- each.
(A) 1% (B) 5% There was a loss of 4 % on the buffalo and a profit of
(C) 10% (D) 20% 8 % on the cow. Find the gain or loss percent, on the
whole transaction. (NTSE Stage- I/Raj./2012)
5. A single discount equivalent to a single discount series
(A) loss of 4 % (B) Gain of 4 %
of 25 %, 20 %, 10 % is : (NTSE Stage -I/Haryana/2008)
(C) loss of 2 % (D) Gain of 2 %
(A) 46 (B) 55
(C) 54 (D) 45 12. If a merchant purchases 9 pens and sells 8 pens at
the cost price of 9 pens, then his profit percent is :
6. Some toffees are bought at the rate of 11 for Rs.10 and
the same number at the rate of 9 for Rs. 10. If the
whole is sold at the rate of one rupee per toffee, the 15 2
(A) 5 (B) 8
gain/loss on the whole transaction is : 17 3
(NTSE Stage -I/Bihar/2009) 1 1
(A) Loss 1 % (B) Loss 5 % (C) 12 (D) 11
2 9
(C) Gain 2 % (D) Gain 5 %
13. Marked price of a Saree is Rs.600 and is available on
7. W hat price should a shopkeeper Gopal mark on a chair Rs. 450. Rate of discount is :
which costs him 1200 so as to gain 12 % after allowing [M.P. NTSE Stage-1 2013]
a discount of 16 % ? (NTSE Stage -I/Bihar/2009) (A) 25% (B) 30%
(A) Rs. 1550 (B) Rs. 1600 (C) 15% (D) 40%
(C) Rs. 1800 (D) Rs. 1650
8. A man sells an article at a loss of 10 %. If he had bought 14. A man sells two articles each at Rs. 198. He makes a
it at 20 % less and sold it for Rs. 44 more, he would profit of 10% on one article and a loss of 10% on the
have gained 40 %. The cost price of the article is : other. Net profit or loss of the person
(NTSE Stage- I/Raj./2009) [West Bengal NTSE Stage-1 2016]
(A) Rs.150 (B) Rs.200 (A) 2% profit (B) 2% loss
(C) Rs. 250 (D) Rs. 400 (C) 1% profit (D) 1% loss
9. If the selling price of 12 articles is equal to the cost price
of 15 articles, then the percentage gain or loss is :
(NTSE Stage- I/Raj./2010)
(A) 25 % gain (B) 25 % loss
(C) 30 % gain (D) 30 % loss
PAGE # 81
SIMPLE INTEREST Ex.4 Find the rate of interest when Rs. 640 amounts to
DEFINITION : Rs. 841 and 60 paise for the period 2 years 7 months
and 15 days at a simple rate of interest.
(i) Principal : The money borrowed or lent out is called
principal. Sol. Given :
Principal = Rs. 640
(ii) Interest : The ad ditional m oney paid by the
borrower is called the interest. Amount = Rs. 841.60
Interest = Rs. (841.60 – 640)
(iii) Amount : The total money (interest + principal)
= Rs. 201.60
paid by the borrower is called the amount. A P I
21
(iv) Rate of interest : If the borrower paid interest of Time = 2 years 7 months 15 days = years
Rs. x on Rs.100 for 1 year, then the rate of interest is 8
x percent per annum. To find : Rate (R)
(v) Time : The period for which the sum is borrowed PRT
is called the time. Simple interest (I) =
100
(vi) Simple Interest : If the principal remains the same
throughout the loan period, then the interest paid by R 21
or 201.60 = 640 ×
the borrower is called simple interest. 100 8
P R T
S.I. = 21 R 20160
100 640 × =
8 100 100
Ex.1 How long will it take a sum of money invested at
5% p.a. S.I. to increase its value by 40% ?
20160 1 8 100
2 R= × × ×
Sol. Let sum is P then S.I. is P 100 640 21 1
5
2 P 5 T R = 12
P= Hence, rate of interest = 12%.
5 100
T = 8 years.
Ex.5 Madhav lent out Rs. 7953 for 2 years and Rs. 1800 for
Ex.2 The rate of interest on a sum of money is 4% p.a. for
3 years at the same rate of simple interest. If he got
the first 2 years, 6% p.a. for the next 3 years and 8%
p.a. for the period beyond 5 years. If the simple interest Rs. 2343.66 as total interest then find the percent rate
accrued by the sum for a total period of 8 years is Rs. of interest.
1,280, what is the sum? Sol. Let the percent rate of interest be x%
Sol. Let the sum be Rs. x.
7953 2 x 15906
x 4 2 x 6 3 x 8 3 = ×x
Then, + + = 1280 100 100
100 100 100
50x = 1280 × 100 and interest on Rs. 1800 for 3 years at the rate of x%
Sum = x = Rs. 2,560
1800 3 x
Ex.3 In what time a sum of Rs. 2700 amounts to Rs. 3240 = = 54 x
100
2
at a rate of 6 % at S.I.?
3 According to problem :
Sol. Given,
15906 x
Principal = Rs. 2700 + 54x = 2343.66
Amount = Rs. 3240 100
Interest = Rs. (3240 – 2700) = Rs. 540 15906 x 5400 x 234366
2 =
Rate = 6 % 100 100
3
PRT 21306x = 234366
Simple Interest =
100
20 234366
540 = 2700 × ×T x=
3 100 21306
20 x = 11%
T× × 2700 = 540 T = 3 years
300 Hence, the required rate of interest = 11%.
Hence, the required time is 3 years.
PAGE # 82
Ex.6 At what rate percent per annum will a sum of Rs.2000
COMPOUND INTEREST
amount to Rs 2205 in 2 years, compounded annually?
If the borrower and the lender agree to fix up a certain Sol. Let the required rate be R% per annum.
interval of time (Say, a year or a half year or a quarter of Here, A = Rs 2205, P = Rs 2000
year etc.) so that the Amount (= Principal + Interest) at and n = 2 years.
the end of an interval becomes the principal for the next n
interval, then the total interest over all the intervals R
Using the formula A = P 1 , we get
calculated in this way is called the Compound Interest 100
2
and is abbreviated as C.I. R
2205 = 2000 x 1
NOTE : S.I. and C.I. are equal for Ist year. 100
2
Important Formulae: If A is the amount, P is the R 2205
1 =
principal, R% is the rate of interest compounded 100 2000
annually and n is the number of intervals, then : 2
n R 441
R 1 =
A=P 1 100 400
100
2 2
n R 21
R 1 =
and, C.I. = A – P = P 1 1 100 20
100
R 21
If compo und interest calculated half-yearly, then 1 =
100 20
R
Rate = % per half year and Time = 2n half years.
2 R 21 1
= 1 =
2n 100 20 20
R
So, A = 1
2 100 1
R = 100 =5
If c om po un d in terest c alcu lated qu arterly, then 20
Hence, the required rate of interest is 5% per annum.
R
Rate = % per quarter, Time = 4n quarters.
4 1
4n Ex.7 Find the compound interest on Rs. 8000 for 1 years
R 2
So, A = P 1 at 10% per annum, interest being payable half yearly.
4 100
Sol. W e have
Let P be the principal and the rate of interest be R% per
Rate of interest = 10% per annum = 5% per half year,
annum. If the interest is compounded k-times in a year,
then the amount A and the compound interest C.I. at 1
the end of n years are given by : Time = 1 years = 3 half year..
2
nk Original principal = Rs. 8000
R
A=P 1 ,and
100k 8000 5 1
nk Interest for the first half year = Rs.
R 100
C.I. = A – P = P 1 1 respectively..
100k = Rs. 400
Amount at the end of the first half year
Let P be the principal and the rate of interest be R1% for
= Rs. 8000 + 400 = Rs. 8400
first year, R2% for second year, R3% for third year and so
Principal for the second half year = Rs. 8400
on and in last Rn% for the nth year. Then, the amount A
and the compound interest C.l. at the end of n years 8400 5 1
are given by : Interest for the second half year = Rs.
100
R1 R2 Rn
A=P 1 1 .... 1 = Rs. 420
100 100 100
Amount at the end of the second half year
R1 R2 Rn = Rs. 8400 + Rs. 420 = Rs. 8820
& C.I. = A – P = P 1 1 ..... 1 1 .
100 100 100 Principal for the third half year = Rs. 8820
Let P be the principal and the rate of interest be R% per 8820 5 1

annum. If the interest is compounded annually but time Interest for the third half year = Rs.
100
1 = Rs. 441
is the fraction of a year, say 5 years, then amount A is
4 Amount at the end of third half year
given by :
= Rs. 8820 + Rs. 441 = Rs. 9261
R
5 Compound interest
A= P 1 R 1 4 and C.I. = A – P.. = Rs. 9261 – Rs. 8000 = Rs. 1261.
100 100
PAGE # 83
Ex.8 Find the compound interest on Rs. 10,000 for 1 year at
20% per annum interest being payable quarterly.
21 P
P– = Rs. 372
Sol. W e have Rate of interest = 20% per annum 100 5
20 P = Rs. 37,200.
= = 5% per quarter
4
Time = 1 year = 4 quarters. Application of Compound Interest :
Principal for the first quarter = Rs. 10000 Let P be the population of a city or town at the beginning
of a certain year and the population grows at a constant
10000 5 1
Interest for the first quarter = Rs. rate of R% per annum, then
100
n
= Rs. 500 R
Population after n years = 1 ×P
Amount at the end of first quarter = Rs. 10000 + Rs. 500 100
= Rs. 10500 Let P be the population of a city or a town at the
beginning of a certain year. If the population grows at
Principal for the second quarter = Rs. 10500 the rate of R1% during first year and R2 % during second
10500 5 1 year, then
Interest for the second quarter = Rs.
100
R1 R2
= Rs. 525 Population after 2 years = P 1 × 1 .
100 100
Amount at the end of second quarter
This formula may be extended for more than 2 years.
= Rs. 10500 + Rs. 525 = Rs. 11025
If V0 is the value of an article at a certain time and R %
Principal for the third quarter = Rs. 11025
per annum is the rate of depreciation, then the value
11025 5 1 Vn at the end of n years is given by
Interest for the third quarter = Rs.
100 n
= Rs. 551.25 Vn = V0 1 R
Amount at the end of the third quarter 100
= Rs. 11025 + Rs. 551.25 = Rs. 11576.25 If V0 is the value of an article at a certain time and the
Principal for the fourth quarter = Rs. 11576.25 rate of depreciation is R1 % for first n1 years, R2% for
next n2 years and so on and Rk % for the last nk years,
Interest for the fourth quarter
then the value at the end of n1 + n2 + ......nk years is
11576.25 5 1 given by
= Rs. = Rs. 578.8125
100 R1
n1
R2
n2
Rk
nk
V = V0 1 1 .... 1
Amount at the end of the fourth quarter 100 100 100
= Rs. 11576.25 + Rs. 578.8125 Ex.11 The present population of a town is 25000. It grows
= Rs. 12155.0625 at the rate of 4%, 5% and 8% during the first year, sec-
Compound interest = Rs. 12155.0625 – Rs. 10000 ond year and third year respectively. Find its popula-
= Rs. 2155.0625. tion after 3 years.
Ex.9 W hat is the C.I. received on a sum of Rs. 26,000 at Sol. Population after 3 years.
rates 10%, 12%, and 8% each, prevailing in that order 4 5 8
for years 1st, 2nd, & 3rd, interest being compounded = 25000 1 1 1
100 100 100
semi-annually for the given three years?
2 2 2
26 21 27
5 6 4 = 25000 = 29484.
25 20 25
Sol. Amt.= Rs.26,000 1 1 1
100 100 100 Hence, the population after 3 years = 29484.
Amount = Rs. 34,836.17
Ex.12 The value of a machine depreciates at the rate of
CI = Rs. 34,836.17 – 26,000 = Rs. 8,836.17.
10% every year. It was purchased three years ago. If its
Ex.10 The difference between the CI and SI on a certain present value is Rs. 8,748. Find its purchase price.
amount at 10% per annum for 2 years, compounded Sol. Let the purchase price be P.
annually is Rs. 372. Find the principal. Rate of depreciation = 10%
Sol. Let the principal be P. 3
10
P 10 2 P P 1 = 8748
SI = = , 100
100 5
2
10 21 10 10 10
CI = Amount – P = P 1 –P = ×P P = 8748
100 100 9 9 9
CI – SI = Rs. 372
= Rs. 12,000.
Therefore, purchase price of machine was Rs. 12,000.
PAGE # 84
Ex.13 W hat annual payment will discharge a debt of Rs. 6. A sum of Rs. 1,550 was partly lent at 5% and 8% p.a.
2 Simple interest. The total interest received after 3 years
7,620 due in 3 years at 16 % per annum compound was Rs. 300. The ratio of the money lent at 5% to that
3
lent at 8% is :
annually ?
(A) 8 : 5 (B) 5 : 8
Sol. Let each instalment be Rs. x.
(C) 16 : 15 (D) 15 : 16
Then,
7. A man invested one-third of his capital at 7%, one-
x x x fourth at 8% and the remainder at 10% simple inter-
+ 2 + 3 = 7620 est, respectively. If his annual income is Rs. 561, the
50 50 50
1 1 1 capital is :
3 100 3 100 3 100
(A) Rs. 5,400 (B) Rs. 6,000
(C) Rs. 6,600 (D) Rs. 7,200
6x 36 x 216 x
= 7620 8. A man lends Rs. 10,000 in four parts. If he gets 8% on
7 49 343
Rs. 2,000; 7.5% on Rs. Rs. 4,000 and 8.5% on Rs.
294x + 252x + 216x = 7620 343 1,400, what per cent must be get for the remainder, if
his average annual interest is 8.13% ?
7620 343 (A) 9 (B) 9.25
x= = 3430 (C) 10.5 (D) 8
762
Amount of each instalment = Rs. 3,430. 9. Simple interest on a certain sum is 9 over 25 of the
sum. Find the rate per cent and time, if both are
numerically equal.
(A) 6%, 6 years (B) 6%, 8 years
(C) 8%, 6 years (D) 8%, 8 years
1. A $500 investment and a $1,500 investment have a 10. The simple interest on Rs. 400 for 8 months at 5 paise
combined yearly return of 8.5 per cent of the total of the per rupee per month is :
two investments. If $500 investment has a yearly re- (A) Rs.120 (B) Rs.160
turn of 7 per cent, what per cent yearly return does the (C) Rs.200 (D) Rs.550
$1,500 investment have ?
11. The rates of simple interest in two banks A and B are in
(A) 9 (B) 10
the ratio 5 : 4. A person wants to deposit his total
1 savings in two banks in such a way that he received
(C) 11 (D) 11
9 equal half yearly interest from both. He should deposit
2. A family made a down payment of $75 and borrowed a the savings in banks A and B in the ratio :
set of encyclopedias that cost $400. The balance with (A) 2 : 5 (B) 4 : 5
(C) 5 : 2 (D) 5 : 4
interest was paid in 23 monthly payments of $16 each
and a final payment of $9. W hat was the per cent of 12. A man invests a certain sum of money at 6% p.a. simple
interest to the borrowed sum? interest and another sum at 7% p.a. simple interest.
(A) 12% (B) 14% His income from interest after 2 years was Rs. 354.
(C) 16% (D) 18% One-fourth of the first sum is equal to one-fifth of the
3. The difference between the interests from two differ- second sum. The total sum invested was :
(A) Rs.2600 (B) Rs.2700
ent banks on Rs. 500 for 2 years, is Rs. 2.50, the differ-
(C) Rs.2880 (D) Rs.2900
ence between their rates is :
(A) 1 (B) 2.5 13. Rs. 300 amounts to Rs. 360 in 4 years. If the rate of
(C) 0.25 (D) 0.5 interest is increased by 1% then in the same time the
4. In S.I., if rate of interest would have been 4% higher, a amount will be :
man would obtained Rs. 400 more in 2 years. Find the (A) Rs. 304 (B) Rs. 372
(C) Rs. 312 (D) Rs. 364
principal.
(A) Rs. 4,000 (B) 5,000 14. W hat will be the ratio of simple interest earned by
(C) Rs. 6,000 (D) 10,000 certain amount at the same rate of inerest for 6 years
5. If x, y and z are three sums of money such that y is the and that for 9 years ?
simple interest on x; z is the simple interest on y for the (A) 1 : 3 (B) 1 : 4
same time and at the same rate of interest, than we (C) Data indadequate (D) None of these
have :
(A) x2 = yz (B) y2 = xz 15. A certain sum of money amounts to Rs. 1008 in 2 years
(C) z2 = xy (D) xyz = 1 1
and to Rs. 1164 in 3 years. Find the rate of interest.
2
(A) 11% (B) 12%
(C) 13% (D) 14%
PAGE # 85
16. An automobile financier claims to be lending money at 24. If the rate increases by 2%, the simple interest received
simple interest, but he includes the interest every six on a sum of money increases by Rs. 108. If the time
months for calculating the principal. If he is charging an period is increased by 2 years, the simple interest on
interest of 10%, the effective rate of interest becomes : the same sum increases by Rs. 108. The sum is :
(A) 10% (B) 10.25% (A) Rs. 1800 (B) Rs. 3600
(C) 10.5% (D) None of these (C) Rs. 5400 (D) Data inadequate
25. Mr. Thomas invested an amount of Rs. 13,900 divided
17. A certain sum of money at simple interest amounts to
in two different schemes A and B at the simple interest
1
Rs. 1012 in 2 years and to Rs. 1067.20 in 4 years. rate of 14% p.a. respectively. If the total amount of simple
2 interest earned in 2 years be Rs. 3508, what was the
The rate of interest per annum is :
amount invested in Scheme B ?
(A) 2.5% (B) 3%
(C) 4% (D) 5% (A) Rs. 6400 (B) Rs. 6500
(C) Rs. 7200 (D) Rs. 7500
18. In how many years will a sum of money double itself at
12% per annum ? 26. Divide Rs. 2379 into 3 parts so that their amounts after
(A) 6 years 9 months (B) 7 years 6 months 2, 3 and 4 years respectively may be equal, the rate of
(C) 8 years 3 months (D) 8 years 4 months interest being 5% per annum at simple interest. The
first part is :
19. Consider the following statements :
(A) Rs. 759 (B) Rs. 792
If a sum of money is lent at simple interest, then the
1. money gets doubled in 5 years if the rate of interest (C) Rs. 818 (D) Rs. 828
2
is 16 %.
3 27. A sum of money amounts to Rs. 4,624 in 2 years and
2. money gets doubled in 5 years if the rate of interest
to Rs. 4,913 in 3 years at compound interest. The sum
is 20%.
is :
3. money becomes four times in 10 years if it gets
doubled in 5 years. (A) Rs. 4,096 (B) Rs. 4,260
Of these statements, (C) Rs. 4,360 (D) Rs. 4, 609
(A) 1 and 3 are correct (B) 2 alone is correct 28. A sum of Rs. 12,000 deposited at compound interest
(C) 3 alone is correct (D) 2 and 3 are correct doubles after 5 years. After 20 years it will become :
20. If the simple interest on a certain sum for 15 months at (A) Rs. 1,20,000 (B) 1,92,000
1 (C) 1,24,000 (D) 96,000
7 % per annum exceeds the simple interest on the
2 29. A tree grows annually by one-eighth of its height. By
1 how much will it grow after 2 years, if it stands today 64
same sum for 8 months at 12 % per annum by Rs.
2 cm high ?
32.50, then the sum (in Rs.) is :
(A) 72 cm (B) 74 cm
(A) Rs.3000 (B) Rs.3060
(C) Rs.3120 (D) Rs.3250 (C) 75 cm (D) 81 cm
21. A sum of Rs. 725 is lent in the beginning of a year at a 30. A sum of Rs. 100 at CI becomes Rs. 300 in 4 years.
certain rate of interest. After 8 months, a sum of Rs. W hat will it amount to in 12 years ?
362.50 more is lent but at the rate twice the former. At (A) Rs. 2,700 (B) Rs. 2,400
the end of the year, Rs. 33.50 is earned as interest
(C) Rs. 2,200 (D) Rs. 3,700
from both the loans. W hat was the original rate of
interest ? 31. The CI on Rs. 50,000 at 10% p.a. Compounded annu-
(A) 3.46% (B) 4.5% ally for a certain time period is Rs. 10,500. W hat is the
(C) 5% (D) 6% time period ?
22. The difference between the simple interest received
(A) 2 years (B) 5 years
from two different sources on Rs. 1500 for 3 years is
Rs. 13.50. The difference between their rates of interest (C) 7 years (D) 4 years
is : 32. W hat sum will become Rs 9826 in 18 months if the
(A) 0.1% (B) 0.2%
1
(C) 0.3% (D) 0.4% rate of interest is 2 % per annum and the interest is
2
23. Peter invested an amount of Rs. 12,000 at the rate of compounded half-yearly?
10 % p.a. simple interest and another amount at the (A) Rs. 9466.54 (B) Rs. 9646.54
rate of 20 % p.a. simple interest. The total interest earned (C) Rs. 9566.54 (D) Rs. 9456.54
at the end of one year on the total amount invested
1
became 14 % p.a. Find the total amount invested. 33. The compound interest on Rs. 20,480 at 6 % per
(A) Rs. 20,000 (B) Rs. 22,000 4
annum for 2 years 73 days, is :
(C) Rs. 24,000 (D) Rs. 25,000
(A) Rs. 2929 (B) Rs. 3000
(C) Rs. 3131 (D) Rs. 3636
PAGE # 86
34. A man saves Rs.200 at the end of each year and lends 43. If the simple interest on a sum of money for 2 years at
the money at 5% compound interest. How much will it 5% per annum is Rs. 50, what is the compound interest
become at the end of 3 years ? on the same sum at the same rate and for the same
(A) Rs. 565.25 (B) Rs. 635 time ?
(C) Rs. 662.02 (D) Rs. 666.50 (A) Rs. 51.25 (B) Rs. 52
35. A bank offers 5% C.I. calculated on half-yearly basis. A
(C) Rs. 54.25 (D) Rs. 60
customer deposits Rs. 1600 each on 1st January and
44. W hat will b e th e difference between sim ple and
1st July of a year. At the end of the year, the amount he
compound interest @ 10% per annum on a sum of
would have gained by way of interest is :
Rs. 1000 after 4 years ?
(A) Rs. 120 (B) Rs. 121
(C) Rs. 122 (D) Rs. 123 (A) Rs. 31 (B) Rs. 32.10
(C) Rs. 40.40 (D) Rs. 64.10
36. W hat is the difference between the compound interests
1 45. The difference between S.I. and C.I. on Rs. 1200 for
on R s. 5 00 0 fo r 1 years at 4% p er an nu m
2 one year at 10% per annum calculated half-yearly is :
compounded yearly and half-yearly ?
(A) Rs. 2.50 (B) Rs. 3
(A) Rs. 2.04 (B) Rs. 3.06
(C) Rs. 3.75 (D) Rs. 4
(C) Rs. 4.80 (D) Rs. 8.30
37. Find the compound interest on Rs. 15,625 for 9 months 46. The C.I. on a sum of money for 2 years is Rs. 832 and
at 16% per annum compounded quarterly. the S.I. on the same sum for the same period is Rs.
(A) Rs. 1851 (B) Rs. 1941 800. The difference between the C.I. and S.I. for 3 years
(C) Rs. 1951 (D) Rs. 1961 will be :
38. A sum of money invested at C.I. amounts to Rs. 800 in (A) Rs. 48 (B) Rs. 66.56
3 years and to Rs. 840 in 4 years. The rate of interest (C) Rs. 98.56 (D) None of these
per annum is : 47. The difference between the S.I. on a certain sum at the
1 rate of 10% per annum for 2 years and C.I. which is
(A) 2 % (B) 4%
2 compounded every 6 months is Rs. 124.05. W hat is
2
(C) 5% (D) 6 % the principal sum ?
3
39. The compound interest on Rs. 30,000 at 7% per annum (A) Rs. 6000 (B) Rs. 8000
is Rs. 4347. The period (in years) is : (C) Rs. 10,000 (D) Rs. 12,000
1 48. The difference in SI and CI on a certain sum of money
2 in 2 years at 15% p.a. is Rs 144. The sum is
(C) 3 years (D) 4 years
(A) Rs 6000 (B) Rs 6200
40. A sum of money placed at C.I. doubles itself in 5 years. (C) Rs 6300 (D) Rs 6400
It will amount to eight times itself at the same rate of
interest in :
(A) 7 years (B) 10 years 49. A sum of Rs. 10 is lent to be returned in 11 monthly
(C) 15 years (D) 20 years installments of Re. 1 each, interest being simple. The
41. A sum of money is borrowed and paid back in two rate of interest is :
an nu al in stalm en t o f Rs. 8 82 each allo win g 5% 1
(A) 9 % (B) 10%
compound interest. The sum borrowed was : 11
(A) Rs. 1620 (B) Rs. 1640 9
(C) 11% (D) 21 %
(C) Rs. 1680 (D) Rs. 1700 11
50. A person takes a loan of Rs. 200 at 5% simple interest.
He returns Rs. 100 at the end of 1 year. In order to clear
42. The difference between the C.I. and S.I. on an amount
his dues at the end of two years, he would pay :
of Rs. 18,000 in 2 years was Rs.405. W hat was the
(A) Rs. 105 (B) Rs. 110
rate of interest % p.a. ?
(A) 10% (B) 15% (C) Rs. 115 (D) Rs. 115.50
(C) 20% (D) 25%
PAGE # 87
51. The price of a T.V. set worth Rs. 20,000 is to be paid in 6. W hen the interest is compounded semi annually, the
20 instalments of Rs. 1000 each. If the rate of interest 1
be 6% per annum, and the first instalment be paid at compound interest on Rs. 4000 for 1 year at 10 %
2
th e time of purc hase, then th e value of th e last p.a.is calculated as follows : (NTSE Stage- I/M.P./2009)
instalment covering the interest as well will be :
3
(A) Rs. 1050 (B) Rs. 2050 10
3
5
(C) Rs. 3000 (D) None of these (A) 4000 1 –1 (B) 4000 1 –1
100 100
52. The population of a village in the year 2000 was
10,000. In the year 2001 & 2002 percentage increase 3
10
in population was 5 % & 10 % respectively. The (C) 2 × 4000 1 –1 (D) None of these
population of village in the year 2002 will be : 100
5 10 7. A sum of money lent out at compound interest at a

(A) 10000 1
100
1
100 certain rate increases in value by 50% in 5 years. A
person wants to lend three different sums of money 'x',
5 10 'y' and 'z' for 10, 15 and 20 years respectively at the
(B) 10000 1 1
above rate in such a way that he gets back equal sums
100 100
of money at the end of the three periods.
5 10 Then the ratio x : y : z is: (NTSE Stage -I/Dehli/2010)
(C) 10000 1 1
100 100 (A) 4 : 3 : 2 (B) 5 : 4 : 1
(C) 9 : 6 : 4 (D) 11 : 9 : 7
5 10
(D) 10000 1 1 8. The difference between compound interest and simple
100 100
interest on a sum of money lent for 2 years at the rate
53. A bacteria reproduces at the rate of 50 % in every of 10% is Rs 40. The sum is :
(NTSE Stage -I/Raj./2010)
3
15 min. In how much time will it be 3 times of itself ? (A) Rs. 1600 (B) Rs. 2000
8 (C) Rs. 4000 (D) Rs. 8000
(A) 105 min (B) 45 min
9. A sum of money is kept in a bank at 8 % interest
(C) 75 min (D) 50 min
compounded annually. Had the interest been at 10 %
54. The population of a town increases 20 % annually.
W hat is the population after two years if present compounded semi annually the amount after 1 year
population is 2500 ? would have been 225 more. W hat was the principal
(A) 3250 (B) 3500 amount kept in the bank ? (NTSE Stage -I/Dehli/2011)
(C) 3600 (D) 4000
(A) Rs. 10,000 (B) Rs. 10,500
(C) Rs. 15,000 (D) Rs. 18,000
10. Simple interest of some money for 2 years at 10% rate of

interest per annum is Rs. 1200. What is the difference in
1. If the compound interest on a certain sum of money for compound interest and simple interest if the rate of
2 years at 4% per annum is Rs.102, then the simple interest, time and Principal amount remains the same ?
interest on the same sum of money at the same rate
and for the same period is : (NTSE Stage-I/Raj./2007)
(A) Rs.99 (B) Rs.100 (A) Rs. 60 (B) Rs. 120
(C) Rs.101 (D) Rs.102 (C) Rs. 160 (D) Rs. 90
2. In what time a capital becomes five times at the interest 11. The present price of car is Rs.7290/-. If its value
rate of 10%. (NTSE Stage-I/Raj./2007) decreased every year by 10%, then its value three
(A) 10 years (B) 30 years years back was [Delhi NTSE Stage-1 2016]
(C) 40 years (D) 50 years (A) Rs.11,500/- (B) Rs.10,500/-
(C) Rs.10,000/- (D) Rs.8,000/-
3. The compound interest on a certain sum of money for
2 years at 5% per annum is Rs. 102.50. Compound 12. W hen the rate of interest being increased from 10% to
interest on the same sum of money for the same period
at 4% per annum is : (NTSE Stage -I/Haryana/2007) 1
12 %, the yearly income of a person increases by
(A) Rs. 80.60 (B) Rs. 82.66 2
(C) Rs.82.60 (D) Rs. 81.60 Rs. 1,250. The principal amount was
4. An amoun t at certain rate of comp ound interest [West Bengal NTSE Stage-1 2016]
becomes Rs. 700 in 3 years and Rs. 756 in 4 years. (A) Rs. 50,000 (B) Rs. 5,000
Rate of interest is : (NTSE Stage-I/Raj./2008) (C) Rs. 15,000 (D) 37,500
(A) 7% (B) 10% 13. The price of a house is Rs.6,76,000. If the price
(C) 8% (D) 10.5% increases every year by 4%, before two years back the
5. A sum of Rs. 8000 at compound interest becomes price of the house was
double after 5 years. After 20 years it will become : [West Bengal NTSE Stage-1 2016]
(NTSE Stage -I/Raj./2009) (A) Rs. 6,00,000 (B) Rs. 6,25,000
(A) Rs. 80000 (B) Rs. 96000 (C) Rs. 6,50,000 (D) Rs. 5,75,000
(C) Rs. 128000 (D) Rs. 160000
PAGE # 88
DIRECT AND INDIRECT PROPORTION Ex.1 A, B and C together can finish a piece of work in
4 days. A alone can do it in 9 days and B alone in
A. Direct Proportion : Two quantities are said to be directly
18 days. How many days will be taken by C to do it
proportional, if on the increase (or decrease) of the
alone.
one, the other increases (or decreases) to the same
Sol. Let’s time taken by C alone to complete the work in x
extent.
days
Cost is directly proportional to the number of articles.
1 1 1 1
(More Articles, More Cost) =
4 9 18 x
W ork done is directly proportional to the number of
x = 12 days.
men working on it (More Men, More W ork)
B. Indirect Proportion : Two quantities are said to be Ex.2 A, B and C can do a piece of work 6, 8 and 12 days
indirectly proportional, if on the increase of the one, respectively. B and C work together for 2 days, then A
the other decreases to the same extent and vice-versa. takes C’s place. How long will it take to finish the work.
The time taken by a car in covering a certain distance 1 1
is inversely, proportional to the speed of the car. Sol. W ork done by B & C in 2 days = 2 ×
8 12
(More speed, Less is the time taken to cover a distance). th
5
Time taken to finish a work is inversely proportional to = part of the work.
12
the number of persons working at it. th th
5 7
(More persons, Less is the time taken to finish a job). Remaining work = 1 – part
12 12
th th
WORK AND TIME 1 1 7
A and B’s one day work = part
6 8 24
W ork is defined as the amount of job assigned or the th
amount of job actually done. 7
So, part of work is completed in 1 day..
24
W ork is always considered as a whole or 1.
th
Units of work : W ork is measured by many units i.e. 7
part of work will be completed in
men-days, men-hours, men-minutes, machine-hours 12
or in general person-time, machine-time.
1 7 24 7
= = 2 days
If A and B can do a piece of work in x and y days 7 12 7 12
respectively while working alone, then they will take 24
xy
days to complete the work if both are work- A can finish a work in x days and B is k times as
x y
ing together. efficient as A (i.e. B will complete the work in
1 x
Proof : A’s one day work = days) Then time taken by both A & B working
x k
1 x
B’s one day work = together to finish the job will be .
y k 1
1 1
and (A + B)’s one day work = + If A is k times as good as B and takes x days less
x y
than B to finish the work. Then the amount of time
x y
(A + B)’s one day work = kx
xy required by A and B working together is days.
k2 – 1
Time taken by both A and B (working together) to
xy Ex.3 A is thrice as good a work man as B and takes 60 days
complete the work = .
x y less than B for doing a job. Find the time in which they
can do it together.
If A, B, C can do a piece of work in x, y, z days
respectively while working alone, then they will to- Sol. Here k = 3, x = 60
Time in which they can do it together
1
gether take days to complete the work. 3 60 3 60 1
1 1 1 = 2
22 days.
3 –1 8 2
x y z
PAGE # 89
Ex.4 25 men were employed to do a piece of work in If m > n, the cistern will never get filled, in this case a
24 days. After 15 days, 10 more men were engaged
mn
and the work was finished a day too soon. In what time completely filled cistern gets emptied in hours.
m–n
could they finish the work if extra men were not
employed. If an inlet pipe fills a cistern in m hrs. and takes n hrs.
Sol. Actual work done = (25 × 15) + (25 + 10) × 8 = 655 man days. longer to fill the cistern due to leak in the cistern, then
655 the time in which the leak will empty the cistern is
Time required by 25 men to complete this work is =
25 m
= 26.2 days. m× 1 .
n
Ex.5 If 12 men or 18 women can reap a field in 7 days, in
Ex.7 A tank is emptied by 2 pipes and filled by a third. If the
what time can 4 men & 8 women reap the same field.
1st two can empty the tank in 2 and 3 hrs. respectively
Sol. 12 men = 18 women
and third can fill it in 4 hours how much time will it take
4 men = 6 women
th
4 men + 8 women = 6 women + 8 women = 14 women 4
Total work done = 18 × 7 women-days to empty the tank full when all three are open.
5
No. of days required to complete this work by 4 men Sol. Let the time taken to completely empty the tank is x hrs.
18 7
and 8 women = 14 women is = = 9 days.
14 1 1 1 1
–
x 2 3 4
Ex.6 A and B undertake to do a piece of work for Rs. 600. A
alone can do it in 6 days, while B alone can do it in 8 1 7
days. W ith the help of C, they finish it in 3 days. Find B’s
x 12
share. 12
x= hrs.
7
1 1 1 1
Sol. C’s 1 day’s work = 12
3 6 8 24 Complete tank will be emptied in hrs.
7
1 1 1 th
Ratio of work done in 1 day for A : B : C = : : 4 12 4 48
6 8 24 tank will be emptied in = = hrs
5 7 5 35
=4:3:1 Ex.8 Two pipes M & N can fill a cistern in 12 & 16 hrs.
respectively. If both the pipes are opened together, then
600 3
B’s share = Rs. = Rs. 225 after how many minutes N should be closed so that
8
the tank is full in 9 hrs.
Sol. Let N be closed after x hrs. Then,
1 1 1
Here the work done is in terms of filling or emptying a x + (9 – x) =1
12 16 12
cistern.
3
Inlet pipe : It is the pipe connected to cistern which fill x = 16 ×
12
the cistern (time taken is in +ve).
x = 4 hrs = 240 minutes.
Outlet pipe : It is the pipe connected to cistern which
empties the cistern. (time taken is –ve). Ex.9 Two pipes A and B can fill a tank in 36 min and 45 min
1
th respectively. Pipe C can empty it in 30 min . A and B are
If an inlet pipe fills a cistern in ‘a’ hours, then opened and after 7 min C is also opened. In how much
a
part is filled in 1 hr. time will the tank be full ?
If two inlet pipes A & B can fill a cistern in ‘m’ & ‘n’ hours
1 1 7
Sol. Part filled in 7 min = 7 × =
36 45 20
mn
respectively then together they will take hrs. to
m n 7 13
fill the cistern. Remaining part = 1 – =
20 20
If an inlet pipe fills a cistern in ‘m’ hours and an outlet
Net part filled in one minute when A, B and C are
pipe empties it in ‘n’ hours, then the net part filled in
1 1 1 1
1 1 opened = .
1 hr. when both the pipes are opened is – hours 36 45 30 60
m n
mn 13 13
and the cistern will get filled in hours, for cistern part is filled in 60 × = 39 mins.
n–m 20 20
to get filled, m < n.
Total time taken to fill the tank = (39 + 7) = 46 mins.
PAGE # 90
Ex.10 A and B can separately do a piece of work in 20 and 7. A, B and C can do a job in 11,20 and 55 days respec-
15 days respectively. They worked together for 6 days, tively. How soon can the work be done if A is assisted
after which B was replaced by C. If the work was by B and C on alternate days ?
finished in next 4 days, then the number of days in (A) 7 days (B) 9 days
which C alone could do the work will be : (C) 8 days (D) 10 days
1 1 7 8. Machines A and B produce 8,000 clips in 4 hr and 6 hr
Sol. (A + B)’s 6 day’s work = 6
20 15 10 respectively. If they work alternately for 1 hr, A starting
3 first, then the 8,000 clips will be produced in :
(A + C)’s 4 day’s work = ;
10 (A) 4.33 hr (B) 5.66 hr
3 (C) 5.33 hr (D) 4.66 hr
(A + C)’s 1 day’s work =
40
9. A cistern can be filled in 9 hr but it takes 10 hr due to a
1
A’s 1 day’s work = leak. In how much time will the leak empty the full cis-
20 tern?
3 1 1 (A) 70 hr (B) 80 hr
C’s 1 day’s work =
40 20 40 (C) 90 hr (D) 100 hr
Hence, C alone can finish the work in 40 days. 10. Taps A and B can fill in a tank in 12 and 15 min respec-
tively. If both are opened and A is closed after 3 min,
how long will it take for B to fill in the tank ?
(A) 8 min 15 s (B) 8 min 5 s
1. A can do a piece of work in 7 days of 9 hr each and B
(C) 7 min 45 s (D) 8 min 45 s
can do it in 6 days of 7 hr each. How long will they take
11. A leak in the bottom of a tank can empty it in 6 hr. A pipe
42
to do it working together hr a day ? fills in the tank at the rate of 4 liters per minutes. W hen
5
the tank is full, the inlet is opened but leak emptied the
(A) 3 days (B) 4 days
tank in 8 hr. W hat is the capacity of the tank ?
(C) 4.5 days (D) 6 days
(A) 5260 L (B) 5670 L
2. A can do a piece of work in 80 days. He works for 10 (C) 5946 L (D) 5760 L
days and then B alone finishes the remaining work in
12. A does half as much work as B, and C does half as
42 days. The two together could complete the work in much work as A and B together in the same time. If C
(A) 24 days (B) 25 days alone can do the work in 40 days, all of them can to-
(C) 30 days (D) 6 days gether will finish the work in :
3. A and B can do a piece of work in 45 days and 40 days
(C) 20 days (D) 13.33 days
respectively. They begin together but A leaves after
13. A can do a piece of work in 9 days and B in 18 days.
some days and B completes the rest in 23 days. For
They began the work together but 3 days before the
how many days did A work ?
comp letion o f work, A leaves. The time taken to
(A) 6 days (B) 9 days complete the work is :
(C) 8 days (D) 12 days (A) 7 days (B) 5 days
(C) 8 days (D) 11 days
4. A can complete a certain job in 12 days. B is 60% more
efficient than A; B can complete the work alone in 14. Harpal is thrice as good a workman as Kewal and
(A) 6 days (B) 6.25 days takes 10 days less to do a piece of work than Kewal
takes. Then Kewal can do that work in :
(C) 7.2 days (D) 7.5 days
5. A and B can do a job in 12 days and B and C can do it (C) 13 days (D) 15 days
in 16 days. After A has been working for 5 days and B 15. If 40 persons consume 240 kg. of rice in 15 days, in
for 7 days. C finishes rest of the work in 13 days. In how many days will 30 persons consume 48 kg of
how many days can C do the work alone ? rice.
(A) 16 days (B) 36 days (A) 2 days (B) 3 days
(C) 48 days (D) 24 days (C) 4 days (D) 5 days
16. A large tanker can be filled by two pipes A and B in 60
6. Twelve men can do a job in 8 days. Six days after they
minutes and 40 minutes respectively. How many
start, 4 more men join them. How many more days minutes will it take to fill the empty tanker if only B is
will it take to do the job ? used in the first-half of the time and A and B are
(A) 2.5 days (B) 3.5 days both used in the second-half of the time ?
(C) 1.5 days (D) 6 days (A) 15 (B) 20
(C) 27.5 (D) 30
PAGE # 91
17. There taps A, B, C fill up a tank independently in 10 hr, 25. A can do a work in 15 days and B in 20 days. If they
20 hr, 30 hr, respectively. Initially the tank is empty and work on it together for 4 days, then the fraction of the
exactly one pair of taps is open during each hour and
work that is left is :
every pair of taps is open at least for one hour. W hat is
the minimum number of hours required to fill the tank? 1 1
(A) (B)
(A) 8 (B) 9 4 10
(C) 10 (D) 11 7 8
(C) (D)
18. A tyre has two punctures. The first puncture alone would 15 15
have made the tyre flat in 9 minutes and the second 26. A machine P can print one lakh books in 8 hours, ma-
alone would have done it in 6 minutes. If air leaks out
chine Q can print the same number of books in 10
at a constant rate, how long does it take both the punc-
tures together to make it flat ? hours while machine R can print them in 12 hours. All
1 1 the machines are started at 9 a.m. while machine P is

(A) 1 minutes (B) 3 minutes closed at 11 a.m. and the remaining two machines
2 2
3 1 complete the work. Approximately at what time will the
(C) 3 minutes (D) 4 minutes
5 4 work be finished ?
19. P, Q an d R are th ree typists wh o wh en w ork (A) 11:30 a.m. (B) 12 noon
simultaneously can type 216 pages in 4 hours. In one (C) 12:30 p.m. (D) 1 p.m.
hour, R can type as many pages more than Q as Q can
type more than P. During a period of five hours, R can 4
type as many pages as P can during seven hours. 27. A does of work in 20 days. He then calls in B and
5
How many pages does each of them type per hour ? they together finish the remaining work in 3 days. How
(A) 14, 17, 20 (B) 15, 17, 22 long B alone would take to do the whole work ?
(C) 15, 18, 21 (D) 16, 18, 22
20. Ronald and Elan are working on an assignment. 1
Ronald takes 6 hours to type 32 pages on a computer, (C) 37 days (D) 40 days
2
while Elan takes 5 hours to type 40 pages. How much
time will they take, working together on two different 28. A and B together can do a piece of work in 30 days. A
computers to type an assignment of 110 pages ? having worked for 16 days, B finishes the remaining
(A) 7 hours 30 minutes (B) 8 hours
work alone in 44 days. In how many days shall B finish
(C) 8 hours 15 minutes (D)8 hours 25 minutes
the whole work alone ?
21. A and B can do a piece of work in 5 days; B and C can
do it in 7 days; A and C can do it in 4 days. W ho among
these will take the least time if put to do it alone ? (C) 60 days (D) 70 days
(A) A (B) B
29. A and B together can do a piece of work in 12 days, which
(C) C (D) Data inadequate
B and C together can do in 16 days. After A has been
22. A can do a certain work in the same time in which B and C working at it for 5 days and B for 7 days, C finishes it in 13
together can do it. If A and B together could do it in 10 days
days. In how many days C alone will do the work ?
and C alone in 50 days, then B alone could do it in :
(A) 15 days (B) 20 days (A) 16 days (B) 24 days
(C) 25 days (D) 30 days (C) 36 days (D) 48 days
23. A is 50% as efficient as B. C does half of the work done 30. A man, a woman and a boy can complete a job in 3, 4 and
by A and B together. If C alone does the work in 40
12 days respectively. How many boys must assist 1 man
days, then A, B and C together can do the work in :
1 1
(A) 13 days (B) 15 days and 1 woman to complete the job in of a day ?
3 4
(C) 20 days (D) 30 days (A) 1 (B) 4
(C) 19 (D) 41
24. Two workers A and B working together completed a job
in 5 days. If A worked twice as efficiently as he actually 31. 12 men can complete a piece of work in 4 days, while
1 15 women can complete the same work in 4 days. 6
did and B worked as efficiently as he actually did,
3 men start working on the job and after working for 2
the work would have been completed in 3 days. A alone
could complete the work in : days, all of them stopped working. How many women
1 1 should be put on the job to complete the remaining
(A) 5 days (B) 6 days work, if it is to be completed in 3 days ?
4 4
1 (A) 15 (B) 18
(C) 7 days (D) None of these
2 (C) 22 (D) None of these
PAGE # 92
32. 12 children take 16 days to complete a work which can 39. A cistern can be filled by a tap in 4 hours while it can be
be completed by 8 adults in 12 days. 16 adults started emptied by another tap in 9 hours. If both the taps are
working and after 3 days 10 adults left and 4 children opened simultaneously, then after how much time will
the cistern get filled ?
joined them. How many days will they take to complete
(A) 4.5 hrs. (B) 5 hrs.
the remaining work ?
(C) 6.5 hrs. (D) 7.2 hrs.
(A) 3 (B) 4
(C) 6 (D) 8 2
40. A water tank is full. Pipe A can fill a tank in 10 min-
33. 16 men can complete a work in 12 days. 24 children 5
utes and pipe B can empty it in 6 minutes. If both the
can complete the same work in 18 days. 12 men and
pipes are open, how long will it take to empty or fill the
8 children started working and after 8 days 3 more
tank completely ?
children joined them. How many days will they now
(A) 6 min. to empty (B) 6 min. to fill
take to complete the remaining work ? (C) 9 min. to fill (D) 9 min. to empty
41. Pipes A and B can fill a tank in 5 and 6 hours respec-
tively. Pipe C can empty it in 12 hours. If all the three
34. 24 men can complete a work in 16 days. 32 women pipes are opened together, then the tank will be filled in
can complete the same work in 24 days. 16 men and :
16 women started working and worked for 12 days. 13 8
(A) 1 hours (B) 2 hours
How many more man are to be added to complete the 17 11
remaining work in 2 days ?
9 1
(C) 3 hours (D) 4 hours
17 2
(A) 16 (B) 24
(C) 36 (D) 48 42. 3 pipes A, B and C can fill a tank from empty to full in 30
minutes, 20 minutes and 10 minutes respectively.
35. 1 man, 3 women and 4 boys can do a piece of work in W hen the tank is empty, all the three pipes are opened.
96 hours, 2 men and 8 boys can do it in 80 hours, 2 A, B and C discharge chemical solution P, Q and R
men and 3 women can do it in 120 hours. 5 men and respectively. W hat is proportion of solution R in the
12 boys can do it in : liquid in the tank after 3 minutes ?
1 7 5 6
(A) 39 hours (B) 42 hours (A) (B)
11 11 11 11
7 7 8
(C) 43 hours (D) 44 hours (C) (D)
11 11 11
36. An electric pump can fill a tank in 3 hours. Because of a 43. Two pipes A and B can separately fill a cistern in 60
min. and 75 min. respectively. There a third pipe in the
1
leak in the tank, it took 3 hours to fill the tank. If the tank bottom of the cistern to empty it. If all the 3 pipes are
2
simultaneously opened, then the cistern is full in 50
is full, how much time will the leak take to empty it ?
min. In how much time, the third pipe alone can empty
(A) 20 hours (B) 21 hours
the cistern ?
(C) 22 hours (D) 23 hours
(A) 90 min. (B) 100 min.
37. Two pipes can fill a cistern in 14 hours and 16 hours (C) 110 min. (D) 120 min.
respectively. The pipes are opened simultaneously and 44. Two pipes A and B together can fill a cistern in 4 hours.
it is found that due to leakage in the bottom it took 32 Had they been opened separately, then B would have
minutes more to fill the cistern. W hen the cistern is full, taken 6 hours more then A to fill the cistern. How much
in what time will the leak empty it ? time will be taken by A to fill the cistern separately ?
(A) 90 hours (B) 100 hours (A) 1 hour (B) 2 hour
(C) 108 hours (D) 112 hours (C) 6 hour (D) 8 hour
45. A tank is filled by three pipes with uniform flow. The first
38. Two pipes A and B can fill a tank in 36 min. and 45 min.
two pipes operating simultaneously fill the tank in the
respectively. A water pipe C can empty the tank in 30
same time during which the tank is filled by the third
min. First A and B are opened. After 7 min., C is also
pipe alone. The second pipe fills the tank five hour
opened. In how much time, the tank is full ? faster than the first pipe and 4 hour slower than the
(A) 40 min. (B) 42 min. third. The time required by the first pipe is :
(C) 44 min. (D) 46 min. (A) 6 hrs. (B) 10 hrs.
(C) 15 hrs. (D) 30 hrs.
PAGE # 93
46. A large tanker can be filled by two pipes A and B in 60 3. A machine makes 3 items in 5 minutes. Find its rate of
min. and 40 min. respectively. How many minutes will it production per minute. (NTSE Stage -I/Gujrat/2007)
take to fill the tanker from empty state if B is used for half
1 1
the time and A and B fill it together for the other half ? (A) (B)
3 5
(A) 15 min. (B) 20 min.
(C) 27.5 min. (D) 30 min. 3 5
(C) (D)
47. A booster pump can be used for filling as well as 5 3
emptying a tank. The capacity of the tank is 2400 m3. 4. Certain number of persons can complete a work in
The emptying capacity of the tank is 10 m3 /min. higher 100 days. If 10 persons were less, it would have taken
than its filling capacity and the pump needs 8 min. 10 days more for the work to be completed. Number of
lesser to empty the tank than it need to fill it. W hat is the persons in the beginning is :
filling capacity of the pump. (NTSE Stage -I/Haryana/2007)
(A) 50 m3/min. (B) 60 m3/min. (A) 100 (B) 90
3
(C) 72 m /min. (D) None of these (C) 110 (D) None of these
1 5. One pipe can fill a tank three times as fast as another

48. Two pipes A and B can fill a cistern in 37 min. and pipe. If together the two pipes can fill the tank in 36
2
45 min. resp ectively. Both pipe are opened. The minutes then the slower pipe alone will be able to fill
1 the tank in. (NTSE-Stage-I/Tripura/2008)
cistern will be filled in just hour., if the pipe B is (A) 81 minutes (B) 108 minutes
2
turned off after : (C) 144 minutes (D) 192 minutes
(A) 5 min. (B) 9 min.
6. Machine A and B manufacture x telephone set in 4 and
(C) 10 min. (D) 15 min.
6 hrs respectively. If they work alternately for 1 hrs;
49. Three pipes A, B and C can fill a tank in 6 hours. After
Machine A start first then the time taken to produce
working at it together for two hours, C is closed and A
x telephone -set will be : (NTSE-Stage-I/MP/2008)
and B can fill the remaining part in 7 hours. The
2 2
number of hours taken by C alone to fill the tank is : (A) 4 x hrs. (B) 4 hrs.
3 3
(A) 10 (B) 12
(C) 14 (D) 16 1 1
(C) 4 x hrs. (D) 4 hrs.
3 3
50. A leak in the bottom of a tank can empty the full tank in
7. A woodcutter cuts a log of wood in three pieces in 18
8 hour. An inlet pipe fills water at the rate of 6 liters a
minutes. To make x such pieces, the time taken will be :
minutes. W hen the tank is full, the inlet is opened and
(NTSE Stage -I/Haryana/2009)
due to leak, the tank is empty in 12 hours. How many
(A) 6(x – 1) minutes (B) 6x minutes
liters does the cistern hold ?
(C) 9(x – 1) minutes (D) 9x minutes
(A) 7580 (B) 7960
8. 8 men or 12 boys complete a work in 25 days. 6 men
(C) 8290 (D) 8640
and 11 boys together can complete that work in :
1. If 6 persons can complete the electric fittings in a 9. Sharma is 20% less efficient than Kelkar. If Kelkar can
building in 7 days, then 21 persons can complete the do a piece of work in 24 days, then the number of days
same work in : (NTSE-Stage-I/Tamilnadu/2006) required by sharma to complete the same work done ?
(A) 14 days (B) 24 ½ days (NTSE Stage-I/Raj./2011)
(C) 2 days (D) 3 days (A) 20 (B) 30
(C) 28.8 (D) 32
3 1
2. A can do part of a work is 9 hrs., B can do part of
8 4 10. A farmer has enough food to feed 20 animals for 6
the same work in 4 hrs. Both work together and days. How long will the food last if number of animals
complete the work in : (NTSE Stage-I/Raj./2007) is increased by 50%. (NTSE Stage-I/Raj./2012)
48 5
(A) hrs (B) hrs (C) 5 days (D) 2 days
5 48
35 8
(C) hrs (D) hrs
8 35
PAGE # 94
Ex.3 A hare makes 9 leaps in the same time as a dog

TIME, SPEED & DISTANCE
1
makes 4. But the dog’s leap is 2 m while hare’s is
Dis tan ce Dis tan ce
3
(i) Speed = , Time = , only 1 m. How many leaps will the dog have to make
Time Speed
before before catching up with the hare if the hare has
Distance = (Speed × Time)
a head start of 16 m ?
5 7 28
(ii) x km/hr = x m/sec Sol. Distance covered by dog in 4 leaps = 4 × = m
18 3 3
Distance covered by hare in 9 leaps = 9 × 1 = 9m
18 1
(iii) x m/sec = x km/hr
5 Distance gained by the dog in 4 leaps = m.
3
Hence, for 1 m gain he has to make 12 leaps.
(iv) If the ratio of the speeds of A and B is a : b, then the
Number of leaps required by the dog to gain 16 m
ratio of the times taken by them to cover the same
= 12 × 16 = 192 leaps.
1 1
distance is : or b : a.
a b PROBLEMS ON TRAINS
(v) Suppose a man covers a certain distance at (i) Time taken by a train of length ‘a’ metres to pass a
x km/hr and an equal distance at y km/hr. Then, the pole or a standing man or a signal post is equal to the
averag e sp eed du ring the w ho le j ou rn ey is
time taken by the train to cover ‘a’ metres.
2 xy
km/hr.. (ii) Time taken by a train of length ‘a’ metres to pass a
x y
stationary object of length ‘b’ metres is the time taken
Average speed : by the train to cover (a + b) metres.
If a body travels d1, d2, d3,........, dn distances with speeds (iii) Suppose two trains or two bodies are moving in
s1, s2, .......,sn,........ respectively, then the average speed
the same direction at u m/s and v m/s, where u > v,
of the body through the total distance is given by :
then their relative speed = (u – v) m/s.
Total dis tance covered
Average speed = Total time taken (iv) Suppose two trains or two bodies are moving in
opposite direction at u m/s and v m/s, then their relative
d1 d2 d3 .......... dn
speed = (u + v) m/s.
= t
1 t 2 t 3 ....... t n
(v) If two trains of length ‘a’ metres and ‘b’ metres are
d d
W here, t1 = 1 , t2 = 2 ... moving in opposite directions at u m/s and v m/s, then
s1 s2
tim e taken by the train s to c ro ss eac h other
Ex.1 A man travels Ist 50 km at 25 km/hr, next 40 km with 20 a b
km/hr. and then 90 km at 15 km/hr. Then find his average = sec.
(u v )
speed for the whole journey (in km/hr).
(vi) It two trains of length ‘a’ metres and ‘b’ metres are
50 40 90
Sol. Avg. Speed = = 18 km/hr.. moving in the same direction at u m/s and v m/s then
50 40 90
25 20 15 the time taken by the faster train to cross the slower
a b
train = sec.
Ex.2 If a man travels @ 10 km/hr from A to B and again (u v )
@ 15 km/hr. from B to A. Find the average speed of
(vii) If two trains (or bodies) start at the same time
man for complete journey.
from points A and B towards each other and after
2 10 15 2 10 15
Sol. Avg. speed = = 12 km/hr.. crossing they take ‘a’ and ‘b’ sec in reaching B and A
10 15 25
respectively, then (A’s speed) : (B’s speed) = ( b : a ) .
PAGE # 95
Ex.4 Two trains running in the same direction at 40 km/hr (ii) If the speed of a boat in still water is u km/hr and the
speed of the stream is v km/hr, then :
and 22 km/hr completely pass one another in 1 minute.
Speed downstream = (u + v) km/hr.
If the length of the Ist train is 125 m., then what will be Speed upstream = (u – v) km/hr.
the length of IInd train. (iii) If the speed downstream is a km/hr and the speed
Sol. Relative speed of trains = 40 – 22 = 18 km/hr. upstream is b km/hr, then :
18 km/hr. = 5 m/sec. 1
Speed of boat in still water = (a + b) km/hr
Let the length of second train = L m. 2
L 125 1
Time taken to cross each other = Rate of stream = (a – b) km/hr..
5
2
L 125
= 60 L = 175 m. Ex.8 A man can row three-quarters of a kilometre against
5
1
Ex.5 A train passes a station platform in 36 seconds and a the stream in 11 minutes and covered the same
4
man standing on the platform in 20 seconds. If the 1
distance with the stream 7 in min. Find the speed
speed of the train is 54 km/hr, what is the length of the 2
(in km/hr) of the man in still water.
platform ?
750 10
5 Sol. Rate upstream = m/sec = m/sec ;
Sol. Speed = 54 m/sec = 15 m/sec 675 9
18
Length of the train = (15 × 20) m = 300 m. 750 5
Rate downstream = m/sec = m/sec
Let the length of the platform be x metres. 450 3
x 300 1 10 5
Then, = 15 Rate in still water = m/sec
36 2 9 3
x + 300 = 540 x = 240 m. 25 25 18
= m/sec = km/hr = 5 km/hr..
18 18 5
Ex.6 A train 125 m long passes a man, running at 5 kmph in
the same direction in which the train is going, in 10 1
Ex.9 A man can row 9 kmph in still water and finds that it
seconds. Find the speed of the train. 3
takes him thrice as much time to row up than as to row
125
Sol. Speed of the train relative to man = m/sec down the same distance in the river. Find the speed of
10
the current.
25 25 18 Sol. Let sp eed up stream be x km ph . Th en , sp eed
= m/sec = km/hr = 45 km/hr.. downstream = 3x kmph.
2 2 5
1
Let the speed of the train be x kmph. Then, relative Speed in still water = (3x + x) kmph = 2x kmph.
2
speed = (x – 5) km/hr
28 14
x – 5 = 45 or x = 50 km/hr. 2x = x= .
3 3
Ex.7 Two goods train each 500 m long, are running in 14
So, Speed upstream = km/hr ;
opposite directions on parallel tracks. Their speeds 3
Speed downstream = 14 km/hr.
are 45 km/hr and 30 km/hr respectively. Find the time
1 14
taken by the slower train to pass the driver of the faster Hence, speed of the current = 14 – km/hr
2 3
one.
14 2
Sol. Relative speed = (45 + 30) km/hr = km/hr = 4 km/hr..
3 3
5 125 CIRCULAR MOTION
= 75 m/sec = m/sec
18 6
The problems in circular motion deal with races on a
Distance covered = (500 + 500) m = 1000 m.
circular track to calculate the time of meeting at the
6 starting point and anywhere on the track.
Required time = 1000 sec = 48 sec.
125 (i) If two people A and B start from the same point, at
the same time and move in the same direction along a
BOATS AND STREAMS circular track and take x minutes and y minutes re-
spectively to come back to the starting point, then they
(i) In water, the direction along the stream is called would meet for the first time at the starting point ac-
downstream. And, the direction against the stream is cording to the formula given below :
called upstream. First time meeting of A and B at the starting point
= (LCM of x and y)
PAGE # 96
NOTE : This formula would remain the same even if Hence, after every 225 s, Saurav would be at the start-
they move in the opposite directions. ing point and after every 360s, Sachin would be at the
(ii) If two people A and B start from the same point with starting point. The time, when they will be together again
speeds m km/hr and n km/hr respectively, at the same at the starting point simultaneously for the first time,
time and move in the same direction along a circular would be LCM (225, 360) = 1800 s. Thus, after every
track, then the two would meet for the first time by the half an hour, they would meet at the starting point. From
formula given below : the solution you could realize that it is immaterial
Circumfere nce of track whether they move in the same direction or in the
Time of the first meeting = opposite direction.
Re lative speed
Ex.10 Ashish and Prashant as a warm up exercise are

jogging on a circular track. Prashant is a better athlete
and jogs at 18 km/hr, while Ashish jogs at 9 km/hr. The 1. Excluding stoppages, the speed of a bus is 54 km/hr
circumference of the track is 500 m. They start from the and including stoppage, it is 45 km/hr. For how many
same point and in the same direction. W hen will they long does the bus stop per hour?
be together again for the first time ? (A) 9 min (B) 15 min
Sol. Since Prashant is faster than Ashish he will take a
(C) 12 min (D) 10 min
lead and as they keep running, the gap between them
will also keep widening, unlike on a straight track they 2. Two cities P and Q are 110 km apart. Person A started
would meet again even if Prashant is faster than from city P at 7 a.m. at the speed of 20 km/hr and B
Ashish. started from city Q at 8 a.m. at the speed of 25 km/hr.
Every second, Prashant is taking a lead of Find when will they meet.
(A) 9 a.m. (B) 10 a.m.
5 5
= 18 9 m = 2.5 m over Ashish. (C) 12 a.m. (D) 11 a.m.
18 18
3. Tarun can cover a certain distance in 1 hr 24 min by
500 2
Hence, he takes = 200s to take a lead of 500 m covering of the distance at 4 km/hr and the rest at
2. 5 3
over Ashish. 5 km/hr. The total distance is :
Hence, they would meet for the first time after 200s. (A) 5 km (B) 6 km
Ex.11 Suppose, in the earlier problem, when would the two (C) 8 km (D) 9.2 km
meet for the first time if they are moving in the opposite 4. W alking at three-fourths of his normal speed, a man is
directions ? late by 2.5 hr. The usual time is :
Sol. If the two are moving in the opposite directions, then (A) 7. 5 hr (B) 3.5 hr
relative speed = 2.5 + 5 = 7.5 m/s (C) 3.25 hr (D) 8 hr
Hence, time for the first meeting
5. If a boy walks from his house at 4 km/hr, he reaches
Circumfere nce 500 200
= s = 66.66s. school 10 min early. If he walks at 3 km/hr, he reaches
Re lative speed 7 .5 3
10 min late. W hat is the distance from his house to
Ex.12 If the speeds of Saurav and Sachin were 8 km/hr & school ?
5 km/hr respectively. Then after what time will the two (A) 6 km (B) 4.5 km
meet for the first time at the starting point if they start (C) 5 km (D) 4 km
simultaneously ? The length of the circular track is
6. Two trains start from opposite directions 200 km apart
500 m.
at the same time. They cross each other at a distance
Sol. Let us first calculate the time Saurav and Sachin take
of 110 km from one of the stations. W hat is the ratio of
to make one full circle.
their speeds ?
500 (A) 11 : 20 (B) 9 : 20
Time taken by Saurav = 5 = 225 s. (C) 11 : 9 (D) 17 : 9
8
18
7. A is twice as fast as B and B is twice as fast as C. The
500 distance covered by C in 54 min will be covered by A in:
5 = 360s. (A) 216 min (B) 27 min

Time taken by Sachin = 5
18 (C) 108 min (D) 13.5 min
PAGE # 97
8. A train 300 m long crossed a platform 900 m long in 17. A thief robs a house at 12 midnight, and as soon as he
1 min 12 s. The speed of the train is :
leaves the house, the house owner realises of the
(A) 45 km/hr (B) 50 km/hr
robbery in the house. After 10 minutes he rings the
(C) 60 km/hr (D) 55 km/hr
alert alarm, and the security guards of the house start
9. Two trains travel in opposite directions at 36 km/hr
running after the thief to catch him. If the speed of the
and 45 km/hr respectively. A man sitting in the slower
train passes the faster train in 8 s. The length of the thief is 30 km/hr and that of the security guards is 20
faster train is : km/hr, what time will the guards catch the thief ?
(A) 80 m (B) 120 m (A) 00.30 hrs (B) 00.40 hrs
(C) 150 m (D) 180 m
(C) Cannot be determined
10. A man sees a train passing over a bridge 1 km long. (D) Never catch the thief
The length of the train is half that of the bridge. If the
train clears the bridge in 2 min, the speed of the train is 18. Bombay Express left Delhi for Bombay at 14.30 hrs,
(A) 30 km/hr (B) 45 km/hr travelling at a speed of 60 kmph .and Rajdhani Express
left Delhi for Bombay on the same day at 16.30 hrs,
11. A man rows 13 km upstream and 28 km downstream travelling at a speed of 80 kmph. How far away from
in 5 hr each. The speed of the stream is :
Delhi will the two trains meet ?
(A) 1.5 km/hr (B) 2 km/hr
(C) 2.5 km/hr (D) 3 km/hr (A) 120 km (B) 360 km
(C) 480 km (D) 500 km
12. A river runs at 2 km/hr. If a man takes twice as long to
row up the river as to row down, the speed of the man 19. Pallavi and Richa start Simultaneously from P and Q
in still water is :
towards Q and P respectively. They meet on the way at
(C) 8 km/hr (D) 6 km/hr T. W hich is at a distance of 120 m from P. If Pallavi and
Richa take 16 s and 25 s to reach their respective
13. A railway passenger counts the telegraph posts on the
line as he passes them while travelling; If the poles destinations from T, then what is the distance between
are 50 m apart and the train is going at the speed of 48 P and Q.
km/hr. How many posts will be passed by the train per (A) 214 m (B) 200 m
minute?
(C) 240 m (D) 216 m
(A) 15 (B) 17
(C) 18 (D) 20 20. A person travels in a car from his village to a town at
14. A man is traveling by car at the rate of 40 km/hr. After a speed of 50 km/hr for four hours. There he spends
every 80 km, he rests for 20 min. How long will he take an hour moving about 20 kms. He then returns to his
to cover a distance of 240 km ?
village at a speed 40 km/hr. His average speed over
(A) 6 hr 40 min (B) 6 hr
(C) 6 hr 20 min (D) 7 hr the whole journey (in km/hr) is :
(A) 44 (B) 42
15. A dog at point A goes in pursuit of a fox 40 m away. The
dog takes a leap of 2 m against 1m long leap of the 4 2
(C) 44 (D) 46
fox. If the dog makes two leaps to the fox‘s three at 9 3
what distance from A will the dog catch up with the fox? 21. A man wants to reach a certain destination. One sixth of
(A) 150 m (B) 160 m
the total distance is muddy while half the distance is
(C) 105 m (D) 120 m
tar road. For the remaining distance he takes a boat.
16. Tw o train s c an run at a sp eed of 54 km/hr and
His speed of traveling in mud, in water & on tar road is
36 km/hr on a parallel tracks. W hen they are running in
opposite directions, they pass each other in 10 s. W hen in the ratio 3 : 4 : 5. The ratio of the durations he
they move in the same direction, a person sitting in the requires to cross the patch of mud. stream and tar
faster train crosses the other train in 30 s. Find the road is :
length of the trains ( faster and slower respectively)
(A) 100 m and 150 m (B) 150 m and 100 m 1 4 5
(A) : : (B) 3 : 8 : 15
(C) 150 m each (D) 100 m each 2 5 2
(C) 10 : 15 : 18 (D) 1 : 2 : 3
PAGE # 98
22. Two friends A and B are 30 km apart and they start 29. Anna left for city A from city B at 5.20 a.m. She travelled
simultaneously on motorcycles to meet each other. at the speed of 80 km/hr. for 2 hours 15 minutes. After
The speed of A is 3 times that of B. The distance be- that the speed was reduced to 60 km / hr. If the dis-
tance between two cities is 350 kms, at what time did
tween them decreases at the rate of 2 km per minute.
Anna reach city A ?
Ten minutes after they start, A's vehicle breaks down
(A) 9.20 a.m. (B) 9.25 a.m.
and A stops and waits for B to arrive. After how much
(C) 9.35 a.m. (D) 10.25 a.m.
time A started riding, does B meet A ?
30. A farmer travelled a distance of 61 km in 9 hours. He
(A) 15 mins. (B) 20 mins.
travelled partly on foot @ 4 km/hr and partly on bicycle
(C) 25 mins. (D) 30 mins. @ 9 km/ hr. The distance travelled on foot is :
23. A goods train leaves a station at a certain time and at (A) 14 km (B) 15 km
(C) 16 km (D) 17 km
a fixed speed. After 6 hours, an express train leaves
the same station and moves in the same direction at 31. A car driver travels from the plains to the hill station,
a uniform speed of 90 kmph. This train catches up the which are 200 km apart at an average speed of 40 km/
goods train in 4 hours. Find the speed of the goods hr. In the return trip, he covers the same distance at an
average speed of 20 km/ hr. The average speed of the
train.
car over the entire distance of 400 km is :
(A) 50 kmph. (B) 40 kmph.
(A) 25 km/hr (B) 26.67 km/hr
(C) 36 kmph. (D) 30 kmph.
(C) 28.56 km/hr (C) 30 km/hr
24. A thief is spotted by a policeman from a distance of 32. I started on my bicycle at 7 a.m. to reach a certain
100 metres. W hen the policeman starts the chase, the place. After going a certain distance, my bicycle went
thief also starts running. If the speed of the thief be 8 out of order. Consequently, I rested for 35 minutes and
km/hr and that of the policeman 10 km/hr, how far the came back to my house walking all the way. I reached
thief will have run before he is overtaken ? my house at 1 p.m. If my cycling speed is 10 kmph and
(A) 300 m (B) 350 m my walking speed is 1 kmph, then on my bicycle I
covered a distance of :
(C) 400 m (D) 450 m
61 4
25. A man in a train notices that he can count 21 telephone (A) 4 km (B) 13 km
66 9
posts in one minute. If they are known to be 50 metres
apart, then at what speed is the train travelling ? 3 10
(C) 14 km (D) 15 km
(A) 55 km/hr (B) 57 km/hr 8 21
33. A man travels 600 km by train at 80 km / hr, 800 km by
26. Sound is said to travel in air at about 1100 feet per ship at 40 km / hr, 500 km by aeroplane at 400 km / hr
1 and 100 km by car at 50 km / hr. W hat is the average
second. A man hears the axe striking the tree, speed for the entire distance?
5
seconds after he sees it strike the tree. How far is the 5
man from the wood chopper ? 123
(A) 2197 ft (B) 2420 ft
5
(C) 2500 ft (D) 2629 ft (C) 62 km/hr (D) 65 km/hr
123
27. An express train travelled at an average speed of 100 34. A car travels the first one-third of a certain distance with
km / hr, stopping for 3 minutes after every 75 km. How a speed of 10 km / hr, the next one-third distance with
long did it take to reach its destination 600 km from the a speed of 20 km / hr, and the last one-third distance
starting point ? with a speed of 60 km / hr. The average speed of the
(A) 6 hrs 21 min (B) 6 hrs 24 min car for the whole journey is :
(C) 6 hrs 27 min (D) 6 hrs 30 min (A) 18 km/hr (B) 24 km/hr
28. A certain distance is covered by a cyclist at a certain
35. A motorist covers a distance of 39 km in 45 minutes by
speed. If a jogger covers half the distance in double
moving at a speed of x kmph for the first 15 minutes,
the time, the ratio of the speed of the jogger to that of then moving at double the speed for the next 20
the cyclist is: minutes then again moving at his original speed for
(A) 1 : 2 (B) 2 : 1 the rest of the journey. Then, x is equal to :
(C) 1 : 4 (D) 4 : 1 (A) 31.2 (B) 36
(C) 40 (D) 52
PAGE # 99
36. Mary jogs 9 km at a speed of 6 km per hour. At what 43. W ith a uniform speed a car covers the distance in 8
speed would she need to jog during the next 1.5 hours hour. Had the speed been increased by 4 km / hr, the
to have an average of 9 km per hour for the entire jog- 1
same distance could have been covered in 7 hours.
ging session? 2
(A) 9 kmph (B) 10 kmph W hat is the distance covered ?
(C) 12 kmph (D) 14 kmph (A) 420 km (B) 480 km
(C) 640 km (D) None of these
6
37. W alking th of his usual speed, a man is 12 minutes 44. It takes eight hours for a 600 km journey, if 120 km is
7 done by train and the rest by car. It takes 20 minutes
too late. The usual time taken by him to cover that more, if 200 km is done by train and the rest by car. The
distance is: ratio of the speed of the train to that of the car is :
(A) 1 hour (B) 1 hr 12 min. (A) 2 : 3 (B) 3 : 2
(C) 1 hr 15 min. (D) 1 hr 20 min. (C) 3 : 4 (D) 4 : 3
38. Robert is travelling on his cycle and has calculated to 45. A walks around a circular field at the rate of one round
per hour while B runs around it at the rate of six rounds
reach point A at 2 P.M. if he travels at 10 kmph. he will
per hour. They start in the same direction from the point
reach there at 12 noon if he travels at 15 kmph. At what
at 7.30 a.m. They shall first cross each other at :
speed must he travel to reach A at 1 P.M.
(A) 7.42 a.m. (B) 7.48 a.m.
(A) 8 kmph (B) 11 kmph
(C) 8.10 a.m. (D) 8.30 a.m.
(C) 12 kmph (D) 14 kmph
46. A train M leaves Meerut at 5 a.m. and reaches Delhi at
39. A man covered a certain distance at some speed. Had
9 a.m. Another train leaves Delhi at 7 a.m. and reaches
he moved 3 kmph faster, he would taken 40 minutes Meerut at 10.30 a.m. At what time do the two trains
less. If he had moved 2 kmph slower, he would have cross each other?
taken 40 minutes more. The distance (in km) is : (A) 7.36 a.m. (B) 7.56 a.m.
2 (C) 8 a.m. (D) 8.26 a.m.
(A) 35 (B) 36
3
47. The distance between two cities A and B is 330 km. A
1
(C) 37 (D) 40 train starts from A at 8 a.m. and travels towards B at 60
2 km/ hr. Another train starts from B at 9 a.m. and travels
40. A car travels from P to Q at a constant speed. If its towards A at 75 km / hr. At what time do they meet ?
speed were increased by 10 km / hr. It would have (A) 10 a.m. (B) 10.30 a.m.
taken one hour lesser to cover the distance. It would (C) 11 a.m. (D) 11.30 a.m.
have taken further 45 minutes lesser if the speed was 48. Two trains start from P and Q respectively and travel
further increased by 10 km / hr. W hat is the distance towards each other at a speed of 50 km/hr and 40 km/
between the two cities ? hr respectively. By the time they meet, the first train has
(A) 420 km (B) 540 km travelled 100 km more than the second. The distance
(C) 600 km (D) 650 km between P and Q is :
(A) 500 km (B) 630 km
41. A train can travel 50% faster than a car. Both start from
(C) 660 km (D) 900 km
point A at the same time and reach point B 75 kms
away from A at the same time. On the way, however.
the train lost about 12.5 minutes while stopping at the
stations. The speed of the car is :
(A) 100 kmph (B) 110 kmph 1. Two Trains of lengths 150 m and 180 m respectively
(C) 120 kmph (D) 130 kmph are running in opposite directions on parallel tracks.
If their speeds be 30 km/hr. and 24 km/hr, respectively,
42. In covering a certain distance, the speeds of A and B then they cross each other in :
are in the ratio of 3 : 4. A takes 30 minutes more than B (NTSE-Stage-I/Tamilnadu/2006)
to reach the destination. The time taken by A to reach (A) 15 Seconds (B) 20 Seconds
the "destination is : (C) 22 Seconds (D) 26 Seconds
2. A 400 m long train is running at the speed of 60 km per
1
(A) 1 hour (B) 1 hours hour. It crosses a bridge of length 800 m in :
2 (NTSE Stage-I/Raj./2007)
1
(C) 2 hours (D) 2 hours 2
2 (A) 6 seconds (B) 20 seconds
3
(C) 2 seconds (D) 72 seconds
PAGE # 100
3. A train cross a telegraph post in 15 seconds with the 9. A train traveling at 90 k m/hr. is able to pass a
speed 48 km/hour. Time will be take to cross a bridge telegraph post in 10 seconds . The length of the train
of length 240 metre is : (NTSE-Stage-I/Tripura/2008) is : (NTSE-Stage-I/Shilong/2009)
(A) 34 sec (B) 33 sec (A) 250 meter (B) 240 meter
(C) 31 sec (D) 32 sec (C) 242 meter (D) 245 meter
4. A boy walks from home at 4 kilometers per hour and
10. There are two trains running on two parallel tracks. A
reaches school 5 minutes late. The next day, he
train of length 100 m takes 10 seconds to pass over
inc rease his sp eed by 1 kilometer p er h our and
1 another train 150 m long coming from the opposite
reaches 2 minutes early. How far is the school from direction. If the speed of first train is 60 km/h, the speed
2
his home ? (NTSE-Stage–I/Kerala/2008) of the second train is : (NTSE Stage-I/Raj./2010)
1 (A) 45 Km/hr (B) 28 Km/hr
(A) 3 km (B) 3 km (C) 30 Km/hr (D) None of these
2
1 11. The length of Kanpur mail is 120 m and that of Punjab
(C) 2 km (D) 2 km
2 mail is 80 m. These two trains are running in the same
5. Ekta drives a car with a speed of 48 km./hr. and covers d irec tion w ith sp eeds o f 40 k m/h an d 50 k m/h
a fixed distance in 10 hrs., if the same distance is to be respectively .The time taken by them to cross each
covered in 8 hrs., How much speed should Ekta other is : (NTSE Stage-I/Raj./2011)
increase : (NTSE-Stage-I/MP/2008) (A) 8 seconds (B) 72 seconds
(A) 60 km / hr. (B) 36 km / hr. (C) 115 seconds (D) 12.5 seconds
(C) 24 km /hr. (D) 12 km/ hr.
12. A train is moving at a uniform speed of 75 km/hour.
6. A train 150 meter long crosses a man walking at a
Find the time required to cross platform having 750
speed of 6 kmph in the opposite direction in 6 seconds.
meter length If the length of the train is also 750 meter.
The speed of the train (in kmph) is :
(NTSE Stage-I/Delhi/2008)
(A) 54 Sec (B) 36 Sec.
(C) 72 Sec (D) 18 Sec.
(C) 96 km/hr (D) 106 km/hr
7. In covering a distance of 30 km Hari takes 2 hours 13. Parth misses a train by 1 hour, if he travels at a
more than Ram. If Hari doubles his speed, he would speed of 4 km/h. If he increases his speed to 5km/h,
he still misses the train by 24 minutes. At what
take one hour less than Ram. Hari's speed is :
speed he should travel so that he reaches the
(NTSE Stage -I/Haryana/2008) station exactly on time. [Delhi NTSE Stage-1 2016]
(A) 5 km/hr (B) 7.5 km/hr (A) 15 km/h (B) 8 km/h
(C) 6 km/hr (D) 6.25 km/hr (C) 10 km/h (D) 6 km/h
8. A train with the speed of 36 Km/hrs. crosses a pole in 14. In a 100m race, A beats B by 20m or 5 seconds, Find
30 sec. The length of the train is : the speed of A [Delhi NTSE Stage-1 2016]
(M.P./ NTSE/Stage - I/2009) (A) 5 m/sec (B) 4 m/sec
(C) 6m/sec (D) 8 m/sec
(A) 300 meter (B) 1800 meter
(C) 600 meter (D) None of these
PAGE # 101
Ex.6 A pupil’s marks were wrongly entered as 83 instead

AVERAGE
of 63. Due to that the average marks for the class
The average of n observation is defined as : increased by its half. Find the number of pupils in the
class.
Sum of n observatio ns
Average = No. of observatio ns(n) Sol. Let there be x pupils in the class.
1 x
Total increase in marks = x = .
Ex.1 Find the average of all prime numbers between 30 2 2
and 50. x x
= (83 – 63) = 20 x = 40.
Sol. There are five prime numbers between 30 and 50. 2 2
They are 31, 37, 41, 43, and 47
Suppose a man covers a certain distance at x kmph
31 37 41 43 47
Required average = and an equal distance at y kmph. Then the average
5
2 xy
199 speed during the whole journey is x y kmph.
= = 39.8
5
Ex.2 Find the average of first 20 multiples of 7. Ex.7 Naresh Kumar drives his car to his office with the
speed of 40 km per hour and returns along the same
7(1 2 3 ...... 20 ) route with the speed of 60 km per hour. Find his average
Sol. Required average =
20 speed for the entire round trip.
Sol. Here the distance is same therefore average speed
7 20 21 147
= = = 73.5. 2 s1 s 2 2 40 60
20 2 2 = =
s1 s 2 ( 40 60)
Ex.3 The average of 25 results is 18. The average of first 4800
= = 48 km/h.
twelve of them is 14 and of last twelve is 17. Find the 100
thirteenth result. The total deviation below the average is equal to the
Sol. Clearly, thirteenth result = (sum of 25 results) – (sum total deviation above the average.
of 24 results)
Ex.8 If the average (arithmetic mean) of 57, 54, and x is 70,
= [(18 x 25) – [(14 x 12) + (17 x 12)]
what is the value of x ?
= 450 – (168 + 204) = 450 – 372 = 78.
Sol. Since 57 is 13 less than 70 and 54 is 16 less than 70,
Ex.4 The average age of a class of 39 students is 15 years. the total deviation below the average is 13 + 16 = 29.
If the age of the teacher be Included, then the average Therefore, the total deviation above the average must
increases by 3 months. Find the age of the teacher. also be 29. Therefore x = 70 + 29 = 99.
Sol. Total age of 39 persons = (39 × 15) years = 585 years. Assume that the average of a set of numbers is A. If a
Average age of 40 persons = 15 years 3 months number, x, is added to the set and a new average is
61 calculated, then the new average will be less than,
= years.
4 equal to, or greater than A, depending on whether x is
61 less than , equal to, or greater than A, respectively.
Total age of 40 persons = 40 years = 610 years.
4
Ex.9 Let n be an integer greater than 1, let a = the average
Age of the teacher = (610 – 585) years = 25 years. (arithmetic mean ) of the integers from 1 to n, and let
b = the average of the integers from 0 to n. W hich of the
Ex.5 A batsman makes a score of 87 runs in the 17th inning following could be true ?
and thus increases his average by 3. Find his average .a=b .a<b .a>b
after 17th inning. Sol. Since a is the average of the integers from 1 to n, a is
Sol. Let the average after 17th inning = x. surely greater than 1. You are told that b is the average
Then, average after 16th inning = (x – 3). of those same n numbers and 0. Since the extra
16 (x – 3) + 87 = 17x number, 0, is less than a , b must be less than a. Only
or x = (87 – 48) = 39. Statement is true.
PAGE # 102
W henever n numbers form an arithmetic sequence 5. Th e averag e w eig ht of 10 oarsmen in a bo at is
(on e in w hich the differenc e betw een an y tw o increased by 1.8 kg when one of the crew member,
consecutive terms is the same): (i) if n is odd, the whose weighs 53 kg is replaced by a new man. Find
average of the numbers is the middle term in the the weight of the new man.
sequence; and (ii) if n is even , the average of the (A) 75 kg (B) 71 kg
(C) 68 kg (D) 80 kg
numbers is the average of the two middle terms.
6. Nine persons went to a hotel for taking their meals.
Ex.10 Find the average of 201, 204, 207, 210, 213.
Eight of them spent Rs.12 each on their meals and the
Sol. As the number are in arithmetic sequence and number
ninth spent Rs.8 more than the average expenditure of
of terms are odd so, the middle number, 207 is the
all the nine. W hat was the total money spent by them?
average
(A) Rs.115 (B) Rs. 118
(C) Rs. 120 (D) Rs.117
Ex.11 Find the average of 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130.
Sol. As the number are in arithmetic sequence and number 7. Th ere were 3 5 stud ents in a hostel. D ue to the
of terms are even so, the average of two middle admission of 7 new student the expenses of the mess
number 100 and 110 is the average. were increased by Rs. 42 per day while the average
So, 105 is the average expenditure Per bead diminished by Re 1. W hat was
the original expenditure of the mess?
The weighted average of a set of numbers, is obtained (A) 425 (B) 410
by multiplying each number in the set by the number of (C) 420 (D) 430
times it appears, add all the products, and divide by
8. The average of runs of a cricket player of 10 innings
the total number of numbers in the set.
was 32. How many runs must he make in his next
innings so as to increase his average of runs by 4?
Ex.12 On Thursday, 20 of the 25 students in a chemistry
(A) 4 (B) 70
class took a test, and their average (arithmetic mean )
(C) 76 (D) 72
was 80. On Friday, the other 5 students took the test ,
and their average (arithmetic mean) was 90, what was 9. The average age of a husband and his wife was
the average for the entire class? 23 years at the time of their marriage. After five years
they have a one-year old child. The average age of the
20(80) 5(90) 1600 450 2050 family now is :
Sol. Average = = 82.
25 25 25 (A) 19 years (B) 23 years
(C) 28.5 years (D) 29.3 years
10. A batsman, by scoring 68 runs in his 20 th inning

1. The average of 2, 7, 6 and x is 5 and the average of 18, improves his average by 2 runs. His average for all
1, 6, x and y is 10. W hat is the value of y ? 20 innings is :
(A) 10 (B) 20 (A) 28 (B) 30
(C) 30 (D) 18 (C) 32 (D) 34
2. The average of first 50 natural numbers is :
11. If average of ten studen ts marks are 47. If 11th
(A) 12.25 (B) 21.15
students marks are also included then average of
(C) 25 (D) 25.5
eleven students marks becomes 45. Find the marks
3. The average of four consecutive even numbers is 27. of 11th student.
Find the largest of these numbers. (A) 35 (B) 25
(A) 50 (B) 40 (C) 45 (D) 40
(C) 20 (D) 30
12. Ten years ago, average of the ages of a men and his
4. The average of ten numbers is 7. If each number is wife was 25 years. Today, the average age of these two
multiplied by 12, then the average of the new set of and their son taken together is again 25 years. W hat is
numbers is :
the age (in years) of the son today ?
(A) 7 (B) 82
(A) 2 (B) 5
(C) 84 (D) 22
(C) 8 (D) 10
PAGE # 103
13. Consider a sequence of seven consecutive integers. 21. The average of a non-zero number and its square is 5
The average of the first five integers is n. The average times the number. The number is :
of all the seven integers is: (A) 9 (B) 17
(A) n (C) 29 (D) 295
(B) n + 1 22. The average age of the boys in a class is 16 years and
(C) k x n, where k is a function of n that of the girls is 15 years. The average age for the
(D) n + (2/7) whole class is :
(A) 15 years (B) 15.5 years
14. A library has an average of 510 visitors on Sundays (C) 16 years
and 240 on other days. The average number of visitors (D) Cannot be computed with the given information.
per day in a month of 30 days beginning with a Sunday
23. Th e average ann ual inc om e ( in Rs.) of c ertain
is : agricultural workers is S and that of other workers is T.
(A) 285 (B) 276 The number of agricultural workers is 11 times that of
(C) 280 (D) 290 other workers. Then the average monthly income (in
Rs.) of all the workers is :
15. The average of 11 results is 60. If the average of first
S T S 11T
six results is 58 and that of the last six is 63, find the (A) (B)
2 2
sixth result. 1 11S T
(A) 66 (B) 70 (C) T (D)
11S 12
(C) 78 (D) 85
24. A car owner buys petrol at Rs.7.50, Rs.8 and Rs.8.50
per litre for three successive years. W hat approximately
16. The average age of group of eight members is the is the average cost per litre of petrol if he spends
same as it was 3 years ago, when a young member is Rs.4000 each year ?
substituted for an old member. The incoming member (A) Rs.7.98 (B) Rs.8
is younger to the outgoing member by : (C) Rs.8.50 (D) Rs.9
(A) 11 years (B) 24 years 25. The average of six numbers is x and the average of
(C) 28 years (D) 16 years three of these is y. If the average of the remaining three
is z, then :
17. Of the three numbers, second is twice the first and is (A) x = y + z (B) 2x = y + z
also thrice the third. If the average of the three numbers (C) x = 2y + 2z (D) None of these.
is 44, find the largest number. 26. Out of 9 persons, 8 persons spent Rs. 30 on each of
(A) 38 (B) 48 their meals. The ninth one spent Rs.20 more than the
(C) 62 (D) 72 average expenditure of all the nine. The total money
spent by all of them was :
18. In Arun’s opinion, his weight is greater than 65 kg but (A) Rs.260 (B) Rs.290
less than 72 kg. His brother does not agree with Arun (C) Rs.292.50 (D) Rs.400.50
and he thinks that Arun’s weight is greater than 60 kg
27. The average of five numbers is 27. If one number is
but less than 70 kg. His mother’s view is that his weight excluded, the average becomes 25. The excluded
cannot be greater than 68 kg. If all of them are correct number is :
in their estimation, what is the average of different (A) 25 (B) 27
probable weights of Arun ? (C) 30 (D) 35.
(A) 66.5 kg (B) 67 kg 28. 16 children are to be divided into two groups A and B of
(C) 68 kg (D) 72 kg 10 and 6 children. The average percent marks obtained
by the children of group A is 75 and the average percent
19. The average of 20 numbers is zero. Of them, at the
marks of all the 16 children is 76. W hat is the average
most, how many may be greater than zero ? percent marks of children of group B ?
(A) 0 (B) 1
1 2
(C) 10 (D) 19 (A) 77 (B) 77
3 3
20. The average of all odd numbers upto 100 is :
1 2
(A) 49 (B) 49.5 (C) 78 (D) 78
3 3
(C) 50 (D) 51
PAGE # 104
29. The average of six numbers is 3.95. The average of 36. The captain of a cricket team o f 11 m embers is
two of them is 3.4, while the average of the other two is 26 years old and the wicket keeper is 3 years older. If
3.85. W hat is the average of the remaining two the ages of these two are excluded, the average age of
numbers ? the remaining players is one year less than the whole
(A) 4.5 (B) 4.6 team. W hat is the average age of the team ?
(C) 4.7 (D) 4.8 (A) 23 years (B) 24 years
(C) 25 years (D) None of these
30. The average price of 10 books is Rs.12 while the
average price of 8 of these books is Rs.11.75. Of the 37. The average of five consecutive numbers is n. If the
remaining two books, if the price of one book is 60% next two numbers are also included, the average will :
more than the price of the other, what is the price of (A) remain the same (B) increase by 1
each of these two books ? (C) increase by 1.4 (D) increase by 2
(A) Rs.5, Rs.7.50 (B) Rs.8, Rs.12 38. A cricketer whose bowling average is 12.4 runs per
(C) Rs.10, Rs.16 (D) Rs.12, Rs.14 wick et takes 5 wickets for 26 run s and thereby
31. A company produces on an average 4000 items per decreases his average by 0.4. The number of wickets
month for the first 3 months. How many items it must taken by him till the last match was :
produce on an average per month over the next 9 (A) 64 (B) 72
months, to average 4375 items per month over the (C) 80 (D) 85
whole ? 39. After replacing an old member by a new member, it

(A) 4500 (B) 4600 was found that the average age of five members of a
(C) 4680 (D) 4710 club is the same as it was 3 years ago. W hat is the
32. Of the four numbers, the first is twice the second, the difference between the ages of the replaced and the
new member ?
second is one-third of the third and the third is 5 times
the fourth. The average of the numbers is 24.75. The
(C) 8 years (D) 15 years
largest of these numbers is :
(A) 9 (B) 25 40. The average age of a group of persons going for picnic
(C) 30 (D) 45 is 16 years. Twenty new persons with an average age
of 15 years join the group on the spot, due to which
33. Of the three numbers, the first is twice the second and
their average becomes 15.5 years. The number of
the second is twice the third. The average of the
persons initially going for picnic is :
7
reciprocal of the number is . The number are : (A) 5 (B) 10
72
(A) 16, 8, 4 (B) 20, 10, 5 (C) 20 (D) 30
(C) 24, 12, 6 (D) 36, 18, 9 41. A certain factory employed 600 men and 400 women
34. The average temperature of the town in the first four and the average wage was Rs.25.50 per day. If a
days of a month was 58 degrees. The average for the woman got Rs.5 less than a man, then what are their
second, third, fourth and fifth day was 60 degrees. If the daily wages ?
temperatures of the first and fifth day were in the ratio (A) Man : Rs.25; W oman : Rs.20
7 : 8, then what is the temperature on the fifth day ? (B) Man : Rs.27.50; W oman : Rs.22.50
(A) 64 degrees (B) 62 degrees (C) Man : Rs.30; W oman : Rs.25

(D) Man : Rs.32.50; W oman : Rs.27.50
(C) 56 degrees (D) None of these
42. The average of the scores of a group of students in a
35. The average monthly salary of 20 employees in an
test was 52. The brightest 20% of them secured a
organization is Rs. 1500. If the manager’s salary is
average score of 80 and the dullest 25% secured a
added, then the average salary increases by Rs. 100.
average score of 31. Then the average score of
W hat is the manager’s monthly salary ?
remaining 55% is :
(A) Rs.2000 (B) Rs.2400
(A) 45 (B) 50
(C) Rs.3600 (D) Rs.4800
(C) 51.4 approx. (D) 54.6 approx.
PAGE # 105
43. The average salary of all the workers in a workshop is
Rs. 8000. The average salary of 7 technicians is
Rs.12000 and the average salary of the rest is Rs. 6000.
The total number of workers in the workshop is :
1. If average of ten studen ts marks are 47. If 11th
(A) 20 (B) 21
students marks are also included then average of
(C) 22 (D) 23
eleven students marks becomes 45. Find the marks
44. In an examination, a pupil’s average marks were 63 of 11th student. (NTSE-Stage-I/Uttarkhand/2007)
per paper. If he had obtained 20 more marks for his (A) 35 (B) 25
Geography paper and 2 more marks for his History (C) 45 (D) 40
paper, his average per paper would have been 65. 2. a, b, c are three numbers such that the average of a
How many papers were there in the examination ? and b is 4, that of b and c is 5 and that of a and c is 12.
(A) 8 (B) 9 The average of all the three numbers is :
(C) 10 (D) 11 (NTSE-Stage-I/Bangolore/2009)
(A) 21 (B) 12
(C) 7 (D) 5
3. The average of four consecutive odd numbers is 28.

Out of these the greatest odd number is:
(NTSE-Stage-I/Raj/2010)
(A) 33 (B) 31
(C) 29 (D) 25
4. 4 boys and 3 girls spent Rs.120 on the average, of

which boys spend Rs.150 on the average, then the
average amount spent by girls is
(A) Rs.80 (B) Rs.60
(C) Rs.90 (D) Rs.100
PAGE # 106
TRIGONOMETRY
ANGLE (iii) Circular system : In this system the unit of

measurement is radian. One radian, written as 1c, is
An angle is the amount of rotation of a revolving line the measure of an angle subtended at the centre of a
with respect to a fixed line. If the rotatio n is in circle by an arc of length equal to the radius of the
anticlock-wise sense, then the angle measured is
circle.
positive and if the rotation is in clock-wise sense,
then the angle measured is negative.
The number of radians is an angle subtended by an
length of arc
arc of a circle at the centre is equal to .
radius
QUADRANTS s
=
r
Let X’OX and YOY’ be two lines at right angles in a
plane. These lines divide the plane into four equal W here, = angle in radian, s = arc length and r = radius.
parts are known as quadrants. The lines X’OX and
YOY’ are known as X-axis and Y-axis respectively.
These two lines taken together are known as the co-
ordinate axes. The regions XOY, YOX’, X’OY’ and Y’OX D G 2R
are known as first, second, third and fourth quadrants 90 100
respectively.
W here, D = number of degrees,
G = number of grades,
and R = number of radians.
NOTE :
(i) The angle between two consecutive digits in a clock
is 30º = ( /6 radians).
(ii) The hour hand rotates through an angle of 30º in
one hour, i.e. (1/2)º in one minute.
(iii) The minute hand rotates through an angle of 6º in
one minute.
c
1
Ex.1 Find the degree measure of .
4
c º
(i) Sexagesimal system (ii) Centesimal system 1 1 180
Sol. =
(iii) Circular system 4 4
(i) Sexagesimal system : In this system a right angle º
is divided into 90 equal parts called degrees. Each 1 180
= 7
degree is divided into 60 equal parts called minutes 4 22
and each minute is divided into 60 equal parts called º
315
seconds. =
Thus, 1 right angle = 90 degrees ( 90º) 22
1º = 60 minutes (60’) º
1’ = 60 seconds (60”) 7
= 14
(ii) Centesimal system : In this system a right angle is 22
divided into 100 equal parts, called grades. Each grade
' '
is sub divided into 100 minutes, and each minute into 7 1
100 seconds. = 14º 60 = 14º 19
22 11
Thus, 1 right angle = 100 grades (100g)
1 grade = 100 minutes (100’) "
1
1 minute = 100 seconds (100”) = 14º 19’ 60
11
= 14º 19’ 5”
PAGE # 107
107
Ex.2 A horse is tied to a post by a rope. If the horse moves Ex.5 The difference between two angles is 19º and their
along a circular path always keep the rope tight and 890
sum is grades. Find the greater angle.
describes 88 metres when it has traced out 72º at the 9
centre, then find the length of rope.
1 90
Sol. S = r [Grade = part of rt. angle = º = 0.9º]
100 100
W here S = arc length, r = radius of circle and
= angle subtended at the centre of circle in radian. Sol. Let two angle the and .
S = 88m, Given – = 19° ...(i)
= 72º
890g
c + =
9
= 72 ×
180
890 90
c + =
2 9 100
=
5 D G
=
90 100
S 88 5 + = 89° ...(ii)
r= =
2 Solving equation (i) &(ii)
= 54° and = 35°.
88 5 7
2 22 TRIGONOMETRY
r = 70 m.
Trigonometry means, the science which deals with
Ex.3 Find the angle between the minute hand of a clock the measurement of triangles.
and hour hand when the time is 7 : 20 am.
Sol. Angle traced by minute hand in 1 minute = 6º so angle
traced by minute hand in 20 minute = 120º
Similarly,
Angle traced by hour hand in 1 hr = 30º
Angle traced by hour hand in 7 hr 20 min
20 1 22 22
(7+ =7+ = ) = 30 º = 22º
60 3 3 3
A right angled triangle is shown in Figure. B is of
Hence, the required angle between two hands is 90º. Side opposite to B is called hypotenuse. There
= 220º – 110º = 100º. are two other angles i.e. A and C. If we consider
C as , then opposite side to this angle is called
Ex.4 The radius of a certain circle is 30 cm, find the
perpendicular and side adjacent to is called base.
approximately length of an arc of this circle ; if the length
(i) Six Trigonometric Ratios are :
of the chord of the arc be 30 cm.
Sol. Let ABC be the circle whose centre is O and AC is Perpendicu lar P AB
chord. sin = Hypotenuse = =
H AC
In AOC, AO = OC = AC = 30 cm.
Hypotenuse H AC
cosec = = =
Perpendicu lar P AB
Base B BC
cos = = =
Hypotenuse H AC
Hypotenuse H AC
sec = = =
Base B BC
AOC = 60º = Perpendicu lar P AB
3 tan = = =
Base B BC
Hence, arc AC s = r radius × B BC
3 Base
cot = = =
Perpendicu lar P AB
= 30 × = 10 = 31.4 cm.
3
PAGE # 108
108
(ii) Interrelationship in Basic Trigonometric Ratios : tan A
Ex.8 If tan A = 2 – 1, then find the value of .
tan =
1
cot =
1 1 tan2 A
cot tan
2 1
1 1 Sol. Given tan A =
cos = sec = 1
sec cos
tan A
1 1
sin = cos ec cosec = 1 tan2 A
sin
We also observe that 2 1
=
tan =
sin
and cot =
cos 1 ( 2 1)2
cos sin
a a sin b cos 2 1
Ex.6 If tan = , then find the value of . =
b a sin – b cos 1 2 1 2 2
a
Sol. tan = 2 1
b =
4 2 2
a sin b cos
To find the value of
a sin b cos 2 1
=
[Dividing Numerator and Denominator by cos 2 2 ( 2 1)
a 1 2
a b = =
a tan b b a2 b2 2 2 4
= = = .
a tan b a a2 b2
a b TR IG O N O M E T R I C RA T IO S O F
b COMPLEMENTARY ANGLES
4 sin (90 – ) = cos cos (90 – ) = sin
Ex.7If is acute and sin =
, then find the value of
5 tan (90 – ) = cot cot (90 – ) = tan
sin (3 cos 4 sin ) cos (3 sin – 4 cos )
. sec (90 – ) = cosec cosec (90 – ) = sec
3 sin
4 AREA OF TRIANGLE
P
Sol. sin = =
5 H In a ABC, a & b are the length of 2 sides of triangle
and is the included angle between them.
B= H2 – P 2 = 25 – 16 = 3 1
Then, Area of triangle = ab sin
2
3 Proof :
So, cos =
5
Putting these values.
3 4 4 3
sin 3 4 cos 3 –4
= 5 5 5 5
3 sin
9 16 12 12
sin cos –
= 5 5 5
3 sin Const. : Draw a line from B perpendicular to AC,
i.e.BD AC
BD
25 sin = BD = a sin
sin 0 5 sin a
= 5 =
3 sin 1
3 sin Area of triangle = base height
2
1
5 = b BD
= . 2
3 1 1
= b a sin = ab sin
2 2
PAGE # 109
109
Ex.12 Let A 0 A 1 A 2 A 3 A 4 A 5 be a regular hexagon inscribed
Ex.9 If tan 15º = 2 – 3 , then find the value of cot2 75º. in a circle of unit radius. Then find the product of the
lengths of the line segments A0 A 1, A 0 A 2 & A 0 A 4.
Sol. tan15° = 2 – 3 Sol. In A0 A1 B
Value of cot2 75° = cot2 (90° – 15°) = tan2 15° A 0B
sin 60º =
2
tan 15° = (2 – 3) 2
=4+3–4 3 A 0 A1
tan2 15° = 7 – 4 3 . 3 A 0B
=
2 1
Ex.10 Prove :
3
sin 70 º cos ec 20 º A0B = unit
– 2cos70ºcosec20º = 0 2
cos 20 º sec 70 º
In A0 A2B
Sol. LHS
A 0B
sin 70 º cos ec 20 º sin 30º =
– 2cos70ºcosec20º A 0A2
cos 20 º sec 70 º
1 3 /2
sin 70º cos ec 20º =
2 A 0A2
= +
cos 90º–70º sec 90º–20º
A0A2 = 3 unit
– 2 cos 70º cosec (90º–70º)
sin 70 º cosec 20 º Similarly A0A4 = 3 unit

= + – 2cos 70º sec 70º
sin 70 º cosec 20 º (A0 A1) (A0A2) (A0 A4)
=1+1–2 =1× 3 × 3 = 3.
=0 RHS
Ex.13 In an equilateral triangle, 3 coins of radii 1 unit
Ex.11 Find the value of : each are kept so that they touch each other and
also the sides of the triangle. Find the area of the
tan 18 º 3 cos ec 37 º cos 69 º trian gle.
+ –
2 cot 72º sec 53 º 2 sin 21º Sol. In OBD
+ 2 tan 23º tan 37º tan 67º tan 53º

1
tan 18 º 3 cos ec 37 º cos 69 º tan 30º =
Sol. + – x
2 cot 72º sec 53 º 2 sin 21º
+ 2 tan 23º tan 37º tan 67º tan 53º 1 1

=
3 x
tan( 90 º 72º ) 3 cos ec (90 º 53 º )
= +
2 cot 72 º sec 53 º x= 3
So, side of equilateral triangle
cos( 90 º 21º ) = 2 + 2x
– + 2 tan (90 º – 67º ) tan 67 º
2 sin 21º
= 2(1 + 3)
tan (90º – 53º) tan 53º
3
Area of ABC = (side)2
cot 72 º 3sec 53 º sin 21º 4
= + – + 2 cot67º
2 cot 72 º sec 53 º 2 sin 21º
3
= [2(1 + 3 )]2
tan 67º cot53º tan 53º 4
1 1 = 3 (1 + 3 )2
= +3 – + 2 (1) (1)
2 2
= 3 (1 + 3 + 2 3 )
= 5.
= 4 3 + 6.
PAGE # 110
110
Ex.15 Prove :
(sin + sec )2 + (cos + cosec )2 = (1 + sec cosec )2
(i) sin2 + cos2 = 1 Sol. LHS
(A) sin2 = 1 – cos2 (B) cos2 = 1 – sin 2
(sin + sec )2 + (cos + cosec )2
(ii) 1 + tan2 = sec2 [where 90º]
= sin 2 + sec 2 + 2 sin sec + c os 2
(A) sec2 – 1 = tan2 (B) sec2 – tan2 = 1 2
(C) tan2 – sec2 = – 1 + cosec + 2 cos cosec
(iii) 1 + cot2 = cosec2 [where 0º] = 1 + sec2 + cosec2 + 2(sin sec + cos cosec )
(A) cosec2 – 1 = cot2 (B) cosec2 – cot2 =1
(C) cot2 – cosec2 = – 1 1 1 sin cos
Proof : Co nsider a rig ht-angled AB C in which =1+ 2 + 2 +2
cos sin cos sin
B = 90º and A = º. Let AB = x units, BC = y units and
AC = r units. C
cos 2 sin 2 2(sin2 cos 2 )
=1+ +
r y cos 2 sin 2 cos sin
A B
x cos 2 sin 2 1 2 cos sin
= 2
Then, by Pythagoras theorem, we have cos sin 2
2 2 2
x y r 2
cos sin 1
Now, =
2 2
cos sin
y x y2 x2
(i) sin2 cos2 2
r r r r2 1
2
(x 2
y ) 2
r 2 = 1 = (1 + sec cosec )2
= 1 [ x2 y2 r2] cos sin
r2 r2
sin2 + cos2 = 1 RHS Hence Proved
2 2 2 2
y x y r
(ii) 1 + tan2 =1 = =
x x 2
x2 cot cos ec – 1 1 cos
Ex.16 Prove :
2 cot – cos ec 1 sin
r
= = sec2
x
1 + tan2 = sec2 cot cos ec – 1
Sol. LHS
cot – cos ec 1
x
2
y2 x2 r2
(iii) 1 + cot2 =1 = 2 =
y y y2
2 cot cos ec – (cos ec 2 cot 2 )
r =
2
=
y
= cosec cot – cos ec 1
1 + cot2 = cosec2
cot cos ec – cot cos ec (cos ec cot )
tan tan 1 =
Ex.14 Prove that = cot – cos ec 1
1 cot 2 cos ec 2
tan tan 1 cot cos ec 1 (cos ec cot )

Sol. To prove = 2
=
1 cot 2 cos ec cot – cos ec 1
LHS
tan cot cos ec 1 cos ec cot
=
1 cot cot – cos ec 1
tan 1 cot tan 1 = cot cos ec

× = 2
1 cot 1 cot 1 cot
cos 1
tan 1 =
sin sin
=
1 cos ec 2 1
tan 1 1 cos
= R.H.S.
= Hence proved sin
2 cos ec 2
PAGE # 111
111
Ex.17 If ac os – b sin = c, p ro ve that
ANGLE OF DEPRESSION
a sin + b cos = a2 b2 – c 2 . W hen the object is at a lower level than the observer’s
eyes, he has to look downwards to have a view of the
Sol. a cos – b sin = c object. In that case, the angle which the line of sight
makes with the horizontal through the observer’s eye
Squaring both sides is known as the angle of depression (Figure).
a2 cos2 + b2sin2 – 2ab cos sin = c2
a2(1 – sin2 ) + b2(1 – cos2 ) – 2ab sin cos = c2
a2sin2 + b2cos2 + 2ab sin cos = a2 + b2 – c2
(a sin + b cos )2 = a2 + b2 – c2
Ex.19 Two pillars of equal height are on either side of a

a sin + b cos = •± a2 b2 c2
road, which is 100 m wide. The angles of elevation of
the top of the pillars are 60º and 30º at a point on the
Ex.18 If sin + cos = m and sec + cosec = n, then road between the pillars. Find the position of the point
prove that n (m2 – 1) = 2m. between the pillars. Also find the height of each pillar.
Sol. L.H.S. n(m2 – 1) Sol.
= (sec + cosec )[(sin + cos )2 – 1]
1 1
= (sin2 + cos2 + 2sin cos – 1)
cos sin
cos sin
= (1 + 2sin cos – 1)
sin cos
Let the height of pillar be h.
The position of point from pillar be x.
(cos sin ) In EDC
= ( 2sin cos )
sin cos h
tan 60º =
= 2 (sin + cos ) x
= 2m h
x=
R.H.S Hence Proved. 3
In ABC
ANGLE OF ELEVATION h
tan 30º =
In order to see an object which is at a higher level
100 x
compared to the ground level we are to look up. The 1 h
line joining the object and the eye of the observer is =
3 100 x
known as the line of sight and the angle which this line
of sight makes with the horizontal drawn through the 100 – x = h 3
eye of the observer is known as the angle of elevation.
h
Therefore, the angle of elevation of an object 100 – = h 3
helps in finding out its height (Figure).
3
h
100 = h 3 +
3
3 1
100 = h
3
4
100 = h
3
h = 25 3 = 25 × 1.73 = 43.3 m
h 25 3
x= = = 25 m.
3 3
PAGE # 112
112
Ex.20 At a point, the angle of elevation of a tower is such Ex.21 The angle of elevation of an aeroplane from a point
5 on the ground is 45º. After a flight of 15 sec, the elevation
that its tangent is . On walking 240 m nearer the
12 changes to 30º. If the aeroplane is flying at a height of
tower, the tangent of the angle of elevation becomes 3000 metres, find the speed of the aeroplane.
3 Sol. Let the point on the ground is E which is y metres from
. Find the height of the tower..
4 point B and let after 15 sec flight it covers x metres
A
distance.
In AEB
Sol.
D C B
240 m x
5 3
tan = , tan =
12 4
Let the height of tower be h.
In ABC
AB
tan 45º =
EB
h
tan = 3000
x 1=
y
h y = 3000 m .......(i)
x=
tan In CED
In ABD CD
tan 30º =
ED
h
tan = 1 3000
x 240 = ( AB = CD)
3 x y
h
x + 240 = x + y = 3000
tan 3 .......(ii)
h From equation (i) and (ii)
h
+ 240 =
tan tan x + 3000 = 3000 3
1 1 x = 3000 3 – 3000
240 = h
tan tan
x = 3000 ( 3 – 1)
240 tan tan x = 3000 × (1.732 – 1)
h=
tan tan x = 3000 × 0.732
x = 2196 m
3 5 Dis tan ce covered
240
4 12 Speed of Aeroplane =
h= Time taken
3 5
4 12
2196
= m/sec.= 146.4 m/sec.
[Substituting the value of tan and tan ] 15
75
h= = 225 m 2196 18
4 / 12 = Km/hr = 527.04 Km/hr
15 5
So, the height of tower = 225 m. Hence, the speed of aeroplane is 527.04 Km/hr.
PAGE # 113
113
Ex.22 A man on a cliff observes a boat at an angle of
depression of 30º which is approaching the shore to
the point immediately beneath the observer with a
u nifo rm speed . Six minu tes later, the ang le o f
1
depression of the boat is found to be 60º. Find the total 1. If, sec A = x + , then the value of sec A + tan A is :
4x
time taken by the boat from the initial point to reach the
shore. 1 1
(A) x or (B) 2 x or
x 2x
1
(C) 4 x or (D) 1
4x
1 1 cos 2
2. If cot = , then the value of is :
Sol. 3 2 sin 2
1 2
(A) (B)
5 5
3
(C) (D) None
Let h be the height of cliff and D & C be the position of 5
the boat when its angle of depression from top of cliff 3 3
3. L et tan A = an d tan B = th en
is 30º & 60º respectively. 4– 3 4 3
Let the distance covered be y m in 6 min.
tan A – tan B
y is equal to :
Speed of boat = m/min 1 tan A tan B
6
(A) 0.385 (B) 0.375
In ABC
(C) 0.575 (D) 0.465
h
tan 60º = 4. Triangle PQ R is rig ht angled at Q and h as side
x lengths PQ = 14 and QR = 48. If M is the mid-point
h of PR. If MQP = then cos is equal to :
3 =
x 7 7
h (A) (B)
25 50
x=
3 7 24
In ABD (C) (D)
24 25
h 5. Given 8 tan = 3 cos , then the value of the expression
tan 30º = E = sin + cos + tan sec + cosec + cot can be
x y
a b c
1 h expressed as where b, c and d are primes
= d
3 h
y then the value of (a + b + c + d) equal :
3 (A) 26 (B) 25
(C) 24 (D) 23
h
y =h 3
3 sin 30 tan 45 sec 60
6. The value of expression, =
cos ec 30 cot 45 cos 60
2h (A) 0 (B) 1
y=
3
x
(C) – 1 (D) 2 + 3
1
So,
y = 2 7. In the diagram B, C and D lie on a straight line, with
AC D = 1 00 °, AD B = x°, AB D = 2x° an d
y DAC = BAC = y°. The value of (sin y°. tan y° + sec y°)
x= equals :
2
A
3y
Total distance to be covered x + y =
2 y° y°
Dis tan ce
Time =
Speed 2x° 100°
x°
3y
Total time taken = B C D
2 y × 6 = 9 min. (A) 7/2 (B) 3
(C) 5/2 (D) 5
PAGE # 114
114
8. W hich one of the following quantities is not rational ?
1 tan2 30º 15. If lies in the first quadrant. W hich one of the following
(A) (B) 4cos3303 – 3cos30º expressions is independent of ?
1 tan2 30º
(A) sec(90° – ) – cot . cos(90° – ) tan (90° – )
2 cot 30º
(C) 3sin30º – 4sin330º (D) cot(90 – ) sec cot 3
cot 2 30º 1 (B)
cos ec 2 sin2 (90 – )
9. A square DEAF is constructed inside a 30° – 60° – 90°
(C) cos(90° – ) × cosec (90° – )
triangle ABC with the hypotenuse BC = 4, D on side
BC, E on side AC and F on side AB. The length of the (D) None
side of the square is : 16. W hich one of the following when simplified is not equal
to one ?
(A) 3 – 3 (B) 3 – 2
(A) tan18º × tan 36º × tan 54º × tan 72º
(C) 2 (D) 1.5 (B) sin219º + sin271º
10. Let S = sin 2 3 0° + sin 2 45 ° + sin 2 6 0° an d
2 sin 62 º sec 42 º
P = cosec245° . sec230° . sin390° . cos 60°, then the (C) –
cos 28 º cos ec 48 º
correct statement is :
(A) S < P (B) S = P (D) None of these
(C) SP = 2 (D) S + P > 3 17. If tan 2A = cot (A – 18º), where 2A is an acute angle,
11. Suppose that q is a number and 0 < < 90º. Consider find the value of A.
the following statements and select the correct choice, (A) 36º (B)63º
I. sec( º) < 1 (C)26º (D) 62º
II. sec( º) = 1 18. Evaluate :
III. sec( º) > 1 sec2 10º – cot2 80º +
(A) Only I is possible (B) All are possible sin15º cos 75º cos 15º sin 75º
(C) Only III is possible (D) Only I is impossible cos sin(90º ) sin cos( 90º )
12. In the given figure and are measured in degrees. (A) 0 (B)1
W hich one of the following statement is not (C)2 (D) 3
correct ? 19. Evaluate :
sec 2 54 º cot 2 36 º
+ 2 sin 2 38 º sec 2 5 2 º
cos ec 2 57 º tan 2 33 º
2
– sin2 45º + tan 17º tan 60º tan 73º.
3
(A) > (B) sec =2
1 9 7
(A) (B)
(C) tan3 = 3 (D) sin( – ) = 2 2
2
13. A right triangle has angles which measure 30, 60 and 90 3 1
(C) (D)
degrees. If the perimeter of this triangle is 15 + 5 3 2 2
then the length of the hypotenuse of this triangle, is :

(A) 5 (B) 7.5 1 sec
(C) 10 (D) 12.5 20.
sec
sin 45º sin 30º cot 90º
14. Let T1 = and sin2 sin2
cos 45º cos 60º (A) (B)
1 cos 1 sin
sec 45 º tan 45 º cos 2
(C) (D) 1+ sin
T2 = , then : 1 sin
cos ec 45 º cos 0 º cot 90 º
21. If is an acute angle and tan + cot = 2, then :
(A) T1 + T2 = 0 (B) T1 – T2 = 0
(C) T1 = 2 T2 (D) T2 = 2 T1 1
(A) tan = (B) tan = 2
2
(C) tan5 + cot5 = 32 (D) tan7 + cot7 = 2
PAGE # 115
115
22. The value of cos4 + sin4 + 2 cos2 sin2 when = 60° 32. W hich one of the following identities (wherever defined)
is : is not correct ?
(A) 1 (B) 2
sin 4 x – cos 4 x
1 (A) 1
(C) (D) 2 2 sin 2 x — cos 2 x
2
23. The value of the expression cot x cotx - 1
(cos – 1)(1 + cos ) (1 + cot2 ) is : (B) =
l tanx 2 - sec 2 x
(A) 0 (B) 1
(C) sin 2 (D) – 1 (C) cosec2x + sec2x = cosec2x . sec2x
(D) [1 + cot x - cosec x)(l + tan x + sec x)] = 1
sin x sin x
24. If + 33. The expression, 2(1 + cos x) – sin2x is the same as :
1 sec x sec x 1 = 2, where 0° < x < 90° then
(A) (1 – cos x)2 (B) 1 – cos2x
cosec x has the value equal to : (C) (1 + cos x)2 (D) 1 + cos2x
(A) 1 (B) 2
34. If sin x + sin2x = 1 then the value of cos2x + cos4x is
(C) 2 (D) 3 equal to :
1
25. If cos + sin = 2 cos , then cos – sin is equal to : (A) 1 (B)
2
(A) 2 –1 (B) 2 1 3 5 5
(C) (D)
(C)
3 3 2
2 sin (D) 2 + sin
1
26. If x = a sec + b tan , y = a tan + b sec , then : 35. If sin x + cos x = then sin 4 x + cos4 x as a rational
(A) x + y = a + b (B) x – y = a – b
2
(C) x2 + y2 = a2 + b2 (D) x2 – y2 = a2 – b2 number equals :
27. If x sin3 + y cos3 = sin cos and x sin = y cos 3 15

(A) (B)
then : 4 32
(A) x3 + y3 = 1 (B) x2 – y2 = 1
(C) x2 + y2 = 1 (D) x3 – y3 = 1 19 23
(C) (D)
32 32
28. If sec + tan = x, then the value of sin is :
2
1 2x x 1 tan2
(A) 2 (B) 2 36. The expression 1+ when simplified, reduces
1 x x 1 1 sec
1 x2 x2 1
(C) (D) to :
2(1 x 2 ) x2 1 (A) sin (B) sec
29. Let x = r cos cos ; y = r cos sin and z = r sin (C) cosec (D) cot
then (x2 + y2 + z2) is : 37. If sin x + sin 2x = 1, then the value o f
(A) independent of both and . cos8x + 2cos6x + cos4x is :
(B) independent of but dependent on .
(C) independent of but dependent on . 3
(A) 1 (B)
(D) dependent on both and . 2
30. Given 2y cos = x sin and 2x sec – y cosec = 3,
3
then the value of x2 + 4y2 is equal to : (C) (D) 2
4
(A) 1 (B) 2
(C) 3 (D) 4 38. If 2cos2x + 5sinx = 4 then which one of the following is
correct ?
tan2 A – sin2 A cot 2 A – cos2 A (A) cosec2x – cot2x = 7
31. Let = and = ,
tan2 A sin2 A cot 2 A cos2 A (B) cot2x + sec2x = 3
(A is acute angle) are the roots of the quadratic equation (C) tan2x + cot2x = 2
whose discriminant is ‘D’, then the most appropriate (D) sec2x + cosec2x = 16/3
choice, is :
39. Let be an acute angle such that sec2 +tan2 = 2. The
(A) D > 0 (B) D 0
value of (cosec2 + cot2 ), is :
(C) D = 0 (D) D < 0
(A) 9 (B) 5
(C) 4 (D) 2
PAGE # 116
116
47. Vijay has been invited for dinner in a club. W hile walking
through the garden path towards the building, he
40. The length of a shadow of a pole is 3 times the length
observes that there is an electric rod on the top of the
of the pole the angle of elevation of the sun is : building. From the point where he is standing, the
(A) 30º (B) 60º angles of elevation of the top of the electric rod and the
(C) 90º (D) 45º top of the building are and respectively. If the heights
41. The upper part of a tree is broken over by the wind of the elec tric rod and the build ing are p an d q
makes an angle of 30º with the ground and the distance respectively, mark all the correct statements.
from the root to the point where the top of the tree meets p tan tan
the ground is 15m. The height of the broken part is- (A) The height of the tower is
tan tan
(A) 15 sin 30º m (B) 15 cos 30º m
q tan
(C) 15 tan 30º m (D) 15 sec 30º m (B) The height of the electric rod is
(tan tan )
42. On the level ground, the angle of elevation of the top of p tan
a tower is 30º. On moving 20 m nearer, the angle of (C) The height of the tower is
tan tan
elevation is 60º. The height of the tower is :
q(tan tan )
(A) 10 m (B) 15 m (D) The height of the electric rod is
tan
(C) 10 3 m (D) 20 m
48. If the angles of depression and elevation of the top of a
43. From a lighthouse 100 m high, it is observed that two tower of height h from the top and bottom of a second
ships are approaching it from west and south. If angles tower are x and y respectively, then the height of the
of d epressio n of th e two ship s are 3 0 0 and 4 5 0 second tower is :
respectively the distance between the ships, in meters, (A) h (cot y + cot x) (B) h (tan x + tan y)
is :
(C) h (1 + tan x cot y) (D) h (tan y cot x + 1)
2
(A) 100 3 1 (B) 100 3 1
(C) 200 (D) 400
44. If the elevation of the sun changed from 30º to 60º, then
the difference between the length of shadows of a pole
15 m high, made at these two positions, is 1. If x = a sec + b tan and y = a tan + b sec ,
(A) 7.5 m (B) 15 m then the value of x2 – y2 is :
15
(C) 10 3 (D) (A) a2b2 (B) a2 + b2
3 (C) a2 – b2 (D) 1
45. A person on the top of a tower observes a scooter cos 1 – sin
2. If – = 2k then the value of k is :
moving with uniform velocity towards the base of the 1 sin cos
tower. He finds that the angle of depression changes [Raj. NTSE Stage-1 2005]
from 30º to 60º in 18 minutes. The scooter will reach (A) 0 (B) 1
the base of the tower in next : 1
(C) (D) 2
(A) 9 minutes 2
3. If a cos + b sin = 3 and a sin – b cos = 4, then the
(B) 18 / ( 3 – 1) minutes value of a2 + b2 is : [Raj. NTSE Stage-1 2006]
(A) 9 (B) 16
(C) 6 3 minutes
(D) the time depends upon the height of the tower
4. If tan + sec = 4, then the value of sin is :
46. The angle of elevation of the top of a tower, as seen [Raj. NTSE Stage-1 2007]
from two points A & B situated in the same line and at 15 8
distances ‘p’ and ‘q’ respectively from the foot of the (A) (B)
28 15
tower, are complementary, then the height of the tower 15 3
(C) (D)
is : 17 5
p 3 3
(A) pq (B) 5. If sin(A + B) = , cos(A – B) = and 0 < A + B 90°,
q 2 2
if A > B then the value of A and B are :
(C) pq (D) None of these [Raj. NTSE Stage-1 2013]
(A) A = 45°, B = 15° (B) A = 60°, B = 30°
(C) A = 0°, B = 30° (D) A = 30°, B = 0°
PAGE # 117
117
17. The angle of elevation of the top of a building from the
6. If cos A + cos A = 1. then the value of sin2 A + sin4 A is :
2
foot of tower is 30° and the angle of elevation of the top
of the tower from the foot of the building is 60°. It the
1
(A) 1 (B) (C) 2 (D) 3 tower is 30 m high, then the height of the building is
2 [Rajasthan NTSE Stage-1 2014]
7. In right triangle ABC. BC = 7 cm, AC – AB = 1 cm and (A) 30 m (B) 20 m
B = 90º. The value of cos A + cos B + cos C is : (C) 15 m (D) 10 m
[Delhi NTSE Stage-1 2013] 1
1 32 31 25 18. If cosec x – cot x = , where x 0, then the value of
(A) (B) (C) (D) 3
7 24 25 31 2 2
cos x – sin x is (NTSE Stage-2 /2015)
8. The angles of elevations of the top of the tower from 16 9
two points in the same straight line and at a distance (A) (B)
25 25
of 9 m. and 16 m. from the base of the tower are 8 7
complementary. The height of the tower is : (C) (D)
[Delhi NTSE Stage-1 2013] 25 25
19. A tower is on a horizontal plane. The angles of eleva-
(A) 18 m. (B) 16 m.
tion of top of the tower from two points on a line pass-
(C) 10 m. (D) 12 m.
ing through the foot of the tower at distances 49 m and
9. If sin and cos are the roots of th e eq uation 36 m are 41° and 49°. The height of the tower is
ax2 + bx + c = 0, then [Haryana NTSE Stage-1 2013] [Rajasthan NTSE Stage-1 2016]
(A) (a – c)2 + c2 = b2 (B) (a – c)2 – c2 = b2 (A) 40m (B) 42 m
2 2 2
(C) (a + c) + c = b (D) (a + c)2 – c2 = b2 (C) 44m (D) 46 m
10. If tan A + sec A = 2, 0°<A<90°, the value of cos A lies cos sin
between : [Haryana NTSE Stage-1 2013] 20. is equal to
1 tan cot 1
(A) 0.7 and 0.9 (B) 0.7 and 0.8 [Rajasthan NTSE Stage-1 2016]
(C) 0.8 and 0.9 (D) 0.5 and 0.7 (A) Sin + cos (B) Sin – cos
11. If sin + cos = 1, then sin cos is equal to : 1
(C) 2 sin (D)
[M.P. NTSE Stage-1 2013] cos sin
2 2
1 21. The least value of 2sin x 2cos x is
(A) 0 (B)
3 1 [West Bengal NTSE Stage-1 2016]
1 2 (A) 4 (B) 2 2
(C) 1 (D)
1 3 (C) 2 (D) 2
12. If sin – cos = 2 sin (90° – ), then tan = 22. If A BC D is a c yc lic qu ad rilateral, the value o f
[Raj. NTSE Stage-1 2014] A C B D
(A)
tan tan + tan tan is
2 – 1 (B) 2 2 2 2 2
(C) 1 – 2 (D) 2 +1 [West Bengal NTSE Stage-1 2016]
2 (A) 0 (B) 1
13. If sec + tan = 2, 0º < < 90º, then the value of
(C) –1 (D) 2
cosec2 + cot2 is - [Harayana NTSE Stage-1 2013]
(A) 2 (B) 3 23. The angles of elevation of the top of a tower from
(C) 4 (D) 5
two points at a distance of 9 m and 16 m from the
14. If tan + 4 cot = 4, the value of tan3 + cot3 is : base of the tower and in the same straight line in
[West Bengal NTSE Stage-1 2014] the same direction with it are complementary. Then
1 height of the tower is
(A) 8 (B) 16
8 [Rajasthan NTSE Stage-1 2017]
9 1 (A) 12 m (B) 15 m
(C) 7 (D) 27 (C) 20 m (D) 25 m
8 27
15. The Maximum value of cos6 + sin6 is :
[West Bengal NTSE Stage-1 2014] p 2p3
24. If sin = p and cos = q then the value of is
(A) 1 (B) 0 2q3 q
(C) 4 (D) 2
16. is an acute angle such that tan = 2/3 then evaluate
(A) sec (B) cosec
1 tan 1 cot (C) cot (D) tan
.
sin cos sec cos ec
[NTSE Stage-2 2014] 25. Value of tan25°tan35°tan45°tan55°tan65° is
1 4 [Rajasthan NTSE Stage-1 2017]
(A) – (B) – (A) 0 (B) 1
5 13
1 4 (C) 2 (D) 3
(C) (D)
5 13
PAGE # 118
118
(ii) Ordinate is the perpendicular distance of a point

RECTANGULAR CO-ORDINATES
from x-axis. (i.e., positive above x-axis and negative
Take two perpendicular lines X’OX and Y’OY intersecting below x-axis).
at the point O. X’OX and Y’OY are called the co-ordinate
(iii) Abscissa of any point on y-axis is zero.
axes. X’OX is called the X-axis, Y’OY is called the
Y-axis and O is called the origin. Lines X’OX and Y’OY (iv) Ordinate of any point on x-axis is zero.
are sometimes also called rectangular axes. (v) Co-ordinates of the origin are (0,0).
DISTANCE BETWEEN TWO POINTS
Let two points be P (x1, y1) and Q (x2, y2).

Take two mutually perpendicular lines as the coordinate
axis with O as origin. Mark the points P (x1, y1) and
Q (x2, y2). Draw lines PA, QB perpendicular to X-axis,
from the points P and Q, which meet the X-axis in
points A and B, respectively.
Y
Let P be any point as shown in figure. Draw PL and PM
perpendiculars on Y- axis and X - axis, respectively. D Q(x2, y 2)
The length LP (or OM) is called the x - coordinate or
th e abscissa of point P and MP is c alled th e C
P(x1, y1) R
y-coordinate or the ordinate of point P. A point whose
abscissa is x and ordinate is y named as the point
(x, y) or P (x, y).
B X
O A
Draw lines PC and QD perpendicular to Y-axis, which

meet theY-axis in C and D, respectively. Produce CP to
meet BQ in R.
Now, OA = abscissa of P = x1
Similarly, OB = x2, OC = y1 and OD = y2
Therefore, we have
PR = AB = OB – OA = x2 – x1
The two lines X’OX and Y’OY divide the plane into four
Similarly, QR = QB – RB = QB – PA = y2 – y1
parts called quadrants. XOY, YOX’, X’OY’ and Y’OX
Now, using Pythagoreus Theorem, in right angled
are, respectively, called the first, second, third and fourth
triangle PRQ, we have
quadrants. The following table shows the signs of the
PQ2 = PR2 + RQ2
coordinates of points situated in different quadrants:
or PQ2 = (x2 – x1)2 + (y2 – y1)2
Quadrant X - coordinate Y - coordinate Point Since the distance or length of the line-segment PQ is
First quadrant + + (+, +)
always non-negative, on taking the positive square root,
we get the distance as
Second quadrant – + (–, +)
Third quadrant – – (–, –) PQ = (x 2 x 1 )2 (y2 y 1 )2

Fourth quadrant + – (+, –)
This result is known as distance formula.
REMARKS : Corollary : The distance of a point P (x1, y1) from the
(i) Abscissa is the perpendicular distance of a point
origin (0, 0) is given by OP = .
from y-axis. (i.e., positive to the right of y-axis and
negative to the left of y-axis).
PAGE # 119
119
                  
              
                 
        
        
           
      
    
          
         
   
                  
           
                  
            
     
       
           
       
          
                    

                
       
        
          
               
                 
           
                      
      
         
           
                 
   
            
  
                
             
       
  
 
       
        
  
            
   
         
      
       
    
  


    
      
 
     
  
            
                     
      
        
  

                
                        
                     
            
     
             
      
    
          
    
  
 
     
    
          
      
            
      

 
  
   
    

      
   

 
            
           
   
       
 
        
                             
               
                 
  
    

        
         
                   
          
         
  
    
             
                       
           
        
          
         
                
         
       
 
                     
            
      
 

 

      
  

                               
                         

         


          


   
  
   
           
   
        
   
         
            
   
 
 
 
      
  
   
     
  
       
 
    
 
      
     
    
                 
          
 
  
         

           
    
     

        
 
                        
      
          
        
  
        
 
           
      
                
   
        
      
  
   
         
     
      
       
 
  

  
              
            
   
       
        
           

     
    
       
 
            
         
   
  
   
      
 
 
         
                    
                  
        
       
               

  
     

        
     
   
                   
               
        
           
                    
          

                     
       
                
           
                 
           
 
 
                 
                
        
        

  
   
            


   
  

Area of ABC = Area of trapezium ABLM + Area of
trapezium AMNC – Area of trapezium BLNC
1
We know that, Area of trapezium = (Sum of LOCUS : The curve described by a point which moves
2
parallel sides) (distance b/w them) under given condition or conditions is called the
1 1 locus. For example, suppose C is a point in the plane
Therefore, Area of ABC = (BL + AM) (LM) + (AM + of the paper and P is a variable point in a plane of the
2 2
1 paper such that its distance from C is always equal to
CN) MN – (BL + CN) (LN)
2 a (say). It is clear that all the positions of the moving
1 1 point P lie on the circumference of a circle whose
Area of ABC = (y2 + y1)(x1 – x2) + (y1 + y3) (x3 – x1) –
2 2 centre is C and whose radius is a.
1
(y + y ) (x – x ) EQUATION OF THE LOCUS OF A POINT : The equation
2 2 3 3 2
to the locus of a point is the relation which is satisfied
Area of ABC = by the co - ordinates of every point on the locus of the
point.
1
x1( y 2 y3 ) x 2 (y3 y1 ) x 3 ( y1 y 2 )
2
ALGORITHM TO FIND THE LOCUS OF A POINT
Three points A (x1, y1), B (x2, y2) and C (x3, y3) are
STEP 1 : Assume the co-ordinates of point say (h, k)
collinear if Area of ABC = 0.
whose locus is to be found.
Ex.10 F in d the area o f trian gle, wh ose vertic es are
STEP 2 : W rite the given condition in mathematical
(–5, –1), ( 3, – 5), (5, 2). form involving h, k.
Sol. Let A = (x1, y1) = (– 5, – 1)
STEP 3 : Eliminate the variables if any.
B = (x2, y2) = (3, – 5)
STEP 4 : Replace h by x and k by y in the result
and C = (x3, y3) = (5, 2) be the given points. obtained in step 3.
Then, Area of ABC The equation obtained is the locus of the point which
moves under some stated condition(s).
1
= |x (y – y ) + x2 (y3 – y1) + x3 (y1 – y2)| Ex.11 F in d th e e q u atio n of th e lo c u s o f th e p o in t
2 1 2 3
P (x, y) such that AP BP = 6 where the points is
1 A (0, 4) and B (0, 4).

= |–5(– 5 – 2) + 3 (2 + 1) + 5 (–1 + 5)| Sol. | AP – BP | = 6
2
(AP – BP)2 = 36
1
= |35 + 9 + 20|
2 AP2 + BP2 – 2AP BP = 36
= 32 sq. units. (x – 0)2 + (y – 4)2 + (x – 0)2 + (y + 4)2 –
AREA OF QUADRILATERAL 2 x2 y2 8y 16 x2 y2 8y 16 = 36
Let the vertices of Quadrilateral ABCD are A (x1, y1), 2x2 + 2y2 + 32 – 36
B (x2, y2) , C (x3, y3) and D (x4, y4)
So, Area of quadrilateral ABCD = Area of ABC + = 2 x2 y2 8y 16 x2 y2 8y 16
Area of ACD.
(x2 + y2 – 2)2 = (x2 + y2 – 8y + 16) (x2 + y2 + 8 y+ 16)
D C
(x4, y4) (x3, y3) x4 + y4 + 4 + 2x2y2 – 4y2 – 4x2 = x4 + y4 + 256 – 64y2 +
2x2y2 + 32x2 + 32y2
28y2 – 36x2 – 252 = 0
A B
(x2, y2) 7y2 – 9x2 – 63 = 0.
(x1, y1)
PAGE # 124
124
                    
                      
                  
             
     
           
            
             
                         
                
                
              
     
     
 
              
 
                     
               
               
     
  
   
       
          
         
                           
                    
           
 
    
  
    

 
      
    
 
                       
                      
                    
         
                   
                 
  
               
              
         
             
      
                   
    
        

     
 
                 
        
                   
                     
     
            
    
              

                    

                     
   
     
       
  

                  
                       
       
      
  

              
          

  
  
   
 
           

 
           
 
              
     
        

  
           

         
    
  
               

        
                 
                          
          
       
                
      
 
         
          
   
        
             
        
            
            
                  
                 
             
      
 
               
 
            
    
          
 
        
               
           
           
       
      
         
     
  
 
     
 
 
     
 
  

           
           
             
        
  
                
                          
           
                   
                  
                        
         
                      
                  
       
                
         
                   
           
                 
               
             
       
     
     
  

(iii) Obtuse angle : An angle whose measure is more

than 90º but less than 180º is called an obtuse angle.
A line has length but no width and no thickness.
An angle is the union of two non-collinear rays with a

common initial point. The common initial point is called 90º < AOB < 180º.
the ‘vertex’ of the angle and two rays are called the
‘arms’ of the angles. (iv) Straight angle : An angle whose measure is 180º
is called a straight angle.
(v) Reflex angle : An angle whose measure is more

REMARK : than 180º is called a reflex angle.
Every angle has a measure and unit of measurement
is degree.
One right angle = 90º
1º = 60’ (minutes)
1’ = 60” (Seconds)
Angle addition axiom : If X is a point in the interior of 180º < AOB < 360º.
BAC, then m BAC = m BAX + m XAC.
(vi) Complementary angles : Two angles, the sum of
whose measures is 90º are called complementary
angles.
AOC & BOC are complementary as their sum is

90 º.
(i) Right angle : An angle whose measure is 90 º is
called a right angle. (vii) Supplementary angles : Two angles, the sum of
w ho se m easu res is 1 80 º, are called th e
supplementary angles.
(ii) Acute angle : An angle whose measure is less AOC & BOC are supplementary as their sum is
than 90º is called an acute angle. 180 º.
B (viii) Angle Bisectors : A ray OX is said to be the bisector

of AOB , if X is a point in the interior of AOB, and
AOX = BOX.
O A
0 0
0 < BOA < 90
PAGE # 128
128
(ix) Adjacent angles : Two angles are called adjacent (i) Corresponding angles : Two angles on the same
angles, if side of a transversal are known as the corresponding
(A) they have the same vertex, angles if both lie either above the two lines or below
(B) they have a common arm, the two lines, in figure 1 & 5, 4 & 8, 2 & 6,
(C) non comm on arms are on either side of the 3 & 7 are the pairs of corresponding angles.
common arm. If a transversal intersects two parallel lines then the
co rrespo nding ang les are equal i.e. 1 = 5,
4 = 8, 2 = 6 and 3 = 7.
(ii) Alternate interior angles : 3 & 5, 2 & 8, are

the pairs of alternate interior angles.
If a transversal intersects two parallel lines then the
AOX and BOX are adjacent angles, OX is common each pair of alternate interior angles are equal i.e.
arm, OA and OB are non common arms and lies on 3 = 5 and 2 = 8.
either side of OX.
(iii) Co- interior angles : The pair of interior angles on
(x) Linear pair of angles : Two adjacent angles are the same side of the transversal are called pairs of
said to form a linear pair of angles, if their non common consecutive or co - interior angles. In figu re
arms are two opposite rays. 2 & 5, 3 & 8, are the pairs of co-interior angles.
If a transversal intersects two parallel lines then each
pair of consecutive interior angles are supplementary
i.e. 2 + 5 = 180º and 3 + 8 = 180º.
Ex.1. F in d the m easure o f an an gle, if six times its

complement is 12º less than twice its supplement.
AOC + BOC = 180º.
Sol. Let the measure of the required angle be xº.
(xi) Vertically opposite angles : Two angles are called Then, measure of its complement = (90 – x)º.
a pair of vertically opposite angles, if their arms form Measure of its supplement = (180 – x)º.
two pairs of opposite rays. 6 (90 – x) = 2 (180 – x) – 12
540 – 6x = 360 – 2x – 12
4x = 192
x = 48º.
Hence, the required angle is 48º.
Ex.2. In the adjoining figure, ABC = 100º, EDC = 120º

AOC & BOD form a pair of vertically opposite and AB || DE. Then, find BCD .
angles. Also AOD & BOC form a pair of vertically
D
opposite angles. E
B
If two lines intersect, then the vertically opposite angles A
are equal i.e. AOC = BOD and BOC = AOD.
xº
C
Transversal : A line which intersects two or more given
parallel lines at distinct points is called a transversal D
E
of the given lines. B
Sol. A F
xº
Produce AB to meet CD at F.
BFD = EDF = 120° [alternate interior s]
BFC = (180° – 120°) = 60°
CBF = (180° – 100°) = 80°
BCF = 180°– (60° + 80°) = 40°.
PAGE # 129
129
Ex.3 If the sum of interior angles of a polygon is 1620º, find
POLYGON its number of sides.
Sol. W e know that sum of all interior angles of a n sided
A closed plane figure bounded by line segments is polygon = (2n – 4) right angles
called a polygon. = [(2n – 4) 900]
A polygon is named according to the number of sides but given sum of interior angles = 1620º
it has : (2n – 4) 900 = 1620º
No. of sides 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 1620 º
2n – 4 =
Figure Triangle Quadrilateral Pentagon Hexagon Heptagon Octagon Decagon 90 º
2n – 4 = 18
In general, a polygon having n sides is called 'n' sided
polygon. 2n = 22
n = 11.
Diagonal of Polygon :
Line segment joining any two non-consecutive vertices TRIANGLE
of a polygon is called its diagonal.
A plane figure bounded by three lines in a plane is
Convex Polygon : called a triangle. Every triangle have three sides and
three angles. If ABC is any triangle then AB, BC & CA
If all the interior angles of a polygon are less than 1800,
are three sides and A, B and C are three angles.
it is called a convex polygon.
Concave Polygon :
If one or more of the interior angles of a polygon is Types of triangles :
greater than 180 0 i.e. reflex, it is called a concave A. On the basis of sides we have three types of triangle.
polygon.
1. Scalene triangle – A triangle in which no two sides
are equal is called a scalene triangle.
2. Isosceles triangle – A triangle having two sides equal
is called an isosceles triangle.
3. Equilateral triangle – A triangle in which all sides
are equal is called an equilateral triangle.
Regular Polygon :
B. On the basis of angles we have three types :
A polygon is called a regular polygon if all its sides
have equal length and all the angles have equal 1. Right triangle – A triangle in which any one angle is
measure. right angle is called right triangle.
2. Acute triangle – A triangle in which all angles are
acute is called an acute triangle.
3. Obtuse triangle – A triangle in which any one angle
is obtuse is called an obtuse triangle.
SOME IMPORTANT THEOREMS :

REMARKS :
Theorem : The sum of interior angles of a triangle is
(1) The sum of the interior angles of a convex polygon of n 180º.
sides is (2n – 4) right angles or (2n – 4) 90º.
Theorem : If the bisectors of angles ABC and ACB
(2) The sum of the exterior angles of a convex polygon is of a trian gle AB C meet at a po in t O, then
4 right angles or 360º.
1
BOC = 90º + A.
(3) Each interior angle of a n-sided regular polygon is 2
2n 4 90 º Exterior Angle of a Triangle :
n If the side of the triangle is produced, the exterior angle
(4) Each exterior angle of a regular polygon of n sides so formed is equal to the sum of two interior opposite
angles.
3600
= Corollary : An exterior angle of a triangle is greater
n than either of the interior opposite angles.
(5) If a polygon has n sides, then the number of diagonals Theorem : The sides AB and AC of a ABC are produced
nn 3 to P and Q respectively. If the bisectors of PBC and
of the polygon = . 1
2 QCB intersect at O, then BOC = 90º – A.
2
PAGE # 130
130
Ex.4 In figure, TQ and TR are the bisectors of Q and R
respectively. If QPR = 80º and PRT = 30º, determine
TQR and QTR.
Sol. Since the bisectors of Q and R meet at T. A P
P
80º
T
B C Q R
Q R Two triangles are congruent if two sides and the
1 included angle of one are equal to the corresponding
QTR = 90º + QPR sides and the included angle of the other triangle.
2
1 :
QTR = 90º + (80º)
2 A P
QTR = 90º + 40º = 130º
In QTR, we have
TQR + QTR + TRQ = 180º
TQR + 130º + 30º = 180º [ TRQ = PRT = 30º ]
TQR = 20º B C Q R
Thus, TQR = 20º and QTR = 130º. Two triangles are congruent if two angles and the
inc lu ded side o f on e triang le are equ al to th e
corresponding two angles and the included side of
the other triangle.
The figures are called congruent if they have same
shape and same size. In other words, two figures are :
called congruent if they are having equal length, width A P
and height.
B C Q R
If any two angles and a non included side of one triangle
are equal to the corresponding angles and side of
another triangle, then the two triangles are congruent.
Fig.(i) Fig.(ii)
:
In the above figures {fig.(i) and fig.(ii)} both are equal in
A P
length, width and height, so these are congruent
figures.
Two triangles are congruent if and only if one of them

B C Q R
can be made to superimposed on the other, so as to
cover it exactly. Two triangles are congruent if the three sides of one
triangle are equal to the corresponding three sides of
the other triangle.
A P
If two triangles ABC and DEF are congruent then

A = D, B = E, C = F and AB = DE, BC = EF, B C Q R
AC = DF. Two right triangles are congruent if the hypotenuse
If two ABC & DEF are congruent then we write and one side of one triangle are respectively equal to
ABC DEF, we can not write as ABC DFE or the hypotenuse and one side of the other triangle.
ABC EDF. NOTE :

Hence, we can say that “two triangles are congruent if If two triangles are congruent then their corresponding
sid es and ang les are also c on gruent b y CPCT
and only if there exists a one-one correspondence
(corresponding parts of congruent triangles are also
between their vertices such that the corresponding
congruent).
sides an d th e co rrespo nd in g an gles o f th e tw o
triangles are equal. Theorem : If the bisector of the vertical angle bisects
the base of the triangle, then the triangle is isosceles.
PAGE # 131
131
Ex.5 In figure, line m is the bisector of an angle A and O is
any point on m. OQ and OP are perpendiculars from O
to the arms of A. Prove that :
In triangle ABC, AB = c, BC = a & CA = b then,
A
P
m
O c b
B a C
A
(i) The sum of any two sides of a triangle is greater
Q
than its third side. i.e. in ABC,
(i) AOQ AOP (ii) OQ = OP. (A) a + b > c (B) b + c > a (C) a + c > b
Sol. (i) In AOQ and AOP,
OAQ = OAP [ line m is the bisector of A] (ii) If two sides of a triangle are unequal, then the longer
AQO = APO = 90º [Given] side has greater angle opposite to it
and AO = AO [Common] i.e. in ABC, if AB > AC then C > B.
By AAS congruency
(iii) Of all the line segments that can be drawn to a
AOQ AOP
given line, from a point, not lying on it, the perpendicular
(ii) OQ = OP [C.P.C.T.]
line segment is the shortest. i.e. in PMN,
Ex.6 If D is the mid-point of the hypotenuse AC of a right P
1
triangle ABC, prove that BD = AC.
2
Sol. Given : ABC is a right triangle such that B = 900 and
D is mid point of AC.
1
To prove : BD = AC.
2 M N
Construction : Produce BD to E such that BD = DE and
join EC. (A) PM < PN.
Proof : (iv) The difference between any two sides of a triangle
is less than its third side. i.e. in ABC,
(A) a – b < c (B) b – c < a (C) a – c < b
(v) In a right angle triangle the sum of squares of two

smaller sides is equal to the square of its third side.
i.e. in ABC, a2 + b2 = c2.
In ADB and CDE
AD = DC [Given] (vi) If sum of squares of two smaller sides is greater
BD = DE [By construction] than the square of its third side then that triangle is
And, ADB = CDE [Vertically opposite angles]
acute angled triangle.
By SAS criterion of congruence we have
i.e in ABC, a2 + b2 > c2.
ADB CDE
EC = AB and CED = ABD ... (i) [By CPCT]] (vii) If sum of squares of two smaller sides is lesser
But CED & ABD are alternate interior angles than the square of its third side then that triangle is
CE || AB obtuse angled triangle.
ABC + ECB = 1800 i.e in ABC, a2 + b2 < c2.
[Consecutive interior angles]
90 + ECB = 1800 Ex.7 From which given triplet we can make the sides a
ECB = 90 . 0 triangle.
Now, In ABC & ECB we have (i) {15, 7, 8} (ii) {3.5, 4.5, 5.5}
AB = EC [By (i)] Sol. As we know sum of two sides is always greater then
BC = BC [Common] third side.
And, ABC = ECB = 900
(i) we can not make the triangle because
By SAS criterion of congruence
ABC ECB here the sum of two side is equal to third side
i.e 7+8=15
AC = EB [By CPCT]
(ii) W e can make the triangle because sum of two
1 1
AC = EB sides is always greater then third side
2 2
1 3.5 +4.5 >5.5
BD = AC. Hence Proved. 3.5 +5.5 >4.5
2
4.5 +5.5 >3.5
PAGE # 132
132
Ex.8 Prove that any two sides of the triangle are together (ii) (SSS Similarity) If the corresponding sides of two
greater than twice the median drawn to the third side.
triangles are proportional, then they are similar.
Sol. Given : ABC and AD is the median.
To prove : AB + AC > 2AD
A (iii) (SAS Similarity) If in two triangles, one pair of
corresponding sides are proportional and the included
angles are equal then the two triangles are similar.
(b) Results Based Upon Characteristic Properties

D
B C of Similar Triangles :
(i) If two triangles are equiangular, then the ratio of the

corresponding sides is the same as the ratio of the
corresponding medians.
E
Construction : Produce AD to E such that AD = DE.
(ii) If two triangles are equiangular, then the ratio of the
Join EC.
Proof : In ADB and CDE co rrespon din g sides is same as the ratio o f the
AD = DE [By construction] corresponding angle bisector segments.
BD = DC [AD is the median]
(iii) If two triangles are equiangular then the ratio of the
ADB = CDE [Vertically opposite angles]
ADB CDE [By SAS congruency] co rrespon din g sides is same as the ratio o f the
So, by CPCT corresponding altitudes.
AB = EC (iv) If one angle of a triangle is equal to one angle of
In AEC another triangle and the bisectors of these equal
AC + EC > 2AD. angles divide the opposite side in the same ratio, then
[Sum of two sides of a triangle is always greater than the triangles are similar.
the third side]
So, AC + AB > 2AD. [As EC = AB]. (v) If two sides and a median bisecting the third side of
a triang le are respectively prop ortion al to th e
co rrespo ndin g sides and the median of an oth er
Two triangles ABC and DEF are said to be similar if triangle, then two triangles are similar.
their
(vi) If two sides and a median bisecting one of these
(i) Corresponding angles are equal.
sides of a triangle are respectively proportional to the
i.e. A= D, B= E, C= F
two sides and the corresponding median of another
And, triangle, then the triangles are similar.
Statement : If a line is drawn parallel to one side of a

triangle to intersect the other two sides in distinct points,
then the other two sides are divided in the same ratio.
i.e., In ABC in which a line parallel to side BC intersects
(ii) Corresponding sides are proportional. other two sides AB and AC at D and E respectively.
AD AE
AB BC AC Then, = .
i.e. . DB EC
DE EF DF
A
(a) Characteristic Properties of Similar Triangles :
(i) (AAA Similarity) If two triangles are equiangular, D E

then they are similar.
B C
PAGE # 133
133
Ex.9 In a trapezium ABCD, AB || DC and DC = 2AB. EF
drawn parallel to AB cuts AD in F and BC in E such that
If in a ABC, a line DE || BC, intersects AB in D and AC
BE 3
in E, then . Diagonal DB intersects EF at G. Prove that
EC 4
DB EC 7FE = 10AB.
(i) Sol. In DFG and DAB,
AD AE
1= 2 [Corresponding s AB || FG]
AB AC
(ii) A B
AD AE
2
F E
AD AE 1 G
(iii)
AB AC
D C
AB AC
(iv) FDG = ADB [Common]
DB EC
DFG ~ DAB [By AA rule of similarity]
DB EC DF FG
(v) … (i)
AB AC DA AB
Again in trapezium ABCD
EF || AB || DC
Converse of Basic Proportionality Theorem :
AF BE
Statement : If a line divides any two sides of a triangle DF EC
in the same ratio, then the line must be parallel to AF 3 BE 3
( given )
the third side. DF 4 EC 4
AF 3
Some Important Results and Theorems : 1 1
DF 4
(i) The internal bisector of an angle of a triangle divides AF DF 7
the opposite side internally in the ratio of the sides DF 4
containing the angle. AD 7
DF 4
(ii) In a triangle ABC, if D is a point on BC such that DF 4
… (ii)
D divides BC in the ratio AB : AC, then AD is the bisector AD 7
of A. From (i) and (ii), we get
FG 4 4
(iii) The external bisector of an angle of a triangle divides i.e., FG = AB … (iii)
AB 7 7
the opposite sides externally in the ratio of the sides
In BEG and BCD, we have
containing the angle.
BEG = BCD [Corresponding angle EG || CD]
(iv) The line drawn from the mid-point of one side of a GBE = DBC [Common]
triangle parallel to another side bisects the third side. BEG ~ BCD [By AA rule of similarity]
BE EG
(v) The line joining the mid-points of two sides of a BC CD
triangle is parallel to the third side.
3 EG
(vi) The diagonals of a trapezium divide each other 7 CD
proportionally.
BE 3 EC 4 EC BE 4 3 BC 7
i.e.,
(vii) If the diagonals of a quadrilateral divide each other EG 7 BE 3 BE 3 BE 3
proportionally, then it is a trapezium. 3 3
EG = CD (2 AB) CD 2AB (given)
7 7
(viii) An y lin e parallel to the parallel sid es of a 6
EG = AB ... (iv)
tr ap ez iu m d ivid es th e n o n - p ara llel sid es 7
Adding (iii) and (iv), we get
proportionally.
4 6 10
FG + EG = AB AB AB
(ix) If three or more parallel lines are intersected by 7 7 7
two transversals, then the intercepts made by them on 10
EF = AB i.e., 7EF = 10AB. Hence proved.
the transversals are proportional. 7
PAGE # 134
134
Ex.10 In th e given fig ure, PA, Q B and RC are each
1 1 1 (i) The areas of two similar triangles are in the ratio of
perpendicular to AC. Prove that .
x z y the squares of corresponding altitudes.
Sol. In PAC, we have BQ || AP
(ii) The areas of two similar triangles are in the ratio of
BQ CB
[ CBQ ~ CAP] the squares of the corresponding medians.
AP CA
y CB (iii) The area of two similar triangles are in the ratio of

… (i) the squares of the corresponding angle bisector
x CA
segments.
In ACR, we have BQ || CR
Ex.11 Prove that the area of the equilateral triangle described
BQ AB on the side of a square is half the area of the equilateral
ABQ ~ ACR
CR AC triangle described on its diagonal.
Sol. Given : A square ABCD. Equilateral triangles BCE and
y AB
… (ii) ACF have been described on side BC and diagonal
z AC
AC respectively.
Adding (i) and (ii), we get
1
To Prove : Area ( BCE) = . Area ( ACF)
P 2
Proof : Sin ce BCE and ACF are equilateral.
R Therefore, they are equiangular ( each angle being
x Q equal to 60º) and hence BCE ~ ACF.
z
y
A B C
y y CB AB
x z AC AC
y y AB BC
x z AC
y y AC
x z AC
y y
1
x z
Area( BCE) BC 2
=
1 1 1 Area( ACF) AC 2
. Hence Proved.
x z y
Area( BCE) BC 2 1
= 2 =
Area( ACF) 2BC 2
Statement :The ratio of the areas of two similar Area( BCE) 1

= . Hence Proved.
triangles is equal to the square of the ratio of their Area( ACF) 2
corresponding sides. i.e., In 2 triangles ABC and PQR
such that ABC ~ PQR [Shown in the figure] PYTHAGORAS THEOREM
Statement : In a right triangle, the square of the
P hypotenuse is equal to the sum of the squares of the

A other two sides. i.e., In a right triangle ABC, right angled
at B.
B C Q R
M N
2 2 2
ar ( ABC) AB BC CA
Then, = = = . Then, AC2 = AB2 + BC2
ar (PQR) PQ QR RP
PAGE # 135
135
In ABC
AB2 = AE2 + EB2 ......(i)
, Statement : In a triangle, if the square of one side is AD2 = AE2 + ED2 .....(ii)
From (i) and (ii)
equal to the sum of the squares of the other two sides,
AB2 = AD2 – ED2 + EB2
then the angle opposite to the first side is a right angle.
BC 2 BC 2
AB2 = AD2 – +
Some Results Deduced From Pythagoras Theorem : 36 4
BC BC BC BC
(i) In the given figure ABC is an obtuse triangle, [ BD + DE = + DE = DE = ]
2 3 2 6
obtuse angled at B. If AD CB,
2 2
then AC2 = AB2 + BC2 + 2BC. BD BC BC BC
AB2 + – = AD2 [ EB = ]
36 4 2
A
AB 2 AB 2
AB2 + – = AD2 [ AB = BC]
36 4
36AB 2 AB 2 9AB 2
= AD2
36
28 AB 2
D B C = AD2 7AB2 = 9AD2.
36
(ii) In the given figure, if B of ABC is an acute angle
and AD BC, then AC2 = AB2 + BC2 – 2BC . BD
1. In the given diagram, PT is parallel to QR. Size of PQR

is
(iii) In any triangle, the sum of the squares of any two

sides is equal to twice the square of half of the third
side together with twice the square of the median which (A) 116º (B) 138º
bisects the third side. (C) 144º (D) 120º
2. In the diagram if ABC and PQR are equilateral. The
(iv) Three times the sum of the squares of the sides of CXY equals
a triangle is eq ual to fo ur times the sum of the
squares of the medians of the triangle.
Ex.12 In an equilateral triangle ABC, the side BC is trisected

at D. Prove that 9 AD2 = 7AB2.
Sol. ABC be an equilateral triangle and D be point on BC (A) 35º (B) 40º
(C) 45º (D) 50º
1
such that BD = BC (Given) 3. In the figure shown, BEA = 100°. Point F is chosen
3
inside BEA so that line FA bisects EAB and line FB
Draw AE BC, Join AD.
bisects EBA. The measure of BFA, is :
BE = EC ( Altitude drown from any vertex of an equilateral
triangle bisects the opposite side)
A
(A) 140° (B) 145°

(C) 150° (D) 155°
4. In the figure shown, the value of CAB, is (Here x is
measured in degree in the figure) :
B D E C
BC
So, BE = EC =
2
(A) 108° (B) 120°

(C) 144° (D) 162°
PAGE # 136
136
5. The altitudes of triangle are 12, 15 and 20 units. 11. In a right triangle ABC, AD = AE and CF = CE as show.
The largest angle in the triangle is : If DEF = x degrees then the value of x equals
(A) 75º (B) 90º A
(C) 120º (D) 135º
6. In the figure, the value of x equals :
E
X
D
B C
F
(A) 30º (B) 45º
(A) 12º (B) 15º (C) 60º (D) 75º
(C) 18º (D) 21º 12. In the figure given, ABC, is a right isosceles triangle
7. As shown in the figure, AC = CD, CAB – ABC = with right angle at C. CD is a parallel to AB and BD =
30º. Then BAD has a measure of : BA. The degree measure of DBC equals :
D C
A B
(A) 10 (B) 15
(A) 15º (B) 30º
(C) 20 (D) 25
(C) 20º (D)(22½º)
13. Triangle ABC is isosceles with AB = AC. The measure
8. Lines PS, QT and RU intersect at a common point
O, as shown P is joined to Q, R to S and T to U, to of angle BAD is 30º and AD = AE. The measure of
form triangles. The value of P + Q + R + S + angle EDC, is :
A
T + U is :
B C
D
(A) 5º (B) 10º
(A) 270º (B) 360º (C) 15º (D) 20º
(C) 450º (D) 540º 14. Given triangle PQR with RS bisecting R, PQ extended
9. In the diagram AMN, to D and n a right angle, then :
QRM and PRN are all straight lines. The value of +
R
is :
Q
P m
n
R
125º
55º p q
A d
M N
P Q D
S
(A) 70º (B) 55º
1 1
(C) 90º (D) 75º (A) m= ( p – q) (B) m= ( p + q)
2 2
10. Triangle ABC and ADC are isosceles with AB = BC and
AD = DC. Point D is inside ABC, ABC = 40º and 1 1
ADC = 140º. The degree measure of BAD, is : (C) d= ( q + p) (D) d= m
B 2 2
40º
15. The interior angle of a regular polygon exceeds the
D exterior angle by 132º . The number of sides in the
140º polygon is :
A C
(A) 7 (B) 8
(C) 12 (D) 15
(A) 20 (B) 30
(D) 40 (D) 50
PAGE # 137
137
16. In a rectangle ABCD, as shown in figure, a point P
is taken on the side CD such that PC = 9, BP = 15
23. A square board side 10 centimeters, standing vertically,
and AB = 14 then the correct relation between angles
is tilted to the left so that the bottom-right corner is
of APB is :
raised 6 centimeters from the ground.
(A) > > (B) > >

(C) > > (D) > >
17. One angle of a seven sided polygon is 108º and each By what distance is the top-left corner lowered from its
of the other six angles is x0. The value of x is : original position ?
(A) 1 cm (B) 2 cm
(A) 114° (B) 121°
(C) 3 cm (D) 0.5 cm
(C) 131° (D) 132°
24. In a right angled triangle ABC, P is mid point of AC.
18. In the figure, PQ || ST, then QRS is equal to : W hich one is true ?
AC AC
(A) PA = (B) PB =
2 2
(C) PA = PB (D) All of these

(A) 30° (B) 40°
(C) 20° (D) 60° 25. In the given figure AC = CB, PCA = QCB and
19. In the given figure, AB = AC and BAC = 20°. Find the PBC = QAC, then the true statement is :
sum of angle ADC and angle DAC. P Q
A C B
(A) 55° (B) 80° (A) PB > QA (B) CPB CQA
(C) 70° (D) 60° (C) PC QC (D) PCB QCA
20. In the figure, ADC is : 26. For given figure, which one is correct :
(A) 30° (B) 60°

(C) 70° (D) 80°
(A) ABC DEF (B) ABC FED
21. In the given figure AB = BC = CD = EG = GA and
(C) ABC DFE (D) ABC EDF
CAD = 25º, Then :
27. In AOC and XYZ, A = X, AO = XZ, AC = XY, then
by which congruence rule is AOC XZY :
(A) SAS (B) ASA
(C) SSS (D) RHS
(A) BCD = 80º (B) CDA = 60º
(C) GEA = 50º (D) CD = 125º ,
22. In the figure, AB = BC = CD = DE = EF = FG = GA, then

28. The sides of a triangle with positive area have lengths
DAE is equal to :
4, 6 and x. The sides of a second triangle with positive
area have length 4, 6 and y. The smallest positive
number that is not the possible value of |x – y| is
(x and y are integers) :
(A) 2 (B) 4
(C) 6 (D) 8
(A) 24° (B) 25°
180 º
(C) 27° (D)
7
PAGE # 138
138
29. The sides of a triangle are in the ratio 4 : 6 : 11. W hich 38. In the figure shown, given PQ || BC. The length of AC is
of the following words best described the triangle? :
A
(A) obtuse (B) isosceles
6 9
(C) acute (D) impossible Q
P
30. The number of triangles with any three of the lengths
12
1, 4, 6 and 8 cm, are :
(A) 4 (B) 2 B C
(C) 1 (D) 0
(A) 24 (B) 27
31. The perimeter of a triangle is : (C) 31 (D) 9
(A) greater than the sum of its altitudes
(B) less than the sum of its altitudes 39. In the figure C is a right angle, DE AB, A E = 6, EB = 7 and
(C) equal to the sum of its altitudes BC = 5. The area of the quadrilateral EBCD is
(D) none of these C
32. In the given diagram B = C = 65º and D = 30º, then
D
the true statement is : 5
A
(A) BC = CA
A B
(B) CA > CD 6 E 7
(A) 27.5 (B) 25
(C) BD > AD
65º 65º 30º (C) 22.5 (D) 20
(D) AC = AD B D
C 40. In ABC, PQ || BC, area of quadrilateral PBCQ = 42sq.
33. In a PQR , PS is b isector o f P, Q = 70º and cm. If AP : PB = 2 : 3, then find the area of APQ :
R = 30º, then :
(A) QR < PR > PQ (B) QR > PR > PQ
(C) QR = PR = PQ (D) QR < PR = PQ
34. If D is any point on the side BC of a ABC, then :
(A) AB + BC + CA > 2AD (B) AB + BC + CA < 2AD
(C) AB + BC + CA > 3 AD (D) None
35. The triangle ABC has sides a = 13, b = 14 and c = 15 as

56
shown in the figure. Line N bisects angle B and (A) 28 sq. cm. (B) sq. cm.
crosses side b at P. The distance from A to P, is : 3
(C) 8 sq. cm. (D) 33.6 sq. cm.
41. The median AD of ABC meets BC at D. The internal
bisectors of ADB and ADC meet AB and AC at E and
F respectively. Then EF :
(A) is perpendicular to AD
(B) is parallel to BC
(C) divides AD in the ratio of AB : AC
(D) none of these
(A) 3 7 (B) 7
42. A square DEAF is constructed inside a 30° – 60° – 90°
(C) 7 2 (D) 7.5 triangle ABC with the hypotenuse BC = 4, D on side
36. The correspo nding sides of two similar trian gles BC, E on side AC and F on side AB. The length of the
are in the ratio 2 to 3. If the area of the smaller side of the square is :
triangle is 12, the area of the larger is :
(A) 24 (B) 27 (A) 3 – 3 (B) 3 – 2
(C) 18 (D) 8 (C) 2 (D) 1.5
37. In the diagram ABC is right angled at C. Also M, N 43. Three squares have the dimensions indicated in the
and P are the mid points of sides BC, AC and AB, diagram. The area of the quadrilateral ABCD, is :
respectively. If the area of APN is 2 sq. cm, then 5
the area of ABC, in sq. cm is : 2 3
C
B
A D
21 15
(A) (B)
4 4
(A) 8 (B) 12 42
(C) 16 (D) 4 (C) (D) data not sufficient
4
PAGE # 139
139
44. ABCD is a parallelogram, M is the midpoint of DC. 51. In a right angle triangle, if the square of hypotenuse
If AP = 65 and PM = 30 then the largest possible integral is equal to twice the product of the other two sides,
value of AB is : then one of the acute angle of the triangle is :
A B
(A) 30º (B) 45º
(C) 60º (D) 75º
P 52. Consider ABC, the medians AD & CF intersect at
D C right angles at G. If BC = 3cm and AB = 4 cm, then
M
(A) 124 (B) 120 the length of AC is (in cm) :
(C) 119 (D) 118
45. ABCD is a parallelogram, P is a point on AB such that
AP : PB = 3 : 2. Q is a po int o n C D su ch th at
CQ : QD = 7 : 3. If PQ meets AC at R, then AR : AC is :
(A) 5 : 11 (B) 6 : 13
(C) 4 : 7 (D) 2 : 5
(A) 12 (B) 3.5

46. Let XOY be a right angled triangle with XOY = 90º.
Let M and N be the midpoints of legs OX and OY, re- (C) 5 (D) 7
spectively. Given that XN = 19 and YM = 22, the length
XY is equal to 53. The sides of an equilateral triangle ABC are 12 cm
(A) 24 (B) 26 each. D is the foot of the perpendicular from A to BC
(C) 28 (D) 34 and E is the mid-point of AD. BE is.
47. If CD = 15, DB = 9, AD bisects A, ABC = 90º, then
(A) 4 3 cm (B) 6 2 cm
AB has length :
(C) 63 cm (D) None of these

54. In parallelogram ABCD, the length AB and CD are both
4, the length of diagonal AC = 4, and the length of
diagonal BD = 6. The length AD equal to :
(A) 10 (B) 12
(C) 15 (D) 20
(A) 32 (B) 18
(C) 7 (D) 24
48. The height of an equilateral triangle of side ‘a’ is 55. Right triangle ABC with A = 90° has M as the midpoint
given by : AB
of BC. If = 2 then equals :
a 2 a 3 AC
(A) (B)
2 2
a 3 a 2
(C) (D)
4 3
49. In a right triangle with sides a and b, and hypotenuse c,
the altitude drawn on the hypotenuse is x. Then which
one of the following is correct ? 1
(A) (B) 3
2
1 1 1 2
(A) ab = x (B)
a b x
3
1 1 1 (C) 1 (D)
2 2
(C) a + b = 2x 2
(D) 3
x2 a2 b2 56. In an obtuse triangle ABC which one of the following
50. In the right triangle shown the sum of the distances pairs of points w.r.t. the triangle ABC must lie outside
BM and MA is equal to the distances BC and CA. the triangle ?
If MB = x, CB = h and CA = d, then x equals. (A) Centroid and orthocentre
M
(B) Incentre and circumcentre
B (C) Orthocentre and circumcentre
(D) Centroid and circumcentre
C A 57. W hich single pair of descriptors of a triangle is not

hd po ssib le ?
(A) (B) d – h (A) isosceles and equilateral
2h d
(B) acute and scalene
(C) h + d – 2d (D) h2 d2 h (C) right and isosceles
(D) obtuse and equilateral
PAGE # 140
140
58. From a point within a triangle, segments are drawn to
the vertices. A necessary and sufficient condition that
the three triangles formed have equal areas, is that
the point be :
(A) such that the three angles formed each have a 1. In a given figure in trapezium ABCD if AB || CD then
measure of 120º value of x is : [Raj. NTSE Stage-1 2013]
(B) the centre of the inscribed circle
A B
(C) the centre of the circumscribed circle
(D) the intersection of the medians 2 x–2
O
59. In an isosceles triangle ABC (AB = AC) the altitude to 5
2x+5
the base and to a lateral side are equal to 10 cm and
D C
12 cm respectively. The length of the base is :
(A) 12.5 (B) 15 29 8
(C) 16 (D) 18 (A) (B)
8 29
60. Line 2 intersects 1 and line 3 is parallel to 1 . The 1
three lines are distinct and lie in a plane. The number (C) 20 (D)
20
of points equidistant from all the three lines is : 2. In a given figure PQ || ST, PQR = 110°, RST = 130°
(A) 0 (B) 1 then value of QRS is [Raj. NTSE Stage-1 2013]
(C) 2 (D) 4 S T
61. If all possible diagonals from a vertex of an n P 130°
Q
sided po lyg on are drawn , th en th e nu mber of
110°
triangles formed will be :
R
(A) n 1 (B) n 2 (A) 20° (B) 50°
(C) n 3 (D) n 4 (C) 60° (D) 70°
area ABC 16
3. ABC ~ PQR and = . If PQ = 18 cm
area PQR 9
62. In the figure, z = and BC = 12 cm, then AB and QR are respectively :
(A) 9 cm, 24 cm (B) 24 cm, 9 cm
(C) 32 cm, 675 cm (D) 135 cm, 16 cm
2xy
(A) (B) xy 4. E and F are respectively, the mid points of the sides AB
x y
and AC of ABC and the area of the quadrilateral BEFC
is k times the area of ABC. The value of k is :
x y [Delhi NTSE Stage-1 2013]
(C) x2 y2 (D)
2
1
63. In the given figure, BEDC is a parallelogram. If the (A) (B) 3
2
ar ea o f A D C = 8 , ar ea o f B D C = 3 an d
3
DAB = 90°, then the area of AEB is : (C) (D) 4
4
1 1
5. In the figure AD = DB, BE = EC and CF = AF. If the
2 3
area of ABC = 120 cm2, the area (in cm2) of DEF is :
A
(A) 5 (B) 1
(C) 2 (D) 8 D F
64. In triangle ABC, CA = CB. On CB a square BCDE is
B C
constructed away from the triangle. If x is the number E
of degrees in angle DAB, then (A) 21 (B) 35
(A) x depends upon the angles of the triangle ABC. (C) 40 (D) 45
(B) x is independent of the angles of the triangle ABC. 6. In ABC, A = 100º, B = 50º , AH BC,BM is a median
(C) x may equal angle CAD and MH is joined. Then MHC =
(D) x is greater than 45º but less than 90º [Harayana NTSE Stage-1 2013]
(A) 15º (B) 30º
(C) 45º (D) 60º
PAGE # 141
141
7. In ABC and DEF, AC =BC=DF=EF, length AB=2FH, 12. In the figure, ABC is a triangle in which AD bisects A,
where FH DE. W hich of the following statements is AC = BC, B = 72° and CD = 1 cm, Length of BD
(are) true ? (in cm) is (NTSE Stage-2 /2015)
I. ACB and DFE are complementary C
II. ACB and DFE are supplementary
III. Area of ABC = Area of DEF
IV. Area of ABC = 1.5x (Area of DEF)
(A) II only (B) III only
D
(C) I and III only (D) II and III only
8. The ratio of the areas of two similar triangles is equal
to : [M.P. NTSE Stage-1 2013]
(A) The ratio of corresponding medians A B
(B) The ratio of corresponding sides 1
(C) The ratio of the squares of corresponding sides (A) 1 (B)
2
(D) None of these
9. In the figure, ABC is similar to EDC. If we have 5 1 3 1
(C) (D)
AB = 4cm, ED = 3 cm, CE = 4.2 cm and CD = 4.8 cm, 2 2
then the values of CA and CB respectively are : 13. In the given figure ABCD is a trapezium in which AB||DC
[M.P. NTSE Stage-1 2013] and AB : DC = 3 : 2, The ratio of the areas of AOB and
COD is [Rajasthan NTSE Stage-1 2016]
(A) 3 : 2 (B) 2 : 3
(C) 4 : 9 (D) 9 : 4
14. In the figure given below, equilateral triangle

EDC surmounts square ABCD. Find the angle DEB
(A) 6 cm, 6.6 cm (B) 4.8 cm, 6.6 cm represented by x [Delhi NTSE Stage-1 2016]
(C) 5.4 cm, 6.4 cm (D) 5.6 cm, 6.4 cm
10. In the figure, DB is diagonal of rectangle ABCD and
line l through A and line m through C divide DB in three
equal parts each of length 1 cm and are perpendicular
to DB. Area (in cm2) of rectangle ABCD is :
(A) 60° (B) 15°
(C) 30° (D) 45°
15. In the following figure ACB = 90° and CD AB.
If AD = 4 cm and BD = 9 cm then the ratio BC : AC is

(A) 2 2 (B) 2 3 [Rajasthan NTSE Stage-1 2017]
(C) 3 2 (D) 3 3 C
11. In the quadrilateral ABCD :
A
12
8 z A B
D
y (A) 3 : 2 (B) 2 : 3
w
D B
a 18 (C) 16 : 81 (D) 81 : 16
12 27 16. If in a right angled triangle the hypotenuse is to be 1

x cm longer than the base and 2 cm longer than the
altitude, then the perimeter of the triangle is
C
(A) x = y, a = z (B) x = z, a = y
(C) x = z, a =y (D) x = y, a = w (A) 24 cm (B) 20 cm
(C) 12 cm (D) 10 cm
PAGE # 142
142
QUADRILATERAL (ii) Rectangle : A rectangle is a parallelogram, in which

each of its angle is a right angle. If ABCD is a rectangle
A quadrilateral is a four sided closed figure. then A = B = C = D = 90°, AB = CD, BC = AD and
D
diagonals AC = BD.
D C
A C 0
90
A B
(iii) Rhombus : A rhombus is a parallelogram in which
all its sides are equal in length. If ABCD is a rhombus
B then, AB = BC = CD = DA.
Let A, B, C and D be four points in a plane such that :
(i) No three of them are collinear.
(ii) The line segments AB, BC, CD and DA do not
intersect except at their end points, then figure
obtained by joining A, B, C & D is called a quadrilateral.
The diagonals of a rhombus are perpendicular to each
other.
(i) A quadrilateral in which the measure of each interior (iv) Square : A square is a parallelogram having all
an gle is less th an 1 80 ° is c alled a convex sides equal and each angle equal to right angle. If ABCD
is a square then AB = BC = CD = DA, diagonal AC = BD
quadrilateral. In figure, PQRS is convex quadrilateral.
and A = B = C = D = 90°.
R
P Q
(ii) A quadrilateral in which the measure of one of the

The diagonals of a square are perpendicular to each
interior angles is more than 180° is called a concave other.
quadrilateral. In figure, ABCD is concave quadrilateral.
B
(v) Trapezium : A trapezium is a quadrilateral with only
D one pair of opposite sides parallel. In figure, ABCD is
C a trapezium with AB || DC.
D C
A
A B
(i) Parallelogram : A parallelogram is a quadrilateral
in which both pairs of opposite sides are parallel. In (vi) Kite : A kite is a quadrilateral in which two pairs of
figure, AB || DC, AD || BC th erefore, ABC D is a adjacent sides are equal. If ABCD is a kite then AB = AD
and BC = CD. C
parallelogram.
D C
B D
A B
A
Properties : (vii) Isosceles trapezium : A trapezium is said to be an
(a) A diagonal of a parallelogram divides it into two isosceles trapezium, if its non-parallel sides are equal.
congruent triangles. Thus a quadrilateral ABCD is an isosceles trapezium,
if AB || DC and AD = BC.
(b) In a parallelogram, opposite sides are equal.
(c) The opposite angles of a parallelogram are equal.
(d) The diagonals of a parallelogram bisect each other.
In isosceles trapezium A= B and C= D.
PAGE # 143
143
PROPERTIES Ex.2. In the figure below, P and Q are the mid-points of the
Theorem 1 : Th e su m of the fou r an gles o f a sides AB and BC of the rectangle ABCD

quadrilateral is 360°. D C
Theorem 2 : A diagonal of a parallelogram divides it Q

into two congruent triangles.
Theorem 3 : In a parallelogram, opposite sides are A P B
equal. If the area of the triangle APQ is 1 square centimeter,
Theorem 4 : The opposite angles of a parallelogram what is the area of the whole rectangle ?
are equal.
Sol.
Theorem 5 : The diagonals of a parallelogram bisect D C
each other.
Q
Theorem 6 : Each of the four angles of a rectangle is a
right angle. A P B
Theorem 7 : Each of the four sides of a rhombus is of

In QAB, QP is median
the same length.
So, ar QAB = 2 area APQ
Theorem 8 : Each of the angles of a square is a right
angle and each of the four sides is of the same length. = 2 × 1 = 2 cm2
Theorem 9 : The diagonals of a rectangle are of equal In ABC, AQ is median
length.
Area ABC = 2 area ABQ
Theorem 10 : The diagonals of a rhombus are per-
= 2 × 2 = 4 cm2
pendicular to each other.
Theorem 11 : The diagonals of a square are equal Area of rectangle ABCD = 2 ar. ABC
and perpendicular to each other. = 2 × 4 = 8 cm2.
Theorem 12 : Parallelogram and Triangles on the
same base (or equal bases) and between the same Ex.3 In the adjoining figure, ABCD is a parallelogram and
parallels, then area of parallelogram is twice the area
the bisector of A bisect BC at X. Prove that AD = 2AB.
of triangle.
A quadrilateral become a parallelogram when :
(i) Opposite angles are equal. D C
(ii) Both the pair of opposite sides are equal
(iii) A pair of opposite side is equal as well as parallel X
(iv) Diagonals of quadrilateral bisect each other. 2
1
REMARK : A B
(i) Sq uare, rectang le and rh om bu s are all
parallelograms.
(ii) Kite and trapezium are not parallelograms. Sol. ABCD is a parallelogram.
(iii) A square is a rectangle. AD || BC and AX cuts them.
(iv) A square is a rhombus.
1
(v) A parallelogram is a trapezium. BXA = DAX = A [Alternate interior angles]
2
Ex.1 In the parallelogram, Find the value of “x”. 1
2 = A.
2
80º 1
Also, 1 = A
2
xº 150º
2 = 1
Sol. A= C = 80º (Opposite angle of a parallelogram) AB = BX
FEB = x + A
(Exterior ang le o f a triang le is eq ual to interio r 1
AB = BC
opposite angle) 2
D C
150° = x + 80 80 1
AB = AD
x = 70° F 2
x 150
A
AD = 2 AB.
E B
PAGE # 144
144
1
In ADC, SR || AC and SR = AC ... (ii)
2
In a triangle, the line segment joining the mid-points [By mid-point theorem]
of any two sides is parallel to the third side and is
half of it. PQ = SR and PQ || SR [From (i) and (ii)]
i.e., In a triangle ABC in which P is the mid-point of side PQRS is a parallelogram.
AB and Q is the mid-point of side AC.
Now, PQRS will be a rectangle if any angle of the
A
parallelogram PQRS is 90º.
P Q
PQ || AC [By mid-point theorem]
QR || BD [By mid-point theorem]
B C But, AC BD
then, PQ is parallel to BC and is half of it i.e., PQ || BC [Diagonals of a rhombus are perpendicular to each other]
1
and PQ = BC. PQ QR
2
: [Angle between two lines = angle between their parallels]
The line drawn through the mid-point of one side of a PQRS is a rectangle. Hence Proved.
triangle parallel to the another side; bisects the third
side. Ex.5 In the given figure, E and F are respectively, the
i.e., A triangle ABC in which P is the mid-point of side
mid-points of non-parallel sides of a trapezium ABCD.
AB and PQ is parallel to BC.
A Prove that :
1
Q (i) EF || AB (ii) EF = (AB + DC).
P 2
B C
then, PQ bisects the third side AC i.e., AQ = QC.
REMARK :
In quadrilateral ABCD, if side AD is parallel to side BC; Sol. Join BE and produce it to intersect CD produced at
ABCD is a trapezium. point P. In AEB and DEP, AB || PC and BP is
transversal.
ABE = DPE [Alternate interior angles]
AEB = DEP [Vertically opposite angles]
And AE = DE [E is mid-point of AD]
Now, P and Q are the mid-points of the non-parallel So, AEB DEP [By ASA congruency]
1 BE = PE [By CPCT]
sides of the trapezium; then PQ = (AD + BC).
2
i.e. T he len gth of th e line seg men t jo in in g th e And AB = DP [By CPCT]
mid-points of the two non-parallel sides of a trapezium Since, the line joining the mid-points of any two sides
is always equal to half of the sum of the lengths of its
of a triangle is parallel and half of the third side,
two parallel sides.
Therefore, in BPC,
Ex.4 ABCD is a rhombus and P, Q, R and S are the
mid-points of the sides AB, BC, CD and DA respectively. E is mid-point of BP [As, BE = PE]
Prove that the quadrilateral PQRS is a rectangle. and F is mid-point of BC [Given]
Sol.
1
EF || PC and EF = PC
2
1
EF || DC and EF = (PD + DC)
2
1
EF || AB and EF = (AB + DC)
1 2
In ABC, PQ || AC and PQ = AC ... (i) [As, DC || AB and PD = AB]
2
[By mid-point theorem] Hence Proved.
PAGE # 145
145
Ex.6 AD and BE are medians of ABC and BE || DF. Prove then, ar(||gm ABCD) = ar(||gm ABEF)
1
that CF = AC. Theorem : The area of parallelogram is the product
4
A of its base and the corresponding altitude.
i.e., In a ||gm ABCD in which AB is the base and AL is the
E corresponding height.
Sol. F
B D C
In BEC, DF is a line through the mid - point D of BC
and parallel to BE intersecting CE at F. Therefore, F is
the midpoint of CE. Because the line drawn through then, area (||gm ABCD) = AB × AL.
the mid point of one side of a triangle and parallel to Ex.7 ABCD is a trapezium with AB || DC. A line parallel to AC
another sides bisects the third side. intersects AB at X an d BC at Y. P ro ve that
Now, F is the mid point of CE ar( ADX) = ar( ACY).
1 Sol. D C
CF = CE
2
1 1 Y
CF = ( AC)
2 2
1
CF = AC.
4
A X B
Join CX, DX and AY.

Clearly, triangles ADX and ACX are on the same base
AX and between the parallels AB and DC.
(i) Base : Any side of a parallelogram can be called its ar ( ADX) = ar ( ACX) ... (i)
base. Also, ACX and ACY are on the same base AC and
between the parallels AC and XY.
(ii) Altitude : The length of the line segment which is
ar ( ACX) = ar ( ACY) ...(ii)
perpendicular to the base from the opposite side is
From (i) and (ii), we get
called the altitude or height of the parallelogram
ar ( ADX) = ar ( ACY).
corresponding to the given base.
D C
M Theorem : Two triangles on the same base (or equal

bases) and between the same parallels are equal in
area.
i.e., If two triangles ABC and PBC are on the same base
A L B
BC and between the same parallel lines BC and AP.
(i) DL is the altitude of ||gm ABCD, corresponding to the
then, ar( ABC) = ar( PBC).
base AB.
(ii) DM is the altitude of ||gm ABCD, corresponding to the
base BC.
Theorem : A diagonal of a parallelogram divides it

into two triangles of equal area.
Theorem : Parallelograms on the same base and Theorem : The area of a trapezium is half the product
of its height and the sum of the parallel sides.
between the same parallels are equal in area.
i.e., In a trapezium ABCD in which AB || DC, AL DC,
i.e., If two ||gms ABCD and ABEF are on the same base
AB and between the same parallels AB and FC. CN AB and AL = CN = h (say), AB = a, DC = b.
b
L D C
h h
A N B
a
PAGE # 146
146
1
then, ar(trapezium ABCD) = h × (a + b).
2
Theorem : Median of a triangle divides it into two
triangles of equal area.
i.e., In a ABC in which AD is the median. 1. One side of a parallelogram has length 3, and another
A
side has length 4. Let a and b denote the lengths of the
diagonals of the parallelogram. W hich of the following
qu an tities c an b e determ in ed fro m th e given
information?
Ia+b II a2 + b2 III a3 + b3
B D C
(A) Only I (B) Only II
1 (C) Only III (D) Only I and II
then, ar ( ABD) = ar( ADC) = ar( ABC)
2
2. A figure is an equiangular parallelogram if and only if it
Ex.8 ABC is a triangle in which D is the mid-point of BC and is a :
E is the mid-point of AD. Prove that the area of BED (A) rectangle (B) rhombus
1 (C) square (D) trapezium
= area of ABC.
4 3. Th e con sec utive angles of a trapezium form an
Sol. Given : A ABC in which D is the mid-point of BC and arithmetic sequence. If the smallest angle is 75º, then
E is the mid-point of AD. the largest angle is :
(A) 100º (B) 105º
1
To prove : ar( BED) = ar( ABC). (C) 110º (D) 115º
4
4. A rhombus is inscribed in triangle ABC in such a way
that one of its vertices is A and two its sides lie along
AB and AC, where AC = 6, AB = 12 and BC = 8, the side
of the rhombus, is :
(A) 2 (B) 3
(C) 4 (D) 5
Proof : AD is a median of ABC. 5. The greatest angle of a quadrilateral is double the
1 least . If the angle are in arithmetic series [a , a + d
ar ( ABD) = ar( ADC) = ar ( ABC) ... (i)
2 , a + 2 d , a + 3 d ] , the other two angles are :
[ Median of a triangle divides it into two triangles of
equal area] 2 5 6
(A) , (B) ,
Again, 3 3 9 9
BE is a median of ABD.
4 5 3
1 (C) , (D) ,
ar ( BEA) = ar( BED) = ar ( ABD) 9 9 4 4
2
[ Median of a triangle divides it into two triangles of 6. W hich of the following statements is true?
equal area] (A) All the angles of a parallelogram can be acute
1 (B) If the diagonals of a quadrilateral are at right angles,
And ar( BED) = ar( ABD)
2 it is a rhombus
1 1 (C) If the diagonals of a quadrilateral are at right angles,
= × ar ( ABC) [From (i)]
2 2 the figure formed by joining the mid-points of adjacent
1 sides is a rectangle.
ar ( BED) = ar( ABC). Hence Proved. (D) If one pair of opposite sides is parallel and the
4
other pair of opposite sides is equal in a quadrilateral,
then the quadrilateral is a parallelogram.
7. In the trapezium shown, AB II DC, and E and F are the

midpoints of the two diagonals. If DC = 60 and EF = 5
then the length of AB is equal to :
(A) 40 (B) 45
(C) 50 (D) 55
PAGE # 147
147
8. Suppose the triangle ABC has an obtuse angle at C 14. In the figure PQRS is a recangle, which one is true?
and let D be the midpoint of side AC. Suppose E is
on BC such that the segment DE is parallel to AB.
Consider the following three statements.
(i) E is the midpoint of BC
(ii) The length of DE is half the length of AB
(iii) DE bisects the altitude from C to AB
(A) only (i) is true (A) area of APS = area of QRB
(B) only (i) and (ii) are true (B) PA = RB
(C) only (i) and (iii) are true
(C ) area of PQS = area of QRS
(D) all three are true.
(D ) all of these
9. The line joining the mid points of the diagonals of a 15. In the given figure, the area of trapezium PQFE is half
trapezium has length 3. If the longer base is 97, then of the area of trapezium EFRS. If SR||EF||PQ, SR
the shorter base is : and PQ is 7 cm and 10 cm respectively, then EF = ?
(A) 94 (B) 92
(C) 91 (D) 90
10. Through a point on the hypotenuse of a right triangle,

lines are drawn parallel to the legs of the triangle so
that the triangle is divided into a square and two smaller
right triangles. The area of one of the two small right (A) 9 cm (B) 83 cm
triangles is m times the area of the square. The ratio of
the area of the other small right triangle to the area of (C) 4 6 cm (D) 87 cm
the square is : 16. The sides of rectangle are all produced in order, in
such a way that the length of each side is increased by
1 1 ‘k’ times itself. The area of the new quadrilateral formed
(A) (B)
4m 2m 1
1
becomes 2 times the area of the original rectangle.
1 2
(C) m (D) Find the value of ‘k’.
8m2
11. Given that the lines and m are parallel. W hich of 1 5
(A) (B)
the three triangles has the greatest area ? 2 2
3
(C) (D) None of these
2
(A) ABC (B) ABC 1. PQRS is a parallelogram and M, N are the mid-points
(C) AEC of PQ and RS respectively. W hich of the following is not
(D) All triangles have the same area
true ? [M.P. NTSE Stage-1 2013]
12
12. ABCD (in order) is a rectangle with AB = CD =
5 P S
and BC = DA = 5. Point P is taken on AD such that
BPC = 90º. The value of (BP PC) is equal to :
(A) 5 (B) 6 N
(C) 7 (D) 8 M
13. In the diagram, ABCD is a rectangle and point E lies on

AB. Triangle DEC has DEC = 90º, DE = 3 and EC = 4. Q R
The length of AD is :
A E B
(A) RM trisects QS
(B) PN trisects QS
D C (C) PSN RQM

(A) 2.4 (B) 2.8
(D) MS is not parallel to QN
(C) 1.8 (D) 3.2
PAGE # 148
148
2. In the figure, the area of square ABCD is 4 cm2 and E 8. In the figure, ABCD is a parallelogram and PBQR is a
any point on AB. F, G, H and K are the mid point of DE, rectangle. R Q
CF, DG, and CH respectively. The area of KDC is - D C
A P B
If AP : PB = 1 : 2 = PD : DR, what is the ratio of the area
of ABCD to the area of PBQR ?
(NTSE-Stage-I/Kerala/2008)
(A) 1 : 2 (B) 2 : 1
1 1 2 (C) 1 : 1 (D) 2 : 3
(A) cm2 (B) cm
4 8 9. To construct rhombus uniquely it is necessary to know
atleast ____of its parts.
1 1 (NTSE-Stage-I/Tamilnadu/2008)
(C) cm2 (D) cm2 (A) 1 (B) 2
16 32
(C) 3 (D) 5
3. Angle at A in trapezium ABCD if AB = 18 cm, BC = 10
cm, CD = 12 cm, DA = 8cm, AB||CD, will be : 10. ABCD is a parallelogram. DEC is drawn such that BE
(A) 80° (B) 45° 1
= AE. Sum of the areas of ADE and BEC is :
(C) 90° (D) None of these 3
(NTSE Stage -I/Rajasthan/2009)
4. If the sum of all angles except one of a convex polygon D C
is 2180º, then the number of sides of the polygon is :
(NTSE Stage-II/2009)
(A) 19 (B) 17
(C) 15 (D) 13
A F E B
5. ABCD is a trapezium in which AB || CD. If ADC = 1
2 ABC, AD = a cm and CD = b cm, then the length (in (A) area of parallelogram ABCD
3
cm) of AB is : (NTSE Stage-II/2009) 1
(B) area of parallelogram ABCD
2
a 2 1
(A) + 2b (B) a + b (C) area of DEC (D) area of DEC
2 3 2
5x º
2 2 11. A quadrilateral ABCD has four angles xº, 2xº, and
(C) a+b (D) a + b 2
3 3 7 xº
respectively. W hat is the difference between the
2
value of biggest and the smallest angles.
6. E is the midpoint of diagonal BD of a parallelogram (NTSE Stage -I/Raj./2012)
ABCD. If the point E is joined to a point F on DA such (A) 40º (B) 100º
(C) 80º (D) 20º
1
that DF = DA, then the ratio of the area of DEF to the 12. ‘O’ is any point inside the rectangle PQRS, then
3
area of quadrilateral ABEF is : (NTSE Stage-II/2010) (A) OP2 + OR2 = OQ2 + OS2
(A) 1 : 3 (B) 1: 4 (B) OP2 + OQ2 = OR2 + OS2
(C) 1 : 5 (D) 2 : 5 (C) OP2 + OS2 = OQ2 + QR2
7. AB CD is a qu ad rilateral wh ose diag on als (D) None of the above
intersect eac h othe at th e po in t O su ch that
13. If the following figure of triangle ABC, E is the midpoint
OA = OB = OD. If OAB = 30º, then the measure of
ODA is : (NTSE Stage-II/2011) of median AD. The ratio of areas of the triangles ABC
and BED is [Raj. NTSE Stage-1 2017]
(A) 30º (B) 45º
(C) 60º (D) 90º A
B D C
(A) 1 : 4 (B) 3 : 4
(C) 4 : 1 (D) 4 : 3
PAGE # 149
149
The length of the complete circle

is called its circumference.
The collection of all the points in a plane,
which are at a fixed distance from a fixed point in the The region between a chord and either
plane, is called a circle. of its arcs is called a segment of the circular region or
The fixed point is called the centre of the circle and the simply a segment of the circle. There are two types of
fixed distance is called the radius of the circle. segments which are the major segment and the minor
segment (as in figure).
O
Major segment
P
P Minor segment Q
In figure, O is the centre and the length OP is the radius
of the circle. So the line segment joining the centre
and any point on the circle is called a radius of the The region between an arc and the two radii,
circle.
joining the centre to the end points of an arc is called a
If we take two points P and Q on a circle, then sector. Minor arc corresponds to the minor sector and
the line segment PQ is called a chord of the circle. the major arc corresponds to the major sector. W hen
two arcs are equal, then both segments and both
sectors become the same and each is known as a
O semicircular region.
P Q
Major sector Semicircular
O region
The chord which passes through the O
centre of the circle, is called the diameter of the circle. P Q
Minor Semicircular
sector region
P Q
B
O Theorem : Equal chords of a circle subtend equal
angles at the centre.
A Given : AB and CD are the two equal chords of a circle
with centre O.
To Prove : AOB = COD.
A diameter is the longest chord and all diameters of
same circle have the same length, which is equal to
two times the radius. In figure, AOB is a diameter of
circle. A O D
A piece of a circle between two points is called `
an arc. The longer one is called the major arc PQ and
B C
the shorter one is called the minor arc PQ. The minor
Proof : In AOB and COD,
arc PQ is also denoted by PQ and the major arc PQ by
OA = OC [Radii of a circle]
QP . W hen P and Q are ends of a diameter, then both OB = OD [Radii of a circle]
arcs are equal and each is called a semi circle. AB = CD [Given]
R AOB COD [By SSS congruency]
AOB = COD. [By CPCT] Hence Proved.
Major arc PQ
Converse :
If the angles subtended by the chords of a circle at the
P Minor arc PQ Q centre are equal, then the chords are equal.
P Q
PAGE # 150
150
Theorem : The perpendicular from the centre of a Ex.1The radius of a circle is 13 cm and the length of one of
circle to a chord bisects the chord. its chords is 10 cm. Find the distance of the chord from
the centre.
Sol. Let O be the center of the circle of radius 13 cm and AB
O
is the chord of length 10 cm
OC AB
A M B
Given : A circle with centre O. AB is a chord of this circle. AB 10
AC = = =5
2 2
OM AB.
To Prove : MA = MB. [Line perpendicular from centre to chord bisect the
Construction : Join OA and OB. chord]
Proof : In right triangles OMA and OMB, In AOC
OA = OB [Radii of a circle] (OC)2 + (AC)2 = (AO)2
OM = OM [Common] (OC)2 = (13)2 – (5)2
OMA = OMB [90º each]
OC = 12 cm.
OMA OMB [By RHS]
MA = MB [By cpctc] Ex.2 In figure, and O is the centre of the circle.
Hence Proved.
Prove that OA is the perpendicular bisector of BC.
Converse :
The line drawn through the centre of a circle to bisect
a chord is perpendicular to the chord.
Theorem : There is one and only one circle passing
through three given non-collinear points.
Proof : Take three points A, B and C, which are not in
the same line, or in other words, they are not collinear
[as in figure ]. Draw perpendicular bisectors of AB and
BC say, PQ and R S resp ec tively. Let th ese Sol. Given : In figure, and O is the centre of the
perpendicular bisectors intersect at one point O.(Note circle.
that PQ and RS will intersect because they are not To Prove : OA is the perpendicular bisector of BC.
parallel) [as in figure]. Construction : Join OB and OC.
C
P Proof :
R O [Given]
S
A chord AB = chord AC.
[ If two arcs of a circle are congruent, then their
corresponding chords are equal]
Q B AOB = AOC ...(i)
O lies on the perpendicular bisector PQ of AB. [ Equal chords of a circle subtend equal angles at
OA = OB the centre]
[ Every point on the perpendicular bisector of a line
In OBD and OCD,
segment is equidistant from its end points]
DOB = DOC [From (i)]
Similarly,
OB = OC [Radii of the same circle]
O lies on the perpendicular bisector RS of BC.
OB = OC OD = OD [Common]
[ Every point on the perpendicular bisector of a line OBD OCD [By SAS congruency]
segment is equidistant from its end points] ODB = ODC ...(ii) [By CPCT]
So, OA = OB = OC And, BD = CD ...(iii) [By CPCT]
i.e., the points A, B and C are at equal distances from But BDC = 180º
the point O. ODB + ODC = 180º
So, if we draw a circle with centre O and radius OA it ODB + ODB = 180º [From equation(ii)]
will also pass through B and C. This shows that there
2 ODB = 180º
is a circle passing through the three points A, B and C.
W e know that two lines (perpendicular bisectors) can ODB = 90º
intersect at only one point, so we can draw only one ODB = ODC = 90º ...(iv) [From (ii)]
circle with radius OA. In other words, there is a unique So, by (iii) and (iv), OA is the perpendicular bisector of
circle passing through A, B and C. Hence Proved. BC. Hence Proved.
PAGE # 151
151
Theorem : Equal chords of a circle (or of congruent REMARK :
circles) are equidistant from the centre (or centres). Angle Subtended by an Arc of a Circle :
C In figure, the angle subtended by the minor arc PQ at O
A is POQ and the angle subtended by the major arc PQ
O
N at O is reflex angle POQ.
M
B D
O
Given : A circle have two equal chords AB & CD. i.e.
AB = CD and OM AB, ON CD.
To Prove : OM = ON P Q
Construction : Join OB & OD
Proof : AB = CD (Given)
Theorem : The angle subtended by an arc at the
[ The perpendicular drawn from the centre of a circle
to a chord bisects the chord] centre is double the angle subtended by it at any
1 1 point on the remaining part of the circle.
AB = CD Given : An arc PQ of a circle subtending angles POQ at
2 2
BM = DN the centre O and PAQ at a point A on the remaining part
In OMB & OND of the circle.
OMB = OND = 90º [Given] To Prove : POQ = 2 PAQ.
OB = OD [Radii of same circle] Construction : Join AO and extend it to a point B.
BM = DN [Proved above]
OMB OND [By R.H.S. congruency]
OM = ON [By CPCT]
Hence Proved.
REMARK :
Chords equidistant from the centre of a circle are
equal in length.
Ex.3 AB and CD are equal chords of a circle whose centre (A) (B) (C)
is O. W hen produced, these chords meet at E. Prove
that EB = ED. Proof : There arises three cases:-
Sol. Given : AB and CD are equal chords of a circle whose (A) arc PQ is minor
centre is O. W hen produced, these chords meet at E. (B) arc PQ is a semi-circle
To Prove : EB = ED.
(C) arc PQ is major.
Construction : From O draw OP AB and OQ CD.
Join OE. In all the cases,
Proof : AB = CD [ Given] BOQ = OAQ + AQO ...(i)
OP = OQ [ An exterior angle of a triangle is equal to the sum of
[ Equal chords of a circle are equidistant from the the two interior opposite angles]
centre] A In OAQ,
P
B OA = OQ [Radii of a circle]
O E OQA = OAQ ...(ii)
D [Angles opposite equal sides of a triangle are equal]
Q From (i) and (ii)
C
BOQ = 2 OAQ ...(iii)
Now in OPE and OQE,
OPE = OQE [Each 90º] Similarly,
OE = OE [ Common] BOP = 2 OAP ...(iv)
OP = OQ [ Proved above] Adding (iii) and (iv), we get
OPE OQE [By RHS congruency] BOP + BOQ = 2( OAP + OAQ)
PE QE [By CPCT] POQ = 2 PAQ. ...(v)
1 1
PE – AB = QE – CD [ AB = CD (Given)]
2 2 NOTE :
PE – PB = QE – QD For the case (C), where PQ is the major arc, (v) is
EB = ED. Hence Proved. replaced by reflex angles.
Thus, reflex POQ = 2 PAQ.
PAGE # 152
152
Theorem : Angles in the same segment of a circle Ex.5. In the given figure, the chord ED is parallel to the
are equal. diameter AC. Find CED.
Proof : Let P and Q be any two points on a circle to form B
a chord PQ, A and C any other points on the remaining
part of the circle and O be the centre of the circle. Then, 50º
P O
A C
1 2
3
E D
Sol. CBE = 1 [Angles in the same segment]

1 = 50º …(i) [ CBE = 50º]
POQ = 2 PAQ ...(i)
AEC = 90º ..(ii)
And POQ = 2 PCQ ...(ii)
[Angle in a semicircle is a right angle]
[Angle subtended at the centre is double than the angle
subtended by it on the remaining part of the circle]
From equation (i) & (ii)
2 PAQ = 2 PCQ
PAQ = PCQ. Hence Proved.
Theorem : Angle in the semicircle is a right angle.
Now, in AEC,
1+ AEC + 2 = 180º
Proof : PAQ is an angle in the segment, which is a 50º + 90º + 2 = 180º
semicircle.
2 = 180º – 140º = 40º
1 1 Thus 2 = 40º ...(iii)
PAQ = POQ = × 180º = 90º
2 2
Also, ED || AC [Given]
[ POQ is straight line angle or POQ = 180º]
2= 3 [Alternate angles]
If we take any other point C on the semicircle, then
3 = 40º
again we get
Hence, CED = 40º.
1 1
PCQ = POQ = × 180º = 90º.
2 2
Hence Proved.
Ex.4. A chord of a circle is equal to the radius of the circle,
find the angle subtended by the chord at a point on the A quadrilateral ABCD is called cyclic if all the four
minor arc and also at a point on the major arc. vertices of it lie on a circle.
Sol.
C
A B
D
Let AB be a chord of the circle with centre at O such that Theorem : The sum of either pair of opposite angles
OA = OB = AB. of a cyclic quadrilateral is 180º.
OAB is equilateral. Given : A cyclic quadrilateral ABCD.
AOB = 60º
D
1 C
ACB = AOB = 30º
2
Consider arc ACB.
Clearly, it makes 360º – 60º = 300º at the centre O. A
PAGE # 153
153
To Prove : A + C = B + D = 180º. Ex.8 If the nonparallel side of a trapezium are equal, prove
Construction : Join AC and BD. that it is cyclic.
Proof : ACB = ADB ...(i) Sol. Given : ABCD is a trapezium whose two non-parallel
And BAC = BDC ...(ii) sides AD and BC are equal.
[Angles of same segment of a circle are equal] To Prove : Trapezium ABCD is a cyclic.
Adding equation (i) & (ii) Construction : Draw BE || AD.
ACB + BAC = ADB + BDC
ACB + BAC = ADC.
Adding ABC to both sides, we get
ACB + BAC + ABC = ADC + ABC.
Proof : AB || DE [Given]
ADC + ABC = 180º
and AD || BE [By construction]
i.e., D + B = 180º Quadrilateral ABED is a parallelogram.
A + C = 360 º – ( B + D) = 1 80 º BAD = BED ...(i) [Opp. angles of a ||gm ]
[ A B C D 360º ] Hence Proved. And , AD = BE ...(ii) [Opp. sides of a ||gm ]
But AD = BC ...(iii) [Given]
Ex.6 If a side of a cyclic quadrilateral is produced, then the From (ii) and (iii),
exterior angle is equal to the interior opposite angle. BE = BC
Sol. Let ABCD be a cyclic quadrilateral inscribed in a circle BCE = BEC ...(iv)
with centre O. The side AB of quadrilateral ABCD is [Angles opposite to equal sides]
produced to E. Then, we have to prove that BEC + BED = 180º [Linear Pair Axiom]
CBE = ADC. BCE + BAD = 180º [From (iv) and (i)]
Trapezium ABCD is cyclic.
[ If a pair of opposite angles of a quadrilateral is 180º,
then the quadrilateral is cyclic] Hence Proved.
Ex.9 In figure, O is the centre of the circle. Prove that

x+ y= z.
1 1
Sol. EBF = EOF = z
Since the sum of opposite pairs of angles of a cyclic 2 2
quadrilateral is 180° [ Angle subtended by an arc of a circle at the centre is
ABC + ADC = 180° twice the angle subtended by it at any point of the
But ABC + CBE = 180°
remaining part of the circle]
[ ABC and CBE form a linear pair]
ABC + ADC = ABC + CBE
ADC = CBE
or CBE = ADC. Hence proved
Ex.7 Find the value of a & b.
D C
130º b
1
ABF = 180º – z ...(i) [Linear Pair Axiom]
A a 2
B
O
1 1
EDF = EOF = z
2 2
[ Angle subtended by any arc of a circle at the centre
Sol. In ADC is twice the angle subtended by it at any point of the
AD = DC remaining part of the circle]
DAC = DCA = x (say) 1
130º + x + x = 180º ADE = 180º – z ...(ii)
2
2x = 50º x = 25º [Linear Pair Axiom]
ADC + ABC = 180º
BCD = ECF = y [Vertically Opp. Angles]
[Opposite angles in a cyclic quadrilateral are supple-
BAD = x
mentary]
130º + ABC = 180º In quadrilateral ABCD
ABC = 50º ABC + BCD + CDA + BAD = 2 × 180º
b = 90º [Angle in a semicircle]
a = 180º – ABC – b 1 1
180º – z+ y + 180º – z+ x = 2 × 180º
= 180º – 50º – 90º 2 2
a = 180º– 140º = 40º.
So, a = 40º and b = 90º. x+ y= z. Hence Proved.
PAGE # 154
154
Ex.10 AB is a diameter of the circle with centre O and chord Clearly OP = OR (Radius)
CD is equal to radius OC. AC and BD produced meet Now, OQ = OR + RQ
at P. Prove that CPD = 60º. OQ > OR
Sol. Given : AB is a diameter of the circle with centre O and OQ > OP ( OP = OR)
chord CD is equal to radius OC. AC and BD produced Thus, OP is shorter than any other segment joining O
meet at P. to any point of AB.
Hence, OP AB.
To Prove : CPD = 60º. O
A B
Construction : Join AD. THEOREM
Proof : In OCD,
C D Lengths of two tangents drawn from an external point
OC = OD ...(i)
to a circle are equal.
[Radii of the same circle]
P
OC = CD ...(ii) [Given]
From (i) and (ii),
OC = OD = CD
OCD is an equilateral triangle.
COD = 60º
1 1 Given : AP and AQ are two tangents drawn from a point
CAD = COD = (60º) = 30º
2 2 A to a circle C (O, r).
[ Angle subtended by any arc of a circle at the centre
To prove : AP = AQ
is twice the angle subtended by it at any point of the
Construction : Join OP, OQ and OA.
remaining part of the circle] Proof : In AOQ and APO
PAD = 30º ...(iii) OQA = OPA [Tangent at any point of a circle is perp.
And, ADB = 90º ...(iv) [Angle in a semi-circle] to radius through the point of contact]
AO = AO [Common]
ADB + ADP = 180º [Linear Pair Axiom]
OQ = OP [Radius]
90º + ADP = 180º [From (iv)]
So, by R.H.S. criterion of congruency AOQ AOP
ADP = 90º ...(v) AQ = AP [By CPCT] Hence Proved.
In ADP,
RESULTS :
APD + PAD + ADP = 180º
(i) If two tangents are drawn to a circle from an external
APD + 30º + 90º = 180º [From (iii) and (v)]
point, then they subtend equal angles at the centre.
APD + 120º = 180º QOA = POA [By CPCT]
APD = 180º – 120º = 60º
(ii) If two tangents are drawn to a circle from an external
CPD = 60º. Hence Proved. point, they are equally inclined to the segment, joining
the centre to that point OAQ = OAP [By CPCT]
THEOREM Ex.11 In figure, a circle touches all the four sides of a
quadrilateral ABCD with AB = 6 cm, BC = 7 cm and
A tangent to a circle is perpendicular to the radius CD = 4 cm. Find AD.
through the point of contact.
Given : A circle C (O, r) and a tangent AB at a point P. Sol. PB = BQ, CR = CQ, DR = DS, AP= AS
To prove : OP AB [ Length of tangents drawn from external point are
Construction : Take any point Q, other than P on the equal]
tangent AB. Join OQ. Suppose OQ meets the circle at R. Add
Proof : Among all line segments joining the point O to PB + CR + DR + AP = BQ + CQ + DS + AS
a point on AB, the shortest one is perpendicular to AB. (PB + AP) + (CR + DR) = (BQ + CQ) + (DS + AS)
AB + CD = BC + AD
So, to prove that OP AB, it is sufficient to prove that OP
AD = AB + CD – BC
is shorter than any other segment joining O to any
AD = 6 + 4 – 7
point of AB. AD = 3 cm.
PAGE # 155
155
Ex.12 Two tangents TP and TQ are drawn to a circle with Proof :
centre O fro m an external po in t T. P ro ve that Case 1. W hen AB and CD intersect at P inside the
PTQ = 2 OPQ. circle.
Sol. W e know that lengths of tangents drawn from an In ’s APC and BPD,
external point to a circle are equal. APC = BPD [Vertically opposite angles]
TP = TQ PAC = PDB [Angles in the same segment]
TPQ is an isosceles triangle. APC ~ BPD
TPQ = TQP PA PC
Hence, = `
PD PB
PA × PB = PC × PD.
Case 2. W hen AB and CD when produced intersect at

P outside the circle.
In PBD and PAC, PBD = ACP
[ABCD is a cyclic quadrilateral and exterior angle is
In TPQ, we have
equal to the interior opposite angle]
TPQ + TQP + PTQ = 180º
PDB = CAP
2 TPQ = 180º – PTQ
[ABCD is a cyclic quadrilateral and exterior angle is
1 equal to the interior opposite angle]
TPQ = 90º – PTQ
2 PBD ~ PCA
1 PB PD
PTQ = 90º – TPQ ....(i)
2 Hence, = `
PC PA
Since, OP TP PA × PB = PC × PD.
OPT = 90º
OPQ + TPQ = 90º THEOREM
OPQ = 90º – TPQ ...(ii)
If PAB is a secant to a circle intersecting the circle at A
From (i) and (ii), we get
an d B an d PT is a tang en t segm en t, then
1 PA × PB = PT2.
PTQ = OPQ
2 Given : A c ircle with centre O; PAB is a secant
PTQ = 2 OPQ.
intersecting the circle at A and B and PT is a tangent
segment to the circle.
SEGMENTS OF A CHORD To prove : PA × PB = PT2.
Construction : Join OA, OP and OT. Draw OD AB.
Let AB be a chord of a circle, and let P be a point on AB
T
inside the circle. Then, P is said to divide AB internally
into two segments PA and PB.
O
THEOREM
P B
A D
If two chords of a circle intersect inside or outside the
circle when produced, the rectangle formed by two Proof : Since OD chord AB
segments of one chord is equal in area to the rectangle AD = DB.
formed by the two segments of another chord. Now PA × PB = (PD – AD) (PD + DB)
= (PD – AD)(PD + AD) [ AD = DB]
= PD2 – AD2
D = (OP2 – OD2) – AD2
A P [From right-angled ODP]
B
= OP – (OD2 + AD2)
2
C
= OP2 – OA2
Fig. (i) [From right-angled ODA]
Given : Two chords AB and CD of a circle C(O, r) = OP – OT2
2
OA = OT [Radii]
intersecting at P, inside in fig. (i) and outside in fig.(ii). = PT2
To prove : PA . PB = PC. PD [From right-angled OTP]
Construction : Join AC and BD. Hence, PA × PB = PT2.
PAGE # 156
156
Ex.13 Two chords AB and CD of a circle intersect each BEA = BAT
other at O internally. If AB = 11 cm, CO =6 cm and DO = But BEA = ACB
4 cm, find OA and OB. [Angles in the same segment]
ACB = BAT
i.e. BAT = ACB.
This proves the first part.
Sol. Again, since ADBC is a cyclic quadrilateral.
ACB + ADB. = 180º
Also BAT + BAP = 180º [Linear pair]
Let OA = x cm, then OB = (11– x) cm ACB + ADB = BAT + BAP
We have, AO × OB = CO × OD BAT + ADB = BAT + BAP
(x) × (11–x) = 6 × 4 = 24 [ ACB = BAT]
ADB = BAP
11x – x2 = 24
BAP = ADB
x2–11x+24 = 0
Hence, BAT = ACB and BAP = ADB.
x–3 x–8
x= 3 or 8 Ex.14 ABCD is a cyclic quadrilateral and PQ is a tangent to
the circle at C. If BD is a diameter and DCQ = 40º and
so, if x = 3 then OA = 3cm, OB = 8cm
ABD = 60º ; find the measure of the following angles :
but if x = 8 then OA = 8cm, OB = 3cm
(i) DBC (ii) BCP (iii) ADB.
A
ANGLES IN THE ALTERNATE SEGMENTS
Let PAQ be a tangent to a circle at point A and AB be a 60º

B D
chord. Then, the segment opposite to the angle formed Oº
by the chord of a circle with the tangent at a point is Sol.
called the alternate segment for that angle. 40º
P C Q
THEOREM Since BD is a diameter of the circle.
BAD = 90º
A line touches a circle and from the point of contact a
chord is drawn. Prove that the angles which the chord and also BCD = 90º
makes with the given line are equal respectively to (i) DBC = DCQ = 40º
ang les fo rm ed in th e co rrespo nd in g altern ate [ s is the alternate segments]
segments. (ii) BCP + BCD + DCQ = 180º
Given : A circle with centre O and PAT is a tangent to the BCP + 90º + 40º = 180º
circle at A. A chord AB is drawn. Let C and D be the BCP = 50º
points on the circumference on opposite sides of AB.
To prove : BAT = ACB and BAP = ADB. (iii) Similarly from BAD, 60º + BAD + ADB = 180º
Construction : Draw the diameter AOE and Join EB. 60º + 90º + ADB = 180º
Proof : Since AE is the diameter, ADB = 30º.
ABE = 90º [Angle in semi circle]
Ex.15 In a right triangle ABC, the perpendicular BD on the
BEA + EAB = 90º ...(i)
[Remaining s of BEA] hypotenuse AC is drawn. Prove that
But since EA AT (i) AC × AD = AB2 (ii) AC × CD = BC2
[ Radius is to the tangent] Sol. We draw a circle with BC as diameter. Since BDC = 90º.
EAB + BAT = 90º ...(ii)
The circle on BC as diameter will pass through D.
Hence from (i) and (ii)
BEA + EAB = EAB + BAT ...(iii) Again
BC is a diameter and AB BC.
AB is a tangent to the circle at B.
Since AB is a tangent and ADC is a secant to the circle.
PAGE # 157
157
2
AC × AD = AB This proves (i)
Again
AC × CD = AC × (AC – AD) = AC2 – AC × AD
= AC2 – AB2 [Using (i)]
2
= BC [ ABC is a right triangle]
2
Hence, AC × CD = BC . This proves (ii).
Ex.16 Two circles touch externally at P and a common

tangent touches them at A and B. Prove that
(i) the common tangent at P bisects AB.
(ii) AB subtends a right angle at P.
Sol. Let PT be the common tangent at any point P. Since the
tangent to a circle from an external point are equal,
TA = TP, TB = TP TA = TB
i.e. PT bisects AB at T
TA = TP gives TAP = TPA (from PAT) (a) In fig. (i) d > r1 + r2 i.e. two circles do not intersect.
In this case, four common tangents are possible.
The tangent lines l and m are called direct common
tangents and the tangent lines p and q are called
indirect (transverse) common tangents.
(b) In fig. (ii), d = r1 + r2. In this case, two circles touch

TB = TP gives TBP = TPB [from PBT]
externally and there are three common tangents.
TAP + TBP = TPA + TPB = APB
TAP + TBP + APB = 2 APB (c) In fig.(iii) d < r1 + r2. In this case two circles intersect
2 APB = 180º [sum of s of a = 180º]
in two distinct points and there are only two common
APB = 90º Hence proved
tangents.
(d) In fig. (iv), d = r1 – r2 (r1 > r2), in this case, two circles
touch internally and there is only one common tangent.
Definition : A line which touches the two given circles is
called common tangent to the two circles. Let (e) In fig. (v), the circle C(O2, r2) lies wholly in the circle
C(O1, r1), C(O2, r2) be two given circles. Let the distance C(O1, r1) and there is no common tangent.
between centres O1 and O2 be d i.e., O1O2 = d.
Ex.17 Two circles of radii R and r touch each other externally
and PQ is the direct common tangent. Then show that
PQ2 =4rR
Sol. Draw O'S|| PQ,
O'SPQ is rectangle
O'S=PQ, PS=QO'=r
OO'=R+r
OS=OP–PS=R–r
In O'OS
(O'S)2 = (OO')2–(OS)2
PQ2=(R+r)2–(R–r)2
PQ2=R2+r2+2Rr–(R2+r2–2Rr)
PQ2=R2+r2+2Rr–R2–r2+2Rr
PQ2=4rR
PAGE # 158
158
7. In the diagram the circle contains the vertices A, B, C of
triangle ABC. Now A BC is 30° and the length of AC
is 5. The diameter of the circle is :
1. In the circle shown AB = 24, and the perpendicular
chord CD bisects AB. If DM is 4 times as long as CM
then the length of BD, is
C B
M
A
(A) 5 3 (B) 8
D
(A) 8 5 (B) 12 5
(C) 10 (D) 5 5
(C) 16 5 (D) 20 5 8. Find the measure of angle y in the figure if P is the
centre of the circle :
2. Let P be a point on the circumference of a circle. Per-
pendiculars PA and PB are drawn to points A and B on
two mutually perpendicular diameters. If AB = 36 cm,
the diameter of the circle is :
(A) 16 cm (B) 24 cm
(C) 36 cm (D) 72 cm
3. A semicircle is drawn with AB as its diameter. From C,
(A) 99° (B) 105°
a point on AB, a line perpendicular to AB is drawn meet-
(C) 90° (D) 109°
ing the circumference of the semicircle at D. Given that
AC = 2 cm and CD = 6 cm, the area of the semicircle 9. In the g iven c ircle AB CD , O is the c en tre an d
is: BDC = 42o. The ACB is equal to :
(A) 32 (B) 50 (A) 48o
(C) 40 (D) 36 D C
(B) 45o 42o
4. The circle and the square have the same center and
the same area. If the circle has radius 1, the length of (C) 42o O
AB, is :
(D) 60o A B
10. In the given figure, CAB = 80o, ABC = 40o. The sum
of DAB + ABD is equal to : D
(A) 80o C
A B
(B) 100o
(A) 4 – (B) 4 – 2
(C) 120o 80º 40º
A B
(C) 2 (D) 4 o
(D) 140
5. In the circle with centre ‘O’ as shown, chord AB and CD
intersect at P and are perpendicular to each other. If 11. In the given figure, AB = BC = CD, If BAC = 25º, then
AP = 4, PB = 6 and PC = 2, then the area of the circle is value of AED is :
D C
(A) 50º D
B
(B) 60º
O 25º
(C) 65º
A P B
(D) 75º
C A
(A) 45 (B) 49 E
12. If , then :
(C) 50 (D) 41
6. In the figure given above, A and B are the centers of the
two c ongruent circles with rad ius 17 u nits.
If AB = 30 units, the length of the common chord DC is :
(A) 25 units
(B) 18 units
(C) 10 units
(A) 1= 2 (B) 3 = 4
(D) 16 units
(C) 2 = 3 (D) None of these.
PAGE # 159
159
13. A, B and C are three points on the circle whose centre
is O. If BAC = x, CBO = BCO = y,, BOC = t,
reflex BOC = z, then : 19. The three circles in the figure centered at A, B and C
are tangent to one another and have radii 7, 21 and 6
respectively. The area of the triangle ABC, is
A
C
B
(A) x + y = 90° (B) x – y = 90°
(C) t + 2y° = 90° (D) None of these
(A) 54 (B) 64
14. Find the value of a + b, if b = 2a.
(C) 74 (D) 84
F
D b 20. Triangle PAB is formed by three tangents to circle O
C and APB = 40º, then angle AOB

R
A a
E
B B
O
Q
40º
P
A T
o o
(A) 40 (B) 80 (A) 45º (B) 50º
(C) 120o (D) 160o
(C) 60º (D) 70º
15. In figure, if PQR is tangent to a circle at Q whose centre
is O, AB is a chord parallel to PR and BQR = 70°, 21. On a plane are two points A and B at a distance of 5 unit
then AQB is equal to : apart. The number of straight lines in this plane which
are at distance of 2 units from A and 3 units from B, is:
(A) 1 (B) 2
(C) 3 (D) 4
22. In the figure, assume that the circle are mutually tangent
and that the circle with centre at A has radius 1. The
lines AB and AC are tangent to the circle at O in the
(A) 20° (B) 40°
(C) 35° (D) 45° points B and C respectively. If the area of the shaded
16. In the given figure value of 'a' is : region is /4, the radius of the circle centered at O, is
D C
(A) 30º C
130º b
r
(B) 40º a
A O
A B
O
(C) 60º B
(D) 90º
17. ABCD is a cyclic quadrilateral inscribed in a circle with (A) r = 2 –1 (B) r = 2– 2
the centre O. Then OAD is equal to :
C (C) r = 1 + 2 (D) 2 + 2
(A) 30º
50º
D 23. Let C be a circle centre O. Let T be a point on the circle,
(B) 40º
O and P a point outside the circle such that PT is tangent
(C) 50º to C. Assume that the segment OP intersects C in a
40º point Q. If PT = 12 and PQ = 8, the radius of C, is :
(D) 60º
A B
(A) r = 40 (B) r = 5
18. In figure, O is centre, then BXD =
(A) 65° (C) r = 4 5 (D) r = 4 13
(B) 60°
(C) 70°
(D) 55°
PAGE # 160
160
24. Two circles of radii 4 cm and 14 cm have a common 31. If two tangents inclined at an angle 60º are drawn to a
external tangent of length 24 cm. The distance between circle of radius 3 cm, then length of each tangent is
equal to :
the centres of these circles (in cm) is :
3
(A) 3 cm (B) 6 cm
2
(C) 3 cm (D) 3 3 cm
32. In figure , ABC is circumscribing a circle. Find the
length of BC.
(A) 24 (B) 25
(C) 26 (D) 27
25. In a triangle ABC, AB = 130, AC = 200 and BC = 260.

Point D is chosen on BC so that the circles inscribed
in triangle ABD and ADC are tangent to AD at the same
point. Length of BD is equal to :
A (A) 8 cm (B) 10 cm
(C) 12 cm (D) 14 cm
33. In figure, there are two concentric circles with centre O
and of radii 5 cm and 3 cm. From an external point P,
tan gents PA and PB are drawn to these circles.
If AP = 12 cm, find the length of BP.
B C A
D
(A) 105 (B) 95
(C) 90 (D) 85
O P
26. Three circles are mutually tangent externally. Their cen-
tres form a triangle whose sides are of lengths 3, 4 B
and 5. The total area of the three circles (in square
units), is : (A) 4 10 cm. (B) 2 10 cm.
(A) 9 (B) 16
(C) 10 cm (D) 3 10 cm
(C) 21 (D) 14
34. A circle is inscribe in trapezoid PQRS. If PS = QR = 25
27. Circles with centres O, O’ and P each tangent of the
cm, PQ = 18 cm and SR = 32 cm, what is the length of
line L and also mutually tangent. If the radii of circle O
the diameter of the circle ?
and circle O’ are equal and the radius of the circle P is
(A) 14 cm P Q
6, then the radius of the larger circle is :
(B) 25 cm
(C) 24 cm
O O'
(D) 674 cm S R
P
L
35. PQ is a chord of a circle. The tangent XR at X on the
(A) 22 (B) 23 circle cuts PQ produced at R. If XR = 12 cm, PQ = x cm,
(C) 24 (D) 25 QR = x – 2 cm, then x in cm is :
28. Two circle touch each other externally at C and AB is a (A) 6 X
common tangent to the circles. Then, ACB = (B) 7 12
(A) 60º (B) 45º (C) 10
x x– 2
(D) 14 R
(C) 30º (D) 90º P Q
36. In the figure shown, the bigger circle has radius 1 unit.
29. ABC is a right angled triangle, right angled at B such
Therefore, the radius of smaller circle must be :
that BC = 6 cm and AB = 8 cm. A circle with centre O is
inscribed in ABC. The radius of the circle is : (A) 2 +1
(A) 1 cm (B) 2 cm 1
(B)
(C) 3 cm (D) 4 cm 2
30. AB and CD are two common tangents to circles which 1
touch each other at C. If D lies on AB such that CD = 4 cm, (C)
2
then AB is equal to :
(A) 4 cm (B) 6 cm 1
(C) 8 cm (D) 12 cm (D)
2 1
PAGE # 161
161
2. In the following figure, if PA = 12 cm, PC = 15 cm and
37. W hich of the following shapes of equal perimeter, the CD = 7 cm, then the value of AB is :
one having the largest area is : [Raj. NTSE Stage-1 2006]
(A) circle (B) equilateral triangle
(C) square (D) regular pentagon
38. Let XYZ be right angle triangle, with right angle at Z.

Let Ax denotes the area of the circle with diameter YZ.
Let Ay denote the area of the circle with diameter XZ
and let Az denotes the area of the circle diameter XY.
W hich of the following relations is true ? (A) 10 cm (B) 4 cm
2
(C) 3 cm (D) 2 cm
(A) Az = Ax + Ay (B) Az = A x A 2y
3. In the figure, PQ is a chord of a circle with centre O and
2
PT is the tangent at P such that QPT = 70º. Then the
(C) A z A 2x A 2y 2
(D) A z A 2x A 2y
measure of PRQ is equal to :
39. A triangle with side lengths in the ratio 3 : 4 : 5 is [Delhi NTSE Stage-1 2006]
inscribed in a circle of radius 3. The area of the triangle
is equal to :
(A) 8.64 (B) 12
(C) 6 (D) 10.28
40. Two legs of a right triangle are 8 and 9 as
shown. A circle is drawn so that the area inside the

(A) 135º (B) 150º
circle but outside the triangle equals the area inside
the triangle but outside the circle. The radius of the (C) 120º (D) 110º
circle is (Use = 22/7) 4. In the figure, O is the centre of the circle and OABC is
rectangle : (NTSE-Stage-I/Kerala/2007)
B
C
A
O 3cm2cm
W hat is the length of AC ?

(A) 6 (B) 6 (A) 4 cm (B) 4.5 cm
(C) 5 cm (D) 5.5 cm
(C) 5 (D) 8
5. In a circle, a 16 unit long chord is at a distance 6 units
away from the center. Find the distance of a 12 unit
long chord from the centre.
(NTSE Stage -I/Gujrat/2007)
(A) 5 (B) 6
1. In the following figure, O is the centre of the circle. The
(C) 7 (D) 8
value of x is : [Raj. NTSE Stage-1 2006]
6. In the d iagram O is th e centre o f a circ le.
AE + EB = CE + ED. OP AB and OQ CD, then true
x
relation between OP and OQ is :
120º
O D
(A) OP > OQ
(B) OP < OQ
Q
1 O B
(C) OP = OQ E
(A) 60º (B) 45º 2 P
(C) 40º (D) 80º (D) OP = OQ A C
PAGE # 162
162
7. The centre of a circle is at O. AB and CD are two chords 13. In the figure, BC is a chord of the circle with centre O
and A is a po in t on the m in or are B C. T hen
of length d and respectively. If P is the mid point of
BAC – OBC is equal to (NTSE Stage-2 /2015)
CD, then the length OP is : (NTSE-Stage-I/MP/2008) A
(A) 30°
(A) d2 l2 (B) 60° B C
B (C) 80° O
(B) d2 – l 2 O
D (D) 90°
1 2 A P 14. In the figure O is the centre of the circle and POR =
(C) d l2
2 C 80º. Then RQS is [Rajasthan NTSE Stage-1 2016]
(A) 30º S
R
1 2
(D) d – l2 (B) 40º
2 O
Q 80°
(C) 1400
8. Two circles of equal radius touch each other externally
(D) 50º
at point C. AB is their common tangent. Value of CAB P
is : (NTSE Stage-I/Rajasthan/2009)
15. In the figure, the semicirlce centered at O has a diam-
(A) 30º A M B
eter 6 cm. The chord BC is parallel to AD and BC =
(B) 40º
1
(C) 45º AD. The area of the trapezium ABCD in cm2 , is :
C 3
(D) 60º [Haryana NTSE Stage-1 2016]
B C
9. BC is the diameter of a circle. Points A and D are
situated on the circumferen ce of the semi circle
ABD = 35º and BCD = 60º, ADB equals to : A D
O
(A) 4 (B) 4 2
(A) 20º D
A (C) 8 (D) 8 2
(B) 25º 35º 16. In the figure, the radius of the larger circle is 2 cm and
60º the radius of the smaller circle is 1 cm and the larger
B C
circle passes through the centre of the smaller circle.
(C) 30º
The length (in cm) of the chord AB is :
(D) 115º A
10. One of the side of a triangle is divided into line segment

of lengths 6 cm and 8 cm by the point of tangency of the
B
incircle of the triangle. If the radius of the incircle is
4 cm, then the length (in cm) of the longer of the two
remaining sides of the triangle is :
[Harayana NTSE Stage-1 2013] 15
(A) (B) 2
(A) 12 (B) 13 2
(C) 15 (D) 16 3 5 34
(C) (D)
2 17
11. The circumference of the circumcircle of the triangle
formed by x -axis, y-axis and graph of 3x + 4y =12 is: 17. In the following figure O is the centre of circle and
[Harayana NTSE Stage-1 2013] ACB = x°, OBA = y° then the value of x° + y° is
(A) 3 units (B) 4 units C
(C) 5 units (D) 6.25 units
x°
12. The lengths of two parallel chords of a circle are 6 cm O
and 8 cm. If the smaller chord is at distance 4 cm from
the centre, then the distance of the other chord from y°
A B
the cnetre is (NTSE Stage -I/Raj./2015)
(A) 5 cm (B) 4 cm
(C) 3 cm (D) 2 cm (A) 90° (B) 120°
(C) 150° (D) 180°
PAGE # 163
163
(iv) Isosceles right-angled triangle
Perimeter : The perimeter of a plane figure is the length For an isosceles right-angled triangle, let a be the
of its boundary. The unit of perimeter is same as the
equal sides, then
unit of length i.e cm, m, etc.
Area : The area of plane figure is the measure of the (A) Hypotenuse = a2 a2 = 2a
surface enclosed by its boundary. The unit of area is
cm2, m2, etc.
(B) Perimeter = 2a + 2a
AREA & PERIMETER OF TRIANGLES A
a 2a
B a C
D
1 1 1 2
(C) Area = (Base × Height) = (a × a) = a.
2 2 2
(i) Scalene triangle
Perimeter = a + b + c (v) Equilateral triangle
1 1 3
Area = × Base × Height = ah Area = (side)2, Perimeter = 3(side)
2 2 4
Heron’s formula :
Ex.1 Triangle ABC is isosceles with AB = AC = 7.5 cm and
Area = s( s a )( s b )(s c ) BC = 9 cm. The height from A to BC i.e., AD is 6 cm. Find
the area of ABC. W hat will be the height from C to AB ?
a b c
W here, s = semi-perimeter = Sol. W e have,
2
1
(ii) Isosceles triangle Area of ABC = × BC × AD
2
A
1 2 1
Area = base (equal side) (base )2
2 4
(iii) Right-angled triangle.
For an right-angled triangle, let b be the base, h be the

perpendicular and d be the hypotenuse. Then
(A) Perimeter = b + h + d
9 cm
1 1
(B) Area = (Base × Height) = bh 1
2 2 = × 9 × 6 cm2 = 27 cm2
A 2
Let CF be the height from C to AB. Then,

d
h 1
Area of ABC = × AB × CF
2
1
B b C 27 = × 7.5 × CF
2
27 2
CF = CF = 7.2 cm
(C) Hypotenuse, d = b2 h 2 [Pythagoras theorem] 7. 5
PAGE # 164
164
Ex.2 Find the area of a triangle : Ex.4 The sides of a triangle containing the right triangle are
(i) whose height is 6 cm and base is 10 cm. 5x cm and (3x – 1) cm. If the area of the triangle is
(ii) whose three sides are 17 cm, 8 cm and 15 cm 60 cm 2, calculate the lengths of the sides of the
long. triangle.
Also, in part (i) of this question; calculate the length of Sol. Since, area of a right angled triangle
the altitude corresponding to the largest side of the
triangle. 1
= × product of its sides containing the right triangle
1 2
Sol. (i) Area of triangle = × Base × Height
2 1
60 = × 5x × (3x – 1)
2
1
= × 10 × 6 = 30 cm2 120 = 15 x2 – 5x 15x2 – 5x – 120 = 0
2 3x2 – x – 24 = 0
(ii) Let a = 17 cm, b = 8 cm and c = 15 cm. 8
On solving we get x = 3 and x = .
a b c 3
s= 8
2 Since, x = will give negative values of the sides of
3
17 8 15
= = 20 cm. the triangle, which is impossible; therefore, x = 3.
2
Length of the sides = 5 (3) = 15 cm and (3 × 3 – 1) = 8 cm.
So, Area = s( s a)(s b)(s c )
Ex.5 Find the perimeter of an equilateral triangle whose
= 20(20 17)(20 8)(20 15) = 60 cm 2 area is equal to that of a triangle with sides 21 cm,
16 cm and 13 cm. Answer correct to 2 decimal places.
Since, the largest side of the triangle is 17 cm.
Sol. For the given triangle a = 21 cm, b = 16 cm and
1 c = 13 cm.
Area = × Base × altitude
2 a b c
1 s=
60 = × 17 × altitude 2
2
21 16 13
60 2 = = 25 cm.
Altitude = = 7.06 cm. 2
17
Ex.3 Find the area of an isosceles triangle whose equal So, Area = s( s a)(s b)(s c )
sides are 5 cm each and base is 6 cm.
Sol. = 25(25 21)(25 16)(25 13)
A
= 60 3 cm2
Given :
5 cm Area of equilateral triangle = Area of this triangle
5 cm
3
(side )2 = 60 3
4
(side)2 = 240
B 3 cm D 3 cm C side = 240 = 4 15 cm
In an isosceles triangle ABC, let AB = AC = 5 cm and Perimeter of the equilateral triangle = 3 (side)
BC = 6 cm.
= 3 × 4 15
Draw AD perpendicular to BC.
Since, the perpendicular from the vertex to the base of = 12 × 3.873
an isosceles triangle bisects the base, therefore = 46.48 cm (Approx.)
1
BD = CD = × 6 = 3 cm.
2 AREA & PERIMETER OF QUADRILATERALS
Applying Pythagoras Theorem in triangle ABD,
AD2 = AB2 – BD2 1. When one diagonal and perpendiculars to this
= 52 – 32 = 25 – 9 diagonal from the remaining vertices are given.
= 16
So, AD = 4 cm.
A D
1
Area of triangle ABC = × Base × height
2
X
1
= × BC × AD
2
Y
1 B C
= × 6 × 4 = 12 cm2.
2
PAGE # 165
165
In qu ad rilateral AB CD , th e diag on al A C an d Ex.7 A room is 8 m long and 5 m broad. Find the cost of
perpendiculars BX and DY to AC from the remaining covering the floor of the room with 80 cm wide carpet at
vertices B and D respectively are given, then the the rate of Rs. 22.50 per meter
Area of quadrilateral ABCD = Ar. of ABC + Ar. of ADC Sol. Area of floor of the room = 8 × 5 = 40 m2
1 1 Let the length of the carpet be m.
= AC × BX + AC × DY Area of carpet = length × breadth
2 2
1 80
= AC ( BX + DY ) = m2 = 0.80 m2
2 100
1 Since, Area of carpet = Area of the floor of the room
Area of quadrilateral = × one diagonal × sum of
2 0.80 = 40
the lengths of the perpendiculars drawn on it from the = 50 m
remaining two vertices
Cost of carpet = 50 × Rs. 22.50 = Rs. 1125.
2. When two diagonals of a quadrilateral cut each
other at right angles. Ex.8 The length and breadth of a rectangular field are in the
D ratio 3 : 2. If the area of the field is 3456 m2, find the cost
of fencing the field at Rs 3.50 per metre.
Sol. Let the length and breadth of the rectangular field be
3x and 2x metres respectively. Then,
A C Area of the rectangular field = (3x 2x)m2 = 6x2 m2.
X Also, area of the rectangular field = 3456 m2
6x2 = 3456
B 3456
x2 =
Area of Quadrilateral ABCD 6
= Ar. of ABC + Ar. of ADC x2 = 576
1 1 x= 576 = 24
= AC × BX + AC × DX
2 2 length = (3 24) m = 72 m, breadth = (2 24) m
= 48 m
1 1
= AC ( BX + DX ) = AC × BD Perimeter of the field = 2 (length + breadth)
2 2
= [2 (72 + 48)]m
1 = 240 m
= × The product of the diagonals Rate of fencing = Rs 3.50 per metre
2
SOME SPECIAL TYPES OF QUADRILATERALS : Cost of fencing = Rs (240 3.50) = Rs 840.
1. Rectangle : 2. Square :
Perimeter = 2 ( + b) Perimeter = 4a
Area = × b
Area = a2
2
Length of diagonal (d) = b2 Length of diagonal = a 2
Ex.6 Find the area of rectangular plot one side of which is
Ex.9 A grassy plot is 80 m × 60 m . Two cross paths each 4
48 m and its diagonal 50 m.
m wide are constructed at right angles through the
Sol. Let the other side be x metres. Since ABC is a right
triangle. Therefore, D C centre of the field , such that each path is parallel to
2 2
AC = AB + BC 2 one of the sides of rectangle. Find the total area used
502 = 482 + x2 xm as path. Also, find the cost of gravelling them at Rs 5
x2 = (50)2 – (48)2 per square metre.
x2 = (50 + 48) (50 –A48) B Sol. Let ABCD and EFGH be the cross paths.
x2 = 98 × 2 We have , AB = 80 m and BC = 4 m.
x2 = 142 Area of path ABCD = (80 × 4) m2 = 320 m2
x = 14. Again, EF = 60 m and FG = 4 m
Thus, the other side of the rectangle is 14 cm. Area of path EFGH = (60 × 4) m2 = 240 m2.
Area of the rectangle = (48 × 14) m2 = 672 m2. Clearly, area PQRS is common to both the paths.
PAGE # 166
166
W e have, 4. Rhombus :
Area PQRS = (4 × 4) m2 = 16 m2
Total area used as path = Area of path ABCD + Area
of path EFGH – Area PQRS
= (320 + 240 – 16) m2 = 544 m2
Rate of gravelling the path = Rs 5 per square metre
Total cost of gravelling the path
= Rs ( 5 × 544) = Rs 2720
E H
Perimeter = 4a = 2 d12 d 22
4m 1
S R Area = d d
D C 2 1 2
A B
P Q Ex.12 If the area of rhombus be 24 cm2 and one of the its
4m diagonals be 4 cm, find the perimeter of the rhombus.
Sol. Let ABCD be a rhombus such that its one diagonal
F G AC = 4 cm. Supp ose the diag onals AC and BD
80 m intersect at O.
3. Parallelogram : Now, Area of rhombus ABCD = 24 cm2
1
× AC × BD = 24
2 D C
1 O
× 4 × BD = 24
2
1
× 4 × BD = 24 A B
Perimeter = 2 (a + b) 2
Area = ah1 = bh2 2 × BD = 24
Ex.10 In figure, ABCD is a parallelogram, CM AB and BD = 12 cm
BL AD. If AB = 16 cm, AD = 12 cm and CM = 10cm, Thus, we have AC = 4 cm and BD = 12 cm
find BL.
1 1
OA = AC = 2 cm and OB = BD = 6 cm
2 2
Since the diagonals of a rhombus bisect each other at
right angles. Therefore,
AOB is a right triangle, right angled at O.
Sol. We have , base AB = 16 cm and altitude CM = 10 cm. By pythagoras theorem, we have
Area of parallelogram ABCD = Base Altitude AB2 = OA2 + OB2
= (16 10) cm2 = 160 cm2 ...(i) AB2 = 22 + 62 = 40 = 4 × 10 = 22 × 10
Now, taking AD as the base, we have
AB = 2 10 cm
Area of parallelogram ABCD = Base Altitude
= (12 BL) cm2 ...(ii) Hence, perimeter of rhombus ABCD = (4 × 2 10 ) cm
From (i) and (ii), we have
= 8 10 cm
12 BL = 160
2
160 Ex.13 The area of a rhombus is 72 cm . If its perimeter is
BL = = 13.33 cm 32 cm, find its altitude.
12
Sol. W e have, perimeter of the rhombus = 32 cm
Ex.11 The base of a parallelogram is thrice its height. If the
4 (side) = 32 cm [ Perimeter = 4 (side)]
area is 876 cm 2 , find the base and height of the
32
parallelogram. side = cm = 8 cm
4
Sol. Let the height of the parallelogram be x cm. Then, Now, area of the rhombus = 72 cm2
base = 3x cm.
(Side Altitude) = 72
Area of the parallelogram= (x × 3x) cm2 = 3x2 cm2
But, area of the parallelogram is given as 867 cm2 8 Altitude = 72
3x2 = 867 x2 = 289 x2 = 172 x = 17 72
Altitude = cm = 9 cm
Thus, height = 17 cm and base = (3 × 17) cm = 51 cm. 8
PAGE # 167
167
Ex.14 If the area of a rhombus be 48 cm2 and one of its In rectan gle BC DE , BE = D C = 15 c m an d
diagonal is 12 cm, find its altitude. DE = BC = 8 cm.
Sol. Let ABCD be a rhombus of area 48 cm2 and diagonal In right angled triangle ABE,
BD = 12 cm. AE2 = AB2 – BE2
Now, Area = 48 cm2 D C = 172 – 152 = 64
1 AE = 8 cm
AC BD = 48
2 O Also, AD = AE + DE = 8 cm + 8 cm = 16 cm
1 1
AC 12 = 48 Area of trapezium = (AD + BC) × BE
2 A B 2
6 AC = 48 1
= (16 + 8) × 15 = 180 cm2.
48 2
AC = cm = 8 cm Perimeter = AB + BC + CD + DA
6
Since the diagonal of a rhombus bisect each other at = (17 + 8 +15 + 16) cm = 56 cm.
right angles.
Ex.16 Find the area of a trapezium whose parallel sides
1 1 are 25 cm, 13 cm and other sides are 15 cm and
OA = AC = 4 cm, OB = BD = 6 cm. 15 cm.
2 2
Sol. Let ABCD be the given trapezium in which AB = 25 cm,
Also, AB2 = OA2 + OB2 [Using pythagoras theorem]
CD = 13 cm, BC = 15 cm and AD = 15 cm.
AB2 = 42 + 62
Draw CE || AD.
AB2 = 16 + 36
D 13 cm
C
AB = 52
Since a rhombus is a parallelogram also, therefore,
15 cm
Area of rhombus = AB Altitude
48 = 52 Altitude
A E L B
48 25 cm
Altitude = cm .
52 Now, ADCE is a parallelogram is which AD || CE and
5. Trapezium : AE || CD.
b AE = DC = 13 cm
D C
and BE = AB – AE = 25 – 13 = 12 cm.
In BCE, we have
h 15 15 12
s= = 21
2
A B
a Area of BCE = s( s a )( s b)( s c )
1
Area = h (a + b)
2 Area of BCE = 21(21 15 )(21 15 )( 21 12)
Ex.15 The given figure shows a trapezium ABCD in which Area of BCE = 21 6 6 9
AB = 17 cm, BC = 8 cm and CD = 15 cm. Find the area = 18 21 cm2 ...(i)
and perimeter of the trapezium.
Let h be the height of BCE, then
D 15 cm C
1
Area of BCE = (Base × Height)
2
8 cm
1
= × 12 × h = 6h ..(ii)
2
B
From (i) and (ii), we have,
17 cm 6h = 18 21
A h = 3 21 cm
Clearly, the height of trapezium ABCD is same as
Sol. Draw BE perpendicular to AD.
that of BCE
D 15 cm C 1
Area of trapezium = (AB + CD) × h
2
8 cm 1
Area of trapezium = (25 + 13) × 3 21 cm2
E 2
B
= 57 21 cm2.
17 cm
PAGE # 168
168
Ex.17 If the perimeter of a semi-circular protractor is 66 cm,
PERIMETER AND AREA OF A CIRCLE
find the diameter of the protractor (Take = 22 7
).
Circle :
Sol. Let the radius of the protractor be r cm.
The collection of all points in a plane, which are at a Then, Perimeter = 66 cm
fixed distance from a fixed point in the plane, is called
r 2r 66
a circle.
The fixed point is called the centre of the circle and the
22
fixed distance is called the radius of the circle. The r 2 66
7
diameter of a circle is twice its radius.
In figure, O is the centre and the length OP is the radius
of the circle. 36
r 66
7
66 7
r
36
77
r
6
The length of the boundary of a circle is called its
circumference or its perimeter. We know that the ratio 77
Diameter = 2r = .
of the circumference of a circle to its diameter is always 3
a constant. This constant ratio is denoted by the greek Ex.18 Two circles touch externally. The sum of their areas
letter . is 130 sq. cm. and the distance between their centres
Circumference is 14 cm. Find the radii of the circles.
= Sol.
Diameter
Circumference = × 2r = 2 r [ Diameter = 2r]
The exact value of is not known, because is an r1 r2
irrational number. For all practical purposes, the value C1 C2
22
of is approximately taken as or 3.14
7
If r is the radius of a circle, then
(i) Circumference = 2 r or d, where d = 2r is the If two circles touch externally, then the distance between
diameter of the circle. their centres is equal to the sum of their radii.
(ii) Area = r2. Let the radii of the two circles be r 1 cm and r 2 cm
respectively.
r2
(iii) Area of semi-circle = . Let C1 and C2 be the centres of the given circles. Then,
2
(iv) Perimeter of the semi-circle = r + 2r. C1C2 = r1 + r2 Cl C2 14 cm (given)
(v) Area enclosed by two concentric circles 14 = r1 + r2
= R2 – r2 = (R2 – r2) = (R + r) (R – r) r1 + r2 = 14 ...(i)
W here R and r and radii of two concentric circles. It is given that the sum of the areas of two circles is
equal to 130 cm2.
r12 + r22 = 130
r12 r22 130 ...(ii)
r R
Now, (r1 + r2)2 = r12 r12 2 r1r2
142 = 130 + 2 r1r2 [Using (i) and (ii)]
NOTE : 196 – 130 = 2r1r2
r1r2 = 33 ...(iii)
1. If two circles touch each other externally, then the
distance between their centres is equal to sum of their Now, (r1 – r2)2 = r12 r12 – 2r1r2
radii. (r1 – r2)2 = 130 – 2 × 33 [Using (ii) and (iii)]
2. If two circles touch each other internally, then the (r1 – r2)2 = 64
distance between their centres is equal to difference r1 – r2 = 8 ...(iv)
of their radii. Solving (i) and (iv), we get r1 = 11 cm and r2 = 3 cm.
3. Th e distan ce mo ved by a rotating wh eel in o ne Hence, the radii of the two circles are 11 cm and 3 cm.
revolution is equal to the circumference of the wheel.
PAGE # 169
169
Ex.19 A race track is in the form of a ring whose inner
SECTOR OF A CIRCLE AND ITS AREA
circumference is 352 m, and the outer circumference
The region bounded by an arc of a circle and its two
is 396 m. Find the width of the track.
bounding radii is called a sector of the circle.
Sol. Let the outer and inner radii of the ring be R metres
and r metres respectively.
O
R
Then, 2 R = 396 and 2 r= 352 If the arc is a minor arc then the corresponding sector
is called the minor sector and the remaining part
22 22 bounded by the major arc is called the major sector.
2 R 396 and 2 r 352 In figure shaded region OAMB is the minor sector and
7 7
the remaining portion OANB is the major sector.
7 1 7 1 Length of Arc and Area of sector :

R = 396 and r 352 Let r be the radius of the circle with centre O and AOB
22 2 22 2
be a sector of the circle such that AOB = .
R = 63 m and r = 56 m 0 < < 180°, then the arc AB is a minor arc of the circle.
Hence, width of the track = (R – r) m

= (63 – 56) m = 7 m.
Ex.20 The diameter of a cycle wheel is 28 cm. How many

revolution will it make in moving 13.2 km ?
Sol. Distance travelled by the wheel in one revolution
Now, if increases, the length of arc AB is also
22 28
=2 r = 2 × × = 88 cm in creases an d if beco mes 18 0°, th en arc A B
7 2
becomes the circumference of a semi-circle.
and the total distance covered by the wheel W hen an arc subtends an angle 180° at the centre,
= 13.2 × 1000 × 100 cm then the length of the arc of the semi-circle = r.
= 1320000 cm W hen an arc subtends angle at the centre, then length
Number of revolutions made by the wheel r r
of the arc = = .
180 180
1320000
= = 15000. r
88 If L be the length of the arc AB, then L=
180
Ex.21 A wire is looped in the form of a circle of radius 28 Again, when an arc subtends angle 180° at the centre,
the corresponding sector is a semi-circular region of
cm. It is re-bent into a square form. Determine the
length of the side of the square. 1 2
area r.
2
Sol. W e have, W hen an arc subtends an angle 180° at the centre,
Length of the wire = Circumference of the circle
r2
then the area of the corresponding sector is .
2
22
Length of the wire = 2 28 cm W hen an arc subtends an at the centre, then
7
r2 1 r2
area of the sector = =
Length of the wire = 176 cm ....(i) 2 180 360
Let the side of the square be x cm. r2
If A be the area of the sector, then A = and length
Then, 360
r
Perimeter of the square = Length of the wire of an arc L =
180
4x = 176 x = 44 cm A r2 180 r
= × =
Hence, the length of the side of the square is 44 cm. L 360 r 2
Lr
Hence, A =
2
PAGE # 170
170
NOTE : A2 = Area of a sector of angle 30° in a circle of radius
3.5 cm.
(i) Angle described by minute hand in 60 minutes
= 360°. 30 22 (3.5) 2
A2 = 360 7
Angle described by minute hand in one minute
360 1 22 7 7 77 2
= = 6°. A2 = 12 7 2 2 = 24 cm .
60
Thus, minute hand rotates through an angle of 6° in Area of the shaded region = A1 – A2
one minute. 77 – 77
= 6 24 cm2
(ii) Angle described by hour-hand in -12 hours. = 360°.
Angle described by hour hand in one hour 77
= × (4 – 1) cm2
360 24
= 12 = 30°.
77
= cm2 = 9.625 cm2.
Angle described by hour hand in one minute 8
30 1 Ex.24 The minute hand of a clock is 10 cm long. Find the
= 60 = 2 .
area of the face of the clock described by the minute
1 hand between 9 A.M. and 9.35 A.M.
Thus, hour hand rotates through an angle of 2 in
Sol. W e have,
one minute. Angle described by the minute hand in one minute
Ex.22 A sector is cut from a circle of radius 21 cm. The = 6°.
angle of the sector is 150°. Find the length of its arc Angle described by the minute hand in 35 minutes
and area. = (6 × 35)° = 210°
Area swept by the minute hand in 35 minutes.
Sol. The length or arc and area A of a sector of angle in
= Area of a sector of angle 210° in a circle of radius
a circle of radius r are given by
10 cm
= 2 r
360 210 22 (10)2
= 360 7 cm2 = 183.3 cm2.
2
and A = r respectively..
360
SEGMENT OF A CIRCLE AND ITS AREA
Here, r = 21 cm and = 150
150 2 22 21 The region enclosed by an arc and a chord is called
= 360 7 cm = 55 cm
the segment of the circle.
150 22
and A = (21)2 cm2
360 7 N
1155
= cm2 = 577.5 cm2. Major segment
Major arc
2
O
Ex.23 In figure, there are shown sector of two concentric
circles of radii 7 cm and 3.5 cm. Find the area of the
22
shaded region. (Use = ). A B
7
M Minor arc
Minor segment
The segment containing the minor arc is called a minor
segment and the remaining segment containing the
major arc is called the major segment.
In the figure, the shaded region is the minor segment
and the remaining part of the circle is major segment.
Area of a Segment of a Circle :
Sol. Let A1 and A2 be the areas of sectors
OAB and OCD respectively. Then, Let r be the radius of a circle with centre O and let AB be
A1 = Area of a sector of angle 30° in a circle of radius an arc subtending an angle at the centre O. we shall
find the area of the shaded segment AMB.
7 cm
30 22 7 2
A1 = [Using : A = × r2]
360 7 360
O
77 P
A1 = cm2 r
6 r
A B
M
PAGE # 171
171
Let AP OB. Important Formulae :
Now, area of the segment AMB In any triangle ABC, the circle which pass through
= Area of the sector OAMB – area of OAB the vertex of triangle is known Circumcircle and its
r2 1 radius is called circumradius.
= – × OB × AP
360 2 In any triangle ABC, the circle which touches the
sides of triangle is known incircle and its radius is
r2 1 called inrad ius.
= – r × OA sin
360 2
Area of triangle = r s,
AP
[ From AOP, sin = AP = OA sin ]
OA
r2 1 abc
= – r2 sin [ OA = OB = r] Area of triangle =
360 2 4R
r2 1
Hence, area of the segment = – r2 sin .
360 2 W here a,b and c represent the length of side of
T rian g le, s re p r es en t t h e s em ip er im et er o f
Ex.25 A chord of circle 14 cm makes an angle of 60º at the
t rian g lea n d r, R r ep re s en t th e in r ad iu s an d
center of the circle. Find : circumradius respectively.
(i) area of minor sector
Ex.26 ABCP is a quadrant of a circle of radius 14 cm. W ith
(ii) area of the minor segment
AC as diameter, a semicircle is drawn. Find the area of
(iii) area of the major sector
(iv) area of the major segment the shaded portion. (figure)
Sol. Given, r = 14 cm, = 60º

A Q
Q
P
14cm
O
60º
B B 14cm C
A
P Sol. In right angled triangle ABC,

(i) Area of minor sector OAPB = r we have AC2 = AB2 + BC2
360 º
AC2 = 142 + 142
60 º
= × 3.14 × 14 × 14
360 º AC = 2 14 2 = 14 2 cm
= 102.57 cm2 Now required Area
r 2
r 2 = Area APCQA = Area ACQA – Area ACPA
(ii) Area of minor segment APB = – sin
360º 2 = Area ACQA – (Area ABCPA – Area of ABC)
14 14 2
= 102.57 – sin 60º 1 14 2 1 1
2 = × × – (14 ) 2 14 14
2 2 4 2
3 1 22 1 22
= 102.57 – 98 ×
2 = × × 7 2×7 2 – × × 14 × 14 + 7 × 14
2 7 4 7
= 17.80 cm2. = 154 – 154 + 98 = 98 cm 2.
(iii) Area of major sector = Area of circle – Area of minor
Ex.27 Find the area of the shaded region in figure, where
sector OAPB = (14)2 – 102.57 radii of the two concentric circles with centre O are
= 615.44 – 102.57 = 512.87 cm 2 7 cm and 14 cm respectively and AOC = 40°.
(iv) Area of major segment AQB Sol. W e have,
= Area of circle – Area of minor segment APB Area of ring = (R2 – r2) = × (142 – 72) = 462 cm2
= 615.44 – 17.80 = 597.64 cm 2.
AREAS OF COMBINATIONS OF PLANE FIGURES
In our daily life we come across various plane figures, O

which are combinations of two or more plane figures. 7cm
For example, window designs, flower beds, circular B 40° D
paths etc. In this section, we shall discuss problems

of combinations of plane figures.
A C
PAGE # 172
172
Area of the region ABDC Ex.29 A horse is placed for grazing inside a rectangular
= Area of sector AOC – Area of sector BOD field 70 m by 52 m and is tethered to one corner by a
rope 21 m long. On how much area can it graze ?
40 22 14 14 40 22 7 7
= 360 7 360 7 cm2 Sol. Shaded portion indicates the area which the horse
can graze. Clearly, shad ed area is the area of a
1 22 14 2 1 22 7 1 quadrant of a circle of radius r = 21 m.
= 9 9 cm2 1 2
Required area = r
4
22 28 7 154
= cm2 = cm2
9 3 C B
Hence, Required shaded area
154
= 462 3 cm2
52 m
Q
1232
= cm2 = 410.67 cm2
3
O 21 m A
Ex.28 In an equilateral triangle of side 24 cm, a circle is 70 m
inscribed touching its sides. Find the area of the
remaining portion of the triangle [Take 3 = 1.732]. 1 22
Required area = (21)2 cm 2
Sol. Let ABC be an equilateral triangle of side 24 cm, and 4 7
let AD be perpendicular from A on BC. Since the triangle
is equilateral, so AD bisects BC. 693
Required area = cm2 346.5 cm2
A 2
Ex.30 In figure , AOBCA represents a quadrant of a circle of
radius 3.5 cm with centre O. Calculate the area of the
22
shaded portion (Take = ).
O
7
B 12cm D 12cm C B
BD = CD = 12 cm
The centre of the inscribed circle will coincide with the D C
centroid of ABC.
AD
OD =
3 2 cm
In ABD, we have
AB2 = AD2 + BD2 [Using Pythagoras Theorem]
242 = AD2 + 122 O 3.5 m A
AD = 2
24 12 2
= 24 12 24 12 Sol. W e have,
1 2
= 36 12 Area of quadrant AOBCA r
4
= 12 3 cm.
1 22
(3.5)2
1 1 12 3 4 7
OD = AD = cm = 4 3 cm
3 3 = 9.625 cm2
Area of the incircle = (OD)2 1
Area of AOD = Base Height
22 2 2
= 4 3 cm2 1
7 = (3.5)(2) = 3.5 cm2
2
22 48 Hence, Area of the shaded portion
= cm2
7
= Area of quadrant – Area of AOD
= 150.85 cm2 = (9.625 – 3.5) cm2 = 6.125 cm2
3
Area of the triangle ABC = (Side)2
4
3
(24)4 = 249.4 cm2
=
4
Area of the remaining portion of the triangle
= (249.4 – 150.85) cm2 = 98.55 cm2.
PAGE # 173
173
8. ABCD is a rectangle, P lies on AD and Q on AB. The
triangles PAQ, QBC and PCD all have the same area,
and BQ = 2. The length of AQ, is :
1. ABC is an isosceles right triangle with area P. The
radius of the circle that passes through the point A, B (A) 3 5 (B) 2 3
and C is
(C) 5 1
P
(A) P (B) (D) not uniquely determined
2
9. Three parallel lines 1, 2 and 3 are drawn through the
vertices A, B and C of a square ABCD. If the distance
P between 1 and 2 is 7 and between 2 and 3 is 12,
(C) (D) 2P
2 then the area of the square ABCD is :
2. All the 3 sides of a right triangle are integers and one (A) 193 (B) 169
side has a length 11 units. Area of the triangle in square (C) 196 (D) 225
units lies between 10. In a trapezium ABCD with bases AB and CD, where
(A) 1 and 100 (B) 100 and 200 AB = 52, BC = 12, CD = 39 and DA = 5. The area of the
(C) 200 and 300 (D) More than 300 trapezium ABCD, is :
3. In the figure given PM = 10 cm, MN = 15 cm and (A) 182 (B) 195
(C) 210 (D) 260
PN = 17 cm. Also QM = QX and XR = RN. Perimeter
of the PQR, is : 11. ABCD is a rectangle with AB = 12 cm and BC = 7 cm.
Point E is on AD with DE = 2 cm. Point P is on AB. How
far to the right of point. A should point P be placed so
that the shaded area comprises exactly 40% of the
area of the rectangle ?
D C
(A) 32 (B) 27 E
(C) 25 (D) 21
4. A triangle EFG is inscribed in a unit square ABCD with
E on AB, F on DA, G on CD such that AE = DF = CG =
A B
1/3. The area of the triangle EFG is : P
(A) 8 (B) 8.4
5 1 (C) 8.2 (D) 8.6
(A) (B)
18 3 12. Given an isosceles trapeziumABCD in order with AB =
6, CD = 12 and area 36 sq. units. Length of the side BC
5 4 is :
(C) (D)
9 9 (A) 6 (B) 5
(C) 4.5 (D) 5.5
5. A triangle of area 9 × y cm2 has been drawn such that
its area is equal to the area of an equilateral triangle of 13. The length of the side of a rhombus is 10 units and
side 6 cm. Then, the value of y is : its diagonals differ by 4. The area of the rhombus
(A) is :
2 cm (B) 3 cm
(A) 108 (B) 96
(C) 2 cm (D) 3 cm
(C) 84 (D) 48
6. A plot o f lan d is in the shape of a righ t an gled
14. The side lengths of trapezium are 4 3 , 4 3 , 4 3 and
isosceles triangle. The length of the hypotenuse is
50 2 m. The cost of fencing it at Rs. 3 per metre will 2 × 4 3 . Its area in the ratio of two relatively prime
be : positive integers, m and n. The value of (m + n) is
(A) less than Rs. 300 (B) less than Rs. 400 equal to :
(C) more than Rs. 500 (D) more than Rs. 600 (A) 5 (B) 7
7. The perimeter of an isosceles triangle is equal to (C) 9 (D) 13
14 cm, the lateral side is to the base in the ratio 5 : 4. 15. A rectangle is inscribed in a square creating four
The area of the triangle is : isosceles right triangle. If the total area of these four
triangles is 200. The length of the diagonal of the
1 3 rectangle is :
(A) 21 cm2 (B) 21 cm2
2 2
(C) 21 cm2 (D) 2 21 cm2
(A) 10 (B) 15
(C) 20 (D) 25
PAGE # 174
174
16. The cost of levelling a rectangular ground at Rs.1.25 23. A wire in the shape of an equilateral triangle encloses
per sq. metre is Rs 900. If the length of the ground is an area of S sq. cm. If the same wire is bent to form of
30 metres, then the width is : a circle. The area of the circle will be :
(A) 330 metres (B) 34 metres
(C) 24 metres (D) 18 metres S2 3S 2
(A) (B)
9
17. A rectangular lawn 60 metres by 40 metres has two
roads each 5 metres wide running in the middle of it, 3S 3 3S
(C) (D)
one parallel to length and the other parallel to breadth.
The cost of gravelling the roads at 60 paise per sq. 24. In the adjoining figure, the radius of the inner circle, if
metre is : other circles are of radii 1 m, is :
(A) Rs. 300 (B) Rs. 280
(C) Rs. 285 (D) Rs. 250 (A) 2 1m
(B) 2m
18. A circle passes through the three vertices of an isos-
1
celes triangle that has sides of length 3 and a base of (C) m
length 2. The area of the circle is 2
9 81 (D) 2 2 m
(A) (B)
4 32
27 5 25. Points M and N are the midpoints of sides PA and PB
(C) (D) of PAB. As P moves along a line that is parallel to side
16 2
AB, which one of the four quantities listed below will
19. Two circles, each with radius 6 , intersect in the two change ?
points A and B. For each of the circles diameters from (A) the length of the segment MN
point A are drawn and the opposite ends C and D (B) the perimeter of PAB
connected to point B. If the area of figure ACBD is (C) the area of PAB
2 11 , then the length of AB may have : (D) the area of trapezium ABNM
(A) two rational values 26. In this figure, AOB is a quarter circle of radius 10 and
(B) only one rational value PQRO is a rectangle of perimeter 26. The perimeter of
(C) one irrational and one rational value the shaded region is :
(D) two irrational values
B
20. Two circles I and II are externally tangent. A tangent to
the circle I passes through the centre of the circle II.
The distance from the point of tangency to the centre of Q
R
the circle II is three times the radius of the circle II. The
ratio of the c ircu mferen ce o f th e circ le I to th e
circumference of the circle II.
(A) 2 (B) 3
O P A
(C) 4 (D) 16
(A) 13 + 5 (B) 17 + 5
21. In the g iven fig ure, the diam eter o f th e bigg est
(C) 7 + 10 (D) 7 + 5
semi-circle is 56 cm and the radius of the smallest
circle is 7 cms. The area of the shaded portion is : 27. W hich one of the following statement is INCORRECT?
(A) A cyclic parallelogram is a rectangle.
(B) Set of points joining the middle points of all parallel
chords of a circle constitute the longest chord of the
circle.
(C) Total surface area of a hemisphere is 2 r2.
(D) A fair coin is tossed. The chance that it shows up
(A) 482 cm2 (B) 462 cm2
(C) 654 cm2 (D) 804 cm2 head is 50%.
22. In the given figure, OPQR is a rhombus, three of whose 28. Each of the congruent circles shown is externally tan-
vertices lie on a circle with centre O. If the area of gent to other circles and/or to the side(s) of the rect-
rhombus is 32 3 cm2. The radius of circle is : angle as shown. If each circle has circumference 16 ,
then the length of a diagonal of the rectangle, is :
(A) 8
(B) 9
(C) 10
(D) 11
(A) 80 (B) 40
(C) 20 (D) 15
PAGE # 175
175
29. ABCD is a rectangle and lines DX, DY and XY are 3. A thin wire is bent into the form of a circle of radius
drawn as shown. Area of AXD is 5, Area of BXY is 4 7 cm. If a square is made out of this wire, the side of
and area of CYD is 3. If the area of DXY can be the square would be : (NTSE Stage -I/Bihar/2009)
expressed as x where x N then x is equal to (A) 7 cm (B) 14 cm
X
A B (C) 11 cm (D) 22 cm
4. As shown in the figure diameter of outer circle is
Y
12 cm. Ratio of shaded area of upper semi circle to
D C that of the shaded area in the lower semicircle.
(A) 72 (B) 75 (NTSE Stage -I/Raj./2009)
(C) 84 (D) 96
30. A square with side length 1 is inscribed in a semicircle
such that one side of the square is on the diameter of
the semicircle. The perimeter of the semicircle is :
5
(A) 5 (B) 3 cm 3 cm
2 3 cm 3 cm
5 1 5
(C) (D) 1
2 2
31. A child draws the figure of an
aeroplane as given. Here the E F
wings EDCF and AGHB are
parallelograms, the tail ADK D C (A) 1 : 1 (B) 11 : 3
is an isosceles triangle, the P
L (C) 4 : 3 (D) 8 : 27
cockpit BLC is a semi-circle K
Q 5. The area of a rh ombus is 28 cm 2 and one of its
and the portion ABCD is a A B diagonals in 4cm. Its perimeter is :
square.
Let FP CD & HQ AB, G H (NTSE Stage -I/Raj. 2011)
AB = 6 cms. KD = 5 cms
(A) 4 53 (B) 36 cm
FP = HQ = 2 cms
The area of the figure is:[ = 3.14]
(A) 86.14 cm2 (B) 87.25 cm2 (C) 2 53 (D) 53 cm
2
(C) 84.63 cm (D) 91.56 cm2
6. The area of a trapezium shaped field is 960 m 2 the
distance between two parallel sides is 30 m. and one
of the parallel side is 20 m. Find the length of other
parallel side. (NTSE Stage -I/Raj. 2012)
(A) 44 m. (B) 22 m.
1. In the given figure, AB = 4 cm, BC = 3cm, the area of
shaded portion is : [Raj. NTSE Stage-1 2005] (C) 88 m. (D) 11 m.
7. The perimeter of square and circumference of Circle
are equal, the area of square is 121 m2, then the area
of circle is : [Raj. NTSE Stage-1 2013]
(A) 7 m2 (B) 14 m2
(C) 21 m2 (D) 49 m2
8. A circle is inscribed in an equilateral triangle of side 'a'
cm. The area (in cm 2) of a square inscribed in the
(A) 6.25 cm2 (B) 7.64 cm2 circle is : [Harayana NTSE Stage-1 2013]
(C) 12 cm2 (D) 19.64 cm2 (A) a2/6 (B) a2/3
2. In the following figure, if O is the centre of the circle and (C) 3a2/4 (D) a2/12
radius OA = 14 cm, then the area of the shaded portion 9. In figure, ABC is a quadrant of a circle of radius 14
is : [Raj. NTSE Stage-1 2006]
cm and a semicircle is drawn with BC as diameter.
The area of the shaded region is
B
O
A
A C
(A) 98 cm2 (B) 154 cm2
(A) 7 cm2 (B) 49 cm2
(C) 56 cm2 (D) None of these
(C) 98 cm2 (D) 196 cm2
PAGE # 176
176
10. The perimeters of a reqular hexagon and a square are 14. A circle with area A cm2 is contained in the interior of a
equal. The ratio of the area of the square to the area of larger circle with area (A + B) cm2 and the radius of the
the hexagon is : [Harayana NTSE Stage-1 2014]
larger circle is 4 cm. If A, B, A + B are in airthmatic
(A) 3 : 2 (B) 2 : 3 3 progression, then the diameter (in cm) of the smaller
circle is : (NTSE Stage-2 /2015)
(C) 1 : 3 (D) 3 : 2 3
11. In the figure given below, ABC is an equilateral triangle. 3 4 3
(A) (B)
D, E, F, G, H and I are the trisector points of the sides 2 3
as shown. If the side of the triangle ABC is 6 cm, then
the area of the regular hexagon DEFGHI is
[Raj. NTSE Stage-1 2014] 8 3
(C) (D) 2 3
3
A
15. Each of sides of a triangle is 8 cm less than the sum of
H G its other two sides. Area of the triangle (in cm2) is
 I F (A) 8 (B) 8 3
(C) 16 (D) 16 3
B D E C
16. A sector with acute central angle is cut from a circle of
(A) 3 3 cm2 (B) 4 3 cm2 diameter 14 cm. The area (in cm2) of the circle circum-
scribing the sector is : (NTSE Stage-2 /2015)
(C) 5 3 cm2 (D) 6 3 cm2
12. In the given figure, ABC is an equilateral triangle

22 77
(A) sec2 (B) sec2
7 2 2
whose side is 2 3 cm. A circle is drawn which
passes through the midpoints D, E and F of its 77 77
sides. The area of the shaded region is (C) cos2 (D) sec2
[Raj. NTSE Stage-1 2014] 2 2 2 2
17. In the figure PQSO, is a trapezium in which PQ || OS,
POS = 135° and OSQ = 90° points P, Q and R lie on
a circle with centre O and radius 12 cm. The area of the
shaded part, in cm2, is (NTSE Stage-2 /2015)

P Q
1 1
(A) 4 – 3 3 cm 2 (B) 2 – 3 cm 2
4 4
1 1 135°
(C) – 3 3 cm 2 (D) 3 – 3 cm 2 R
4 4 O S
2 5
(A) 61 (B) 61
13. In the given figure, AB = 4 cm and BD = 4 3 cm. Then 7 7
the relation between [area of triangle ADC] and S 5 2
(C) 73 (D) 73
(shaded area bounded by three semicircles) is : 7 7
[Harayana NTSE Stage-1 2014] 18. In the figure, ABCD is a square of side 1 dm and
D PAQ = 45°. The perimeter (in dm) of the triangle PQC
is (NTSE Stage-2 /2015)
A D
A P
B C
(A) >S (B) < S
(C) =S (D) None of the above B C
Q
(A) 2 (B) 1 + 2
(C) 2 2 – 1 (D) 1 + 3
PAGE # 177
177
19. Equilateral triangles I, II, III and IV are such that the 21. Pentagon ABCDE is such that all five diagonals AC,
altitude of triangle I is the side of triangle II, the altitude BD, CE, DA and EB lie entirely with in it. If the area of
of triangle II is the side of triangle III and the altitue of each of the triangle ABC, BCD, CDE, DEA and EAB is
the triangle is the side of triangle IV. If the area of triangle equal to 1 cm2, the area of the pantagon is :
I is 2 cm2 , then the area (in cm2) of triangle IV is : [Haryana NTSE Stage-1 2016]
5 5 3 5
9 (A) cm2 (B) cm2
3 2 2
(A) (B)
2 16
5 5 5– 5
27 45 (C) cm2 (D) cm2
(C) (D) 2 2
32 64
22. A cow is tied with a rope of length 12 m at a corner of
20. ABC is a rig ht angled triangle with A = 90 °, rectangular field of dimensions 25 m × 45 m. If the
AB = b cm, AC = a cm, and BC = c cm A circle is length of the rope is increased to 23m, then the addi-
inscribed in this triangle. The radius of the circle, tional grassy area in which the cow can graze is (Take
in cm, is : [Haryana NTSE Stage-1 2016] 22
= ) [Raj. NTSE Stage-1 2017]
1 7
(A) a + b – c (B) (a + b – c)
2 (A) 300.5 m2 (B) 312.5 m2
1 (C) 315.5 m2 (D) 302.5 m2

(C) (a – b + c) (D) 2 2 2
2 a b c
PAGE # 178
178
(i) C.S.A. of cylinder = (2 r) × h = 2 rh.

(ii) Total Surface Area (T.S.A.) :
If any fig ure su ch as cu bo id , wh ic h has th ree
dimensions length, width and height are known as T.S.A. = C.S.A. + circular top & bottom
three dimensional figures. W here as rectangle has = 2 rh + 2 r2
only two dimensions i.e. length and width. Three = 2 r (h + r) sq. units.
dimensional figures have volume in addition to areas
of surface from which these solid figures are formed. (iii) Volume of cylinder :
Some of the main solid figures are : Volume = Area of base × height
= ( r2) × h
= r2h cubic units
Total Surface Area (T.S.A.) : The area of surface from
wh ic h cu bo id is fo rm ed . Th ere are six faces
(rectangular), eight vertices and twelve edges in a
cuboid.
(i) C.S.A. = r
(ii) T.S.A. = C.S.A. + other area

(i) Total Surface Area (T.S.A.) = 2 [ × b + b × h + h × ]
= r + r2
(ii) Lateral Surface Area (L.S.A.) = 2 [b × h + h × ] = r ( + r)
(or Area of 4 walls) = 2 h [ + b]
1
(iii) Volume of Cuboid = (Area of base) × height (iii) Volume = r2h
= ( × b) × h 3
W here, h = height
(iv) Length of diagonal = 2
b2 h2 r = radius of base
= slant height
Cube has six faces. Each face is a square.

T.S.A. = S.A. = 4 r2
4
Volume = r3
3
(i) T.S.A. = 2 [x x + x x + x x] C.S.A. = 2 r2

= 2 [x2 + x2 + x2] = 2 (3x2) = 6x2 T.S.A. = C.S.A. + other area
(ii) L.S.A. = 2 [x2 + x2] = 4x2 = 2 r2 + r2
(iii) Volume = (Area of base) × Height) = 3 r2
= (x2) x = x3 2
Volume = r3
(iv) Length of diagonal = x 3 3
Curved surface area of cylinder (C.S.A.) : It is the W hen a cone is cut by a plane parallel to base, a small
area of surface from which the cylinder is formed. W hen cone is obtained at top and other part is obtained at
we cut this cylinder, we will find a rectangle with length bottom. This is known as ‘Frustum of Cone’.
2 r and height h units. A
1 – h1– h
1
D Er h1
2
h
r1
B
C
PAGE # 179
179
ABC ~ ADE Ex.2 An iron rod of length 1 m and diameter 4 cm is melted
AC AB BC and cast into thin wires of length 20 cm each. If the
AE AD DE number of such wires be 2000, find the radius of each
h1 r1 thin wire.
1
h1 h r2 Sol. Let the radius of each thin wire be r cm. Then, the sum
1
of the volumes of 2000 thin wires will be equal to the
h1 1 r1 volume of the iron rod. Now, the shape of the iron rod
Or
h r1 r2 and each thin wire is cylindrical.
Volume of Frustum Hence, the volume of the iron rod of radius 2 cm
= × 22 × 100 cm3
1 1
= r 2h – r 2 (h1 – h) Again, the volume of each thin wire = r2 × 20
3 1 1 3 2
Hence, we have
1 × 22 × 100 = 2000 × r2 × 20
= [r12 h1 – r22 (h1 – h)]
3 400 r2 = 4
1 r1h r1h 1
r1
2
r2
2
h r2 =
= 3 r1 r2 r1 r2 100
1
3 3 r= [Taking positive square root only]
1 r1 r2 10
= 3 h r r
1 2 1
Hence, the required radius of each thin wire is cm
1 10
2 2
= h r1 r2 r1r2 or 0.1 cm.
3
Curved Surface Area of Frustum = r1 – r2( Ex.3 By melting a solid cylindrical metal, a few conical
1–
1
)
materials are to be made. If three times the radius of
r1 r1
= r1 r2 the cone is equal to twice the radius of the cylinder and
r1 r2 r1 r2
the ratio of the height of the cylinder and the height of
2 2 the cone is 4 : 3, find the number of cones which can
r1 r2
= be made.
r1 r2 r1 r2
Sol. Let R be the radius and H be the height of the cylinder
= (r1 + r2) and let r and h be the radius and height of the cone
respectively. Then,
Total Surface Area of a Frustum
3r = 2R
= CSA of frustum + r1 2 + r22
and H : h = 4 : 3 ....(i)
= (r1 + r2) + r1 2 + r22
H 4
Slant height of a Frustum = h2 (r1 r2 )2 h 3
where, 3H = 4h ....(ii)
h = height of the frustum
Let n be the required number of cones which can be
r1 = radius of larger circular end
r2 = radius of smaller circular end made from the materials of the cylinder. Then, the
volume of the cylinder will be equal to the sum of the
Ex. 1 How many balls, each of radius 1 cm, can be made
volumes of n cones. Hence, we have
from a solid sphere of lead of radius 8 cm ?
n
Sol. Volume of the spherical ball of radius 8 cm R 2H = r2h
3
4 3R2H = nr2h
× 83 cm3 =
3
Also, volume of each smaller spherical ball of radius 1 cm 9r 2 4h
2 3
4 n = 3R H 4 3
= × 13 cm3. r 2h 2
r h
3
Let n be the number of smaller balls that can be made. 3r 4h
[ From (i) and (ii), R = and H = ]
Then, the volume of the larger ball is equal to the sum 2 3
of all the volumes of n smaller balls.
3 9 4
4 4 n=
Hence, ×n= × 83 3 4
3 3
n = 9.
n = 83 = 512
Hence, the required number of balls = 512. Hence, the required number of cones is 9.
PAGE # 180
180
Ex.4 The base diameter of a solid in the form of a cone is 6 Ex.7 W ater flows at the rate of 10 m per minute through a
cm and the height of the cone is 10 cm. It is melted and
cylindrical pipe having its diameter as 5 mm. How
recast into spherical balls of diameter 1 cm. Find the
number of balls, thus obtained. much time will it take to fill a conical vessel whose
Sol. Let the number of spherical balls be n. Then, the diameter of the base is 40 cm and depth 24 cm?
volume of the cone will be equal to the sum of the 5 1
volumes of the spherical balls. The radius of the base Sol. Diameter of the pipe = 5 mm = cm = cm.
10 2
6 1 1 1
of the cone = cm = 3 cm Radius of the pipe = × cm = cm.
2 2 2 4
1 In 1 minute, the length of the water column in the
and the radius of the sphere = cm.
2 cylindrical pipe = 10 m = 1000 cm.
Now, the volume of the cone
Volume of water that flows out of the pipe in 1 minute
1
=× 32 × 10 cm3 = 30 cm3 1 1
3 = × × × 1000 cm3.
and, the volume of each sphere 4 4
3 1
4 1 Also, volume of the cone = × × 20 × 20 × 24 cm3.
= cm3 = cm3 3
3 2 6
Hence, the time needed to fill up this conical vessel
Hence, we have
1 1 1
= 20 20 24 1000 minutes
n = 30 n = 6 × 30 = 180 3 4 4
6
Hence, the required number of balls = 180.
20 20 24 4 4 4 24 16
Ex.5 A conical empty vessel is to be filled up completely by = = minutes
3 1000 30
pouring water into it successively with the help of a
cylindrical can of diameter 6 cm and height 12 cm. The 256
radius of the conical vessel is 9 cm and its height is = minutes = 51.2 minutes.
5
72 cm. How many times will it require to pour water
Hence, the required time is 51.2 minutes.
into the conical vessel to fill it completely, if, in each
time, the cylindrical can is filled with water completely? 3
Ex.8 A hemispherical tank of radius 1 m is full of water. It
Sol. Let n be the required number of times. Then, the 4
volume of the conical vessel will be equal to n times is connected with a pipe which empties it at the rate of
the volume of the cylindrical can. 7 liters per second. How much time will it take to empty
Now, the volume of the conical vessel
the tank completely?
1
= × 92 × 72 cm3 = 24 × 81 cm3 7
3 Sol. Radius of the hemisphere = m = 175 cm
And the volume of the cylindrical can 4
= × 32 × 12 cm3 = 9 × 12 cm3 Volume of the hemisphere
2
Hence, 24 × 81 = 9 × 12 × n = × × 175 × 175 × 175 cm3
3
24 81 The cylindrical pipe empties it at the rate of 7 litres i.e.,
n= = 18
9 12
7000 cm3 of water per second.
Hence, the required number of times = 18.
Hence, the required time to empty the tank
Ex.6 The height of a right circular cylinder is equal to its
diameter. If it is melted and recast into a sphere of 2 22
radius equal to the radius of the cylinder, find the part = 175 175 175 7000 s
3 7
of the material that remained unused.
Sol. Let h be height of the cylinder. Then, its diameter is h
h 2 22 175 175 175
and so its radius is . H en ce, its vo lu me is = min
2 3 7 7000 60
2
h h3
V1 = .h 11 25 7 1925
2 4 = min = min
h 3 2 12 72
Again, the radius of the sphere =
2 ~ 26.74 min. nearly.
Hence, the volume of the sphere is
3 Ex. 9 A well of diameter 2 m is dug 14 m deep. The earth
4 h h3
V2 = taken out of it is spread evenly all around it to a width of
3 2 6
The volume of the unused material = V1 – V2 5 m to form an embankment. Find the height of the
h3 h3 h3 (3 – 2 ) h3 1 h3 1 embankment.
= – V1
4 6 12 12 3 4 3 Sol. Let h be the required height of the embankment.
Hence, the required volume of the unused material is The shape of the embankment will be like the shape
1 of a cylinder of internal radius 1 m and external radius
equal to rd of the volume of the cylinder..
3
(5 + 1) m = 6 m [figure ].
PAGE # 181
181
The volume of the embankment will be equal to the Ex.11 A bucket is 40 cm in diameter at the top and 28 cm in
volume of the earth dug out from the well. Now, the diameter at the bottom. Find the capacity of the bucket in
volume of the earth = volume of the cylindrical well litres, if it is 21 cm deep. Also, find the cost of tin sheet
= × 12 × 14 m3 = 14 m3 used in making the bucket, if the cost of tin is Rs 1.50 per
Also, the volume of the embankment sq dm.
2 2 3 3 Sol. Given : r1 = 20 cm, r2 = 14 cm and h = 21 cm
= (6 – 1 ) h cm = 35 hm
6m 1m
14 m
Now, the required capacity (i.e., volume ) of the bucket
h 2
Hence, we have = (r + r1 r2 + r22)
3 1
35 h = 14
22 21
h=
14 2
= 0.4 = (202 + 20 × 14 + 142) cm3
7 3
35 5
= 22 × 876 cm3
Hence, the required height of the embankment = 0.4
= 19272 cm3
m
19272
Ex.10 W ater in a canal, 30 dm wide and 12 dm deep, is = litres = 19.272 litres.
1000
flowing with a speed of 10 km/hr. How much area will
it irrigate in 30 minutes, if 8 cm of standing water is Now,
required for irrigation.
= (r1 – r2 )2 h2
Sol. Speed of water in the canal = 10 km/h
500 = (20 – 14 )2 212 cm

= 10000 m/60 min = m/min.
3
The volume of the water flowing out of the canal in = 62 212 cm
500 30 12 = 36 441 cm
1 minute = m3 = 600 m3
3 10 10
= 477 cm
In 30 min, the amount of water flowing out of the 21.84 cm.
canal = (600 × 30) m3 = 18000 m3 Total surface area of the bucket (which is open at the top)
2
If the required area of the irrigated land is x m , then
= (r1 + r2) + r22
the volume of water to be needed to irrigate the land
= [(r1+ r2) + r22 ]
8 2x 3
= x m3 = m 22
100 25 20 14 21.84 14 2
=
7
2x = 2949.76 cm2.
Hence, = 18000
25
Required cost of the tin sheet at the rate of Rs 1.50
per dm2 i.e., per 100 cm2
25
x = 18000 × = 225000
2 1.50 2949.76
= Rs Rs 44.25.
2 100
Hence, the required area is 225000 m .
PAGE # 182
182
Ex. 12 A cone is divided into two parts by drawing a plane
through a point which divides its height in the ratio
1 : 2 starting from the vertex and the plane is parallel to
the base. Compare the volume of the two parts.
1. A hollow cube of internal edge 22 cm is filled with
Sol. Let the plane XY divide the cone ABC in the ratio AE :
sph eric al m arbles o f diam eter 0 .5 c m an d it is
ED = 1 : 2, where AED is the axis of the cone. Let
r2 and r1 be the radii of the circular section XY and the 1
assumed that space of the cube remains unfilled.
base BC of the cone respectively and let h 1 – h and 8
h1 be their heights [figure]. Th en the nu mb er o f m arbles th at the cu be c an
accommodate is :
(A) 142296 (B) 142396
(C) 142496 (D) 142596
2. The volume of a cube (in cubic cm) plus three times
the total length of its edges (in cms) is equal to twice
its surface area (in sq. cm). The length of its diagonal
is :
(A) 6 (B) 6 3
(C) 3 6 (D) 6 6
3. The length, breadth and height of a room are in the

ratio 3: 2: 1. If the breadth and height are halved while
h1 3 3 the length is doubled, then the total area of the four
Then, h1 = h walls of the room will :
h 2 2
(A) remain the same
3 (B) decrease by 30%
h
r1 h1 2 (C) decrease by 15%
And =3
r2 h1 h 1 (D) decrease by 18.75%
h
2
r1 = 3r2 4. An aquarium has a rectangular base that measure
Volume of cone AXY 100 cm by 40 cm and has height of 50 cm. It is filled
with water to a height of 40 cm. A brick with a rectangular
1 base measures 40 cm by 20 cm and a height of 10 cm
= r22 (h1 – h)
3 is placed in the aquarium. The water level (in cm) rises
by
1 3 (A) 0.5 (B) 1
= r22 ( h – h)
3 2 (C) 1.5 (D) 2
5. The sides of cube are increased by 100%. The percent
1 2
= r h increase in the volume of the cube is :
6 2
(A) 800 (B) 700
Volume of frustum XYBC (C) 500 (D) 100
1 6. If the surface area of cube A is 64% of the surface area

= h(r12 + r22 + r1r2) of cube B, then the volume of cube A is ‘k’ percent of the
3
volume of cube B. The value of ‘k’ is
(A) 0.64 (B) 0.512
1
= h(9r22 + r22 + 3r22) (C) 51.2 (D) 64
3
1 7. If the radius of a right circular cylinder is increased

= h(13r22)
3 by 50% and height is decreased by 20% then the
percentage change in volume of cylinder is
1 2
r2 h (A) 40% (B) 50%
Volume of cone AXY 6
So, 13 (C) 60% (D) 80%
Volume of frustum XYBC 2
r2 h
3 8. John’s birthday cake is a delightful cylinder of radius 6
Volume of cone AXY 1 inches and height 3 inches, If these friends cut the
Volume of frustum XYBC = 26 . cake into 8 equal sectors, the total surface area of a
i.e., the ratio between the volume of the cone AXY and piece of birthday cake in sq. inches, is :
the remaining portion BCYX is 1 : 26. 27
(A) 9( + 4) (B)
2
9
(C) 4( + 4) (D) (3 + 8)
2
PAGE # 183
183
9. A rectangular tin sheet is 12 cm long and 5 cm broad. 18. The slant height of a cone is increased by P%. If radius
It is rolled along its length to form a cylinder by making remains same, the curved surface area is increased
the opposite edges just to touch each other. The vol-
by :
ume of the cylinder (in cm3) is :
180 120 (A) P % (B) P2 %
(A) (B) (C) 2 P % (D) None of these
100 60 19. It is required to construct a conical circus tent of radius
(C) (D)
21 m and 35 m slant height. The width of the canvas
10. If the radius of the base of a right circular cylinder is cloth is 3 meters. W hat will be the length of the cloth
halved, keeping the height same, what is the ratio of which shall do the needful ?
the volume of the volume of the reduced cylinder to that (A) 700 m (B) 1250 m
of the original one ? (C) 776.5 m (D) 770 m
(A) 1 : 4 (B) 1 : 8
(C) 1 : 2 (D) 8 : 1
11. The radius of a wire is decreased to one-third. If vol- 20. A lead ball of radius 24 cm is melted down and recast
ume remains the same, the length will become : into smaller balls of radius 6 cm. Assuming that no
(A) 1 time (B) 3 times metal is lost in this process, number of complete
(C) 6 times (D) 9 times smaller balls that can be made, is :
(A) 4 (B) 16
12. Two steel sheets each of length a1 and breadth a2 are (C) 36 (D) 64
used to prepare the surface of two right circular cylin-
21. If a hemi-spherical dome has an inner diameter of 28
ders-one having volume V1 and height a2 and the other
m, then its volume (in m3) is :
having volume V2 and height a1. Then.
(A) 6186.60 (B) 5749.33
(A) V1 = V2 (B) a1V1 = a2V2
(C) 7099.33 (D) 7459.33
V12 V22 22. Three solid spherical beads of radii 3 cm, 4 cm and 5
(C) a2V1 = a1V2 (D) =
a1 a2 cm are melted into a spherical bead. Its radius is :
(A) 6 cm (B) 7 cm
(C) 8 cm (D) 9 cm
13. If the radii of the circular ends of a bucket of height 23. If a solid sphere of radius 10 cm is moulded into 8
40 cm are 35 cm and 14 cm respectively, then the spherical solid balls of equal radius, then the surface
area of each ball (in sq. cm) is :
volume of the bucket in cubic centimeters is : (A) 100 (B) 75
(A) 60060 (B) 80080 (C) 60 (D) 50
(C) 70070 (D) 80160
24. The radius of a sphere is increases by P%. Its surface
14. If a cone is cut into two parts by a horizontal plane
area increase by :
passing through the mid-point of its axis, the ratio of
the volumes of the upper part and the cone is: (A) P % (B) P2 %
(A) 1 : 2 (B) 1 : 4 P2
2P % P2
(C) 1 : 6 (D) 1 : 8 (C) (D) %
100 2
15. A reservoir is in the shape of a frustum of a right circular
cone. It is 8 m across at the top and 4 m across at the
bottom. If it is 6 m deep its capacity is :
25. A medicine-capsule is in the shape of a cylinder of
(A) 176 m3 (B) 196 m3
(C) 200 m3 (D) 110 m3 diameter 0.5 cm with two hemisphere stuck to each of
16. A right circular cone is cut off at the middle of its height its ends. The length of entire capsule is 2 cm. The
and parallel to the base. Call the smaller cone so capacity of the capsule is :
formed as A and the remaining part as B, then: (A) 0.36 cm3 (B) 0.40 cm3
(A) Vol. A < Vol. B (B) Vol. A = Vol. B (C) 0.45 cm 3
(D) 0.30 cm3
1
(C) Vol A > Vol. B (D) Vol. A = (Vol. B) 26. The volume of the greatest sphere that can be cut off
2
from a cylindrical log of wood of base radius 3 cm and
17. The height of a cone is 30 cm. A small cone is cut off at
the top by a plane parallel to the base. If its volume be height 7 cm is :
1 (A) 108 cm3 (B) 36 cm3
of the volume of the given cone, at what height
27 4
(C) 12 cm3 (D) cm3
above the base, the section has been made ? 3
(A) 10 cm (B) 15 cm
(C) 20 cm (D) 25 cm
PAGE # 184
184
27. A sphere is inscribed in a cone of radius 3 3 and
slant height 6 3 . The radius of the sphere, is :
1. The dimension of a cuboid is 18 cm × 12 cm × 9 cm.

How many cubes of side 3 cm can be made by melting
the cuboid ? [Raj. NTSE Stage-1 2006]
(A) 72 (B) 69
(C) 60 (D) 55
2. If radii of two cones are in the ratio 3 : 1 and heights
are in the ratio 1:3, then the ratio of their volumes is :
(A) 3 (B) 3 3 (A) 3 : 1 (B) 2 : 1
(C) 1 : 3 (D) 1 : 2
3 3
(C) 6 3 (D) 3. Areas of six surfaces of a cuboid are 12, 12, 20, 20,
2
28. The number of solid spheres, each of diameter 6 cm and 15, 15 sq. cm respectively. Volume of this cuboid
that could be moulded to form a solid metal cylinder of in cm3 is : (NTSE Stage - I/Raj. /2007)
height 45 cm and diameter 4 cm, is : (A) 12 (B) 15
(A) 3 (B) 4 (C) 60 (D) 94
(C) 5 (D) 6
4. Radius and height of a cylinder are 7 cm and 14 cm
29. If the height and diameter of a right circular cylinder are respectively. It is divided along its axis vertically into
32 cm and 6 cm respectively, then the radius of the equal parts. The increase in its total surface area is :
sphere whose volume is equal to the volume of the (NTSE Stage - I/Raj. /2008)
cylinder is : (A) 392 sq. cm (B) 308 sq. cm
(A) 3 cm (B) 4 cm
(C) 196 sq. cm (D) 154 sq. cm
(C) 6 cm (D) None
5. The moon diameter is approximately one fourth of the
30. W ater flows at the rate of 10 m per min. from a cylindri-
cal pipe 5 mm in diameter. How long will it take to fill up diam eter o f th e earth. Volum e of m oo n is w hat
a conical vessel whose diameter at the base is 40 cm fraction the volume of earth :
and depth 24 cm. ? (NTSE-StageI/Himachal/2008)
(A) 48 min. 15 sec. (B) 51 min. 12 sec.
1 1
(C) 52 min. I sec. (D) 55 min. (A) (B)
64 8
31. A hollow spherical ball whose inner radius is 4 cm is
1
full of water. Half of the water is transferred to a conical (C) (D) None of these
4
cup and it completely filled the cup. If the height of the
cup is 2 cm, then the radius of the base of cone in cm 6. The volume of a box is given by v = x3 – 2x2 – 24x. If the
is : depth of the box be the smallest, then the depth is :
(A) 4 (B) 10 (NTSE Stage -I/Dehli/2009)
(C) 8 (D) 16 (A) (x – 3) (B) (x – 6)
(C) (x – 4) (D) (x – 8)
32. A is a right circular cylinder on which a cone B is placed.
7. A cone, a right cylinder and a hemi shpere stand on
The entire structure is melted and spheres are formed
equal bases and have the same height. Their volumes
each having radius 1 cm. How many spheres can be
are in the ratio : (NTSE Stage -I/Bihar/2009)
formed ?
(A) 1 : 2 : 3 (B) 1 : 3 : 2
B
(A) 18 (C) 2 : 3 : 1 (D) 2 : 1 : 3
(B) 20 8. If a sphere and a rectangular cylinder having equal
A radius, the height of the cylinder is double of its radius,
(C) 21
then the ratio of volumes of sphere and cylinder is :
(D) 23 (NTSE Stage -I/Raj. 2010)
(A) 1 : 2 (B) 2 : 1
(C) 2 : 3 (D) 3 : 2
9. The largest sphere is cut off from a cube of side 5 cm.
The volume of the sphere will be :
(NTSE Stage -I/Raj. 2011)
125
(A) 27 cm3 (B) cm3
6
(C) 108 cm3 (D) 30 cm3
PAGE # 185
185
10. Find the volume of a Cube whose surface area is 16. A right circular cylinder has its height equal to two times
600 cm . 2
(NTSE Stage -I/Raj. 2012) its radius. It is inscribed in a right circular cone having
(A) 900 cm3 (B) 1000 cm3 its diameter equal to10 cm and height 12 cm, and the
(C) 1500 cm3 (D) 810 cm3 axes of both the cylinder and the cone coincide. Then,
the volume (in cm3) of the cylinder is approximately.
11. From a 25 cm × 35 cm rectangular cardboard, an
open box is to be made by cutting out identical squares (NTSE Stage-2 /2015)
of area 25 cm2 from each corner and turning up the (A) 107.5 (B) 118.6
sides. The volume of the box is : (C) 127.5 (D) 128.7
(A) 3000 cm3 (B) 1875 cm3 17. An empty pool being filled with water at a constant
(C) 21875 cm3 (D) 1250 cm3
3
12. Let P (4, k) be any point on the line y = 6 –x. If the vertical rate takes 8 hours to fill th of its capacity. How
5
segment PQ is rotated about y – axis, the volume of the much more time will it take to finish filling the pool?
resulting cylinder is : [Delhi NTSE Stage-1 2013] [Delhi NTSE Stage-1 2016]
(A) 5 hours 30 minutes
(B) 5 hours 20 minutes
(C) 4 hours 48 minutes
(D) 4 hours 50 minutes
18. A solid metallic sphere of radius r is converted into a

solid right circular cylinder of radius R. If the height of
(A) 32 (B) 16 the cylinder is twice the radius of the sphere then :
32
(C) (D) 8
3 r 2
(A) R = r (B) R =
13. T he surface w ater in a sw im ming p oo l fo rm s a 3
rectangle of length 40 m and breadth 15m. The depth
of water increases uniformly from 1.2m at one end to 2r 3r
2.4m at the other end. The volume (in m3) of water in (C) R = (D) R =
3 2
the pool is : [Harayana NTSE Stage-1 2013]
(A)1080 (B) 720 19. If the edge of a regular tetrahedron is 1 cm, then its
(C) 600 (D) 540 volume is [West Bengal NTSE Stage-1 2016]
14. If a right circular cone, with slant height , and a right
circular cylinder have the same radius r, same total 1 2
(A) cm3 (B) cm3
surface area and heights h and h' respectivley, then 12 6
–r
= [Harayana NTSE Stage-1 2014] 2 2
r (C) cm3 (D) cm3
(A) h/h’ (B) 2h/h' 12 4
(C) h/2h' (D) 2h'/h
15. A solid sphere is cut into identical pieces by three 20. If a metallic sphere of radius 6 cm is melted and
mutually perpendicular plane passing through its cen-
recast into the shape of a cylinder of radius 3 cm,
tre. Increase in total surface area of all the pieces with then the height of the cylinder is
respect to the total surface area of the original sphere [Raj. NTSE Stage-1 2017]
is (NTSE Stage-2 /2015) (A) 30 cm (B) 25 cm
(A) 250% (B) 175% (C) 35 cm (D) 32 cm
(C) 150% (D) 125%
PAGE # 186
186
(v) Class limits : The lowest and the highest value of

th e class are kn ow n as low er and u pp er lim its
Statistics deals with collection of numerical facts i.e., respectively of that class.
data, th eir classification & tab ulatio n an d th eir
(vi) Class mark : The average of the lower and the
interpretation.
upper limits of a class is called the mid value or the
class mark of that class. It is generally denoted by x.
On the basis of methods of collection, data can be If x be the mid value and h be the class interval, then
divided into two categories : h h
the class limits are x ,x .
(i) Primary data : Data which are collected for the first 2 2
time by the statistical investigator or with help of his
workers is called primary data.
(ii) Secondary data : These are the data already The marks scored by 30 students of IX class, of a
collected by a person or a society and these may be in school in the first test of Mathematics out of 50 marks
published or unpublished form. These are generally are as follows :
obtained from the following two sources.
6 32 10 17 22 28 0 48 6 22
(A) Published sources
32 6 36 26 48 10 32 48 28 22
(B) Unpublished sources 22 22 28 26 17 36 10 22 28 0
The number of times a mark is repeated is called its

frequency. It is denoted by f.
W hen the data is compiled in the same form and order
Marks Marks
in which it is collected, it is known as Raw Data, It is Obtained Tally mark Frequency Obtained Tally mark Frequency
also called Crude Data. For example, the marks 0 II 2 26 II 2
obtained by 20 students of class IX in English out of 6 III 3 28 IIII 4
10 marks are as follows : 10 III 3 32 III 3

17 II 2 36 II 2
22 I 6 48 III 3
7 4 9 5 8 9 6 7 9 2
A bo ve typ e of frequen cy d istrib utio n is c alled
0 3 7 6 2 1 9 8 3 8 ungrouped frequency distribution. Although this
representation of data is shorter than representation
of raw data, but from the angle of comparison and
analysis it is quite big. So to reduce the frequency
distribution, it can be classified into groups in following
(i) Variate : The numerical quantity whose value varies
ways and it is called grouped frequency distribution.
in objective is called a variate, generally a variate is
represented by x. There are two types of variate. Class Fre quency
(A) Discrete variate : Its magnitude is fixed. For 1–10 8
example, the number of teachers in different branches 11–20 2
of a institute are 30, 35, 40 etc. 21–30 12
(B) Continuous variate : Its magnitude is not fixed. It is 31–40 5
expressed in groups like 10 – 20, 20 – 30, …etc. 41–50 3
(ii) Range : The difference of the maximum and the
minimum values of the variable x is called range.
Statistical methods like comparison, decision taken
(iii) Class frequency : In each class the number of
etc. depend on frequency distribution. Frequency
tim es a d ata is rep eated is k no wn as its class
distribution are of three types :
frequency.
Range (i) Individual frequency distribution : Here each item
(iv) Class interval = or original price of unit is written separately. In this
Number of classes
category, frequency of each variable is one. For
It is generally denoted by h or i.
example : Total marks obtained by 10 students in a
class is given as follows :
PAGE # 187
187
S. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 A
Marks
46 18 79 12 97 80 5 27 67 54
obtained
Class Frequency
(ii) Discrete frequency distribution : W hen number of 1 – 10 4
terms is large and variable are discrete, i.e. variate 11 – 20 7
can accept some particular values only under finite 21 – 30 6
limits and is repeated then it is called discrete
31 – 40 3
frequency distribution. For example the wages of
41 – 50 3
employees and their numbers is shown in following
table. (ii) Exclusive series : In this method upper limit of the
previous class and lower limit of the next class is same.
Monthly wages No. of employees In this method the term of upper limit in a class is not
4000 10 considered in the same class, it is considered in the
next class.
6000 8
Conversion of above inclusive frequency distribution
8000 5 into exclusive frequency distribution is as follows :
11000 7
20000 2 A
25000 1
Class Frequency
Th e ab ove table show s un grou ped freq uenc y 0.5 – 10.5 4
distribution the same facts can be written in grouped 10.5 – 20.5 7
frequency as follows : 20.5 – 30.5 6
Monthly wages No. of employees 30.5 – 40.5 3
0 – 10,000 23 40.5 – 50.5 3
11,000 – 20,000 9
21,000 – 30,000 1
(i) Discrete frequency distribution : Here we add all

NOTE :
previous frequency and get cumulative frequency. It will
If variable is repeated in individual distribution then it be more clear from the following table :
can be converted into discrete frequency distribution.
Frequency Cumulative
Class Explanation
(iii) Continuous frequency distribution : W hen number (f) frequency (cf)
of terms is large and variate is continuous. i.e., variate 4000 10 10 10
can accept all values under finite limits and they are 6000 8 18 10 + 8 = 18
repeated then it is called continuous frequency 8000 5 23 18 + 5 = 23
distribution. For example age of students in a school 11000 7 30 23 + 7 = 30
is shown in the following table : 20000 2 32 30 + 2 = 32
25000 1 33 32 + 1 = 33
Age (in yea r) Class No. of students
Less than 5 year 0–5 72 (ii) Continuous frequency distribution :
From 5 and less than 10 year 5 – 10 103
Monthly No. of Cumulative
From 10 and less than 15 year 10 – 15 50
income employee frequency Explanation
From 15 and less than 20 year 15 – 20 25 variate (x) frequency (f) (cf)
0–5 72 72 72 = 72
Classes can be made mainly by two methods :
(i) Inclusive series : In this method value of upper and 5 – 10 103 175 72 + 103 = 175
lower limit are both contained in same class. In this 10 – 15 50 225 175 + 50 = 225
method the upper limit of class and lower limit of other 15 – 20 25 250 225 + 25 = 250
class are not same. Some time the value is not a whole
number, it is a fraction or in decimals and lies in Class Cumulative Frequency
between the two intervals then in such situation the
Less than 5 72
class interval can be constructed as follows :
Less than 10 175
Less than 15 225
Less than 20 250
PAGE # 188
188
From this table the number of students of age less Ex.2 The relative humidity (in %) of a certain city for a month
than the upper limit of a class, i.e. number of student of 30 days are as follows :
wh ose ag e is less than 5 , 10 , 15 , 20 year can 98.1, 98.6, 99.2, 90.3, 86.5, 95.3, 92.9, 96.3, 94.2, 95.1,
determined by merely seeing the table but if we need 89.2, 92.3, 97.1, 93.5, 92.7, 95.1, 97.2, 93.3, 95.2, 97.3,
the number students whose age is more than zero, 96.2, 92.1, 84.9, 90.2, 95.7, 98.3, 97.3, 96.1. 92.1, 89.
more than 5, more than 10 or more than 15, then table (i) W hat is the range of this data ?
should be constructed as follows : (ii) Construct a grouped frequency distribution table
with classes 84 - 86, 86 - 88, etc.
Age
Sol. (i) Minimum humidity = 84.9
Class Frequency Cumulative Explanation
Maximum humidity = 99.2
frequency
So, Range = 99.2 – 84.9
0–5 72 More than 0 250 = 250
= 14.3
5 – 10 103 More than 5 250 – 72 = 178 (ii)
10 – 15 50 More than 10 178 – 103 = 75
15 – 20 25 More than 15 75 – 50 = 25 Relative humidity (%) No. of days
Ex.1 The weights (in grams) of 40 oranges picked at
random from a basket are as follows : 84 – 86 1
40, 50, 60, 65, 45, 55, 30, 90, 75, 85, 70, 85, 75, 80, 86 – 88 1
100, 110, 70, 55, 30, 35, 45, 70, 80, 85, 95, 70, 60, 70,
75, 40, 100, 65, 60, 40, 100, 75, 110, 30, 45, 84. 88 – 90 2
Construct a grouped frequency table by dividing the
90 – 92 2
variable range into class intervals of equal width of
10 g, such that the mid - value of the first class interval 92 – 94 7
is 30 g.
94 – 96 6
Sol. Maximum weight = 110 g
Minimum weight = 30 g 96 – 98 7
Mid value of Ist class interval = 30 g 98 – 100 4
W idth = 10 g.
Range = Maximum weight – Minimum weight Ex.3 Thirty children were asked about the number of hours
= 110 – 30 = 80 they watched T.V. programs in the previous week. The
results were found as follows :
80 1, 6, 2, 3, 5, 12, 5, 8, 4, 8
No. of class interval = = 8.
10 10, 3, 4, 12, 2, 8, 15, 1, 17, 6
But frequency distribution is of exclusive form, so no. 3, 2, 8, 5, 9, 6, 8, 7, 14, 12
(i) Make a grouped frequency distribution table for this
of class interval = 8 + 1 = 9.
data, taking class width 5 and one of the class intervals
10 10
Ist class interval = 30 – 30 as 5-10.
2 2
(ii) How many children watched television for 15 or
= 25 – 35 more hours a week ?
Similarly other class interval are : Sol. (i) Frequency distribution table is as follows :
35 – 45, 45 – 55, 55 – 65, 65 – 75, 75 – 85, 85 – 95,
95 – 105, 105 – 115. Class intervals Frequency
0-5 10
Weight in g No. of oranges
5 - 10 13
25 - 35 3 10 - 15 5
35 - 45 4 15 - 20 2
45 - 55 4 (ii) Numbers of children that watched 15 or more hours

a week = 2 children.
55 - 65 5
Ex.4 The class marks of a distribution are :
65 - 75 7 47, 52, 57, 62, 67, 72, 77, 82, 87, 92, 97, 102.
75 - 85 7 Determine the class size and the class limits.
Sol. (i) Class size = 52 – 47 = 5
85 - 95 4 (ii) 1st class interval = (47 – 2.5) – (47 + 2.5)
= 44.5 – 49.5
95 - 105 4 Similarly other class interval are
49.5 – 54.5, 54.5 – 59.5, 59.5 – 64.5, 64.5 – 69.5,
105 - 115 2
69.5 – 74.5, 74.5 – 79.5, 79.5 – 84.5, 84.5 – 89.5,
89.5 – 94.5, 94.5 – 99.5, 99.5 – 104.5
PAGE # 189
189
Sol. Take the year along x -axis and number of students
along y - axis.
(i) Bar graphs All the bar should be of the same width and same
space should be left between the consecutive bars.
(ii) Histograms
(iii) Frequency polygons Y
(iv) Frequency curves

1800
BAR GRAPH 1600
1400
A b ar g raph is a pictorial represen tation o f th e 1200
1000
numerical data by a number of bars (rectangles) of
800
uniform width erected horizontally or vertically with 600
equal spacing between them. 400
W hile constructing bar graphs the following points 200
0 X
should be kept in mind :
(i) The width of the bars should be uniform throughout.
(ii) The gap between one bar and another should be Year
Ex.7 Look at the graph given below :
uniform throughout.
Y
(iii) Bars may be either horizontal or vertical.
80
Ex.5 Given below is a table which shows the year wise 70
60
strength of a school. Represent this data by a bar
50
40
graph.
30
20
Year 2004-05 2005-06 2006-07 2007-08 2008-09 2009-10 10
No. of students 800 975 1100 1400 1625 1800 0 X

Subjects
Read it carefully and answer the following questions.
Sol.
Y (i) W hat information does the bar graph give ?
(ii) In which subject the student scored highest marks ?
2000
(iii) In which subject the student scored lowest marks ?
1800
(iv) W hat is the average of his marks ?
1600
Sol.(i) Bar graph gives the information about the marks
1400
obtained in different subjects.
1200 (ii) Hindi
1000 (iii) Mathematics
800
600 60 40 80 50 60
(iv) Average = = 58.
400 5
200 HISTOGRAM
0 X
Histogram is a rectangular representation of grouped
and continuous frequency distribution in which class
Year intervals are taken as base and height of rectangles
Ex.6 Given below a table which shows the year wise are proportional to corresponding frequencies. To
draw the histogram class intervals are marked along
strength of a school. Represent this data by a bar
x-axis on a suitable scale. Frequencies are marked
graph. along y-axis on a suitable scale, such that the areas of
drawn rectangles are proportional to corresponding
Year 2001- 02 2002 - 03 2003 - 04 2004 - 05 2005 - 06 frequencies.
No. of students 800 975 1100 1400 1625
PAGE # 190
190
Constructio n of h istograms are related with four So here the redefined frequency table is obtained as
different kinds of frequency distributions. follows :
(i) W h en frequ en cy d istribu tion is grou ped an d No. of Adjusted

Marks
continuous and class intervals are also equal. Students Freque ncy
5
(ii) W hen frequen cy distrib utio n is group ed and 0 – 10 8 8 4
10
continuous but class interval are not equal.
5
(iii) W hen frequency distribution is grouped but not 10 – 30 32 32 8
20
continuous. 5
30 – 45 18 18 6
15
(iv) W hen frequency distribution is ungrouped and
5
middle points of the distribution are given. 45 – 50 10 10 10
5
Case I : W hen frequency distribution is grouped and 5

50 – 60 6 6 3
10
continuous and class intervals are also equal.
Y
Ex.8 Draw a histogram to represent the following data :
10 –
C.I. 40 - 60 60 - 80 80 - 100 100 - 120 120 - 140 140 - 160 160 - 180 180 - 200
9–
Freq. 20 40 30 50 30 20 10 40
8–
Y 7–
50 – 6–
40 – 5–
30 – 4–
20 – 3–
Sol.
10 – 2–
0 X 1–
40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
Class Interval 0 X
10 20 30 40 50 60
Case II : W hen frequency distribution is grouped and Marks
continuous but class interval are not equal. This is the required histogram of the given frequency
distribution.
Ex.9 Draw a histogram for the marks of students given below : Case III : W hen frequency distribution is grouped but
not continuous.
Marks 0 - 10 10 - 30 30 - 45 45 - 50 50 - 60
Ex.10 Construct a histogram for the following frequency
No. of students 8 32 18 10 6
distribution :
Sol. Here frequency distribution is grouped and continuous C.I. 5 - 12 13 - 20 21 - 28 29 - 36 37 - 44 45 - 52
b ut c lass intervals are n ot sam e. U nd er suc h Frequency 6 15 24 18 4 9
circumstances the following method is used to find Sol. The given frequency distribution is not continuous. So,
heights of rectangle so that heights are proportional first convert it into a continuous frequency distribution.
to frequencies. The difference between the lower limit of a class and
(i) W rite interval (h) of the least interval, here h = 5. the upper limit of the preceding class is 1 i.e. h = 1. To
co nvert th e given freq uenc y distribu tion into a
(ii) Redefine the frequencies of classes by the using
h 1
the following formula. continuous frequency distribution subtract = = 0.5
2 2
Redefined frequency of class h 1
from each lower limit and add = = 0.5 to each
2 2
h upper limit. The distribution so obtained is as given
= × frequency of class interval.
class int erval below :
PAGE # 191
191
Case I : Following procedure is useful to draw a
C.I. Frequency
frequency polygon with the help of histogram.
4.5 – 12.5 6
(a) Construct the histogram for the given frequency
12.5 – 20.5 15 distribution.
20.5 – 28.5 24 (b) Find the middle point of each upper horizontal line
of the rectangle.
28.5 – 36.5 18
(c) J oin th ese midd le p oints of the suc cessive
36.5 – 44.5 4 rectangle by straight lines.
(d) Join the middle point of the initial rectangle with the
44.5 – 52.5 9
middle point of the previous expected class interval on
Y the x-axis.
24 –
Ex.11 The ages (in years) of 360 patients treated in a
22 – hospital on a particular day are given below :
20 –
Age
10 - 20 20 - 30 30 - 40 40 - 50 50 - 60 60 - 70
18 – (in years
16 – Number
90 40 60 20 120 30
of patients
14 –
12 –
Draw a frequency polygon to represent the above data.
Sol.
10 –
8– Class Mark Frequency
6–
15 90
4–
25 40
2–
0 X 35 60
4.5 12.5 20.5 28.5 36.5 44.5 52.5
Class Interval 45 20
This is the required histogram of the given frequency
55 120
distribution.
65 30
Y
(i) In histogram there is no gap in between consecutive
120 –
rectangle as in bar graph.
110 –
(ii) The width of the bar is significant in histogram. In
100 –
bar graph, width is not important at all.
90 –
(iii) In histog ram th e areas of rec tang les are
80 –
proportional to the frequency, however if the class size
70 –
of the frequencies are equal then height of the rectangle
60 –
are proportional to the frequencies.
50 –
FREQUENCY POLYGON 40 –
A frequency polygon is also a form of graphical 30 –
representation of frequency distribution. Frequency 20 –

polygon can be constructed in two ways : 10 –
(i) W ith the help of histogram
0 5 15 25 35 45 55 65 75
X
(ii) W ithout the help of histogram
Class Interval
PAGE # 192
192
Case II : Following procedure is useful to draw a frequency Mean of raw data : If x1, x2, x3, ...... , xn are the n values
polygon without the help of histogram.
(or observations) then, A.M. (Arithmetic mean) is
n
Ex.12 Draw a histogram and frequency polygon on the same
xi
graph for the following distribution : _
x1 x 1 .... x n i 1
x
C.I. 1 - 10 11 - 20 21- 30 31 - 40 41 - 50 51 - 60 n n
n
_
n x = sum of observations = xi
Frequency 8 3 6 12 2 7
i 1
i.e. product of mean & no. of items gives sum of
observation.
Sol.
Ex.13 If the mean of 6, 4, 7, P and 10 is 8 find P.
C.I. Class Mark Frequency
6 4 7 P 10
Sol. 8 =
0.5 – 10.5 5.5 8 5
10.5 – 20.5 15.5 3 P = 13.
20.5 – 30.5 25.5 6 Ex.14 The mean of marks scored by 100 students was
found to be 40. Later on it was discovered that a score
30.5 – 40.5 35.5 12
of 53 was misread as 83. Find the correct mean.
40.5 – 50.5 45.5 2 Sol. n = 100, x = 40
50.5 – 60.5 55.5 7 1

x= xi
n
Y
1
12 – 40 = xi
100
11 –
Incorrect value of x i = 4000.
10 –
9– Now, Correct value of x i = 4000 – 83 + 53 = 3970

8–
7– correct value of xi
Correct mean =
6– n
5– 3970
= = 39.7
4– 100
3– So, the correct mean is 39.7

2–
Ex.15 The mean monthly salary of 10 members of a group
1– is Rs. 1445, one more member whose monthly salary
65.5
X is Rs. 1500 has joined the group. Find the mean
– 4.5 0.5 10.5 20.5 30.5 40.5 50.5 60.5
Class Interval monthly salary of 11 members of the group.
Sol. n = 10, x = 1445
So, total monthly wages of 10 persons = 10 × 1445
The commonly used measure of central tendency = 14450.

(or averages) are : Monthly salary of one more person who joined the
(i) Arithmetic Mean (AM) or Simply Mean group is Rs. 1500
(ii) Median Total monthly wages of 11 persons
(iii) Mode = Rs. 14450 + Rs. 1500
= Rs. 15950
The mean of a number of observation is the sum of the
values of all the observations divided by the total 15950
So, average monthly salary of 11 persons =
number of observations. It is denoted by the symbol 11
x , read as x bar. = Rs. 1450
PAGE # 193
193
Method for Mean of Ungrouped Data Ex.17 Find the mean for the following distribution by using
deviation method :
xi 15 20 22 24 25 30 33 38
Frequency 5 8 11 20 23 18 13 2
Sol.
Let A = 25
xi fi fidi
di = xi – 25
15 5 –10 – 50
20 8 –5 – 40
22 11 –3 – 33
24 20 –1 – 20
25 23 0 0
30 18 5 90
33 13 8 104
_ fi x i
Then mean, x 38 2 13 26
fi
fi 100 fi d i 77
Grouped Frequency Distribution (Grouped )

fi di 77
(i) Direct Method : for finding mean x A = 25 + = 25.77
fi 100
_ fi x i (iii) Step-Deviation Method :
Mean, x
fi fiu i
x a h
Ex.16 Find the value of p, if the mean of the following fi
distribution whose mean is 20. where,
x 15 17 19 20 + p 23 xi a
a = Assumed mean, ui =
h
f 2 3 4 5p 6
h = W idth of class interval
Sol. Ex.18 Find the mean of following distribution by step

deviation method :
Class interval 50 - 70 70 - 90 90 - 110 110 - 130 130 - 150 150 - 170
x f fx No. of workers 18 12 13 27 8 22
15 2 30 Sol. Let A = 100
17 3 51 h = 20
19 4 76 xi A
ui
2 h
20 + p 5p 100p + 5p
C.I. xi fi ui fiui
23 6 138
f 15 5p fx 295 100 p 5p 2 50 – 70 60 18 –2 – 36
fx 295 100p 5p 2 70 – 90 80 12 –1 – 12
X = f
=
15 5p
90 – 110 100 13 0 0
2
295 100p 5p
20 = 110 – 130 120 27 1 27
15 5p
300 + 100p = 295 + 100p + 5p 2 130 – 150 140 8 2 16
5p2 = 5
150 – 170 160 22 3 66
p = 1.
fi 100 fi ui 61
(ii) Deviation Method : (Assumed Mean Method)
In this method, we subtract an arbitrary constant 'a', fiui
h
called the assumed mean from each value of xi. The X =A+ fi
reduced value is xi – a. W e denote it by di
di = xi – a. 61
= 100 +× 20
di is called the deviation of xi from the assumed mean 100
a. = 100 + 12.20
= 112.20
So, mean is 112.20
PAGE # 194
194
Ex.19 If the mean of following distribution frequency
distribution is 188, find the missing frequencies f1 and f2 .
C.I. 0– 80 80 – 160 160 – 240 240 – 320 320 – 400 Total

(i) It can not be determined by inspection nor it can be
Freq. 20 25 f1 f2 10 100
located graphically.
Sol. Given : Mean = 188
(ii) Arithmetic mean cannot be used for qualitative
C.I. fi xi fixi characteristics such as intelligence, honesty, beauty
0 – 80 20 40 800 etc.
80 – 160 25 120 3000 (iii) It cannot be obtained if a single observation is

160 – 240 f1 200 200 f1 missin g.
240 – 320 f2 280 280 f2
(iv) It is affected very much by extreme values. In case
320 – 400 10 360 3600 of extreme items, A.M. gives a distorted picture of the
Total f = 100 = 55 + f1 + f2 f= 7400 + 200 f1 + 280 f2 distribution and no longer remains representative of
the distribution.
fi xi
x = fi (v) It may lead to wrong conclusions if the details of the
data from which it is computed are not given.
7400 200 f1 280 f2
188 =
100 (vi) It can not be calculated if the extreme class is open,
18800 = 7400 + 200f1 + 280f2 e.g. below 10 or above 90.
18800 – 7400 = 200f1 + 280 f2
11400 = 200 f1 + 280 f2 (vii) It cannot be used in the study of ratios, rates etc.
1140 = 20f1 + 28f2
285 = 5f1 + 7f2 ... (i)
Also, f1 + f2 + 55 = 100 Median of a distribution is the value of the variable
f1 + f2 = 100 – 55 which divides the distribution into two equal parts.
f1 + f2 = 45 ... (i)
Solving equation (i) and (ii) f1 = 15, f2 = 30. Median of ungrouped data
(A) Arrange the data in ascending order.
(i) Sum of deviations from mean is zero. (B) Count the no. of observations (Let there be ‘n’
n _ observations)
i.e. . (xi x) 0. th
i 1
n 1
(C) If n is odd then median = value of
(ii) If a constant real number ‘a’ is added to each of the 2
_
observation than new mean will be x a. observation.
th
(iii) If a constant real number ‘a’ is subtracted from n
_
(D) If n is even then median = value of mean of
each of the observation then new mean be x a . 2
(iv) If a constant real number ‘a’ is multiplied with each th
_ n
observation and 1 observation.
of the observation then new mean will be a x . 2
(v) If each of the observation is_ divided by a constant or
th th
x N N
no ‘a’, then new mean will be . observatio n 1 observation
a 2 2
Median =
2
Ex.20 Find the median of the following values :
(i) It is rigidly defined, simple, easy to understand and 37, 31, 42, 43, 46, 25, 39, 45, 32
easy to calculate.
Sol. Arranging the data in ascending order, we have
(ii) It is based upon all the observations. 25, 31, 32, 37, 39, 42, 43, 45, 46
(iii) Its value being unique, we can use it to compare Here the number of observations n = 9 (odd)
different sets of data. th
9 1
(iv) It is least affected by sampling fluctuations. Median = Value of observation
2
(v) Mathematical analysis of mean is possible. So, It is = Value of 5th observation
relatively reliable. = 39.
PAGE # 195
195
Ex.21 Following are the lives in hours of 15 pieces of the Ex.23 Find the median class of the following data :
components of air craft engine.
Classes 0 – 10 10 – 20 20 – 30 30 – 40 40 – 50 50 – 60 60 – 70
Find the median :
Frequencey 5 10 18 30 20 12 5
715, 724, 725, 710, 729, 745, 649, 699, 696, 712, 734,
728, 716, 705, 719, 737.
Sol.
Sol. Arranging the data in ascending order
649, 696, 699, 705, 710, 712, 715, 716, 719, 724, 725, xi fi c.f.
728, 729, 734, 737, 745
0 – 10 5 5
N = 16 (Even)
So, Median = 10 – 20 10 15
th th
16 16 20 – 30 18 33
observatio n 1 observation
2 2
30 – 40 30 63 Median class
2
40 – 50 20 83
8 th Obs. 9 th Obs.
= 50 – 60 12 95
2
716 719 60 – 70 5 100

= = 717.5
2
N
Ex.22 The median of the observation 11, 12, 14, 18, N = 100 = 50
2
x + 2, x + 4, 30, 32, 35, 41 arranged in ascending order
is 24. Find the value of x. = 30, c = 33, f = 30, h = 10
Sol. Here, the number of observations n = 10. Since n is
even, therefore N
c
2
th th Median = + ×h
n n 30
observation 1 observation
2 2
Median =
2 (50 33 ) 170
= 30 + 10 = 30 +
30 30
5 th observation 6 th observation = 30 + 5.67
24 =
2 Median = 35.67
Ex.24 If the median of the following frequency distribution
( x 2) ( x 4)
24 = is 28.5 find the missing frequencies :
2
2x 6 C.I. 0 - 10 10 - 20 20 - 30 30 - 40 40 - 50 50 - 60 Total
24 =
2 Freq. 5 f1 20 15 f2 5 60
24 = x + 3
Sol.
x = 21.
xi fi c.f.
Hence, x = 21.
0 – 10 5 5
Median of class-interval data (Grouped)
10 – 20 f1 5 + f1
N
C 25 + f1
2 20 – 30 20 Median class
Median = h
f 40 + f1
30 – 40 15
= lower limit of median class,
N = total no of observation 40 – 50 f2 40 + f 1 + f2
C = cumulative frequency of the class preceding the 50 – 60 5 45 + f 1 + f2

median class
h = size of the median class Given : Median = 28.5
f = frequency of the median class. So, Median class = 20 – 30
and 45 + f1 + f2 = 60
What is median class :
th f1 + f2 = 15
N
The class in which item lie is median class. Here, = 20, c = 5 + f1, f = 20, h = 10
2
PAGE # 196
196
Ex.26 The marks in science of 80 students of class X are
N given below . Find the mode of the marks obtained by
c the students in science.
2 h
So, Median = +
f C.I. 0 - 10 10 - 20 20 - 30 30 - 40 40 - 50 50 - 60 60 -70 70 - 80 80 - 90 90 - 100
Freq. 3 5 16 12 13 20 5 4 1 1
Sol.
30 5 f1
28.5 = 20 + × 10 xi fi
20
0 – 10 3
25 f1
8.5 =
2 10 – 20 5
25 – f1 = 17 20 – 30 16
f1 = 8
30 – 40 12
when f1 = 8, 8 + f2 = 15 f2 = 7
So, f1 = 8 and f2 = 7. 40 – 50 13
(ii) Uses of Median : 50 – 60 20 Modal class

(A) Median is the only average to be used while dealing 60 – 70 5
with q ualitative data w hic h canno t be measured
quantitatively but can be arranged in ascending or
70 – 80 4
descending order of magnitude. 80 – 90 1
(B) It is used for determining the typical value in
90 – 100 1
problems concerning wages, distribution of wealth etc.
= 50, f0 = 13, f1 = 20, f2 = 5, h = 10
f1 f0
(i) Mode of ungrouped data (By inspection only) : Mode = + ×h
2f1 f0 f2
Arrange the data in an array and then count the
freq uenc ies of eac h variate. T he variate h avin g
20 13
maximum frequency is the mode. = 50 + × 10
40 13 5
Ex.25 Find the mode of the following array of an individual
70
series of scores 7, 7, 10, 12, 12, 12, 11, 13, 13, 17. = 50 + = 50 + 3.17
22
Sol. Arranging the data in the form of a frequency table :
Mode = 53.17
Numbers 7 10 11 12 13 17 Merits of Mode :
Frequency 2 1 1 3 2 1 (ii) Uses of Mode : Mode is the average to be used to

find the ideal size, e.g., in business forecasting, in
From the above table it is clear that 12 is occurring manufacture of ready-made garments, shoes etc.
most number of times.
Mode is 12.
Mode of continuous frequency distribution Mode = 3 Median – 2 Mean.
f1 f0
Mode = h
2f1 f0 f2
In a cumulative frequency polygon or curves, the
W here = lower limit of the modal class
cumulative frequencies are plotted against the lower
f1 = frequency of the modal class i.e. the largest and upper limits of class intervals depending upon
frequency. the manner in which the series has been cumulated.
f0 = frequency of the class preceding the modal class. There are two methods of constructing a frequency
f2 = frequency of the class succeeding the modal class. polygon or an Ogive.
h = width of the modal class (i) Less than method
(ii) More than method
PAGE # 197
197
Ex.27 During the medical check-up of 35 students of a class
Less than method :
, their weights were recorded as follows :
To construct an ogive by less than method, we follow
W eight (in kg) Num ber of students
the procedure given below :
38 - 40 3
Step I 40 - 42 2
Construct the cumulative frequency table by adding 42 - 44 4
class frequencies. 44 - 46 5
46 - 48 14
Step II
48 - 50 4
Mark upper class limits along x-axis as a suitable scale.
50 - 52 3
Step III
Draw a less than & more than type ogive for the given
Mark cumulative frequencies along y-axis on a suitable
data. Hence, obtain median weight from the graph.
scale. Sol. For the given data, cumulative frequency distribution of
the less than type can be computed as follows.
Step IV
Number of Students
Plot the points (xi, fi ), where xi is the upper limit of a Weight (in kg)
(Cumulative Frequency)
class and fi is corresponding cumulative frequency.
Less than 40 3
Step V Less than 42 3+2
Less than 44 5+4=9
Join the points obtained in step IV by a free hand smooth
Less than 46 9 + 5 = 14
curve to get the ogive and to get the cumulative
Less than 48 14 + 14 = 28
frequency polygon join the points obtained in step IV Less than 50 28 + 4 = 32
by line segments. Less than 52 32 + 3 = 35
To draw a less than ogive, we mark the upper class
More than method :
limits of the class intervals on the x-axis and their
To construct a cumulative frequency polygon and an
corresponding cumulative frequencies on the y-axis
ogive by more than method, we follow the procedure by taking a convenient scale.
given below : Now, plot the points corresponding to the ordered pairs
[(upper class limit, cumulative frequency) – i.e., (40, 3),
Step I (42, 5), (44, 9), (46, 14), (48, 28), (50, 32), (52, 35)] on
Construct the cumulative frequency table by subtracting the graph paper.
the frequency of each class from the total frequency. Similarly, we can compute the cumulative frequency
distribution of the more than type as follows :
Step II
Mark lower class limits along x-axis on a suitable scale. Number of Students
Weight (in kg)
(Cumulative Frequency)
Step III
More than 38 35
Mark cumulative frequencies along y-axis on a suitable More than 40 35 – 3 = 32
scale. More than 42 32 – 2 = 30
Step IV More than 44 30 – 4 = 26
More than 46 26 – 5 = 21
Plot the points (x i, fi ), where xi is the lower limit of a
More than 48 21 – 14 = 7
class and fi is corresponding cumulative frequency.
More than 50 7–4=3
Step V Now, to draw a more than ogive, we mark the lower
Join the points obtained in step IV by a free hand smooth class limits of the class intervals on the x-axis and
curve to get the ogive and to get the cumulative their corresponding cumulative frequencies on the
y-axis by taking a convenient scale.
frequency polygon join the points obtained in step IV
Now, plot the points corresponding to the ordered pairs
by line segments.
[(low er c lass lim it, cu mulative frequ en cy) – i.e.,
NOTE : W hen nothing is mentioned, then we generally (38, 35), (40, 32), (42, 30), (44, 26), (46, 21), (48, 7),
construct the ‘less than type ogive. (50, 3)] on the graph paper.
PAGE # 198
198
Y
The difference between the upper quartile (Q 3) and
40 lower quartile (Q1) is called interquartile range.
35 i.e. Interquartile range = Q 3 – Q 1 ; which is always
30 positive as Q3 > Q1.
25 Q3 – Q1
Semi interquartile range = ; which is also
20
2
always positive.
15
Ex.29 From the following frequency distribution table, find :
10 Median = 46.5 (i) Lower quartile (ii) Upper quartile
5 (iii) Semi-interquartile range.
X
x 5 10 15 20 25 30
38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 f 3 4 6 9 7 3
Weight (in kg)
Sol. First of all construct a cumulative frequency table for
Now, to obtain the median weight from the graph, we
the given distribution.
draw both ogives on the same graph paper. They
intersect at (46.5, 17.5). 46.5 kg is the median weight
x f cf
of the given data.
5 3 3
10 4 7
Quartiles are those values of the variate which divide 15 6 13
the total set of data in four equal parts. 20 9 22
(i) Lower quartile : W hen the lower half before the 25 7 29
median, is divided into two equal parts, the value of the 30 3 32
dividing variate is called lower quartile and is denoted
by Q1. Since, n = 32 (even)
th th
n n 1 th
lower quartile Q 1 = term or term, n
4 4 (i) Lower quartile (Q1) = term = 8th term = 15.
4
depending whether n is even or odd.
th
3n
For finding quartiles, the given terms (data) are always (ii) Upper quartile (Q3) = term = 24 term = 25.
4
arranged in ascending order of their magnitudes.
(iii) Semi-interquartile range
(ii) Upper quartile : W hen the upper half, after the
Q3 – Q1 25 – 15
median, is divided into two equal parts, the value of the = = = 5.
dividing variate is called upper quartile and is denoted 2 2
by Q3. (Q2 being the median).
th
3n
T herefo re, u pp er q uartile Q 3= term o r The dispersion of the observations from the mean is
4
called dispersion, i.e., dispersion denotes the spread
th
3(n 1) of the observation. Mean deviation is a simple mea-
term, depending whether n is even or odd. sure to find the amount of dispersion.
4
Definition : The A.M. of absolute values of deviations of
Ex.28 Find the median, lower quartile and upper quartile all terms from any standard mean is called deviation
from the following data : 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19.
and it is denoted by A .
Sol. The data is already in ascending order.
Since, n = 7 (odd) x1 A x2 A ...... xn A
Thus, A =
th
n
n 1 xi A
Median = term = 4th term = 13. =
2 n
th NOTE :
n 1
Lower quartile (Q1) = term = 2nd term = 9 Here xi A mean s th e absolute value o f th e
4
deviation of xi from A which is always positive and
th
3(n 1) defined as follow :
Upper quartile (Q3) = term = 6th term = 17.
4 xi A = xi – A, if xi – A 0
= – (xi – A) or A – xi, if xi – A < 0.
PAGE # 199
199
Particular cases : Ex.31 Find mean deviation from following data :
(i). Mean deviation from A.M. ( x ) :
x 3 9 17 23 27
xi x
x = , Here A = x f 8 10 12 9 5
n
(ii). Mean deviation from median (M) : Sol. Calculation table for mean deviation
xi M
M = , Here A = M xi fi fi x i xi x fi x i x
n
(iii). Mean deviation from mode (z) : 3 8 24 12 96
xi z
= , Here A = z 9 10 90 6 60
z
n
17 12 204 2 24
Ex.30 The runs scored by 8 cricket players in an inning are
as follows : 42, 47, 52, 47, 37, 60, 55, 55, 38. 23 9 207 8 72
Find (i) Mean deviation (ii) Mean deviatio n from
27 5 135 12 60
median and (iii) Mean deviation from origin 40.
Sol. Calculation table of mean deviations : N 44 fi x i 660 fi x i x 312
Run x i xi x xi M xi 40
fi x i 660
37 10 25 10 3 Here x = = = 15
N 44
38 9 25 9 2
Therefore, mean deviation
42 5 25 5 2
312 fi x i x
47 0 25 0 7 ( x) =
= 7.09 (Approx) =
N 44
47 0 25 0 7
Ex.32 For the following distribution, find mean deviation
52 4 75 5 12 from the origin 20 and from the mode.
55 7 75 8 15
x 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
60 12 75 13 20
f 5 8 21 24 18 15 7 2
xi 378 xi x 50 50 xi M 50 xi 40 68
Sol. Calculation table for mean deviation.
xi 378
Here x = = = 47 25 xi fi xi 20 fi x i 20 x i 16 fi x i 16
8 8
47 47 10 5 10 50 6 30
And M = = 47
2
xi x 50 50 12 8 8 64 4 32
(i) Mean deviation ( x) = = = 6 31
n 8
(ii) Mean deviation from median 14 21 6 126 2 42
xi M 50
( M )= = = 6 25 16 24 4 96 0 0
n 8
(iii) Mean deviation from origin 40
18 18 2 36 2 36
68 xi 40
( 40 ) = = =85
n 8 20 15 0 0 4 60
Mean Deviation from Frequency Distribution :
Let value of a variable x are x1, x2, ...., xn with frequencies
22 7 2 14 6 42
f1, f2,..., fn respectively, then mean deviation from mean.
fi x i x 24 2 4 8 8 16
( x)= fi N fi fi x i 20 fi x i 16
1 100 394 258
or ( x)= fi x i x , where N = fi
N
Similarly mean deviation from median, mode or any Here mode i.e. value of maximum frequency = 16
origin point can b e calc ulated b y tak ing M or A Therefore mean deviation from value 20( )
20
respectively in place of x . In such cases.
fi x i 20 394
fi x i M = = = 3.94
N 100
M =
N and mean deviation from mode (z) 16
fi x i A
and A = . fi x i z fi x i 16 258
N ( z) = = = = 2.58
N N 100
PAGE # 200
200
10. The following marks were obtained by the students in
a test : 81, 72, 90, 90, 86, 85, 92, 70, 71, 83, 89, 95, 85,
79, 62. Find the range.
(A) 9 (B) 17
(C) 27 (D) 33
1. The upper class limit of inclusive type class interval
10 – 20 is.
(A) 10.5 (B) 20 11. If the arithmetic mean of 7, 5, 13, x and 9 be 10, then
(C) 20.5 (D) 17.5 the value of x is :
(A) 10 (B) 12
2. Range of 14, 12, 17, 18, 16 and x is 20. Find x (x > 0) (C) 14 (D) 16
(A) 2 (B) 28
12. The arithmetic mean of the set of observations 1, 2,
(C) 32
3....n is :
3. The highest score of certain data exceeds its lowest n 1 n

(A) (B) 1
1 2 2
score by 16 and coefficient of range is . Find the
3
sum of the highest score and the lowest score.
n 1
(C) (D) (n – 1)
(A) 36 (B) 48 2 2
(C) 24 (D) 18 13. In a monthly test, the marks obtained in mathematics
by 16 students of a class are as follows :
4. The range of 15, 14, x, 25, 30, 35 is 23. Find the least 0, 0, 2, 2, 3, 3, 3, 4, 5, 5, 5, 5, 6, 6, 7, 8
possible value of x. The arithmetic mean of the marks obtained is :
(A) 14 (B) 12 (A) 3 (B) 4
(C) 13 (D) 11 (C) 5 (D) 6
5. In a frequency distribution, the mid value of a class is 5n

14. The mean of first n natural numbers is . Find n.
15 and the class interval is 4. The lower limit of the 9
class is : (A) 5 (B) 4
(A) 10 (B) 12 (C) 9 (D) None of these
(C) 13 (D) 14 15. Mean of a certain number of observation is m. If each
observation is divided by x (x 0) and increased by y,
6. The mid value of a class interval is 42. If the class size is
then the mean of new observation is :
10, then the upper and lower limits of the class are :
mx y
(A) 47 & 37 (B) 37 & 47 (A) mx + y (B)
(C) 37.5 & 47.5 (D) 47.5 & 37.5
x
m xy
7. The number of times a particular item occurs in a given (C) (D) m + xy
x
data is called its : 16. The mean of a variable x having 50 observations is 45.
(A) variation (B) frequency If a new variable is defined as U = x + 45, the mean of
(C) cumulative frequency (D) None of these the new variable is :
(A) 45 (B) 0
8. The width of each of nine classes in a frequency (C) 95 (D) 90
distribution is 2.5 and the lower class boundary of the 17. The weighted A.M. of the first n natural numbers whose
lowest class is 10.6. W hich one of the following is the weights are corresponding numbers is :
upper class boundary of the highest class ?
(n 1)(2n 1) n(n 1)(2n 1)
(A) 35.6 (B) 33.1 (A) (B)
6 6
(C) 30.6 (D) 28.1
(2n 1) 2n 1
9. Let L be the lower class boundary of a class in a (C) (D)
3 6
frequency distribution and m be the mid point of the
class. W hich one of the following is the upper class 18. If the arithmetic mean of the observations x1, x2, x3 .......
boundary of the class ? x1 x 2 x 3

xn is 1, then the arithmetic mean of , , , ....
k k k
m L m L
(A) m + (B) L +
2 2 xn
(k > 0) is :
k
(C) 2m – L (D) m – 2L
(A) greater than 1 (B) less than 1
(C) equal to 1 (D) None of these
PAGE # 201
201
19. T he m ean of a set o f ob servatio n is a. If eac h 28. In order to make the computation of the arithmetic
observation is multiplied by b and each product is mean of a set of 50 numbers simpler, each observa-
decreased by c , th en the m ean of n ew set o f tion is subtracted from 53 and the arithmetic mean of
observation is. the set of differences is found to be – 3.5 . The arith-
metic mean of the set of given numbers is :
a
(A) +c (B) ab – c (A) 53.07 (B) 52.93
b (C) 56.50 (D) 49.50
a n2
29. The mean of first n odd natural numbers is . Find
(C) –c (D) ab + c 81
b
n.
20. The arithmetic mean of 5 numbers is 27. If one of the (A) 9 (B) 81
numbers be excluded, their mean is 25. The excluded (C) 27 (D) None of these
number is :
(A) 28 (B) 26 30. The arithmetic mean of 12 observations is 15. If two
(C) 25 (D) 35 o bservation s 20 and 2 5 are remo ved, then th e
arithmetic mean of remaining observations is :
21. The combined mean of three groups is 12 and the (A) 14.5 (B) 13.5
combined mean of first two groups is 3. If the first, (C) 12.5 (D) 13
sec ond and third groups have 2, 3 and 5 tim es
respectively, then mean of third group is : 31. A distribution consists of three components with
(A) 10 (B) 21 frequencies 45, 40 and 15 having their means 2, 2.5
(C) 12 (D) 13 and 2 respectively. T he m ean of the c om bined
distribution is :
22. Out of 100 numbers, 20 were 5s, 30 were 6s and the (A) 2.1 (B) 2.2
remain in g were 7 s. T he arith metic mean o f th e (C) 2.3 (D) 2.4
numbers is :
(A) 5.3 (B) 5.4 32. If the mean of x + 2, 2x + 3, 3x + 4 and 4x + 5 is x + 2,
(C) 6.1 (D) 6.5 then find the value of x.
(A) 0 (B) 1
23. The mean of the values of 1, 2, 3,..... n with respective (C) – 1 (D) 2
frequencies x, 2x, 3x,.....nx is :
33. Consider the table given below :
n 1 2n 1
(A) (B) M arks 0-1 0 10 -20 20 -3 0 3 0-4 0 4 0-5 0 5 0 -60
2 6 N um be r of Stud en ts 12 18 27 20 17 6
n 2n 1 The arithmetic mean of the marks given above, is :

(C) (D) (A) 18 (B) 28
2 3
(C) 27 (D) 6
24. W hile dividing each entry in a data by a non-zero
number a, the arithmetic mean of the new data : 34. The mode of the observation 2x + 3, 3x – 2, 4x + 3, x –
(A) is multiplied by a (B) does not change 1, 3x – 1, 5x + 2 (x is a positive integer) can be :
(C) is divided by a (D) is diminished by a (A) 3 (B) 5
25. If the mean of five observations x, x + 2, x + 4, x + 6, (C) 7 (D) 9
x + 8 is 11, then the mean of first three observations is : 35. Th e median o f 21 o bservation s is 1 8. If tw o
(A) 9 (B) 11 o bservation s 15 and 2 4 are in clud ed to th e
(C) 13 (D) None observation, then the median of new series is :
26. If the mean of four observations is 20 and when a (A) 15 (B) 18
constant c is added to each observation, the mean (C) 24 (D) 16
becomes 22. The value of c is : 36. The median of the following distribution is :
(A) – 2 (B) 2
(C) 4 (D) 6 Class interval 35-45 45-55 55-65 65-70
27. In a class of 100 students, the mean marks obtained Frequency 8 12 20 10

in a certain subject is 30 and in another class of (A) 56.5 (B) 57.5
50 students, the mean marks obtained in the same (C) 58.7 (D) 59
sub ject is 60. The mean marks o btained by the
37. The median of a given frequency distribution is found
students of two classes taken together is :
graphically with the help of :
(A) 40 (B) 45
(A) Histogram (B) Pie chart
(C) 48 (D) 50
(C) Frequency Curve (D) Ogive
PAGE # 202
202
38. Find the median of the following data. 48. If the quartile deviation of a set of observations is 10
and the third quartile is 35, then the first quartile is :
C.I. 0–10 10–20 20–30 30–40 40–50
(A) 24 (B) 30
f 12 13 25 20 10 (C) 17 (D) 15
(A) 25 (B) 23 49. The semi-inter quartile range of the observations

(C) 24 (D) 26 9, 12, 14, 6, 23, 36, 20, 7, 42 and 32 is
(A) 12.75 (B) 12.5
39. In a data, 10 numbers are arranged in increasing order.
(C) 9.75 (D) 9.5
If the 7th entry is increased by 4, then the median
increases by : 50. The inter-quartile range of the observations 3, 5, 9, 11,
(A) zero (B) 4 13, 18, 23, 25, 32 and 39 is :
(C) 6 (D) 5 (A) 24 (B) 17
40. The median of the following data 46, 64, 87, 41, 58, (C) 31 (D) 8
77, 35, 90, 55, 33, 92 is :
(A) 87 (B) 77
51. If the difference of mode and median of a data is 24,
(C) 58 (D) 64
then the difference of median and mean is :
41. If the observations 20, 22, 23, 25, (x + 1), (x + 3), (A) 12 (B) 24
36,38, 39 and 41 have median 30, then the value of (C) 8 (D) 36
x is :
(A) 28 (B) 29 52. The arithmetic mean and mode of a data is 24 and 12
(C) 30 (D) 32 respectively, then the median of the data is _________.
(A) 25 (B) 18
(C) 20 (D) 22
42. T he m ean deviatio n of a 3 + b 3 an d a 3 – b 3
(when (a & b > 0) is. 53. W h ich of the followin g do es n ot chan ge for the
(A) a3 (B) b3 observation 23, 50, 27, 2x, 48, 59, 72, 89, 5x, 100, 120,
3
(C) 2a (D) 2b3 when x lies between 15 and 20 ?
43. The mean deviation of first 8 composite numbers is. (A) Arithmetic mean (B) Range
(A) 3.0 (B) 4.83 (C) Median (D) Quartile deviation
(C) 5.315 (D) 3.5625 54. If the mean and median of a set of numbers are 8.9
and 9 respectively, then the mode will be :
44. Find the mean deviation from the median for the (A) 7.2 (B) 8.2
following ungrouped data. 20, 25, 30, 18, 15, 40
(C) 9.2 (D) 10.2
(A) 6 (B) 4
(C) 7 (D) 5
45. The algebraic sum of the deviations of a set of n
values from their mean is :
(A) 0 (B) n – 1
(C) 1 (D) 1 1. Mean temperature of last week of September was 24º
C. If mean temperature of Monday, Tuesday, Wednes-
a b a–b day and Thursday was 22ºC and that of Thurs-
46. The mean deviation of and (where a
2 2 day, Friday, Saturday and Sunday was 25º then tem-
and b > 0) is. perature on Thursday is :
(NTSE-Stage-I/Tamilnadu/2006)
b a
(A) (B) (A) 24ºC (B) 23ºC
2 2 (C) 22ºC (D) 20ºC
(C) a (D) b
2. W hich of these numbers is the average of the remaining
47. In the followin g tab le, pass perc entage o f th ree three ? (NTSE-Stage-I/Bangalore/2007)
schools from the year 2001 to the year 2006 are given. (A) 26 (B) 39
W hich school students performance is more consis- (C) 30 (D) 61
tent ?
3. Mean of salary of 10 employees is Rs. 5000. If salary
2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 of employees are Rs. 3000. Rs. 4000, Rs. 5000, Rs.
School (X) 80 89 79 83 84 65 6000, Rs. x, Rs. 7000, Rs. 8000, Rs. 3800, Rs. 2200
and Rs. 9000 then value of x is :
School(Y) 92 94 76 75 80 63
(NTSE Stage - I/Raj. /2008)
School(Z) 93 97 67 63 70 85
(A) 2000 (B) 3000
(C) 4000 (D) 5000
(A) X (B) Y
(C) Z (D) X and Y
PAGE # 203
203
4. A cricketer has a certain average run for 10 innings. In 11. For the distribution [Delhi NTSE Stage-1 2013]
the 11 th inning, he scores 100 runs, and now his Marks Number of students
average run is increased by 9 runs. Then average of Below 5 10
11 inning is : (NTSE-Stage-I/MP/2008)
Below 10 25
(A) 10 runs (B) 20 runs
Below 15 37
(C) 11 runs (D) 21 runs
5. The mean of six numbers is 15. If 2 is taken away from Below 20 57
every number, the new mean would be : Below 25 66
(NTSE Stage -I/Bihar/2009) the sum of the lower limits of the median class and
(A) 13 (B) 4 the modal class is :
(C) 17 (D) 8 (A) 15 (B) 25
6. Out of 50 observations the mean of 25 observation is (C) 30 (D) 35
30 and mean of rest 25 observation is 32, Then mean 1
of 50 observation is : (NTSE Stage - I/Raj. /2010) 12. If the mean of x and is M, then the mean of x2 and
x
(A) 34 (B) 33
1
(C) 32 (D) 31 is : [M.P. NTSE Stage-1 2013]
x2
7. If the mean of the numbers 7, 3, 8, 4, x, 7, 9, 7 and 12 is
7, then the difference between the median and the M2
(A) M2 (B)
mode of the numbers 12, 10, 8, 10, x 7, 6, 8 and 6 is : 4
(NTSE Stage-II/2009) (C) 2M2 – 1 (D) 2M2 + 1
(A) 0 (B) 1 13. Positional mean is : [M.P. NTSE Stage-1 2013]
(C) 2 (C) 3 (A) Arithmetic mean (B) Geometric mean
8. If the mean of three numbers a, b and c is 3, then (C) Median (D) Harmonic mean
14. The mean of fifteen different natural numbers is 13.
3
(7 a b– c
)(7b c– a
)(7 c a– b
) equals The maximum value for the second largest of these
(NTSE Stage-II/2010) numbers is : (NTSE Stage-2 /2015)
(A) 71/3 (B) 72/3 (A) 46 (B) 51
(C) 52 (D) 53
(C) 72 (D) 73
9. For the data 1, 2, 2, 3, 3, 3, 4, 4, 4, 4, ............... 9, 9, the 15. If mode of any series is 5 and median is 3 then mean
product of mean and mode equals
(NTSE Stage-II/2011) of that series is [Raj. NTSE Stage-1 2017]
(A) 9 (B) 45
(A) 1 (B) 2
(C) 57 (D) 285
(C) 3 (D) 4
10. The median and mode of a frequency distribution are
525 and 500 then mean of same frequency distribu-
tion is : [Raj. NTSE Stage-1 2013]
(A) 75 (B) 107.5
(C) 527.5 (D) 537.5
PAGE # 204
204
Favourable Event : L et S b e a sam ple spac e
associated with a random experiment and A be event

The word experiment means an operation, which can
produce well defined outcomes. There are two types assoc iated with the ran do m experiment. Th e
of experiment : elem entary events belonging to A are known as
(i) Deterministic experiment favourable events to the event A.
(ii) Probabilistic or Random experiment For example : In throwing a pair of dice, A is defined by
(i) Deterministic Experiment : Those experiment which “Getting 8 as the sum”. Then following elementary
when repeated under identical conditions, produce the
events are as out comes : (2, 6) ,(3, 5), (4, 4) (5, 3),
same results or outcome are known as deterministic
experiment. For example, Physics or Chem istry (6, 2). So, there are 5 elementary events fovourable to
experiments performed under identical conditions. event A.
(ii) Probabilistic or Random Experiment :– In an

experiment, when repeated under identical conditions
donot produce the same outcomes every time. For
example, in tossing a coin, one is not sure that if a If there are n elementary events associated with a
head or tail will b e obtained. S o it is a random random experiment and m of them are favourable to
experiment.
an event A, then the probability of happening or
Sample space : The set of all possible out comes of a occurence of event A is denoted by P(A)
rand om exp erim en t is called a sample space
Thus, P(A)
associated with it and is generally denoted by S.
Ex.1 In tossing a coin, we have S = {T,H}
Total number of favourable outcomes m
Ex.2 In rolling a die S = { 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 }. =
Total number of possible outcomes n
Ex.3 W hen two coins are tossed, we have S = {HT, TH, HH,
TT}
And 0 P(A) 1
Event : Any subset of a sample space is called an
If, P(A) = 0, then A is called impossible event
event.
Ex.4 In a single throw of a die, the event of getting a prime If, P(A) = 1, then A is called sure event
number is given by E = {2,3,5}. P(A) + P( A ) = 1
Mutually exclusive events: Two events E1 and E2 are
W here P(A) = probability of occurence of A.
said to be mutually exclusive, if E1 E2 P( A ) = probability of non - occurence of A.
Ex.5 In rolling a dice, we have S= { 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 }.
Let E1 = Event of getting even number on die={2,4,6} Some important point related to Probability:
Let E2 = Event of getting odd number on die={1,3,5} Let A and B are two event ,and the probability of
clearly, E1 E2 , So E1 and E2 are mutually exclu- happening or occurence of event A and B is denoted
sive. by P(A), P(B) respectively.
Independent events: Two events are said to be inde-
(i) P( A B ) P( A ) P(B ) P( A B)
pendent , if the occurrence of one does not depend
upon the occurence of the other.
(iii) If A and B are two mutually exclusive , A B then
Ex.6 In simultaneous throw of two coins,
Let E 1= Even t o f getting head o n first co in and and in this case, P( A B ) P( A ) P(B )
E2 = event of getting head on second coin. Then E1 and
E2 are the independent events. (iii) If A and B are independent then P( A B) P( A )P(B )
PAGE # 205
205
Ex.7 A bag contains 5 white balls, 4 red balls and 3 green Ex. 9 (i) A lot of 20 bulbs contains 4 defective ones. One
balls. A ball is drawn at random. Find the probability bulb is drawn at random from the lot. W hat is the
that it is (i) a red ball (ii) a green ball (iii) a coloured ball
probability that this bulb is defective.
(iv) a ball which is not green.
Sol. Total number of balls in the bag 5 + 4 + 3 = 12. (ii) Suppose the bulb drawn in (i) is not defective and is
W e denote the event of getting a red ball as R, that of not replaced. Now one bulb is drawn at random from
getting a green ball G, that of getting a coloured ball as the rest. W hat is the probability that this bulb is not
C and that of getting a ball not green as G or not G.. defective.
Sol. (i) Number of defective bulbs = 4
[Number of outcomes which favour R ]
(i) P(R ) Number of good bulbs (Not defective) = 16
12
Total number of bulbs = 4 + 16 = 20
4
[ 4 outcomes favour the event R]
12 4 1
1 Probability of getting a defective bulb = = .
20 5
=
3
(ii) W hen a defective bulb drawn is not being replaced,
3 1
(ii) P(G ) . we are left with 19 bulbs. Now probability of not getting
12 4
(iii) There are 4 + 3 = 7 coloured balls, i.e. either red or 15
a defective bulb .
green. 19
So, 7 outcomes favour the event C
Ex.10 One card is drawn from a well shuffled deck of 52
7
P(C) cards. Calculate the probability that the card will be :
12
(iv) There are 5 + 4 = 9 balls which are not green i.e. (I) a diamond (II) an ace
white or red, so there are 9 outcomes that favour the (III) a black card (IV) not a heart
event not G.
Sol. Total no. of cards = 52
9 3
Therefore, P (not G) = . Total number of events = 52
12 4
(I) Let E be an event of getting a diamond card n(E) = 13
Ex. 8 A dice is thrown once. Find the probability of getting
(i) an even number (ii) a prime number (iii) a number 13 1
greater than 4.(iv) multiple of 2 or 3(v) a number greater P(E) =
52 4
than 3
Sol. W e know that sample space S on throwing a dice is (II) Let E be an event of getting an ace n(E) = 4
S = [1, 2, 4, 5, 6]
4 1
Total number of cases (possible outcomes) P(E) =
52 13
n(S) = 6
(i) Event E : getting an even number = {2,4, 6} (III) Let E be an event of getting a black card n(E) 26
Number of favourable cases = n(E) = 3
n(E) 3 1 26 1
Required probability = P(E) = . P(E) =
n(S) 6 2 52 2
(ii) Event E : getting a prime number (IV) Let E be an event of getting not a heart
E = {2,3, 5}
n(E) = 52 – 13 = 39
Number of favourable cases = n(E) = 3
n(E) 3 1 39 3
P(E) . P(E) = = .
n(S) 6 2 52 4
(iii) Event E : getting a number greater than E = {5, 6} Ex.11 A die is dropped at random on the rectangular region
Number of favourable cases = n(E) = 2 as shown in figure. W hat is the probability that it will
n(E) 2 1 land inside the circle with diameter 1m ?
P(E) = n(S) 6 3. Sol. Area of rectangular region = 3m × 2m = 6m2
(iv) An multiple of 2 or 3 is obtained if we obtain one of Area of circle = r2 3m
the numbers 2,3,4,6, as out comes
Favourable number of elementary events = 4 2
1
4 2 = ×
Hence, P (Getting multiple of 2 or 3) = 2 1m 2m
6 3
(v) The event “Getting a number greater than 3” will
occur, if we obtain one of number 4,5,6 as an outcome. = m2
Favourable number of out comes = 3 4
3 1 Probability that die will land inside the circle
Hence, required probability = .
6 2
/4
= = .
6 24
PAGE # 206
206
Ex.12 Fifty seeds were selected at random from each of
5 bags of seeds, and were kept under standardized
conditions favourable to germination. After 20 days the 1. All the three face cards of spades are removed from a
numb er of seeds which had germinated in each well-shuffled pack of 52 cards. A card is then drawn at
collection were counted and recorded as follows : random from the remaining pack. Find the probability
of getting black face card.
Bag 1 2 3 4 5
6 3
Number of seeds (A) (B)
40 48 42 39 41 49 49
germinated
W hat is the probability germination of : 5 4

(C) (D)
(i) more than 40 seeds is a bag ? 49 49
(ii) 49 seeds in a bag ? 2. A bag contains 40 balls out of which some are red,
some are blue and remaining are black. If the probability
(iii) more than 35 seeds in a bag ?
(iv) at least 40 seeds in a bag ? 11 1
of drawing a red ball is and that of blue ball is ,
(v) at most 40 seeds in a bag ? 20 5
Sol. Total number of bags = 5. then the number of black balls is :
(i) Number of bags in which more than 40 seeds (A) 5 (B) 25
germinated out of 50 seeds = 3 (C) 10 (D) 30
Probability of germination of more than 40 seeds in 3. If E and F are independent events such that P(E) = 0.7
3 and P(F) = 0.3 : then P(E F)
a bag = (A) 0.4 (B) 1
5
(ii) Number of bags in which 49 seeds germinated = 0 (C) 0.21 (D) none
0 4. Three unbiased coins are tossed, W hat is probability
Probability of germination of 49 seeds = = 0. of getting exactly two heads ?
5
(iii) Number of bags in which more than 35 seeds 1 3
(A) (B)
germinated = 5 3 4
Probability of germination of more than 35 seeds
2 3
5 (C) (D)
= = 1. 3 8
5
(iv) Nu mber of bag s in which at least 4 0 seeds 5. Three unbiased coins are tossed. W hat is the prob-
germinated = 4 ability of getting at most 2 heads ?
4 1 3
Probability of germination of at least 40 seeds = (A) (B)
5 4 8
(v) N um ber of b ag s in w hich at mo st 4 0 seed s
7 1
germinated = 2 (C) (D)
8 2
2 6. W hat is the probability that a number selected from the
Probability of germination of at most 40 seeds =
5 numbers 1 2, 3, 4, 5,...,16 is a prime number, is ?
1 5
Ex.13 In simultaneous throw of coin and dice then what is (A) (B)
16 8
3 7
the probability of getting head on coin and prime (C) (D)
8 16
7. Tickets numbered 1 to 20 are mixed up and then a
number on dice. ticket is drawn at random. W hat is the probability that
the ticket drawn bears a number which is a multiple of
Sol. Let E1 denote the probability of getting head on coin. 3?
1 3 3
then P(E1)= (A) (B)
2 20 10
Let E 2 denote the probability of getting the prime 2 1
(C) (D)
3 5 2
number in a dice then P(E2)= 8. One card is drawn at random from a pack of 52 cards.
6
W hat is the probability that the card drawn is a face
clearly E1 and E2 are independent event so happening card
of th ese two event sim ultaneou sly
3 1
(A) (B)
1 3 1 13 4
= P(E1 E2 ) P(E1 )P(E 2 ) = x =
2 6 4 9 1
(C) (D)
52 13
PAGE # 207
207
9. One card is drawn at random form a pack of 52 cards. 17. If three coins are tossed simultaneously, then the
W hat is the probability that the card drawn is a king probability of getting at least two heads, is :
1 1 1 3
(A) (B) (A) (B)
13 52 4 8
1 1
3 1 (C) (D)
(C) (D) 2 4
13 4
18. A girl calculates that the probability of her winning the
first prize in a lottery is 0.08. If 6,000 tickets are sold,
10. One card is drawn of random from a pack of 52 cards. how many tickets has she bought ?
W hat is the probability that the card drawn is either a (A) 40 (B) 240
red card or a king ? (C) 480 (D) 750
6 1 19. A number x is chosen at random from the numbers
(A) (B)
13 2 – 3, – 2, – 1, 0, 1, 2, 3. The probability that |x| < 2 is :
7 27 5 3
(C) (D) (A) (B)
13 52 7 7
11. W hat is the probability that an ordinary year has 53 2 1
(C) (D)
Sundays ? 7 7
53 1 20. The odds in favour of an event are 3 : 5. The probability
(A) (B)
365 7 of occurrence of the event is :
2 48 3 3
(C) (D) (A) (B)
7 53 5 8
1 1
12. In a simultaneous throw of two dice, what is the prob- (C) (D)
3 5
ability of getting a total of 7 ?
21. The odds against the occurrence of an event are 5 : 4.
1 7
(A) (B) The probability of its occurrence is :
6 12
4 4
7 1 (A) (B)
(C) (D) 5 9
36 4
13. In a simultaneous throw of two dice, what is the prob- 1 1
(C) (D)
ability of getting a doublet ? 5 4
22. W hat is the probability of getting a king or a queen in a
1 1
(A) (B) single draw from a pack of 52 cards ?
6 4
1 1
3 2 (A) (B)
(C) (D) 26 13
4 3
14. In a simultaneous throw of two dice, what is the prob- 2
(C) (D) none
ability of getting a total of 10 or 11 ? 13
7 5 23. In a lottery there are 10 prizes and 25 blanks. W hat is

(A) (B) the probability of getting prize
12 36
1 1 1 2
(C) (D) (A) (B)
6 4 10 5
15. Tickets numbered from 1 to 20 are mixed up and a 2 5
ticket is drawn at random. W hat is the probability that (C) (D)
7 7
the ticket drawn has a number which is a multiple of 3 24. An urn contains 9 red, 7 white and 4 black balls. A ball
or 7 ? is drawn at random. W hat is the probability that the ball
1 1 drawn is not red ?
(A) (B)
15 2 1 9
(A) (B)
2 7 11 11
(C) (D)
5 20 2 11
16. A bag contains 6 black and 8 white balls. One ball is (C) (D)
11 20
drawn at random. W hat is the probability that the ball 25. A card is drawn from a pack of 52 cards. A card is
drawn is white ? drawn at random. W hat is the probability that it is nei-
4 3 ther a heart nor a king ?
(A) (B)
7 4 4 9
(A) (B)
4 1 13 13
(C) (D)
3 8 2 4
(C) (D)
13 13
PAGE # 208
208
26. In a single throw of two dice what is the probability of 3. A die is thrown twice. The probability that 5 will not
not getting the same number on both the dice ? come up either of the time is
1 2
(A) (B) 35 25
6 3
(A) (B)
36 36
5 1
(C) (D) 1 11
6 3
(C) (D)
27. A card is drawn at random from a pack of 52 cards. 36 36
W hat is the probability that the card drawn is a spade 4. A die is thrown twice. The probability of the sum being
or a king ? odd, is [Raj. NTSE Stage-1 2014]
4 3
(A) (B)
13 13 1 1
(A) (B)
2 2 2 3
(C) (D)
13 13 1 1
(C) (D)
28. The probability of occurrence of two events E and F are 4 6
0.25 and 0.30 respectively. The probability of their si- 5. A point (a, b) in the plane is such that |a| 4, |b| 4,
multaneous occurrence is 0.14. The probability that where a,b, are integers then what is the probability that
the distance of point from origin is at most two units :
either E occurs or F occurs is : [Haryana NTSE Stage-1 2014]
(A) 0.31 (B) 0.41
13 15
(C) 0.69 (D) 0.89 (A) (B)
81 81
29. If E and F be events in a sample space such that
P(E F) = 0.8, P (E F) = 0.3 and P (E) = 0.5, then P (F) 11 13
(C) (D)
is :
81 64
6. Three - digit number formed by using digits 0, 1,2 and
(A) 0.6 (B) 1
5 (without repetition) are written on different on each
(C) 0.8 (D) none slip, and put in a bowl. One slip is drawn at random
from the bowl. The probability that the slip bears a
30. If E and F be mutually exclusive events such that number divisible by 5 is : (NTSE Stage-2 /2015)
P (E) = 0.4 and P(F) = 0.5, then P(E F) is :
5 4
(A) 0.2 (B) 0.1 (A) (B)
9 9
(C) 0.9 (D) none
2 1
(C) (D)
3 3
7. I play a game in which two dice are thrown together. I
win if the product of the two numbers appearing on
their tops is odd or a multiple of 5. The probability of my
1. A bag contains 20 balls out of which x are black. If 10 winning is: [Haryana NTSE Stage-1 2016]
more black balls are put in the box, the probability of
1 5
drawing a black ball is double of what it was before. (A) (B)
The value of x is: [Delhi NTSE Stage-1 2013] 3 12
(A) 0 (B) 5
(C) 10 (D) 40
7 1
(C) (D)
18 4
2. The author of the book "The Book on games of chance"
based on probability theory is : 8. Two coins are tossed once. The probability of getting
(A) J. Cardon (B) R.S. W oodwards at least one tail is [Raj. NTSE Stage-1 2017]
(C) P.S. Laplace (D) P.D. Pherma
1 1
(A) (B)
2 3
1 3
(C) (D)
4 4
PAGE # 209
209
1. NUMBER SYSTEM
EXERCISE # 1
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. B A C D D D B A B D D A B D D D C C A A
Que. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Ans. B C C B A B B B C C C C D C B B B A C B
Que. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
Ans. D D A C C A B C D D D A D C B D D A B B
Que. 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80
Ans. C A D B C C A B D B B A A D A C C A A A
Que. 81
Ans. B
EXERCISE # 2
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. A B C A C B C B A B B A C D B C D B A B
Que. 21 22 23 24 25 26
Ans. A B B A B B
2. SURDS & EXPONENTS

EXERCISE # 1
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. B D A D B B B D A D C B B D C A B B D A
Que. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Ans. A C B C A A C C B
EXERCISE # 2
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Ans. C D D D C B C D C D C
3. POLYNOMIALS
EXERCISE#1
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. B D A A C C D A D D A B D A C C A A A A
Que. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
Ans. A B C A A C C A B D C D A B
EXERCISE#2
Que . 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans . B D D A B A B D A D A A C D C B C B A A
Que . 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
Ans . B C C C D C A C D A D A A A
PAGE # 210
210
4. LINEAR EQUATIONS IN TWO VARIABLES
EXERCISE # 1
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. C A D A C B A B C C D D D D D A B D C A
Que. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Ans. C D D D A D C C B D C D C C A B D B D A
EXERCISE#2
Que. 1 2 3 4
Ans. A A A C
5. QUADRATIC EQUATIONS
EXERCISE # 1
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. C A A C A A B B B A B A A A C D C D A D
Que. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Ans. B A C B B C A C A B A B D A C C C D D D
Que. 41 42 43 44
Ans. B B A B
EXERCISE # 2
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans. C B A A C C B C B D
6. PROGRESSIONS
EXERCISE#1
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. C C C B B B A C C C A D B B B A A A C D
Que. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Ans. B A B A B A C C B B C A B C D A B A C A
Que. 41 42 43 44 45
Ans. A C B B D
EXERCISE#2
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Ans. C B B C D C C C B C A
PAGE # 211
211
7. PERCENTAGE
EXERCISE#1
Q. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
An s. B C C C C D C B A B C C D C D A B B D C
Q. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
An s. B B A B B C A C C C A A D C A C A B B B
Q. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
An s. A D B D B B D D C B
EXERCISE#2
Q ue . 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Ans . B B B A C C B B B D A B
8. RATIO & PROPORTION, PARTNERSHIP, MIXTURE & ALLIGATION

EXERCISE#1
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. C B B D B C C A D B D A D B B A B C B D
Que. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Ans. B D C A A B D B B C C C D C A B B C C A
Que. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59
Ans. C C D A C D D C B B A B C C B B B A B
EXERCISE#2
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans. A A D A A C C D D D
9. PROFIT, LOSS & DISCOUNT

EXERCISE#1
Que . 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. C D B C B A C D A B C C B C C B D D C C
Que . 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Ans. D A B C D B A C C A B C B A B C D A C C
Que . 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Ans. B B B A C D A A D B
EXERCISE#2
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Ans. A A D D A A B B A C D C A D
PAGE # 212
212
10. SIMPLE & COMPOUND INTEREST
EXERCISE #1
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. A C C B B C C A A B B B B D C B C D B C
Que. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Ans. A C A D A D A B D A A A A C B A C C A C
Que. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
Ans. B B A D B C B D D C D A B C
EXERCISE#2
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Ans. B C D C C B C C A A C A B
11. TIME & WORK

EXERCISE#1
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. A C B D D C C D C A D D C D C D A C C C
Que. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Ans. A C A B D D C C B D A C B B C B D D D A
Que. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Ans. C B B C C D A B C D
EXERCISE#2
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ans. C A C C C B C B B B
12. TIME, SPEED & DISTANCE
EXERCISE#1
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. D B B A D C D C D B A D B A B A D C D B
Que. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Ans. C D C C C B A C D C B A D A B C B C D A
Que. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Ans. C C B C A B C D
EXERCISE#2
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Ans. C D B C D B A A A C B C D A
PAGE # 213
213
13. AVERAGE
EXERCISE#1
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. B D D C B D C C A B B B B A A B D B D C
Que. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Ans. A D D A B C D B B C A D C A C A B D D C
Que. 41 42 43 44
Ans. B C B D
EXERCISE#2
Que. 1 2 3 4
Ans. B C B A
14. TRIGONOMETRY
EXERCISE # 1
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. B C B A A C A D A C C D C B D D A C A A
Que. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Ans. D A D C C D C B A D C D C A D B A D B A
Que. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Ans. D C C C A C D C
EXERCISE # 2
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. C A C C A A C D D A A D D A A A D D B A
Que. 21 22 23 24 25
Ans. B D A D B
15. CO-ORDINATE GEOMETRY

EXERCISE#1
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. A A D B B C B B C B B C A A A D D C A A
Que. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
A-p, B-q,
Ans. A A C AB D B
C-r, D-s
EXERCISE#2
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Ans. D B C D C B D
PAGE # 214
214
16. LINES AND ANGLES, TRIANGLES
EXERCISE#1
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. A B A A B C A B A D B B C B D A D C B C
Que. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Ans. A D B D D C A D D C A C B A D B A B C C
Que. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
Ans. B A A A B B B B D A B C C A D C D D B C
Que. 61 62 63 64
Ans. B D A B
EXERCISE#2
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Ans. C C B C B B D C D C A C D D A C
17. QUADRILATERALS
EXERCISE#1
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Ans. B A B C C C C D C A D C A D B A
EXERCISE#2
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Ans. D B C C B C C A B B B A C
18. CIRCLES
EXERCISE#1
Q ue . 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
A ns. B D B D C D C D A C D C B C B B D C D D
Q ue . 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
A ns. C C B C B D C D B C D B A C C D A A A B
EXERCISE#2
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Ans. A D D C D D D C B C C C D B D A A
PAGE # 215
215
19. PERIMETER AND AREA OF PLANE FIGURES
EXERCISE#1
Que . 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. A D B A B C D C A C B B B D C C C B D C
Que . 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Ans. B A D A B B C A C C A
EXERCISE#2
Que . 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans . B C C C A A D A A D D A A B D D B A C B
Que . 21 22
Ans . C D
20. SURFACE AREA & VOLUME
EXERCISE#1
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. A B B D B C D D A A B C B D A A A A D D
Que. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
Ans. B A A C A B A C C B C C
EXCERCISE#2
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. A A C A A B B C B B B A A D C C B B C D
21. STATISTICS
EXERCISE#1
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. B C B B C A B B C D D A B C C D C D B D
Que. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Ans. B A D C A B A D B B B C B C B B D D A C
Que. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
Ans. A B A C A A A D C B A C B C
EXERCISE#2
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Ans. D B A A A D C D C D B C C B B
PAGE # 216
216
22. PROBABILITY
EXERCISE#1
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. B C C D C C B A A C B A A B C A C C B B
Que. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans. B C C D B C A B A C
EXERCISE#2
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Ans. B A B A A A B D
PAGE # 217
217
DOWNLOADED FROM THE BOOKCORNER
Welcome to THE BOOKCORNER world. We are a team to help you and many others
to get free books online. Here you will get everything and we just need your support.
TELEGRAM CHANNEL
It provides you books for all competitive exams like IIT, NEET, KVPY, NTSE, PRMO, NSE
Olympiads, UPSC, CIVIL SERVICES and much more.
CLICK HERE TO JOIN OUR CHANNEL
PRIVATE TELEGRAM CHANNEL

We have a second telegram channel only for premium materials. It's totally free too but
private channel so you must have a link to join
CLICK HERE TO OUR PRIVATE CHANNEL
THE BOOKCORNER STUDY BOT

To help you in a fully organized way we have designed a STUDY MATERIAL BOT through
which you can access our study material easily. The priority remains the CHANNEL always
CLICK HERE TO REACH STUDY MATERIAL BOT
WANNA EXPLORE US??

We have a special updates channel where we update about our website, apps and telegram
channels. I'll recommend checking it out once at least.
CLICK HERE TO EXPLORE MORE ABOUT US
DISCLAIMER
The material provided by us is neither self created nor scanned. We provide them from
already known open sources only. Our aim is just to achieve free education for those who
can't afford much. In case it violates any copyright or other law, please write us at
bookcornerofficialstore@gmail.com for the removal of such material immediately. We are
always there to help you.

Resonance Maths Ntse Plus

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Resonance Maths Ntse Plus

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DOWNLOADED FROM ​THE BOOKCORNER

PRIVATE TELEGRAM CHANNEL

THE BOOKCORNER STUDY BOT

WANNA EXPLORE US??

NTSE (STAGE-I & II)

Telegram @Altruists @BookCornerBack @TheBookCorner

Telegram @Altruists @BookCornerBack @TheBookCorner

Stage –I Examination : http:\\www.rajboard.nic.in

Stage-II Examination : http:\\www.ncert.nic.in

Telegram @Altruists @BookCornerBack @TheBookCorner

be completed successfully only by making the most out of it.

thorough understanding of Principles and Concepts which is required to crack NTSE.

Pre-foundation Career Care Programmes (PCCP) Division

Telegram @Altruists @BookCornerBack @TheBookCorner

2. SURDS AND EXPONENTS :

4. LINEAR EQUATIONS IN TWO VARIABLES :

8. RATIO & PROPORTION, PARTNERSHIP, MIXTURE & ALLIGATION :

9. PROFIT, LOSS & DISCOUNT :

10. SIMPLE & COMPOUND INTEREST :

11. TIME & WORK :

12. TIME, SPEED & DISTANCE :

Telegram @Altruists @BookCornerBack @TheBookCorner

Angle, Quadrants, Trigonometry, Trigonometric ratio of complementary angles, Area of triangle,

15. CO-ORDINATE GEOMETRY :

16. LINES AND ANGLES, TRIANGLES :

Definition, Properties, Midpoint theorem, Area of parallelogram, Area of triangle.

19. PERIMETER AND AREA OF PLANE FIGURES :

20. SURFACE AREA & VOLUME :

Mensuration (solid figures).

Definition and concepts of probability.

Telegram @Altruists @BookCornerBack @TheBookCorner

Telegram @Altruists @BookCornerBack @TheBookCorner

INTRODUCTION (viii) Real numbers : Numbers which can represent

e.g., (i) 0. 3 = 3/9 or 1/3 3 5 1 1

(i) If the unit digit of a number is 2, 3, 7 or 8, then it does

Square roots : The square root of a number x is that

Ex.16 Find the LCM of (72, 108).

500 2060 1025 NOTE :

Now, 1169 when divided by 585 gives remainder

(ix) If ‘a’ is a positive real number and ‘n’ is a positive 3 log 13

9 32 3 Standard form of Number

1 10. The positive integers A, B, A – B and A + B are all prime

22. If 9 (n 2 )2 is a real number, then the number of

50. There is an N digit number (N > 1). If the sum of

1 75. Three consecutive positive integers are raised to the

9 9 9 9 78. If n is a natural number then we define n! (pronounced

(A) 0.465 (B) 0.465

= – 33 2 . Monomial surds and their RF :

The general form of a monomial surd is n a and its

1 19. Real n um bers a an d b satisfy th e eq uation s

(B) Linear Polynomial : A polynomial of degree one is

5 There are three types of polynomials based on number

(a) Degree of the Polynomial : (B) Binomial : A polynomial is said to be a binomial if it

(iii) f(x) = 2x3 + 7x – 5 is a polynomial of degree 3.

(b) Different Types of Polynomials : Some important identities are :

Sol. x2 + 4 2 x + 6 Ex.12 If p(x) = (x + 2)(x2 – 4x–21), Q(x) = (x– 7) (2x2 + x – 6)

Sol. (i) 2 2a 3 8b 3 27c 3 18 2abc

3 The value of a polynomial f(x) at x = is obtained by

Consider the polynomial f(x) = 2x3 + x2 – 7x – 6,

HCF/GCD (Greatest Common Divisor) : A polynomial

Sol. Let P(x)=x51 + 51

b are constant. Then the values of a and b are :

4ay = 4a2x2 + 4abx + b2 – b2 + 4ac

Graphs of a cubic polynomial does not have a fixed

DOWNLOADED FROM THE BOOKCORNER